مواصفات فنية

SAUDI ELECTRICITY CO.
– Eastern Region Branch ‫فرع المنطقةر ا‬

‫لمشعقي‬
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
For
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________

Qassim recreation club
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
‫المواصفات الفنيه لمشروع مبنى نادي الشركة‬

OPERATING DEPT.
‫في القصيم‬
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
JOB ORDER NO. PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

FOR 1
QASSIM RECREATION CLUB F732 A PTS-13CF716 OF 0
494
QASSIM (C.O.A.) , SAUDI ARABIA
SAUDI ELECTRICITY CO. – Eastern Region Branch ‫فرع المنطقةر ا‬
‫لمشعقي‬
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01300 SUBMITTALS
01400 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01530 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
SECTION 02000 GENERAL CONDITIONS

02110 SITE CLEARING
02200 EARTHWORK
02221 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
02230 SOIL COMPACTION AND CONTROL
REVISIONS 02281 TERMITE CONTROL
02500 SUBGRADE, SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE
DRAWN BY: ___________ 02560 ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
DATE: _________________
02580 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
02667 SITE WATER LINES
CHK’D BY: ____________
02675 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
APPROVED
02732 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM
02790 ATHLETIC AND RECREATIONAL SURFACING
ENGINEERING DEPT.
02811 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02831 CHAINLINK FENCE
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
OPERATING DEPT. SECTION 03005 CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

03100 FORMWORK
03200 REINFORCEMENT
03300 ACCESSORIES
03347 CONCRETE HARDENER
CERTIFIED 03400 CONSTRUCTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS
03500 CASTS-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BY: ___________________
03532 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
03550 FAIRFACE CONCRETE
DATE: _________________
03600 GROUT
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04100 MORTARS

04200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT SYSTEM

FOR 2
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05300 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL
05720 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
05850 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGN BOARDS
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
06650 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATION
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07100 WATER PROOFING CAULKING AND SEALING

REVISIONS 07200 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING OF UNDERGROUND CONCRETE
STRUCTURES
DRAWN BY: ___________ 07210 THERMAL INSULATION
DATE: _________________
07256 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07300 JOINT SEALERS
CHK’D BY: ____________
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING
APPROVED
07841 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL
07920 SEALANTS AND CAULKING
ENGINEERING DEPT.
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08211 WOOD DOORS
OPERATING DEPT. 08300 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08710 HARDWARE
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING
CERTIFIED DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
BY: ___________________
SECTION 09000 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09010 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
DATE: _________________
09030 CERAMIC WALL AND FLOOR TILES
09100 CARPET TILES
09200 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM
09546 LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM
09613 MARBLE FLOORING
09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
09900 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

FOR 3
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES
10800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (SEE ATTACHMENT)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (SEE ATTACHMENT)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEM (NOT USED)
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

15170 MOTORS
15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15245 VIBRATION ISOLATION
REVISIONS 15260 PIPING INSULATION
15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION
DRAWN BY: ___________ 15310 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
DATE: _________________
15320 FIRE PUMPS
15325 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
CHK’D BY: ____________
15375 STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEMS
APPROVED
15410 PLUMBING PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
ENGINEERING DEPT.
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
15536 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
15870 POWER VENTILATORS
15885 AIR CLEANING DEVICES
OPERATING DEPT. 15890 DUCTWORK
15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15975 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
CERTIFIED
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
BY: ___________________
SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS
DATE: _________________
16050 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND CALIBRATIONS
16111 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
16120 LOW VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES
16130 BOXES
16141 WIRING DEVICES
16160 CABINETS / ENCLOSURES
16190 SUPPORTS AND FASTENERS
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16200 MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
16450 GROUNDING
16470 EQUIPMENT PANELBOARDS
16471 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16483 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS

FOR 4
494
‫لمشعقي‬
16491 SAFETY/DISCONNECT SWITCHES

16501 LAMPS
16502 BALLASTS
16510 LIGHTING
16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16721 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
16740 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
16770 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
ATTACHMENTS (COMMUNICATIONS)
 ATTACHMENT 01: OSP-PDS SCOPE OF WORK (DESIGN-BUILD)

 ATTACHMENT 02 : SOW-PTS (IP TELEPHONY)
 ATTACHMENT 2A: LIST OF OFFICE EQUIPMENT (PC/PRINTERS etc.)
 ATTACHMENT-2B: MAIN GROUND BUS BAR
 ATTACHMENT-2C : APPROVED CONTRACTORS FOR IP TELEPHONY
 ATTACHMENT 2D: VIDEO CONFERENCE SYSTEM
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________

FOR 5
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 01100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF WORK
A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials, labor, tools, equipment, plant, supplies,

furnishings, transportation, supervision, administration, temporary constructions,
insurance, taxes, services and FACILITIES, and other items required to complete the
construction of this PROJECT in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. All fire and safety supplied materials shall be from the SEC-ERB technically approved
materials/manufacturers list, otherwise manufacturer/supplier who is not in the list shall
follow COMPANY procedure for prequalification prior to submitting their materials for
approval by CONTRACTOR.
REVISIONS
C. This Construction specifications will aid CONTRACTOR in defining the Scope of WORK
DRAWN BY: ___________ for inclusion in the proposal. Omissions from this Scope of WORK shall not relieve
DATE: _________________
CONTRACTOR from including in the proposal the WORK required to complete the
Contract.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
D. Use of Premises:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. CONTRACTOR shall limit use of premises for construction operations and purposes
to allow for COMPANY occupancy.
2. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction operations at PROJECT SITE and
permitted access and approaches, and to areas permitted by ordinances, permits,
Contract Documents, and COMPANY.
OPERATING DEPT. 3. CONTRACTOR shall not unreasonably encumber SITE with materials and
equipment.
4. CONTRACTOR shall not load structures beyond the allowable limit to endanger
structures.
5. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of
CERTIFIED materials and products stored at PROJECT SITE.
6. Stored materials and products in and about the PROJECT SITE interfering with
BY: ___________________
operations of COMPANY shall be removed by CONTRACTOR.
DATE: _________________
1.02 DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Drawings: Form part of Contract Documents accompanying this Construction

Specifications and are listed on the Drawing Control Sheets, SE-839597 REV.0.
B. Construction Specifications: Form part of the Contract Documents consisting of Divisions

and Sections as listed in the Table of Contents of this Construction Specifications
including addenda and approved changes thereto.
01100-01

FOR 6
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. General Terms and Conditions: Form part of the Contract Documents consisting of
documents and sections are bound separately including addenda and approved changes
thereto.
1.03 SCHEDULING
A. Upon award of the Contract, CONTRACTOR shall consult COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE concerning the order of WORK which will be performed and shall
prepare Construction Schedule for approval. This Construction Schedule shall be in the
Format approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and shall show sequence of
operations mutually agreeable between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR in connection
with use of premises, access roads and approaches, services and utilities based on final
completion and acceptance of WORK on or before the completion date indicated in the
Contract. See also Section 01300, submittals.
1.04 PROJECT MANAGER
A. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall be notified by CONTRACTOR in writing and in

advance of appointing and removal/replacement of PROJECT Manager and any key
REVISIONS personnel for the PROJECT.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.05 MATERIALS SHIPPING AND CRATING

DATE: _________________
A. SUBCONTRACTORS shall certify in writing and submit to the CONTRACTOR that at the
CHK’D BY: ____________
time of loading materials for delivery to PROJECT SITE, it meets the following
APPROVED
requirements:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Materials are new and in good conditions.
2. Materials are complete, with all parts necessary for compete installation.
3. Materials contain no damage of any kind.
4. Material are packed and crated to withstand the normal and expected abuse during
transportation to PROJECT SITE.
OPERATING DEPT.
B. CONTRACTOR shall maintain file of the above certifications for review by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE upon request.
C. CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing when material will

CERTIFIED be inspected prior to crating for shipping. Likewise, no materials that were delivered to
site will be installed until re-inspected and accepted by the COMPANY
BY: ___________________
REPRESENTATIVE.
DATE: _________________
1.06 USE AND OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO COMPLETION
A. COMPANY reserves the right to use and occupy whole or part of the PROJECT that have
been completed sufficiently to permit use and occupancy without delaying
CONTRACTOR’s WORK. Use and occupancy by COMPANY shall not be construed as
acceptance of WORK or part thereof, and any claim COMPANY will have against
CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed to have been waived by occupancy.
01100-02

FOR 7
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.07 POLLUTION
A. Throughout the duration of Contract, CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTOR shall

conform to applicable environmental pollution regulations and ordinances of the
Municipality or local governing authorities having jurisdiction for the PROJECT SITE.
1.08 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETING AND REPORTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Weekly Progress Report to the responsible COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE. The format shall be given to the CONTRACTOR by the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Weekly Construction Progress Meetings shall be conducted at the PROJECT SITE

OFFICE or at the COMPANY Headquarters, as may be deemed necessary, between the
COMPANY and the CONTRACTOR during the construction phase. Other Coordination
and interface meetings will be conducted, as required.
C. CONTRACTOR’s PROJECT Manager, Site Engineers/Supervisors, QA/QC Engineer,

Safety Inspector etc. shall regularly attend the Weekly Construction Progress Meeting.
REVISIONS
D. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare the current Weekly Progress Report (updated previous
DRAWN BY: ___________ Weekly Progress report), discuss with the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and submit it
DATE: _________________ to the COMPANY at least one (1) day prior to the Weekly Construction Progress Meeting.
CHK’D BY: ____________
E. Draft of the Minutes of Weekly Construction Progress Meeting and all other meetings
APPROVED
shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE not later than the following working day after the meeting, and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
submit the final minutes within two days after the meeting.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit within one week a report containing his responses
to the outstanding items (if any) generated in the meetings.
OPERATING DEPT. G. A Weekly Construction Safety Meeting shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR’s
Safety Engineer/PROJECT Engineer and the Safety Report on the subject discussed
shall be noted/recorded and made part of the Minutes of Weekly Construction Progress
Meeting.
CERTIFIED 1.09 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
BY: ___________________ A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and deliver to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE progress
photographs made by approved photographer and shall be taken once every middle of
DATE: _________________
the month from start of WORK throughout the duration of construction until substantial
completion. One (1) exposure shall be taken, at every visit, from each of three (3)
viewpoints as directed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Photographs shall be 200 by 250mm matte color prints mounted on muslin with extended
border for binding. Prints shall bear the date of exposure, PROJECT title and description,
and COMPANY name and shall identify the location and point of view of exposure.
C. Three (3) prints of each photograph and digital file copy shall be delivered to COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE within two days after taking the photographs.
01100-03

FOR 8
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.10 SITE BOARD
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install a site board at the COMPANY site office.
B. Site board shall be of magnetic white aluminum board one (1) meter high and two (2)
meters width, wall mounted with magnetic nameplates for the PROJECT team as
mentioned in Item C below.
C. The site board shall contain the PROJECT information with the names and telephone
nos. as follows:
1. Contract No.
2. PROJECT Title
3. PROJECT Milestones Dates
4. PROJECT Manager
5. PMD PROJECT Engineer
6. PMD Site Engineer
7. ESQD/PQU Engineers
REVISIONS 8. Safety Engineer
9. PROJECT Consultant
DRAWN BY: ___________ 10. CONTRACTOR’s PROJECT Manager and PROJECT Engineer
DATE: _________________
1.11 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits opening used as passageways and
openings through where materials are handled, against damage resulting from conduct of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
WORK by various trades.
B. Finished surfaces, including factory finished and WORK SITE finished items, shall be
clean and unmarred at time of final acceptance by COMPANY.
OPERATING DEPT. C. CONTRACTOR shall refinish, as directed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, spaces

where surfaces have become damaged because of lack of protection, at no additional cost
to COMPANY.
D. Roof surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic nor shall be used for storage of materials.
CERTIFIED
Where WORK will take place on the roof, adequate and approved protection shall be
provided.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
1.12 LOSS PREVENTATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all barricades, appropriate and efficient danger signs
with red warning lights or signals, suitable types and sizes of portable fire extinguishers,
other necessary precautionary measures for protection of construction worker and safety
of general public.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all the safety and loss prevention requirements
under G.I. #06011-0011 relative to work permits and safe working procedures in
substations, transmission lines and the requirements outlined in the schedule of contract
document.
01100-04

FOR 9
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Loss Prevention Program for approval by COMPANY’s
Loss Prevention Division prior to commencement of construction work.
D. CONTRACTOR shall ensure full implementation of the program in accordance with the
SOW/TS.
E. CONTRACTOR shall appoint a safety supervisor to coordinate the program.
F. If the CONTRACTOR has no authorized employee, or has an employee with expired

certificate, he shall be responsible to coordinate with the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
for scheduling of WORK Permit training course. All activities inside the project site shall be
allowed only after securing WORK Permit.
G. Prior to approval of the program by COMPANY, the Contractor’s Safety Engineer is

required to conduct a safety presentation of the program to COMPANY representatives.
The presence of the Contractor’s Project Manager is required during the safety
presentation.
REVISIONS
H. The CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary personal protective clothing (i.e. head, eye,
face, hand, and foot protection) and respiratory protective equipment including personal
DRAWN BY: ___________
protective equipment for fall protection such as safety belts and implement wearing them.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ I. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and use adequate and suitable safety/warning signs,
cordon tapes, and personnel protective equipment at the JOB SITE to protect the safety of
APPROVED COMPANY and CONTRACTOR personnel and the public, and to prevent damage to
ENGINEERING DEPT. property.
J. The CONTRACTOR shall provide first aid facilities and must have a certified employee to
administer first aid and Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR).
OPERATING DEPT. K. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the COMPANY, ID cards for his employees and
stickers for his vehicles/equipment prior to mobilization to site.
L. In order to prevent theft/loss of material/equipment, the CONTRACTOR at site shall take all
necessary precautionary measures but not limited to:
CERTIFIED
1. All the materials under this contract shall be stored by CONTRACTOR in safe and secured
locations even if it is for short period of time.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ 2. If the equipment/materials are to be retained in SEC vicinities for a substantial period, then
the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that they are kept in locked containers or any other
appropriate method of storage which will keep the material/equipment not easily noticeable
by people with any intention of theft or pilferage. Moreover, such containers shall be placed
at a distance from the fence/boundary wall.
3. CONTRACTOR shall also consider all the storage requirements of the (i.e.,
temperature, etc.) being stored in containers to avoid any damage during such storage
period.
01100-05

FOR 10
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.12 REFERENCES
A. Codes and standards listed below shall be considered an integral part of these
Construction Specifications. Where discrepancy exists between these codes and
standards, and these specifications, the most stringent application shall govern or shall
be brought to the attention of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Codes and standards are
understood to mean the current edition, and amendments and revisions thereof, except
where dates are indicated.
B. COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Codes and Standards:
1. Applicable COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Engineering Standards and Codes

2. Applicable COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Construction Specifications
C. Industry Codes and Standards:
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
REVISIONS ACRI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
AHI American Hardware Institute
DRAWN BY: ___________ AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
DATE: _________________
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA Air Monitoring and Conditioning Association
CHK’D BY: ____________
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APPROVED
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWWA American Water Works Association
AWS American Welding Society
OPERATING DEPT. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
FM Factory Mutual
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
ISO International Organization for Standardization
CERTIFIED NBS National Bureau of Standards
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association
BY: ___________________
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
DATE: _________________
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
SDI Steel Door Institute
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TCA Tile Council of America
UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
*** End of Section 01100 ***
01100-06

FOR 11
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Instructions and Specifications

2. Shop Drawings
3. Product Samples
4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals/Data
5. Catalogues & Brochures
6. As-Built Drawings
7. Special Tools and Replacement Materials
REVISIONS B. Substitutions
DRAWN BY: ___________ C. Warranties

DATE: _________________
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Type of Submittals: Specific submittal requirements are indicated in various Sections of
this Construction Specifications and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Time: As required by the current construction schedule and various Sections of this
Construction Specifications and Contract Documents.
C. Place: COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

OPERATING DEPT. SEC Eastern Operating Area Administration Office
Dammam, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
D. Approval: Shall be by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
CERTIFIED
E. Transmittal of Submittals: Shall be by CONTRACTOR. Direct submittals by SUB-
CONTRACTORS, manufacturers, suppliers and vendors shall not be accepted, unless
specifically requested by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Only the tests and reports
BY: ___________________ done by the Independent Testing Laboratory shall be submitted directly by the laboratory
DATE: _________________ office to the COMPANY.
F. CONTRACTOR shall submit at least three (3) copies of submittal documents requiring
review and approval by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
G. Submittals shall be reviewed, stamped, signed and dated by CONTRACTOR and shall
be:
1. Conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Applicable to WORK.
01300-01

FOR 12
494
‫لمشعقي‬
H. Incomplete submittal shall be rejected. Lack of titles, references and information; and
manufacturer’s details not related to adjacent materials shall be rejected without
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s review.
I. At COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s option, samples will be tested, and additional

samples will be requested and shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost
to COMPANY.
J. Unit of measurement: Submittals shall be in metric measurements as shown on the

drawings and as indicated in this Construction Specifications.
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE a list and submittal

schedule. List items by Specification Sections.
B. Submittals shall be in English and clearly identified by PROJECT name, location,

Specifications Sections and manufacturer's name. Submittals shall be received and
REVISIONS approved by CONTRACTOR for compliance with Contract Documents prior to submitting
to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR shall indicate his review and
DRAWN BY: ___________ approval by stamping the submittals accordingly.
DATE: _________________
C. Submittal shall be provided with lead-time in order not to delay the construction schedule.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Submittal shall be complete according to Specifications Section and assembled in neat
APPROVED
package. Partial submittal (piece-meal basis) shall not be accepted.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
D. CONTRACTOR is responsible for submittal errors and accuracy of quantities and
dimensions shown.
E. Submittals not reviewed and rejected by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall not be

used for ordering, fabrication and WORK.
OPERATING DEPT.
F. Deviations from Contract Documents:
1. Cite justification for deviation in writing.

2. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s review does not constitute approval, unless
CERTIFIED deviation is approved in writing.
3. On COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s acceptance of deviations, CONTRACTOR
BY: ___________________
shall be responsible for correct fitting, assembly and relationship of substitute item to
adjacent and related WORK.
DATE: _________________
G. Schedule submittals to allow adequate time for COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE's review

and for resubmittal where required. When substitution proposed by CONTRACTOR is
rejected, COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall require CONTRACTOR to airfreight the
specified item in order to maintain the schedule.
1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to installation of products and equipment a pre-installation meeting shall be

conducted. Attendees shall include COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, CONTRACTOR,
SubCONTRACTOR, and equipment manufacturer or vendor and installer.
01300-02

FOR 13
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Other products and systems shall also be required to conduct a pre-installation meeting
for proper coordination, systems approval, fabrication and erection.
C. Installer’s Qualifications: CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval prior to installation, in

advance so as not to affect the overall PROJECT schedule, the following:
1. Installer’s Training: Product manufacturer’s certification certifying installers are

trained to perform the WORK.
2. Installer’s Experience: Installer shall have minimum 5 years experience in methods,

techniques, sequences and procedures for installing product and equipment. Submit
manufacturer’s certification certifying installer had been performing the WORK
including name and location of completed PROJECTS.
1.05 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Where portion of WORK will be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s written

REVISIONS instructions and specifications, CONTRACTOR shall obtain latest edition copies and
submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and for use by installer when
DRAWN BY: ___________ accepted.
DATE: _________________
B. Submit three (3) sets of each item required.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. 2 sets will be returned to CONTRACTOR after COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s review.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
D. Where revisions are required, resubmit three (3) sets of item required.
E. Information required:
1. Delete from each submittal extraneous data, listings and materials not directly
OPERATING DEPT. related to item being proposed for use in WORK.
2. Clearly define items and articles being proposed.
3. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall not review submitted data not in accordance
with above requirements. Lack of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s review shall
constitute rejection of improperly prepared submittals.
CERTIFIED
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
BY: ___________________
A. Shop Drawings includes detailed drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets,
DATE: _________________
schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and
similar information not in standard printed form applicable to WORK. Clearly indicate
details where required by particular Specifications Section.
B. Shop Drawings shall be drawn on the same size as COMPANY Size “A” Standard
Drawing Format (710mm by 1015mm). Number Shop Drawings consecutively and
maintain numbering through revisions.
C. Submit one (1) original and two (2) photocopies of shop drawings. After review and
approval of shop drawings, COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will retain two (2)
photocopies and return the original to CONTRACTOR, and shall:
01300-03

FOR 14
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1. Make no further revisions or changes on the approved original shop drawings.
2. Distribute copies of reviewed and approved original to the following:
a. CONTRACTOR’s WORK SITE file.

b. SUBCONTRACTORS, Suppliers, Manufacturers and other concerned parties.
D. When shop drawings are rejected by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and revisions and
corrections are required, CONTRACTOR shall comply with requirements and resubmit
shop drawings for re-approval.
E. Information Required:
1. Title of Sheet
2. Sheet Number and Number of Sheets Included
3. Name and Location of PROJECT
4. Name of CONTRACTOR
5. Name of SUBCONTRACTOR
REVISIONS 6. Name of Drawing
7. Name of Each Revision
DRAWN BY: ___________ 8. Cross Reference to COMPANY’s Drawings
DATE: _________________
1.07 PRODUCT SAMPLES
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Include fabricated and unfabricated physical samples of materials and products, as
complete units and as smaller portions of units for visual inspection (where indicated) or
ENGINEERING DEPT.
for detailed testing and analysis. Provide sample of products and materials as shown on
the Drawings and as indicated in the Specifications. Samples for selection of colors shall
be of actual finishes specified. Photographic and printed reproductions are not
acceptable.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Submit samples in types and quantities as required in various Sections of Specifications
and additional samples as requested by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Where piece of
item is appropriate, such as window section, it shall be large enough to explain the
section. Paint samples shall be approximately 200mm by 250mm.
CERTIFIED C. Submit two (2) samples of each item unless other wise required.
BY: ___________________
D. Samples of interior finish materials and colors shall be submitted one time for review and
selection by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
DATE: _________________
E. Approval of sample shall be in writing. When CONTRACTOR needs approval to be

attached to samples, provide additional sample as needed.
F. Samples will be stamped or noted by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE indicating review

result. One sample will be returned to CONTRACTOR, and one will be retained at
PROJECT SITE by CONTRACTOR and will constitute standard of quality and
workmanship where construction of type represented by samples will be judged. Samples
rejected, CONTRACTOR will be given reason for rejection and shall resubmit until
acceptance is obtained.
01300-04

FOR 15
494
‫لمشعقي‬
G. Label each sample with the following information. Label shall be in the form of sticker
which has blank space large enough to accommodate review stamp.
1. PROJECT Name and Location

2. Name of CONTRACTOR
3. Name of Manufacturer and SUBCONTRACTOR
4. Name, Finish and Composition of Material
5. Location and Intended Use
6. Specification Section, Drawing Number(s) and Reference to Related Specifications
Section(s).
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Where portion of WORK will be operated, serviced and maintained in accordance with
manufacturer’s, fabricator’s or installer’s printed instructions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain
and submit latest edition copies to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. These shall include
maintenance instructions, part lists and detailed drawings, and name and address of
nearest supplier to PROJECT SITE.
REVISIONS
B. Collect data as WORK progresses. Compile data in manual form. Data shall be collated,
DRAWN BY: ___________ indexed and bound in durable covers and identified on the cover as follows:
DATE: _________________
1. PROJECT Name and Date
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Name, Address & Telephone Number of CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTOR.
APPROVED
C. Include only catalogs and manuals dealing with products and equipment used in the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PROJECT. Remove pages of advertising in nature and pages dealing with items not used
in the PROJECT where more than one model or item is listed, carefully marked to identify
item or model used.
D. Submit two (2) copies in approved contents, format and presentation to COMPANY
OPERATING DEPT. REPRESENTATIVE. Operation and maintenance manuals required as follows;
1. Building Maintenance Manual

2. Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manual
3. Electrical Operation and Maintenance Manual
CERTIFIED 4. Telecommunications Operation and Maintenance Manual
5. Civil Maintenance Manual
BY: ___________________
E. Final manuals shall be submitted not later than the acceptance of substantial completion
DATE: _________________
of the PROJECT. Each manual shall include the following:
1. Complete description of each item of equipment and apparatus including ratings,

capacities and characteristics.
2. Detailed parts list, including numbered parts of each item of equipment or apparatus.
3. Manufacturer’s printed instructions describing operation, servicing, maintenance,
repair and cleaning of each item of equipment and apparatus.
4. Printed information for maintenance and cleaning of building materials requiring
special care and treatment as indicated in Sections of these Specifications.
01300-05

FOR 16
494
‫لمشعقي‬
5. Typewritten record of tests made on materials, equipment, and systems. Records

shall indicate the date of tests conducted and names of persons or organizations
conducting and witnessing the tests, citing unusual conditions relevant to the tests.
1.09 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS
A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain one complete set of Construction Drawings at the WORK
SITE during the entire duration of the Contract. As the WORK progresses,
CONTRACTOR shall record the following:
1. Changes in size, depth and position of foundations.

2. Changes and modifications made in architectural and structural phases of WORK
above ground level, ground level and below ground level.
3. Exact location and elevation of underground piping and conduits and positions of
fixtures, equipment, valves and appurtenances.
4. Changes made in locations and details of HVAC system, electrical system and
telecommunications system WORK below ground level, ground level and above
REVISIONS ground level.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. “As-Built” Drawings Preparation

DATE: _________________
1. “As-Built” drawings shall be prepared (drawn) in CADD through Microstation only
CHK’D BY: ____________
and in accordance with the COMPANY Engineering design and services procedures.
APPROVED
Final original “As-Built” drawings shall be submitted as follows:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
a. Hard Copy: Copies shall be plotted on Size “A” COMPANY standard drawing (digital
format will be provided by COMPANY) format, on high quality paper. Plotter used
shall have 600 dpi or greater resolution. Final “As-Built” drawings shall be clear and
sharp plot and free from tears.
OPERATING DEPT. b. Digital Copy: Microstation digital copies on CD ROM. Use of other media shall
require prior approval from COMPANY.
C. Upon substantial completion of WORK, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE one set of “As-Built” Drawings plotted on high quality paper and one
CERTIFIED set of photocopies including shop drawings. CONTRACTOR shall make additional
corrections as COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will require and shall then deliver the
BY: ___________________
corrected drawings (plotted on high quality paper and photocopies) to COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
DATE: _________________
D. Contract shall not be considered complete until “As-Built” Drawings are completed,
submitted and accepted by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
1.10 SPECIAL TOOLS AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
Obtain and submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE special tools and replacement

materials required for maintenance of equipment and apparatus.
01300-06

FOR 17
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Where catalog numbers, brand names and trade names is followed by the designation "or
approved equal" are used in conjunction with designated material, product, item or
service in this Construction Specifications, they are intended to establish the standards of
quality and performance required.
B. Substitutions equal in quality and performance to specify will be approved, subject to the
following provisions. Substitutions shall be approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
in writing. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY, within 30 calendar days after
signing of the Contract, three (3) copies of typewritten substitution list containing:
1. Description of each proposed substitute product and material.
2. Justification for substitution.
3. Data, drawings, samples, literature and other detailed information shall demonstrate
the proposed substitute is equal in quality and performance to products and
REVISIONS materials specified.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 4. Approval shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from complying with requirements of
DATE: _________________
Drawings and Specifications. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for changes
resulting from substitutions affecting other parts of WORK and WORK of
CHK’D BY: ____________
SUBCONTRACTORS and shall be at no additional cost to COMPANY.
APPROVED
C. Substitution list shall be organized as follows:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Lists by Specification Sections.

2. List items for use including specified items and proposed substitution.
3. Enumerate and compare different properties and characteristics of substitute items
from specified.
OPERATING DEPT. 4. Effect of proposed substitutions shall be indicated in the submittals.
D. Substitute equipment, products and materials installed without COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE's approval shall be removed and replaced with the approved items
at no additional cost to COMPANY.
CERTIFIED
1.12 WARRANTIES
BY: ___________________
A. CONTRACTOR shall remedy defects, resulting from faulty workmanship and materials,
DATE: _________________
within one Gregorian year from the date of PROJECT acceptance.
B. Warranties for more than one (1) year, where indicated in various Specifications Sections,
shall be in the form of guarantee written on the letterhead of CONTRACTOR,
SUBCONTRACTOR, manufacturer or supplier performing WORK.
01300-08

FOR 18
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
Quality control and quality assurance of products and services, workmanship,

manufacturer’s instructions, manufacturer’s certificates, manufacturers’ field services,
mockups, tests and inspection.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals

B. Other Specifications Sections requiring Testing and Inspection
REVISIONS 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Workmanship: Comply with applicable COMPANY standards and industry standards,
DATE: _________________ except when specified requirements indicate more rigid standards and more precise
CHK’D BY: ____________
workmanship. Perform WORK by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified
quality. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
APPROVED
withstand stresses, vibration and racking.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Manufacturer’s Instruction: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions in full detail, including
each step of sequence. Where instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, request
for clarifications from COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
C. Manufacturer’s Certificates: When required by the individual Specifications Sections

OPERATING DEPT. submit manufacturer’s certificate, in duplicate, indicating products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
D. Manufacturers’ Field Services:
CERTIFIED 1. When specified in individual Specifications Sections, CONTRACTOR shall require

the manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions,
BY: ___________________ conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of
equipment, and testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment, and to provide
DATE: _________________
appropriate recommendations.
2. CONTRACTOR shall submit the manufacturer’s representative written report to

COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE listing observations and recommendations.
E. Mockups: When required by individual Specifications Sections, erect complete, full-scale

mockup assembly at PROJECT SITE. Test shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of individual sections. Remove mockup at PROJECT completion.
01400 - 01

FOR 19
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.04 QUALITY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACTOR shall implement an effective quality management system addressing direct and
indirect construction related activities to ensure contractual conditions are met. Quality planning,
control, assurance and improvement shall be part of CONTRACTOR’s quality management. To
effectively manage construction quality, CONTRACTOR shall develop a clearly defined Quality
Plan and Quality Program. Quality Plan and Quality Program shall be implemented from start to
completion of construction and communicated to all levels of PROJECT construction
organization. CONTRACTOR shall require manufacturers and suppliers to develop and
implement Quality Control Plan and Inspection and Test Plan for materials and equipment.
1.05 QUALITY PLAN AND QUALITY PROGRAM
A. PROJECT Quality Plan and Quality Program shall stipulate quality procedures and
practices, resources and sequence of construction activities. Quality Plan and Quality
Program shall address Quality Assurance and Quality Control (QA/QC) activities during
procurement, manufacturing and fabrication, transportation, storage, construction and
installation, and testing and commissioning of all items of WORK in accordance with
these specifications.
REVISIONS
B. Quality Plan and Quality Program shall be submitted to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
DRAWN BY: ___________ for review and approval.
DATE: _________________
C. Quality Plan and Quality Program shall define and address the following:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. CONTRACTOR’s objectives of Quality to be attained and commitment to achieve
objectives in the form of signed policy statement. CONTRACTOR’s management
ENGINEERING DEPT.
personnel of the same shall sign policy statement level or higher than the personnel
who signed the contract.
2. Detailed PROJECT construction organization chart and personnel assignment of

responsibilities and authorities during different phases of construction.
OPERATING DEPT.
CONTRACTOR shall include in the organizational chart Quality Assurance and
Quality Control (QA/QC) team (engineers and inspectors) specifically assigned for
quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) WORK. QA/QC team shall be
reporting directly to the PROJECT Manager. QA/QC team shall be responsible for
CERTIFIED ensuring all phases of construction are implemented, tested and commissioned in
accordance with requirements of these specifications. QA/QC team shall be
BY: ___________________
composed of qualified QA/QC engineers and inspectors (civil, structural,
architectural, mechanical, electrical, communications and other applicable discipline)
DATE: _________________
and shall be available at WORK SITE during construction and installation of all items
of WORK. Qualified Chief QA/QC engineer who shall coordinate directly with
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall supervise QA/QC team.
CONTRACTOR shall use QA/QC personnel independently from personnel

supervising construction and installation WORK being inspected and shall not report
directly to supervisors responsible for construction and installation WORK.
CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC personnel shall be free from pressures of construction cost

control, schedule and production and shall be provided with authority and
independence in performance of their WORK.
01400 - 02

FOR 20
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Number of CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC personnel shall be as required in the Instruction

to Bidders for Technical Proposal.
3. Procurement Control: CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC team shall review products and

services prior to procurement and submission to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to
ensure conformance with specified requirements. Procurement control shall include
source evaluation and selection, source inspection, and evaluation of objective
evident from quality furnished by manufacturer and supplier against construction
specifications.
Products and testing services includes fill materials, Portland cement concrete and
additives, formwork, reinforcing steel, structural steel, asphalt concrete,
waterproofing and dampproofing, thermal and acoustic insulation, HVAC materials
and equipment, electrical materials and equipment, plumbing materials and
equipment, and architectural and finishing materials.
4. Quality Audit: CONTRACTOR shall conduct his own internal quality surveillance at
various stages of PROJECT construction (e.g., procurement, construction and
REVISIONS installation and commissioning) to determine compliance to with Quality Plan and
Quality Program. Each part of Quality Plan and Quality Program shall be assessed
DRAWN BY: ___________ at least once during the entire duration of the contract. Schedule and frequency
DATE: _________________ shall be adjusted where one or more of the following conditions exist:
CHK’D BY: ____________
a) Result of previous surveillance indicates need to perform more frequencies.
APPROVED
b) Changes are made in the PROJECT construction Quality Plan and Quality
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Program.
c) Safety, performance and reliability of products and services are questionable

due to non-conformance.
OPERATING DEPT. d) Verification of corrective action implementation.
5. Non-Conformance Control: CONTRACTOR shall ensure products and services not

conforming to specified requirement are controlled in accordance with documented
procedures to prevent unintended use. CONTRACTOR shall identify, document,
CERTIFIED segregate, evaluate and dispose non-conforming products and services after proper
notification of concerned personnel in CONTRACTOR’s organization.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineer or inspector shall re-inspect repaired and re-
worked non-conforming materials and equipment. CONTRACTOR shall not use
repaired materials and equipment unless approved by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
Under the above clause, the following definitions shall apply:
a) Repair - action taken on non-conforming product in order to fulfill intended

usage requirements although not conforming to the original specified
requirements (ISO 8402).
01400 - 03

FOR 21
494
‫لمشعقي‬
b) Rework - action taken on non-conforming product in order to fulfill the specified

requirement.
CONTRACTOR shall develop non-conformance report (NCR) form and submit to

COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and comment. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC
engineers and inspectors shall have the freedom to issue NCRs, verify
implementation of corrective actions and prevent use of non-conforming items until
deficiency has been corrected. CONTRACTOR’s Chief QA/QC engineers shall
submit bi-weekly reports on non-compliance to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
6. Corrective Action: CONTRACTOR shall develop, document and implement a system

for determining causes of non-compliance and identifying required corrective
actions. New procedures and changes to existing procedures resulting from
identification of cause and potential cause of non-conformance shall be documented
and implemented. Follow-up action shall be taken to verify effective implementation
of corrective action. Identified cause and corrective action shall be included in the bi-
weekly QA/QC reports required to be submitted to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
REVISIONS 7. Quality Records: CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a system for
preparation, maintenance, protection and preservation of quality records. Documents
DRAWN BY: ___________ including inspection report, field inspection checklist, factory test reports, laboratory
DATE: _________________
test reports, witnessed test reports, inspection logbooks, construction drawings and
specifications, approved submittals and non-conformance reports are part of quality
CHK’D BY: ____________
records. Quality records shall be available at WORK SITE for use as reference by
APPROVED
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
8. Control of Field Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment: Measuring and
testing equipment and devices affecting quality of construction shall be controlled
and maintained. CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement a documented
calibration control program detailing equipment calibration schedule and identifying
personnel responsible for control of equipment. CONTRACTOR shall ensure only
OPERATING DEPT. correctly identified and calibrated measuring equipment are used in the PROJECT.
Equipment calibration certificates shall be made available to COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE upon request.
Document Control: CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a documented

CERTIFIED control program for review, approval, revision and distribution of documents for
activities affecting quality. Personnel responsible for revision, issuance and approval
BY: ___________________
of documents shall be identified. Control shall ensure pertinent and current issues of
documents are available at essential locations and obsolete and superseded
DATE: _________________
documents are removed. CONTRACTOR shall list documents to be controlled and
shall include CONTRACTOR’s Quality Manual and Procedure, Quality Plan and
Quality Program, Quality Control Plan and Inspection, Test Plan, construction
drawings, calculations, correspondence, inspection and test reports, field inspection
checklist and other relevant construction document.
10. Materials and Equipment Handling, Storage, Identification and Control:

CONTRACTOR shall verify materials and equipment meet the specified quality and
shall be handled, stored, identified and controlled according to contractual
requirements.
01400 - 04

FOR 22
494
‫لمشعقي‬
11. Interface and interaction control between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR and
between CONTRACTOR and SUB-CONTRACTORS, manufacturers, vendors and
suppliers, QA/QC Service CONTRACTORs (independent inspection agencies) and
Independent Testing Laboratories.
12. Other Quality Assurance and Quality Control PROJECT construction activities.
E. Field Testing and Inspection, and Construction and Installation Control:
1. CONTRACTOR shall establish and document procedures and WORK instructions to

ensure construction and installation processes are performed in controlled
conditions. Necessary qualification of personnel and procedure for activities such as
welding, non-destructive testing, heat treatment, civil and concrete WORK shall be
defined. CONTRACTOR’s personnel shall adhere to WORK instructions and
procedures.
2. CONTRACTOR shall conduct inspection and testing activities at all phases and
quality audit at required stages of construction and installation. CONTRACTOR’s
REVISIONS QA/QC team shall develop and use field inspection checklist to facilitate checking of
process, activity, material and equipment. Field inspection checklist shall indicate
DRAWN BY: ___________ characteristic to be verified, inspection method, acceptance criteria and reference
DATE: _________________
specifications section and standard. Checklist shall have provision for writing result
of inspection, date of inspection, and name and signature of QA/QC engineer or
CHK’D BY: ____________
inspector. Activities where inspection checklists are required shall include pre-
APPROVED
commissioning and commissioning checks and tests, materials and equipment
receiving inspection, concrete pre-placing inspection, asphalting, hydrostatic testing,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
pressure testing of piping and equipment, testing of HVAC system. Checklist shall
be submitted to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and comments.
3. CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement use of inspection logbook by

CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineers and inspectors in recording comments and
OPERATING DEPT. observation and inspection results. CONTRACTOR’s personnel responsible for
correcting deficiency and non-conformance shall record their reply in the logbook
stating actions taken in correcting deficiencies. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineers
and inspectors shall ensure unsatisfactory observations are corrected and cleared
before proceeding with the succeeding activity.
CERTIFIED
1.06 RECEIPT INSPECTION
BY: ___________________
A. CONTRACTOR shall conduct receipt inspection of materials and equipment and shall
DATE: _________________
submit copies of report to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. CONTRACTOR is responsible for reporting to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shipment

and transportation damages. CONTRACTOR shall acknowledge such delivery made
without inspection report is subject to rejection and return at no additional cost to
COMPANY.
01400 - 05

FOR 23
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.07 INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY
A. Requirements:
1. CONTRACTOR shall employ and pay for services of COMPANY qualified and
approved Independent Testing Laboratory to perform quality control and quality
assurance services including tests, inspection and other services required by the
individual specifications sections.
2. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the contracted independent testing laboratory to

provide one (1) original and two (2) duplicate copies of test results directly to
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE within three (3) days of test completion. Test
reports shall indicate tested characteristics, test method, acceptance criteria and
compliance and non-compliance with applicable standard. PROJECT contract
number shall be used as reference on reports.
3. CONTRACTOR shall ensure contracted Independent Testing Laboratory does not

re-assign and subcontract any part of contracted testing WORK.
REVISIONS
4. CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY the scope of WORK issued to Independent

DRAWN BY: ___________ Testing Laboratory.
DATE: _________________
5. CONTRACTOR shall provide access by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to facilities
CHK’D BY: ____________
of Independent Testing Laboratory for witnessing tests and verification of testing
APPROVED
equipment calibration status and in cases COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE exercise
the option of witnessing required tests.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
6. Employment by CONTRACTOR of Independent Testing Laboratory shall not relieve

CONTRACTOR of obligations to perform WORK in accordance with the contract
documents.
OPERATING DEPT. B. QUALIFICATION OF TESTING LABORATORY
1. Shall meet “Recommended Requirements for Independent Testing Laboratory

Qualification,” latest edition published by American Council for Independent
Laboratories.
CERTIFIED
2. Shall meet requirements of ASTM E329, Standard Recommended Practice for
BY: ___________________
Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as
Used in Construction.
DATE: _________________
3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at maximum 12-month intervals by devices of

accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and accepted values of
natural physical constant.
C. Testing Laboratory Duties and Limits of Authority:
1. Cooperate with COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and provide qualified personnel on

notice.
01400 - 06

FOR 24
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Perform required inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of

construction to comply with applicable standards specified in individual specifications
and requirements of the contract documents.
3. Immediately notify COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, in writing, of observed

irregularities, deficiencies and other conditions not in compliance with the
specifications and contract documents requirements.
4. Immediately submit one (1) original and two (2) duplicate copies of inspection and
test report to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE including the following:
a) Date Issued
b) PROJECT Title and Contract Number
c) Testing Laboratory Name and Address
d) Type of Inspection and Test
e) Date of Inspection and Sampling
f) Date of Testing
g) Record of Temperature and Weather Conditions
REVISIONS h) Location in PROJECT
i) PROJECT Identification and Specification Section
DRAWN BY: ___________ j) Observation complying with Specifications and Contract Documents
DATE: _________________
k) Name and Signature of Inspector and Tester
CHK’D BY: ____________
5. Testing Laboratory is not authorized to release, revoke, alter and enlarge
APPROVED
requirements of the contract documents; accept any portion of WORK; and perform
any duties of CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTOR.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
D. CONTRACTOR’s Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel, provide storage, assistance and

access to WORK and manufacturer’s operations.
OPERATING DEPT.
2. Provide to Testing Laboratory representative samples of materials proposed for use
in the WORK in quantities sufficient for accurate testing and as specified.
3. Samples of concrete shall be made available from daily placing to COMPANY

CERTIFIED REPRESENTATIVE for purpose of making test cylinders, and samples of
aggregates shall be provided at request of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for
BY: ___________________
testing purposes.
DATE: _________________
4. Submit two (2) copies of mill test reports.
5. Provide manpower and facilities:
a) To provide access to WORK to be tested.
b) To obtain and handle samples at PROJECT SITE under the direction of Testing
Laboratory.
c) To facilitate inspections and tests.
01400 - 07

FOR 25
494
‫لمشعقي‬
6. Notify Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operation to allow for assignment

of personnel and schedule of tests.
7. Arrange with Testing Laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests requested
by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
8. Employ and pay for services, when required, of another equally qualified
Independent Testing Laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and
testing and retesting required initial test indicate WORK does not comply with
requirements of contract documents.
9. In addition to the foregoing, CONTRACTOR shall provide the following:
a.) Soil surveys of location of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil
materials and delivery to testing laboratory.
b) Reinforcing steel mill order certificate
REVISIONS c) Portland cement certification
DRAWN BY: ___________ d) Concrete aggregate samples and delivery to testing laboratory
DATE: _________________
e) Below strength concrete coring and testing, when required by COMPANY
CHK’D BY: ____________
REPRESENTATIVE.
APPROVED
f) Welding procedure qualification tests
ENGINEERING DEPT.
g) Equipment performance tests
h) Change of materials source after original test and inspection has been made.
OPERATING DEPT. i) Where in the opinion of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, WORK of

CONTRACTOR is not executed according to these specifications;
CONTRACTOR shall make tests to determine its acceptability, at no additional
cost to COMPANY.
CERTIFIED j) Tests, samples and mockup costs of substitute materials, where

CONTRACTOR requested substitution, to establish specified quality shall be at
BY: ___________________
no additional cost to COMPANY.
DATE: _________________
E. Tests and Inspection Reports:
1. Testing Laboratory shall provide certified copies of test and inspection reports. One
(1) original and two (2) duplicate copies to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and one
(1) duplicate copy to the supplier of material tested.
2. Reports shall indicate tests and inspections were made by approved testing
engineer discloses materials met or failed to meet the requirements of the contract
documents.
01400 - 08

FOR 26
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.08 INSPECTION BY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
A. In addition to tests and inspection required in this section, COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE will conduct routine and periodic inspection of WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities and access to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to
inspect WORK and witness tests. WORK covered before required inspection shall be
uncovered and removed at no additional cost to COMPANY.
B. CONTRACTOR shall advise COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing, 48 hours in

advance, schedule of field and laboratory tests to be conducted indicating dates and
locations of testing.
C. CONTRACTOR shall attach copy of Inspection Report, e.g., inspection checklist and final
in-process inspection report by CONTRACTOR’s SITE QA/QC engineer on every
Inspection Request submitted to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR’s
SITE QA/QC team shall verify and confirm activities covered by CONTRACTOR’s
inspection request are in accordance with the contract requirements prior to receipt by
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE of inspection request.
REVISIONS
D. CONTRACTOR shall comply with lead time, as stipulated in contract Schedule “A”, when
DRAWN BY: ___________ requesting for inspection to allow presence of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in
DATE: _________________
witnessing and inspecting the tests.
CHK’D BY: ____________
1.09 COMPANY’S QUALITY ASSESSMENT (AUDIT) RIGHT
APPROVED
A. COMPANY reserves the right to conduct scheduled and unscheduled quality assessment
ENGINEERING DEPT.
of CONTRACTOR’s Quality System, Construction Operation and Quality Plan
implementation. Results of assessments (audits) shall be confidential between
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY.
When COMPANY exercise the right to perform quality assessment (audit),

OPERATING DEPT. CONTRACTOR will be given minimum three (3) calendar days notice. CONTRACTOR
shall provide access and assistance to COMPANY personnel to perform the quality
assessment (audit).
CONTRACTOR shall implement corrective actions on deficient areas discovered during

CERTIFIED quality assessment (audit) within mutually agreeable time frame. Costs, except wages,
transportation and lodging incurred by COMPANY quality assessors during quality
BY: ___________________
assessment (audit) shall be at no additional cost to COMPANY.
DATE: _________________
B. CONTRACTOR shall include the following conditions on purchase order placed with the
manufacturers and suppliers:
COMPANY reserves the right to perform production plant survey, quality assessment
(audit), quality surveillance activities and inspect materials and equipment at
manufacturer’s production plant and supplier’s facility to verify compliance with the terms
and conditions of purchase orders and related documents. COMPANY reserves the right
to witness tests and perform visual examinations and inspections at the manufacturer’s
production plant and supplier’s facility related to materials and equipment workmanship,
surface defects, component dimension, and paint and coating application.
01400 - 09

FOR 27
494
‫لمشعقي‬
COMPANY reserves the right to require certificates and data from manufacturer and
supplier on pertinent aspects of manufacturing process including mill test reports, heat
treatment certificates, welders and welding procedure qualification records, non-
destructive examination records, test records and quality manual to form part of non-
material requirement and shall be forwarded to COMPANY as document package.
1.10 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Testing and inspection includes the following:
1. Layouts and Measurements

2. Soils Tests and Compaction Tests
3. Sampling and Testing of Cement, Reinforcing Steel, Aggregates, Water, Concrete
Mixes, Concrete Batches, and Concrete Strength
4. Design of Concrete Mixes
5. Sampling and Testing of Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU), Mortar, Grout and
Reinforcing Steel
6. Welded Connection Tests
REVISIONS 7. Mechanical Systems Operational Tests
8. Electrical Operational System Tests
DRAWN BY: ___________ 9. Communication Operational System Tests
DATE: _________________
B. Inspections Required:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Site grading including subgrade, subbase, and base course
2. Fill and backfill
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. Utility lines prior to backfilling
4. Building layout.
5. Foundation excavation prior to placing of forms.
6. Concrete forms and reinforcing steel prior to placing of concrete.
7. Concrete placing.
OPERATING DEPT. 8. Concrete masonry unit (CMU) wall placing
9. Architectural pre-cast panel installation, horizontal and vertical alignments and levels
10. Application of thermal and moisture protection.
11. Roof substrate prior to roofing WORK.
12. Floor and wall substrates prior to finishing WORK.
CERTIFIED 13. Prior to closing of walls, locations of outlets, and fixtures.
14. Locations to receive doors and windows
BY: ___________________
15. Other items specifically requested by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
DATE: _________________
C. Layout and Measurements:
1. Verify dimensions on the drawings before layout and request clarifications of

discrepancies. CONTRACTOR is responsible for corrections.
2. CONTRACTOR is responsible for layout WORK lines, levels and measurements.
3. Verify dimensions on drawings and in field before ordering and fabricating materials.
01400 - 10

FOR 28
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Schedules:
1. Tests and inspections are required for materials, products, equipment, applications,
installations and systems as set forth herein, contract documents and required by
ordinances and governing authorities having jurisdiction at the PROJECT SITE.
Tests, inspections and provisions set forth in the following schedules shall be part of
listed specifications sections and divisions and shall apply thereto as though wholly
repeated therein.
2. Testing Laboratory approved by COMPANY shall conduct tests.
3. Tests and Inspections Schedules and Related Sections Summary:
Schedule 2A - Earthwork:
Section 02200 - Earthwork

Section 02221 - Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
Section 02500 – Subgrade, Subbase and Base Course
REVISIONS
Schedule 2B - Site Underground Water Lines

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Section 02667 - Site Water Lines

CHK’D BY: ____________ Section 02675 - Disinfection of Water Distribution System
APPROVED Schedule 2C - Asphalt Concrete Paving

ENGINEERING DEPT.
Section 02513 - Asphalt Concrete Paving
Schedule 3A - Reinforcing Steel for Concrete
OPERATING DEPT. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
Schedule 3B - Concrete
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

CERTIFIED
Schedule 4A - Masonry
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
Section 04300 - Concrete Masonry Unit System
Schedule 5A - Welded Connections
Section 05300 - Miscellaneous Metal
Schedule 7A - Thermal and Moisture Protection (See relevant tests and inspections
specified in specifications sections)
01400 - 11

FOR 29
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Schedule 8A - Doors and Windows (See relevant tests and inspection specified in
specifications sections)
Schedule 15A - Operational Tests
Division 15 - Mechanical Systems (See relevant specifications sections)
Schedule 16A - Operational Tests
Division 16 - Electrical Systems (See relevant specifications sections)
E. Schedule 2A - Earthwork
1. Soils and Soils Compaction Tests and Inspection: Provide one optimum moisture-
maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered in subgrade and subbases
(fill materials) under building slabs and foundations. Determine maximum soil
densities in accordance with ASTM D1557.
REVISIONS
2. Quality Control Tests During Construction: COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall
inspect and approve subgrades and subbases (fill materials) layers before further
DRAWN BY: ___________
construction are performed thereon. Tests will be taken as follows:
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ a) Footing Subgrade (Natural Grade): Subgrades where footings will be placed,
conduct at least one plate bearing test and field density test where subgrade is
APPROVED cohesionless, or unconfined compression test where subgrade is cohesive to
ENGINEERING DEPT. verify the design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of
footing subgrades will be based on visual comparison of each subgrade with
related tested strata when acceptable to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
b) Building Slab Subgrade: Conduct all tests required in accordance with

COMPANY standard SCS-Q-002, Rev. 1.
OPERATING DEPT.
c) Building Slabs Subbase Material: In each compacted layer, conduct one field
density test for every 250 square meters overlaying concreted areas and
building slabs, but in no case less than three (3) tests.
CERTIFIED
d) Foundation and Wall Backfill Materials: Conduct at least two (2) field density
test at locations and elevations as directed.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ e) Based on reports of testing laboratory and inspections; the subbase and backfill
materials are placed below the specified density; additional compaction and
testing shall be required at no additional cost to COMPANY.
f) Soil-in-place density test results will be considered satisfactory when the

average of 4 consecutive density tests out of 5 has a value not greater than 2%
below the required density.
i. Verification of each footing subgrade.
01400 - 12

FOR 30
494
‫لمشعقي‬
ii. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil used
shall be taken.
F. Schedule 2B - SITE Underground Water Lines:
1. Pressure Tests: CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment for conducting pressure

tests. Tests shall be carried out in accordance with ACS-S-6.
2. Pressure gauges to be used shall be calibrated before conducting tests. Flush and
clean water lines before testing. CONTRACTOR to ensure it is tightly connected
before pressure is applied shall examine hydrostatic testing equipment. Hydrostatic
tests shall be performed in the presence of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Leaks
discovered during the tests shall be repaired and re-tested, at no additional cost to
COMPANY, and accepted by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Hydrostatic tests
pressure shall be continuously maintained until such time it is ready for inspection
and examination for leakages.
REVISIONS 3. Mains and laterals shall be checked by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE using

CONTRACTOR’s manpower to determine displacement on pipes occurred after the
DRAWN BY: ___________ trench has been backfilled to 300mm level above the pipe and tamped according to
DATE: _________________
ACS-S-6. Where the interior of the pipe shows misalignments or defects,
CONTRACTOR shall remedy misaligned and defective pipes.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
4. Disinfection and Sterilization: Sweet and raw water lines disinfection and sterilization
shall be in accordance with ACS-S-11.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
G. Schedule 2C - Asphalt Concrete Paving:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide samples of paving materials proposed for use in required
quantities for testing.
OPERATING DEPT.
2. Analysis of Base and Surface Courses:
a) Sieve analysis
b) Moisture-density relation, when applicable
CERTIFIED c) Asphalt stability test
BY: ___________________ 3. Design base course and surface course mixes shall comply with specifications
DATE: _________________ requirements.
4. Perform appropriate laboratory tests to substantiate mix design. Submit report clearly
indicating mix proportion for CONTRACTOR’s use.
5. Inspect and test materials and proportions of base course and surface course mixes during
production for compliance with specifications requirements.
6. Perform compaction test on base course in accordance with COMPANY Standard SCS-Q-
002, Rev. 1.
01400 - 13

FOR 31
494
‫لمشعقي‬
7. Perform one density and one stability test on surface course for every 500 square meters
placed to ascertain compliance with specifications requirements.
H. Schedule 3A - Reinforcing Steel for Concrete:
1. Tensile and Bend Test by Testing Laboratory:
a) Identified Stock: Where material is taken from bundles delivered from mill is
properly identified to heat number and accompanied by mill and analysis test
reports, material shall be used without further tests, provided affidavit is given
that materials conform with specified requirements. In case of controversy,
tensile and bend tests shall be made either locally or at mill, same as required
for mill for unidentified stock.
b) Unidentified Stock and Random Samples: One tensile test and one bending test
for every 5 tons, or fraction thereof, for every size and type of steel.
c) Exception: Bend tests are not required for 44mm (no. 14) or larger bars.
REVISIONS
I. Schedule 3B - Concrete:
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Test of Portland Cement: Portland cement shall be tested for compliance with the
DATE: _________________ requirements of ASTM C150.
CHK’D BY: ____________
a) Mill certificates certifying cement has been tested and meets the requirements
APPROVED of these specifications will be acceptable, provided cement proposed for use
can be identified with tests lots. CONTRACTOR prior to use shall submit Mill
ENGINEERING DEPT.
certificates.
b) Retesting: Where in the opinion of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, cement is

damaged in storage, transit and has been in storage at mixing SITE for more
OPERATING DEPT. than 30 days, retesting will be required at no additional cost to COMPANY.
2. Tests of Aggregates: Tests of aggregates shall be made before concrete mix is

established, where aggregate characteristic changes and aggregate source
changes.
CERTIFIED
a) Sampling: Aggregate samples shall be taken in accordance with ASTM D75

BY: ___________________ and delivered to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for approval. Aggregates shall
DATE: _________________
not be delivered to ready-mix plant until pit source, plant capacity and ability to
produce uniform products has been verified and approved.
b) Sieve Analysis: ASTM C136
c) Organic Impurities: ASTM C140
d) Soundness: ASTM C88
e) Concrete Aggregate Abrasion: ASTM C131
01400 - 14

FOR 32
494
‫لمشعقي‬
f) Specific Gravity: ASTM C127 (Coarse), ASTM C128 (Fine)
g) Deleterious Materials: ASTM C33
h) Materials Passing No. 200 Sieve: ASTM C177
i) Exception: Soundness and deleterious materials abrasion tests will be waived

where supplier has current laboratory test results on aggregate.
3. CONTRACTOR’s Testing Laboratory Mix Designs and Preliminary Tests:
a) Concrete Mix Design: Submit for approval mix designs and certified preliminary
compressive strength test reports for each concrete strength, type, maximum
aggregate size required and shrinkage limitation prepared and certified by
testing laboratory. Submit at least 15 days prior to start of affected WORK. Do
not begin production until mixes have been reviewed and approved by
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
REVISIONS i. Required compressive strengths and types of concrete shall be as

indicated on the drawings and as specified in Section 03300.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ii. Mix designs shall state proportions for each material, including admixtures
(where required), water-cement ratio, maximum allowable water content,
CHK’D BY: ____________
slump for each material, manufacturer’s name and brand, type of
APPROVED
designation, source, aggregate sieve analysis and gradation, and other
pertinent data.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
iii. Producer’s past quality control record shall be considered in design of

mixes.
iv. Where mixes are intended for placing by pumping, this shall be considered
OPERATING DEPT. in design of mixes and designated.
v. Compressive strength tests shall be made to establish strength quality of

each concrete mix design proposed for use. Tests shall be made in
advance of beginning operations. Prepare specimens in accordance with
CERTIFIED ASTM C192 and C39, and submit to approve independent testing
laboratory in the presence of a COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for testing.
BY: ___________________
b) Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select
DATE: _________________
concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192
and conduct strength test in accordance with ASTM C39, as specified in ACI
301.
c) Establish curve showing relationship between water-cement ratio (or cement

content) and compressive strength with at least three (3) points representing
batches producing strengths above and below required. Use not less than three
(3) specimens tested at 28 days, or earlier age to establish each point on the
curve, when acceptable to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
01400 - 15

FOR 33
494
‫لمشعقي‬
d) Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select
concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301.
e) Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable

where concrete production facility has certified records consisting at least 30
consecutive tests in one (1) group, or statistical average for two (2) groups,
totaling 30 or more tests representing similar materials and PROJECT
conditions.
i. Standard Deviation: Where standard deviation exceeds 4.14 MPa (600 psi)
or where no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce
an average strength at least 8.27 MPa (1200 psi) greater than the required
compressive strength of concrete.
ii. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the
PROJECT SITE using ACI 214 evaluation methods, standard deviation will
be reduced when the probable tests frequency of more than 3.45 MPa (500
psi) below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100, and that
REVISIONS the probable frequency of average three (3) consecutive tests below
required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
f) Adjustments to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments will be requested by
CONTRACTOR when materials characteristics, PROJECT conditions, weather,
CHK’D BY: ____________
tests results, and other circumstances warrants. Provide such adjustments, at
APPROVED
no additional to COMPANY. Laboratory test data from revised mix designs and
strength results shall be submitted to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for
ENGINEERING DEPT.
review and approval.
g) Admixtures:
i. Air-Entraining Admixtures shall be added in strict compliance with

OPERATING DEPT. manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
ii. Water-Reducing Admixtures shall be used in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Admixtures to increase
cement dispersion and workability for low-slump concrete will be used at
CONTRACTOR’s option subject to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
CERTIFIED acceptance.
iii. Use admixture amounts as recommended by manufacturer for climatic
BY: ___________________
conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust admixture quantities as
required to maintain quality control.
DATE: _________________
h) Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the
point of placing as follows:
i. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 75mm.

ii. Reinforced Foundation and All Other Concrete: Not less than 25mm and
not more than 100mm.
i) The following concrete field tests will be carried out by COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE:
01400 - 16

FOR 34
494
‫لمشعقي‬
i. Compression Test: Make 4 standard test cylinders from each placing day
and every 100 cubic meters or fraction thereof, whichever is less, of each
class and type of concrete. Date and number cylinders and indicate point
where samples were taken. Indicate slump test result, air content, and
concrete temperature of samples and air temperature at PROJECT SITE.
ii. Test Cylinders: Make test cylinders at PROJECT SITE in accordance with
ASTM C31, 24 hours after making store cylinders under moist curing
conditions, at approximately 70 degrees F until tested. Test specimens in
accordance with ASTM C39, one (1) at age 7 days and two (2) at 28 days.
Reserve one (1) cylinder for testing at ages directed by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
iii. Slump Tests: ASTM C143, at beginning of concrete placing and at the
same time test cylinders are made.
iv. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C233, at beginning of concrete placing and at the

REVISIONS same time test cylinders are made.
DRAWN BY: ___________ j) Tests of Below Concrete Strength: Core or load tests, or both, will be required
DATE: _________________
taken from and performed on concrete represented by unsatisfactory
compressive tests results, at no additional cost to COMPANY
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
i. Core Test: ASTM 42, CONTRACTOR shall fill holes made by cutting cores
with an approved dry pack concrete.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ii. Load Test: In accordance with American Concrete Institute, ACI 318.
k) All cast-in place concrete shall be accordance with SCS-Q-003,
OPERATING DEPT. J. Schedule 4A - Masonry
1. Cement: Mill test and manufacturer’s compliance certificate with appropriate ASTM
standards shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to use of materials.
CERTIFIED 2. Test samples shall be made available to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE at

beginning of masonry WORK for three (3) successive working days. Additional
BY: ___________________
samples shall be taken at least once every 5 working days during the progress of
masonry WORK. Samples shall be cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C31.
DATE: _________________
a) Make Test Samples as Follows:
i. Mortar: Mortar shall be spread on concrete masonry unit and let stand for
one (1) minute then molded into 50mm diameter by 100mm diameter
cylinder and rodded.
ii. Grout: Make three (3) test cylinders in similar manner as concrete.
01400 - 17

FOR 35
494
‫لمشعقي‬
b) Mark tests in set with same number of one end. Laboratory inspector shall
record this number on his record log. Deliver two (2) test samples from each
set to testing laboratory after 48 hours of curing. Compression tests shall be
made at 7-day and 28-day samples ages.
c) Third samples taken from each set shall be kept at PROJECT SITE until second
test report has been received by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE on matching
samples. When report is satisfactory, third sample shall be removed and
disposed of. In the event second test is below the required strength, testing
laboratory shall then test the third sample at age selected by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
K. Schedule 5A - Welded Connections:
1. Welders Qualification: CONTRACTOR shall arrange with COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE for certification of welders.
2. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall make field inspections and tests as required

REVISIONS during precast concrete erection, structural steel WORK, miscellaneous metal
WORK and related welded construction. Test reports shall be submitted to
DRAWN BY: ___________ COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Reports shall include field welders certifications,
DATE: _________________ types and locations of defective welds found during inspection and measures
required and performed to correct defective welds, final approval statements of field
CHK’D BY: ____________
welded connections, and other field erection data and information pertinent to safe
APPROVED
and proper welding of field connections.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. Welding: In addition to visual inspection of welds, minimum 20% of grove welds and
other welds indicated on the drawings shall be tested by Ultrasonic Weld Testing in
accordance with ASTM E164.

OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
01400 – 18

FOR 36
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Providing and maintaining of temporary facilities during the entire duration of the contract
including the following:
1. SITE Offices and Storage

2. Power and Lighting
3. Water Supply
4. Sanitary Facility
5. Access
6. Safety and Security
7. Fire Protection
8. Communications
REVISIONS 9. Housekeeping and Cleanliness
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Removal of temporary facilities after completion of WORK

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

1.02 SITE OFFICES AND STORAGE
APPROVED
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary SITE offices and storage shed for
use during the entire duration of the contract. CONTRACTOR shall submit proposed
ENGINEERING DEPT.
layout of temporary offices and storage sheds to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for
review and approval. In case it will be located outside premises, written approval shall be
obtained from the owner of land and a copy furnished to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
for record purposes.
OPERATING DEPT. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide weathertight storage sheds to protect stored materials,
equipment and apparatus that will be damaged by weather. Storage sheds shall have
floors raised at least 150mm above the ground on heavy joist or sleepers.
C. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary SITE offices for exclusive use by
CERTIFIED SITE Personnel in accordance with the following requirements:
BY: ___________________ 1. Temporary SITE office shall be new and not less than 50 sq. meters in floor area. It
shall include conference room and toilet. It shall be provided with electric power;
DATE: _________________
and heating, ventilating and air conditioning system capable of maintaining 25C
room temperature at all weather conditions; water supply (sweet and raw) system;
sewage disposal system and telecommunications system.
2. All window types air conditioner shall be new.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall supply and install one eastern and one western water
closet in separate compartments and a hand wash sink with a new water heater.
01500-01

FOR 37
494
‫لمشعقي‬
4. Furniture, office equipment and supplies includes, as a minimum, the following:
a. New brand name personal computer of latest configuration with latest original
software for operating system, M. S. Office, and a new color printer.
b. Log Books and Office Stationery
c. Telephone Unit : 1 each
d. Fax Machine : 1 each
e. Copying Machine : 1 each
f. Standard Size 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet : 2 each
g. Standard Size Desks w/ Side Drawers : 2 each
h. Standard Size Swivel Chairs : 2 each
i. Guest Chairs : 4 each
j. Conference Table for 8 w/ Chairs : 1 set
k. Drawing File Racks : 1 each
l. Portable Fire Extinguishers, Type ABC : 3 each
m. First-Aid Cabinet : 1 each
n. Presentation Board : 1 each
D. A refrigerator shall be provided and conveniently located inside the SITE offices.
REVISIONS Adequate bottled drinking water shall be supplied for daily consumption at site for
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.03 POWER AND LIGHTING
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain power supply to meet the requirements of
APPROVED
construction, testing and commissioning. For PROJECT SITE where power supply is not
available, CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain power generating equipment. For
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PROJECT SITE where power supply is available, COMPANY will provide temporary
power supply through a metered connection upon request by CONTRACTOR. Power
supply consumption shall be paid by CONTRACTOR.
B. Temporary Lighting:
OPERATING DEPT.
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary night lighting for use in
construction, maintenance and general security.
2. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain barricade warning lights.

CERTIFIED
C. Temporary electrical materials and installation shall be in conformance with the
BY: ___________________
requirements of the latest editions of NEC and NFPA.
DATE: _________________
1.04 WATER SUPPLY
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain adequate water supply for temporary offices
requirements and construction purposes. CONTRACTOR is responsible for arranging
necessary permits and connections from the local water authority or municipality. Where
no water supply is available, CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain a water tank
and associated distribution system, with capacity adequate to support the water
requirement throughout the duration of the contract.
01500-02

FOR 38
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.05 SANITARY FACILITY
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary sanitary conveniences (toilets and
washrooms) for use by personnel at PROJECT SITE throughout the duration of Contract.
Approved and adequate sanitary conveniences with enclosures and ventilation and shall
be kept clean. Install and maintain sanitary conveniences to conform with applicable
requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction. Location shall be approved by
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary drainage and sewage disposal
system will be connected to, where available, the local and municipality sewerage
system.
C. Where no local or municipal connection is available, CONTRACTOR shall provide and

maintain temporary drainage and sewage disposal system. These shall comply with the
local and municipal environmental regulations.
1.06 ACCESS
REVISIONS A. Provide and maintain temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, hoist, runways and
derricks as necessary for construction purposes during the entire duration of the Contract.
DRAWN BY: ___________ These shall be erected in accordance with applicable safety standards and shall be
DATE: _________________
inspected by CONTRACTOR’s qualified personnel and approved prior to use.
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. Scaffolding shall be erected, maintained and removed as necessary for proper execution
APPROVED
of WORK and shall be erected on the side of wall on where facing WORK occurs. It shall
not be erected on and into any finish facing material.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.07 SECURITY AND SAFETY
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary barricades, warning lights and
signals, and provide watchmen and other precautionary measures for protection of
OPERATING DEPT. persons, property and WORK during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain in good condition temporary fence at WORK
SITE throughout the duration of construction. Fence shall be a minimum of 1.80 meters
high corrugated steel sheet. Fence shall be removed immediately upon completion of
CERTIFIED construction.
BY: ___________________
C. Provide temporary construction sign as directed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. No
unauthorized signs shall be installed anywhere on the PROJECT SITE including
DATE: _________________
advertising signs.
D. Exposed surfaces on the outside of barricades, outside of field offices and toilet
enclosures shall be painted.
E. CONTRACTOR is responsible for WORK SITE security.
01500-02

FOR 39
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.08 FIRE PROTECTION
A. Construction practices including cutting and welding and fire protection during
construction shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Accident Prevention
and Safety Manual.
B. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored and handled in accordance with
NFPA 30. Storage shall not be permitted within the building construction.
C. Do not light fires or burn waste construction materials in and around the limits of
construction area.
1.09 COMMUNICATION
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary telephone connection at the SITE
offices. COMPANY, at its discretion, will allow having temporary telephone connection
from the existing telecommunications facility upon request and remittance of rental
charges as per regulations. Telephone sets and associated cabling shall be provided and
REVISIONS installed by CONTRACTOR.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. CONTRACTOR will be allowed and limited to local calls only.
DATE: _________________
1.10 HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEANLINESS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide janitorial services at temporary facilities throughout the
duration of the Contract.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate number of trash containers complete with cover
and shall be properly distributed at locations of WORK SITE. Trash containers shall be
painted and marked “TRASH CONTAINER.” Contents shall be collected daily and
disposed to approve disposal area.
OPERATING DEPT.
1.11 FACILITIES REMOVAL
A. After obtaining demobilization approval from COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall arrange

for removal of temporary utilities connections and submit clearance certificates from local,
CERTIFIED municipal and authorities having jurisdiction upon completion of the PROJECT or fifteen
(15) days after removal of temporary facilities, whichever is later.
BY: ___________________
B. Remove all temporary facilities from PROJECT SITE when their use is no longer
DATE: _________________
required. After removal, restore damaged portions of the SITE occupied by temporary
facilities to its pre-installation original condition.
01500-04

FOR 40
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing, installation and maintaining of barriers and enclosures at designated

construction areas and other areas designated to or as directed by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork

B. Section 02221 - Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
REVISIONS C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

DATE: _________________
A. American Welding Society (AWS):
CHK’D BY: ____________
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded
and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses
OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,

Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
ASTM A153 Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hard- ware

CERTIFIED
ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fastener
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength
ASTM A526 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

Commercial Quality
ASTM A641 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
ASTM B209 Aluminum-Alloy Sheets and Plates, Spec for
ASTM B211 Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods, and Wire, Spec for
01530-01

FOR 41
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s certification of materials produced and tested in accordance with these

specifications shall be provided upon request by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Warrantees by the Manufacturer for products used in the WORK.
C. Samples shall be provided upon request by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
D. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Construction barriers and elements shall be handled, stored and transported that no
undue stress is applied to the units and no cracking, distortion, warping, staining or other
physical damage.
REVISIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.01 GENERAL

DATE: _________________
Procurement of goods and products covered by these specifications shall be approved
CHK’D BY: ____________
by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
APPROVED
2.02 MATERIALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Structural Steel ASTM A36

Steel Pipe ASTM A120
Steel Sheet ASTM A526
Tension Wire (9 US Gauge) ASTM A641
OPERATING DEPT. Standard Bolts, Nuts and Washers ASTM A307
High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers ASTM A325
B. Aluminum Sheets and Plates ASTM B209

Aluminum Bars, Rods and Wire ASTM B211
CERTIFIED
C. Miscellaneous steel shall be galvanized in accordance with the applicable ASTM A123 or
A153.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ D. Miscellaneous steel will be buried in earth shall be coated with coal tar enamel
conforming to AWWA C-203; minimum thickness coat shall be 500 micron.
E. Welding and weld materials shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWS D1.1,
SES-W-1.
F. Wood posts and blocks for metal beam barrier shall be rough douglas fir or S4S douglas
fir, and shall be pressure treated after fabrication.
G. Precast construction barrier shall be constructed as precast members using concrete of

28 MPa compressive strength.
01530-02

FOR 42
494
‫لمشعقي‬
H. Other miscellaneous hardware and fittings shall be commercial quality steel or malleable
iron or wrought iron.
I. Dissimilar metals liable to lead to galvanic action shall not be permitted in the WORK.
J. Cast-in-Place Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section

03300.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT
A. Constructed units of like type or kind shall be reasonably uniform in size and shape.
Each unit shall be accurately fabricated, assembled and interconnected to form a rigid
unit free from any looseness or sway within the unit and free from movement when set up
on a level surface.
B. Posts shall be placed at equal intervals, except that end posts will be spaced closer to
REVISIONS adjacent posts. A rainproof top shall be installed on each closed tubular or pipe section.
C. Rail elements and channel rail elements shall be spliced at an interval not to exceed
DRAWN BY: ___________
3.0m. Splices shall be made at posts.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ D. Metal WORK shall be fabricated in the shop, and no punching, cutting or welding shall be
permitted in the field. The bolted connection of the rail element to the post shall withstand
APPROVED a 22 KN pull at right angles to the line of barrier.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
E. Precast concrete barrier shall present a smooth, uniform appearance in the final position
and conform closely to the horizontal and vertical lines shown on the plan.
F. Wood surfaces shall be free from splinters, splits, tear, dents, and tool marks and holes
not required. Any voids in plywood edges shall be filled to preclude entry of water.
OPERATING DEPT.
G. Metal surfaces shall be free from twists, nicks, cuts and holes not required.
H. Paints and reflectorized sheeting shall be applied in accordance with the instruction of
each manufacturer.
CERTIFIED
I. Barrier panel shall be in single pieces without intermediate joints, and shall be set square
BY: ___________________
and flat.
DATE: _________________
J. Maximum height for the construction barrier is 1.5 m.
3.02 MAINTENANCE
A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining construction barriers throughout the

duration of the Contract. Barriers shall be kept in good condition. They shall be kept at
required locations, unless repairing or replacing is required.
B. When for reasons of safety authorized officials require that barriers be relocated or
rearranged, shall comply with such requirements.

01530-03

FOR 43
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. CONTRACTOR shall investigate the WORK SITE and approaches, listing existing
WORK to remain and to gather required data to bid the PROJECT and to perform
the WORK required under the Contract and Specification Sections of Division 2.
CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing of
discrepancies between the SITE conditions and those shown on the Drawings.
2. CONTRACTOR’s failure to acquaint himself with available SITE information,

REVISIONS conditions and factors affecting cost and liabilities shall not relieve CONTRACTOR
of responsibility for performing WORK in accordance with the requirements of the
DRAWN BY: ___________ Contract Documents.
DATE: _________________
B. Protection of Monuments, WORK and Structures:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Monuments: CONTRACTOR shall prevent the destruction of survey monuments,
bench marks, property corners and other survey points. Where the removal of such
ENGINEERING DEPT.
points is necessary for accomplishing the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall inform
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing, prior to disturbing any point, and shall not
disturb the point until written permission has been issued by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE. Points where removal is allowed, points shall be permanently
referenced prior to disturbance. Clear notes and sketches of reference points shall
OPERATING DEPT. be furnished to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
2. Structures: Structures outside the limits of WORK shall be protected by

CONTRACTOR during the progress of the WORK. Structure damaged shall be
repaired or restored to its original condition at no additional cost to COMPANY.
CERTIFIED Sidewalks, curbs, concrete or asphalt pavement shall be replaced in kind, in
accordance with the applicable Section of these Specifications or as instructed by
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
3. Protection of WORK: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the WORK of
SUBCONTRACTORS and protection of his WORK. Grading necessary to prevent
damage to WORK by water shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will direct CONTRACTOR to perform necessary
grading and drainage to prevent surface run off from damaging the WORK.
4. CONTRACTOR shall locate, protect, support and relocate where necessary,

underground and exposed utilities and other construction uncovered and otherwise
affected by the WORK. Damages shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR at no
additional cost to COMPANY.
02000-01

FOR 44
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. WORK within Easements:
1. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to determine

the limits of construction easements. CONTRACTOR shall ensure WORK, materials
and equipment do not encroach beyond the limits of construction easements.
2. CONTRACTOR shall remove from easements (or dispose of as directed by

COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE) construction debris, including rock, trash and other
objectionable material.
D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. CONTRACTOR is responsible for obtaining permits required by Saudi Government

and their agents, and owners of utilities public or private, where permits are required
for the completion of WORK. CONTRACTOR is responsible for notifying utility
owners or governmental agencies of the scope of WORK of utility and service
involved and to take necessary action and submit information required to obtain
permits.
REVISIONS 2. Permits required include building permits, burning permits, excavation or digging
permits. Copies of permits shall be forwarded to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Exceptions are permits obtained by COMPANY or permits obtained in COMPANY's
DATE: _________________
name.
CHK’D BY: ____________
E. Soil Compaction Control: Soils identification, compaction tests and soil classification
APPROVED
required during construction shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specifications
ASTM D1556 Tests for Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method

OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM D1557 Tests for Moisture Unit Weight Relations of Soils, and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 4.5 kg (10 lb) Hammer and 457 mm (18 in.) Drop
ASTM D2049 Tests for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils

CERTIFIED
ASTM D2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
BY: ___________________
ASTM D3740 Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
DATE: _________________
Inspection of Soil and Rock and Used in Construction
ASTM E11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
B. COMPANY Standards
SCS-Q-002 (Rev. 1) COMPANY Construction Specifications for Earthwork
02000-02

FOR 45
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Choice of equipment to perform the required operations in conformity with this

Construction Specifications shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Where
equipment results in waste, damage to material, inaccurate and objectionable WORK
shall be immediately replaced as directed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. When CONTRACTOR performs construction operations after daylight hours, he shall

provide and maintain sufficient artificial lighting to permit proper construction, observation
and inspection. Where lighting is insufficient for construction, inspection or observation,
CONTRACTOR shall provide additional lighting as directed by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD ENGINEERING

REVISIONS
A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for field engineering required for construction,
DRAWN BY: ___________ furnishing lines, grades, and control points starting from control points and elevations
DATE: _________________
shown on the drawings.
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. WORK shall be performed only by men trained and qualified to where they are assigned.
APPROVED
C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to ensure
ENGINEERING DEPT.
execution of WORK shall not interfere or jeopardize the operations and existing facilities.
D. No WORK shall be covered and put out of view without prior approval of COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR shall provide full opportunity for COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE to examine and observe testing of WORK will be covered.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.02 SPECIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with safety requirements and practices during execution of
WORK and responsible for educating his supervisors and employees of the safety
CERTIFIED requirements and practices being followed during the course of WORK.
BY: ___________________
1. Barricades. CONTRACTOR shall barricade open excavations and install adequate
warning lights. Temporary bridges shall be installed and maintained by
DATE: _________________
CONTRACTOR to accommodate traffic and pedestrian accessibility to WORK area
during excavation operations. CONTRACTOR shall provide flagmen required for
safety and to maintain traffic controls.
2. Access. CONTRACTOR shall provide safe access to bottom of trenches and

excavations including ladders, ramps, steps and other approved type of access
where depth of trench and excavation is greater than one meter, and where access
to the trench and excavation is required by WORK.
02000-03

FOR 46
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. Side Slopes. Sides of excavations and trench walls shall be sloped, benched,
sheeted and shored to maintain stability. Materials obtained from excavation shall be
piled a minimum one meter from the edge of excavation. Roads, streets, sidewalks
and travel ways shall be kept clear of excavated material at all times.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring stability of trench and excavation
walls for safety of personnel and WORK.
4. Working Conditions: Nothing contained herein shall be construed to relieve

CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to provide and maintain safe and clean working
conditions for his employees and others in the area of WORK.
3.03 LOSS PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. CONTRACTOR shall comply with applicable requirements of COMPANY Accident

Prevention and Construction Safety Manual.
2. Prior to commencement of construction operations, CONTRACTOR shall submit to

REVISIONS COMPANY, for review and approval, a Loss Prevention Program consisting of the
following:
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
a. Cover page complete with information including CONTRACTOR’s Name, Title
of Submittal, Contract Title, PROJECT Location and COMPANY Name.
CHK’D BY: ____________
b. Table of Contents
APPROVED
c. Signed Copy of CONTRACTOR’s COMPANY Safety Policy.
d. Program Contents applicable to the Scope of WORK only.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. Comply with provisions of COMPANY's General Instruction for WORK Permit and
Clearance Procedure (G.I. LP-002/83) and CONTRACTOR's employees shall have
valid Work Permit Certificates throughout the duration of the contract.
OPERATING DEPT. 4. Provide and strictly implement use of personal protective clothing (head, eye, face,
hand, foot protection, and respiratory protective equipment) and fall protection
equipment (safety belts and lifelines).
5. Provide and install COMPANY approved safety and warning signs, cordon tapes,
CERTIFIED portable barricades and warning lights for safety and protection of pedestrians and
prevention to damage property.
BY: ___________________
6. Provide first-aid facilities and certified personnel to administer first-aid and
DATE: _________________
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) during emergency cases.
B. Elevated Work:
1. Submit heavy equipment including cranes, lifts, trucks, bucket trucks to COMPANY
for safety inspection and certification. COMPANY will issue green safety sticker to
equipment approved for use.
2. Furnish ladders, platforms and scaffoldings designed, fabricated, inspected and

certified for use by Safety Engineer and Safety Organization. Positioning of ladders,
platforms and scaffoldings shall conform to standard safety practices.
02000-04

FOR 47
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Excavating and Crossing Public Roads and Highways:
1. Mechanized excavation equipment, unless certified and permitted, shall not be used.
CONTRACTOR shall verify locations of underground utilities through COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE and other governing authorities prior to excavation to avoid
damages to such utilities.
2. When required, CONTRACTOR shall provide personnel (as flagmen) to direct and
maintain traffic and traffic signs for re-directing and re-routing of traffic.
D. Welding and Cutting Operation:
1. Provide approved fire extinguishers for use during fire emergencies.
2. Welding gas cylinders shall be provided with approved racks equipped with securing
chains.
E. WORK Adjacent to Energized Lines and Equipment: Comply with working clearances
when working near and about energized power lines and equipment.
REVISIONS
F. WORK Requiring Use of Chemicals: Submit Material Data Sheets (MDS) of chemicals
DRAWN BY: ___________ for use in construction.
DATE: _________________
3.04 COMPLETE WORK
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Clean-up. CONTRACTOR shall keep the WORK area free of debris, trash, garbage and
other offensive waste material and keep construction materials including sheeting,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
shoring, formwork, pipes and reinforcing steel, stockpiled in a neat, orderly manner at
points designated by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, until ready for use in WORK.
During construction, walkways, passages, traveled ways, adjacent to the area of WORK
shall be kept clean and open to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Upon completion of any
stage of WORK in any area, debris, trash, litter, construction materials, shall be removed
OPERATING DEPT. and the area left in suitable condition for the next stage of construction.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02000-05

FOR 48
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. SITE clearing and grubbing.

B. Removal vegetation and other obstructions that will interfere with the new construction.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. UBC, 1997 Chapter 33: Site Work, Demolition and Construction

B. ANSI A10.6 Safety Requirements for Demolition
C. NFPA 241 Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operation
REVISIONS 1.03 WORK CONDITIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Protection of Existing Improvements:

DATE: _________________
1. Provide barricades, coverings or other types of protection required for preventing
CHK’D BY: ____________
damage to existing improvements to remain.
APPROVED
2. Protect improvements on COMPANY property and adjacent properties from
ENGINEERING DEPT.
damage.
3. Restore improvements damaged by WORK of this Section to their original conditions

at no additional cost to COMPANY.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Coordination
1. Confine WORK, unless permitted, of this Section to areas indicated on the drawings.
2. Coordinate WORK to avoid disruption and interference of use, including circulation

CERTIFIED to and from, adjacent FACILITIES.
BY: ___________________
1.04 SUBMITTAL
DATE: _________________
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and approval,
prior to commencement of WORK, procedure and schedule indicating in details the
method of WORK, equipment for use, and testing procedure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
02110-01

FOR 49
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify and protect existing improvements to remain.
B. Disconnect, remove and cap designated utility services within areas of SITE clearing and
removing areas.
C. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on the
PROJECT record documents.
3.02 SITE CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. CONTRACTOR shall clear WORK SITE of vegetation, debris, and obstructions that will
interfere with new construction.
B. Topsoil Removal: Remove top soil as waste material to at least 300mm below natural
REVISIONS grade line in areas of clearing and grubbing. Dispose waste material to location(s) as
directed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Method and locations for disposal of cleared and grubbed materials shall be submitted,
APPROVED
reviewed and approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in advance prior to
commencing WORK.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Burning of combustible cleared and grubbed materials is not permitted within COMPANY
property. Where perishable materials require burning, it shall be burned under constant
supervision of competent personnel and conducted in time and method shall not affect
existing SITE and adjacent improvements. Burning shall be conducted in accordance with
OPERATING DEPT. provisions of environmental laws and ordinances of organizations having jurisdiction.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02110-02

FOR 50
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing of materials, labor, plant and tools and equipment required for excavating,
transporting, placing, spreading, compacting and testing earthwork to grades and
elevations shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 02000 - General Requirements

B. Section 02230 - Soil Compaction and Control
REVISIONS 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Comply with applicable requirements of COMPANY Standard SCS-Q-002 Rev. 1,
DATE: _________________
Construction Specifications for Earthwork
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. Tests:
APPROVED
1. Soils identifications, soils classifications and compaction tests during construction
ENGINEERING DEPT.
shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. Increased in frequency will be ordered by
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE when quality of materials is not complying with
requirements of this Section.
2. Tests to determine compliance with specified density throughout fill areas shall be
OPERATING DEPT. made by Independent Testing Laboratory approved by COMPANY see Section
01400.
3. Density tests shall be made in accordance with COMPANY Standard, SCS-Q-002,

and Rev. 1.
CERTIFIED
1.04 SUBMITTAL
BY: ___________________
A. Prior to commencing WORK, CONTRACTOR shall submit schedule of WORK for review
DATE: _________________
and approval to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE as follows:
1. Excavation Plan
2. Filling Plan
3. Schedule of Equipment to be used
4. Tests Schedule
5. Supervision and Control
B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300.
02200-01

FOR 51
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials used shall be approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and will be retested

anytime.
B. Fill materials shall be accordance with COMPANY standards SCS-Q-002 Rev. 1.
C. Where required quantities of approved materials is not available from excavations within
the SITE limits, additional material will be excavated from approved borrow pits and
transported to the SITE.
D. Top soil shall be approved sweet sand meeting the following requirements:
1. Capable of supporting agricultural crops.
2. Without admixture of subsoil and free from stones, stumps, roots, trash, debris and
other deleterious materials.
REVISIONS
3. Electrical conductivity of soil shall not exceed 7 milliohms per centimeter.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
4. Sodium absorption ratio shall not exceed 12.
CHK’D BY: ____________
5. The pH range shall be 6.5 to 8.4. Topsoil not meeting this pH range shall be
APPROVED
amended by addition of aluminum sulfate or pH adjusters approved by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
6. Gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
OPERATING DEPT. No. 4 97 (min.)

No. 100 80 (min.)
No. 200 20 (min.)
7. Soil percentage not passing the no. 4 sieve shall not contain particles over 50mm
CERTIFIED diameter.
BY: ___________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
DATE: _________________
3.01 USE AND DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Excavated suitable materials shall be stockpiled and reused as directed by COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE. Use SITE excavated materials before “Borrow” materials. Unused
materials shall be removed from PROJECT SITE and disposed to location(s) directed by
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Stockpiled excavated materials shall freely drain
surface water and cover when required to prevent transportation by wind.
02200-02

FOR 52
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Unstable, organic and waste materials, and materials mixed with roots, rock, muck, sod
and other deleterious materials encountered during excavation shall be removed from
PROJECT SITE and disposed of to location(s) directed by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
3.02 EXCESS EXCAVATION
A. Where unsuitable materials for support of fill are encountered during excavation, notify
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Upon approval, excavate unsuitable material below the
grade indicated on the drawings and fill and compact with approved material.
B. Excavations below the indicated grades shall be backfilled with approved materials and
compacted to required compaction.
3.03 BORROW PITS
A. Notify COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE prior to commencing operations of approved

borrow pits and do not commence until approval is obtain.
REVISIONS B. Excavate borrow pits to facilitate drainage and prevent collection and ponding of water.
Overburden and spoil materials shall be disposed or used for other purposes as directed
DRAWN BY: ___________
by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Trim slopes and leave in shape allowing accurate
measurements after excavation is completed.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

3.05 EXCAVATION
APPROVED
A. Preliminary WORK:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Survey borrow pit site to determine materials are complying with classifications.
Notify COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE of discrepancies.
2. Do not commence excavation until required clearing and grubbing operations are
completed.
OPERATING DEPT.
3. Barricade open excavation. Post signs and warning lights as required.
B. Types of Excavation:
CERTIFIED
1. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation, other than borrow or rock, will be considered
unclassified excavation regardless of material excavated.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
2. Top Soil: Prior to beginning of excavations, strip approved top soil and well graded
sands to approved depth, from areas to be covered by subsequent construction.
Transport and stockpile in designated areas.
3. Borrow Excavation: Materials excavated and furnished from borrow pits shall be
approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE prior to commencement of excavating
the material.
4. Stop stripping operations at sufficient distance from vegetation designated to remain

to prevent damage to main root system. Do not strip, collect, mix or deposit soil while
wet.
02200-03

FOR 53
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.06 PLACING OF FILL
A. Inspection: Do not commence fill operations until below grade construction is complete
including:
1. Underground utilities are inspected, rested and approved.

2. Areas to fill are cleaned of vegetation, trash and debris.
B. Slopes: Break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal for better pond
with fill.
C. Operation and Equipment: Operate hauling and spreading equipment over the full width
of each layer. Grade to facilitate drainage and prevent ponding.
D. Fill Placing: Place in successive horizontal layers of 200mm thick (loose layer thickness).
Each layer of fill shall be compacted to desired density prior to placing of the next layer.
E. Rock: Where indicated on the drawings or as directed by COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE, place rock boulders at toes of embankments to retain fill materials.
REVISIONS
3.07 COMPACTING
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. Field Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D2922. For large areas, make one test per
1500 cubic meters minimum.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
B. In-Situ: Loosen material to base grade, moisten or dry as required and compact to 95%
per ASTM D1557, Method D.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
D. Moisture Control: Compact materials at uniform moisture content as determined by ASTM

D1557. Uniformly apply required amount of water to surfaces. Prevent free water from
appearing on surface during and before compacting operations. Remove and replace
over-moisturized soil or scarify and air dry or remove and dry by disking, harrowing or
OPERATING DEPT. pulverizing.
E. Insufficient Compaction: Surfaces not meeting compaction requirements for classified

purpose shall be broken up, pulverized; moisture conditioned to optimum and compacted
to specified density.
CERTIFIED
3.08 GRADING
BY: ___________________
A. Rounding: Excluding solid rock, round tops and bottoms of slopes, embankments and
DATE: _________________
ditches as indicated on the drawings.
B. Warping: Grade and warp intersection of cut and fill and where slopes meet natural grade
to harmonize with existing features. Make transitions gradual and uniform.
C. Finish Grading: Finish to lines, grades and slopes as indicated on the drawings.
1. Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 30mm above or below the
required grade elevations when tested with 3-meter straightedge.
02200-04

FOR 54
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Grade and shape subgrade or subbase surfaces to receive marl base course to
within tolerance of 25mm above or below the required grade elevation when tested
with 3-meter straightedge.
3. Cumulative tolerances shall not be permitted.
3.09 CLEAN-UP
A. Following completion of earthwork operations, the entire WORK area shall be cleaned
free of remaining materials overages and leftovers, discarded equipment and parts, and
trash. Unused rock and soil shall be collected and disposed of as directed by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02200-05

FOR 55
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02221 - EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes, but is not limited to; trenching, excavation, backfilling and
compacting building, utility lines; cables; water and sewer pipes, drainage pipes
which also include manholes, cleanouts and boxes, removal and disposal of excess
excavation material and importing required bedding and fill material, installation of
cable tiles and warning tapes.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03005 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
REVISIONS 1.3 REFERENCE
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
DATE: _________________
1. ASTM D 1557 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of
CHK’D BY: ____________
Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures using 10-lb (4.54
APPROVED
kg) rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) Drop.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. ASTM D 1556 Test Methods for Density of Soil in place by the
Sand-Cone Method.
3. ASTM D 2922 Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

in place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
OPERATING DEPT.
4. ASTM D 4254 Test Methods for, Minimum Index Density of Soils
and Calculation of Relative Density.
5. ASTM D 698 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of

CERTIFIED Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb
(2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (304.8 mm) Drop.
BY: ___________________
6. ASTM D 4253 Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soil
DATE: _________________
Using Vibratory Table.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples of fill material shall be submitted to SEC Representative for evaluation and
approval prior to delivery to site. Additional submittals of fill materials are to be made
as requested by SEC Representative throughout the project.
02221-1

FOR 56
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BEDDING MATERIALS
A. Sand: Shall be clean sand per ASTM C-33.
2.2 FILL MATERIALS
A. Selected Backfill Material: For backfilling 300 mm below the finish grade surface and
600 mm below concrete elements, the material shall be selected fill material as
specified in ASTM D4318.
B. Fill Material: For backfilling the remainder of trenches, use on-site excavation fill or
imported fill material free of stones larger than 150 mm.
2.3 WARNING TAPE AND TILE FOR ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE CABLE TRENCHES
A. Electrical Warning Tape: PVC yellow warning tape 450 mm wide, 0.15 mm thick with
black lettering in Arabic and English stating “Caution, Buried Electrical Cables”.
REVISIONS
B. Electrical Cable Tile: Red calcium silicate or concrete tile, size 400 mm x 200 x 50
DRAWN BY: ___________ mm.
DATE: _________________
C. Telephone Warning Tape: PVC yellow warning tape 500 mm wide, 0.50 mm thick
CHK’D BY: ____________
with black lettering in Arabic and English stating “Caution”, “Buried Telephone
APPROVED
Cables”.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavation: CONTRACTOR shall perform excavation as indicated on

OPERATING DEPT. the plans and standard details in whatever material encountered. All excavations for
structures, utility pipes, appurtenances or cables shall be made to such an extent
that will provide sufficient space to work conveniently around the structure or pipe to
be installed.
CERTIFIED B. Elimination of Unsuitable Materials: all materials removed during excavation or

trenching, unsuitable for backfill, shall be removed from site and disposed of by the
BY: ___________________
CONTRACTOR as specified in Section 02110 Site Clearing.
DATE: _________________
C. Disposal of Surplus Excavated Suitable Materials: All excavated materials suitable
for backfill shall be used and the surplus shall be removed from the site and
disposed of at a Government approved dump site outside SEC boundary limits.
D. Bracing and Shoring: For excavation over 1.20 m deep, the sides of pits and
trenches shall be sloped back to the natural repose of the soil to avoid caving. Side
which cannot be sloped to natural repose because of adjacent structures or ground
condition shall be shored adequately to resist earth movement and protect workers.
02221-2

FOR 57
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Drainage and Dewatering: To ensure proper drainage conditions throughout

construction, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain devices including
spares to intercept remove promptly and properly dispose of all natural ground water
or flood water entering the excavation or trenches. All excavation and trenches shall
be kept dry until the structures, pipes and appurtenances to be built are completed.
F. Protection of Adjacent Building or Existing Structures: When the excavation is close

to an existing structure, the CONTRACTOR shall avoid any possibility of
undermining or disturbing the foundations by placing sheeting, bracing and supports,
dewatering and draining the bottom of the excavations in an acceptable manner
approved by SEC Representative.
3.2 STRUCTURE FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Backfilling around and beneath concrete foundation shall be in accordance with this
specification. Compaction shall have a minimum of 70% relative density (ASTM-D
4253/4254) or 95% standard proctor density (ASTM-D 698) whichever is applicable
and gives the greater density.
REVISIONS B. Fill and backfill under structures and pavements adjacent to structures shall be select
fill as per Section 02300 Earthwork, or coarse aggregate and fine aggregate when
DRAWN BY: ___________ indicated or specified for use under structures, and conforming to requirements for
DATE: _________________
coarse and fine aggregate specified under Section 03005 Concrete and Reinforced.
CHK’D BY: ____________
C. Place fill and backfill materials in layers not exceeding 15 cm in thickness. Unless
APPROVED
otherwise indicated or specified each layer shall be compacted to 95% of the
maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698 for cohesive materials and with in
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1-1/2% optimum moisture content or 70% relative density as determined by ASTM-D
4253/4254 for cohesionless material.
D. Do not place backfill against or on structures until they have attained sufficient
strength to support the loads (including construction loads) to which they will be
OPERATING DEPT. subjected, without distortion, cracking, or other damage. Provide special leak tests, if
required, as soon as practicable after structures are structurally adequate and other
necessary work has been done. Start backfilling promptly after completion of tests.
Avoid unequal soil pressure by depositing material evenly around structure.
CERTIFIED E. The sides of all concrete foundations shall be primed and top-coated with asphalt
emulsion damp-proofing prior to backfilling.
BY: ___________________
3.3 TRENCH BACKFILL
DATE: _________________
A. Preparation of Trench Bottom: The bottom of the trench shall be free of rock, sharp
debris or foreign matter that could cause damage to pipes, cables or other new
construction.
B. Placement of Bedding Material: Cables of pipes shall be laid on a clean sand bed
compacted to 70% relative density ASTM D 4253 and 4254. The bed shall be
compacted uniformly to provide even bearing for pipes. After pipes have been laid,
tested and approved, fill equally on both sides of the pipe and periodically compact to
maintain equal pressure on the pipe. Backfilling shall be done in 150 mm lifts or half
the pipe diameter whichever is the greater until a depth of 300 mm of fill over the
pipe is obtain.
02221-3

FOR 58
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Backfill Trenches: Place the fill material thereon and build it up in successive layers,
compacted by tamping, until it has reached the required elevation. Ensure that each
layer is sloped to drain during construction. Do not allow layers to exceed 200 mm in
thickness before compaction. Compact each layer of material by the use of rollers or
other means so as to secure a dense, stable and thoroughly compacted mass.
Where mobile mechanical equipment cannot be used, compact the materials
thoroughly by the use of power-driven tampers.
D. Compaction: Cable or pipes shall be bedded all around with at least 150mm of
compacted clean sand unless otherwise indicated, having minimum 70% relative
density per ASTM D 4253 and D 4254. Using a machine compactor or hand tamping,
the remaining backfill material shall be compacted to 70% relative density for
cohesionless material. This shall be consistent with 95% of the maximum density as
determined by ASTM D 698 for cohesive soil and or marl whichever is applicable.
3.4 PLACING WARNING TAPE AND CONCRETE TILE FOR ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE
SYSTEM
A. Place continuous PVC warning tape, and concrete tile for electrical and telephone
REVISIONS cable at positions as indicated on the Standard Detail Drawings.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.5 REINSTATEMENT

DATE: _________________
A. To install pipe, cable or conduits under existing pavement, the CONTRACTOR shall
CHK’D BY: ____________
saw cut pavement for the area as needed and restore it back to the original
APPROVED
condition.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.6 COMPACTION TESTING
A. Method and Frequency: To verify that the specified degree of compaction has been
achieved the CONTRACTOR shall perform in-place density test in accordance with
ASTM D 1556, D 2922 or D 23167 after compaction of each lift of fill. Perform at
2
OPERATING DEPT. least one in-place density test for every 90 m of compacted soil or for every layer of
fill. Spacing between all test locations shall be approximately equal.
B. Extra Test: Should be work in question fail to meet the required densities,
CONTRACTOR shall perform remedial work as required and re-test in accordance
CERTIFIED with Paragraph A. of this Section to the satisfaction of SEC Representative.
BY: ___________________
- END OF SECTION -
DATE: _________________
02221-4

FOR 59
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02230 - SOIL COMPACTION AND CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
General requirements CONTRACTOR shall meet to attain specified compaction control defined
herein or as specified in other sections of this Construction Specifications.
A. Section 02000 - General Provisions

B. Section 02200 - Earthwork
C. Section 02221 - Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting

REVISIONS
A. Comply with SCS-Q-002 Rev.1 "COMPANY Construction Standards for Earthwork".
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
B. Tests:
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. Soils identification, compaction tests and soil classification required during
APPROVED
construction shall be at CONTRACTOR’s expense. Increased frequency of testing
will be ordered by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE when in his opinion the quality of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
fill material is less than that desirable.
2. Testing Agency. Sufficient tests to ascertain that the specified density is obtained
throughout the fill and backfill shall be made by an independent testing laboratory
acceptable to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
OPERATING DEPT.
3. Density tests shall be made in accordance with the COMPANY Standard, SCS-Q-
002, Rev. 1.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
CERTIFIED
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit formal reports of required compaction tests. Reports
BY: ___________________
information shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
DATE: _________________
1. Date of the test and date submitted.
2. Location of test.
3. Wet weight, moisture content and dry weight of field sample.
4. Description of soil.
5. Maximum dry density and moisture content of laboratory sample matching the field
sample in color, texture, grain size and maximum dry density.
02230-01

FOR 60
494
‫لمشعقي‬
6. Ratio of field dry density to maximum laboratory dry density expressed in percent.
7. Comments concerning the field density passing or failing the specified compaction.
8. Comments about compaction where required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
Equipment used shall comply with Section 02000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
REVISIONS A. Fill areas under roads, slabs on grade, footings and backfill areas at footings and grade
beams shall be in accordance with the materials& requirements per SCS-Q-002 Rev.1.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
B. Moisture Content. Fill material shall be at optimum moisture content where placed.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.02 COMPACTION RESULTS
APPROVED
A. No additional lift shall be placed on lift with portion failing.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Formal reports of test results shall be submitted.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02230-02

FOR 61
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02281 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
Furnishing of materials, equipment, tools and labor required for the application of
toxicant treatment to control infestation of subterranean termites and other insects.

B. Section 02200 - Earthwork
C. Section 02221 - Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
D. Section 02500 - Subgrade, Subbase and Base Course
REVISIONS 1.03 REFERENCES
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide
DATE: _________________
Act.
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. U.S. Federal Housing Administration, Minimum Property Standards 815-3.6.
APPROVED
C. Building Research Establishment (Dept. of Environment (U.K.) - Overseas Building Notes
ENGINEERING DEPT.
No: 170.
D. Saudi Pesticide Regulations
E. Codes of Federal Regulations, 40 CFR.

OPERATING DEPT.
F. National Fire Codes.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
CERTIFIED A. Submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE the following for review and approval.
BY: ___________________
1. Product Data: Indicate each toxicant for use, composition of active ingredients by
percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate and hazard identification
DATE: _________________
ratings of each toxicant.
2. Test Reports: Regulatory agency approval reports.
3. Manufacturer's recommended application instructions.
4. Manufacturer's certification of compliance with the specified requirements of

toxicants.
5. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) of toxicants for use.
02281-01

FOR 62
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.05 STORAGE
Hazardous materials, when mixed, react violently or evolve toxic vapors or gases, or in
combination, become hazardous by reason of toxicity, oxidizing power, flammability and
other properties shall be separated from each other in storage by distance, partitions and
other approved method to preclude accidental contact between them. The safe handling
and storage of toxic chemical shall be per manufacturer's recommendation.
1.06 MAINTENANCE DATA
Provide re-treatment procedure and schedule.
1.07 QUALIFICATION
Only companies specialized in performing the WORK of this section, with minimum five
years experience, shall be proposed by CONTRACTOR as approved by COMPANY.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ PART 2 - PRODUCTS

DATE: _________________
2.01 CHEMICALS (Toxicants)
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Dragnet FT (Permethrin)
B. Dursban 4TC (Chlorpyrifos)
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. Toxicant chemicals shall be synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of

treated soil and substructure of buildings and shall be approved by local authority
OPERATING DEPT. (Environmental Health Division, Ministry of Agriculture and Water).
B. Dilutant shall be as recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
2.03 TOXICANT SOLUTION MIX

CERTIFIED
Toxicant solution mix shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation. The
BY: ___________________
recommended dilution rate for treating specific soils shall be as per product data and
approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
DATE: _________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. CONTRACTOR shall conduct soil test to verify SITE soil conditions and to determine the
dilution rate of toxicant.
02281-02

FOR 63
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. CONTRACTOR shall verify the SITE and ensure soil condition is sufficiently dry to absorb
toxicant. The soil shall be free from cellulose materials and ready to receive treatment.
3.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION (TREATMENT) APPLICATION
A. Stage 1 - Foundations:
After completion of excavation for foundations and prior to placing of forms, reinforcing bars
and waterproofing membrane and depositing concrete for footings, pedestals, grade beams
and wall footings apply the toxicant solution at a rate of five (5) liters per square meters using
soil injector or power sprayer machine at bottoms and sides of excavations. Rate of
application shall be according to manufacturer's instructions and as approved by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Stage 2 - Slabs-on-Grade:
Prior to placing of waterproofing membrane and steel reinforcing bars for slabs-on-grade, the
entire prepared base shall be saturated and drenched with toxicant solution. The rate of
REVISIONS application is same as mentioned above.
DRAWN BY: ___________ C. Stage 3 - Completed Structures:

DATE: _________________
After completion of the building's primary structures, e.g., footings, pedestals, grade beams,
CHK’D BY: ____________
wall footings, slabs-on-grade, and walls, a 300mm deep trench shall be excavated around the
APPROVED
building and apply toxicant solution on bottom and sides of trenches and backfilled after
completion of application.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS AND ADDITIONAL TREATMENT
A. Apply extra toxicant treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts,
and soil penetrations such as grounding rods and posts.
OPERATING DEPT.
B Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant solution as original treatment.
C Where upon inspection or testing identified the presence of termites, the soil or wooden
structure shall be re-treated and re-tested.
CERTIFIED
D Re-treatment shall be performed as per approved re-treatment procedure.
BY: ___________________
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISH WORK
DATE: _________________
A. Prior to final acceptance of completed WORK, remove cellulose material and other
foreign materials from treated area.
B. Grading operations shall not be permitted on completed treated area. Where so required
due to construction errors, the affected area shall be re-treated with same toxicant
solution as original treatment.
02281-03

FOR 64
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02500 - SUBGRADE, SUBBASE, BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Subgrade Preparation
B. Subbase Placing
C. Base Course Placing

B. Section 02230 - Soil Compaction Control
C. Section 02513 - Asphalt Concrete Paving
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. Standards: CONTRACTOR shall comply with applicable standards of Section 02000.
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. Tests: Refer to SCS-Q-002 - COMPANY Construction Specifications for Earthwork.
APPROVED
1.04 LAYOUT AND STAKING
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Staking of construction shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE shall approve staking before commencing WORK. CONTRACTOR shall
be responsible for staking and error resulting thereof. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor,
stakes, instruments, and materials required for layout. Control points required for laying out
OPERATING DEPT. will be provided by COMPANY.
B. Stakes, marking lines and elevations shall not be removed and disturbed during construction
operation, and protection of stakes shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility.
CERTIFIED
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
BY: ___________________
2.01 SUBGRADE, SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE
DATE: _________________
A. Subgrade and Subbase:
1. Material used shall be clean, free of organic and other deleterious substances. Material
shall be well graded, 100% material passing USA standard sieve #10, less than 10%
material passing USA standard sieve #200.
02500-01

FOR 65
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. CBR for subbase material shall not be less than 15.
3. Where CBR of existing subgrade materials is 5 or less, subgrade shall be modified to

minimum of 9 by replacing subgrade soil of materials specified above, paragraph
2.01.A.1.
B. Base Course:
1. Material: Base course material shall be free of organic matter, rubble, cobbles and
boulders and other deleterious substances. Material shall be well graded, granular
material meeting the following minimum requirements:
USA STANDARD PERCENT

SIEVE SIZE PASSING
50 mm (2 in.) 100
19.0 mm (3/4 in.) 95 to 80
2.0 mm (No. 10) 80 to 50
0.250 mm (No. 60) 50 to 25
REVISIONS 0.075 mm (No. 200) 20 to 8
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Plasticity index of material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be less than 6.
DATE: _________________
3. Soaked CBR of base course at 95% relative compaction of maximum dry density using
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM D1557, Method D or ASTM D4253, whichever gives higher density, shall not be
APPROVED
less than 50. Corrective measures should be taken to upgrade the base course where
CBR of 50 cannot be obtained.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

OPERATING DEPT.
A. Original ground shall be scarified and compacted to minimum 200mm depth and density not
less than 92% of the maximum laboratory density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D,
or ASTM D4253, whichever gives a higher density. Fill material used to bring level to bottom
of subbase or base course shall be compacted to the same degree. Field density of subgrade
CERTIFIED and fill material shall be verified in accordance with Clause 3.03-B.4 of this Section.
BY: ___________________
B. Subgrade shall be finished to conform to alignments, grades and cross-sections shown on the
drawings and as approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
DATE: _________________
C. Holes, ruts, soft spots and other defects shall be corrected. Subbase or base course materials
shall not be placed over soft, unstable and not drained subgrade areas. Where subgrade is
dusty ot muddy, operations shall be suspended until conditions are corrected.
D. Finished subgrade surface shall be maintained in compacted conditions and free of foreign
materials prior and until placing of subbase or base course materials.
02500-02

FOR 66
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 SUBBBASE AND BASE COURSE
A. Subbase Placing
1. Subbase material shall be placed in layers of uniform thickness of 200mm loose material
depth, moisture conditioned and compacted to density of not less than 92% of maximum
laboratory density, as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D, or ASTM D4253,
whichever gives a higher density. Fill material used to level the subbase course shall be
compacted to the same degree. Field density of subbase course shall be verified in
accordance with paragraph 3.02-B.4 of this Section.
2. Subbase shall be finished to conform to alignment, grade and cross-section shown on

the drawings and as approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Base Course Placing
1. Placing: Material shall be placed in layers of uniform thickness with approved spreaders.
Layer thickness generally shall not exceed 150mm after compaction. When vibrating or
approved types of special compacting equipment are for use, approval will be given by
REVISIONS COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for increasing the permissible thickness of layers,
provided the ability of such equipment to achieve acceptable compaction to full layer
DRAWN BY: ___________ depth is demonstrated. Prior to placing of succeeding layer, the previously constructed
DATE: _________________
layer shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter. The water content of material shall be
maintained during placement at optimum percentage (± 1½%) as determined by ASTM
CHK’D BY: ____________
D1557.
APPROVED
2. Compaction: While at optimum moisture (± 1½%), the material shall be compacted with
ENGINEERING DEPT.
equipment capable of obtaining the desired density to full depth. Rolling shall continue
until base is compacted to not less than 95% of maximum laboratory density as
determined by ASTM D1557, Method D or ASTM D4253, whichever gives a higher
density.
OPERATING DEPT. 3. Acceptance of Material: Fifty-kilogram bag samples of each material for use shall be
submitted to an independent soil testing laboratory approved by COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE, at least ten (10) days prior to commencing placing operations.
Testing laboratory shall perform at least one of each of the following tests on samples
and submit the data to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
CERTIFIED
a) Mechanical Analysis (Gradation, ASTM D422
BY: ___________________
b) Plasticity Index, ASTM D4318
DATE: _________________
Where results from the above tests meet the requirements of Item (1) above, the testing
laboratory shall determine compaction characteristic of material by conducting the
following tests and use higher of the maximum densities given by the two tests for
compaction control.
a) Modified Compaction, ASTM D1557, Method D, Minimum of Five Moisture Density

Determinations per Tests, or
b) Maximum Index Density of Soils Using Vibratory Table, ASTM D4253.
02500-03

FOR 67
494
‫لمشعقي‬
No material shall be used until tested, as above, by soil testing laboratory and approved
by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. By submitting samples of material, CONTRACTOR
agrees and guarantees the material used for construction shall conform to the sample(s)
supplied.
4. Field Testing: In-place density of compacted material shall be measured by ASTM

D1556 or D2922. As minimum, at least one field density test shall be conducted in
accordance with the following guidelines:
a) In areas where degree of compaction is doubtful.

b) For every 1000 cubic meters of material when no doubtful areas occur.
c) During each shift involving placing of material.
d) For each layer of compacted material place
CONTRACTOR shall provide horizontal and vertical control for location of each test.
5. Surface of compacted material shall be finished by blading or with automated equipment

especially designed for this purpose and rolled with steel-wheeled roller. In no case will
thin layers of fine materials be added to the top layer of base course in order to meet the
REVISIONS grade. Surface of completed base shall not show any deviation in excess of 19mm when
tested with a 3-meter straightedge. The completed thickness of base course shall be
DRAWN BY: ___________ within  19mm of the design thickness.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02500-04

FOR 68
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02560 - ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions of

Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 Description of Work
This section shall consist of a surface course composed of mineral aggregate, filler and
bituminous material mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course in
accordance with these specifications and shall conform to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and
typical cross sections shown on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer.
REVISIONS Each course shall be constructed to the depth, typical section, or elevation required by the
plans and shall be rolled, finished, and approved before the placement of the next course
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.3 Reference Standards
CHK’D BY: ____________
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations the American Society for
APPROVED
Testing and Materials Specification (ASTM), the Specifications of the American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) or other equivalent standards and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
sound practice.
1.4 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
OPERATING DEPT. Specification Sections:
Equipment list and manufacturer's product data.

Samples of all materials.
Test reports and materials certificates as required in referenced section for concrete, joint
CERTIFIED fillers and sealers.
Contractor's proposal for construction procedure, types and positions of joints.
BY: ___________________
Design mixes for each concrete pavement mix.
DATE: _________________
1.5 Traffic Control
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction
activities.
Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.
02560-1

FOR 69
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE
2.1.1 Aggregates shall consist of crushed stone or crushed gravel with or without sand or
other inert finely divided mineral aggregate. The portion of materials retained on the
No. 8 sieve shall be known as coarse aggregate, the portion passing the No. 8 sieve
and retained on the No. 200 sieve as fine aggregate, and the portion passing the No.
200 sieve as mineral filler.
2.1.2 Coarse Aggregate
A. Coarse aggregate shall consist of sound, tough, durable particles, free from
adherent coatings of clay, organic matter, and other deleterious substances.
It shall show no more wear than 25% when tested in accordance with ASTM
C 131, nor shall the sodium sulphate soundness loss exceed 9%, or the
magnesium soundness loss exceed 12%, after five cycles, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 88.
REVISIONS B. Crushed aggregate shall contain at least 75% by weight of crushed pieces
having two or more crushed fractured faces. The area of each face shall be
DRAWN BY: ___________ equal to at least 75% of the smallest mid-sectional area of the piece. When
DATE: _________________
two fractures are contiguous, the angle between plans of fractures shall be
at least 30 degree to count as two fractured faces.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. The aggregate shall not contain more than 8%, by weight, of flat or
elongated pieces. A flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness
ENGINEERING DEPT.
greater than three; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to
width greater than three.
2.1.3 Fine Aggregate
OPERATING DEPT. A. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, durable, angular particles
produced by crushing stone or gravel that meets the requirements for wear
and soundness specified for coarse aggregate. The aggregate particles
shall be free from coatings of clay, silt, or other objectionable matter and
shall contain no clay balls. The fine aggregate, including any blended filler,
CERTIFIED shall have a plasticity index of not more than 6% when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 424, and a liquid limit of not more than 25% when tested in
BY: ___________________
accordance with ASTM D 423.
DATE: _________________
B. If necessary to obtain the gradation of aggregate blend or workability, natural
sand may be used, however beach sand shall not be used in all types of
roadwork’s. The amount of sand to be added shall be adjusted to produce
mixtures conforming to the requirements of this section. If it is necessary to
add natural sand, the percentage should, whenever possible, be kept below
15% (calculated by weight of the total mixture).
02560-2

FOR 70
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.1.4 Sampling and Testing
All aggregate samples required for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor.
ASTM D 75 shall be used in sampling coarse aggregate and fine aggregate, and
ASTM C 183 shall be used in sampling mineral filler. All these tests for initial
aggregate selection necessary to determine compliance with requirements specified
herein shall be made by the Contractor and will be observed and supervised by the
Engineer. No aggregate shall be used in the production of mixtures without prior
approval.
2.1.5 Sources of Aggregates
Sources of aggregates shall be selected well in advance of the time the materials are
required in the work. An inspection of the producer's operation will be made by the
Engineer. When new sources are to be developed, the Contractor shall indicate the
sources and shall submit a plan for operation 30 days in advance of starting
production. Approval of the source of aggregate does not relieve the Contractor in
any way of the responsibility for delivery at the job site of aggregates which meet the
REVISIONS
2.1.6 Samples of Aggregates
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Samples of aggregates shall be furnished and tested by the Contractor at the start of
production and at intervals during production of bituminous mixtures. The intervals
CHK’D BY: ____________
and points of sampling will be designated by the Engineer. The samples will be the
APPROVED
basis of approval of specific lots of aggregates from the standpoint of the quality
requirements of this section.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.2 FILLER
If filler, in addition to that naturally present in the aggregate, is necessary, it shall meet the
requirements of ASTM D 242.
OPERATING DEPT.
2.3 BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
2.3.1 The types, grades, and controlling specifications and maximum mixing temperatures
for the bituminous materials are given as follows:
CERTIFIED
Penetration grade: 40-50 60-70 85-100
BY: ___________________
Specification ASTM: D 946 D946 D946
o
Maximum mixing temperature C: 170 165 160
DATE: _________________
2.3.2 The Contractor shall furnish the vendor's certified test reports for each carload or
equivalent of bitumen shipped to the project. The report shall be delivered to the
Engineer before permission is granted for use of the material. The furnishing of the
vendor's certified test report for the bituminous material shall be the basis for final
acceptance.
2.3.3 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings bitumen for Surface course Construction
shall be 60/70 penetration graded bitumen and or any other suitable grade for the
climatic conditions of the project.
02560-3

FOR 71
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.4 COMPOSITION OF MIXTURE
The asphalt plant mix shall be composed of a mixture of aggregate, filler if required, and
bituminous material. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformly graded, and
combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of
the job mix formula.
2.5 JOB MIX FORMULA
2.5.1 No asphalt mixture for payment shall be produced until a job mix formula has been
approved by the Engineer. The formula shall be submitted in writing by the
Contractor to the Engineer at least 15 days prior to the start of paving operations and
shall indicate the definite percentage of each sieve fraction of aggregate, the
percentage of bitumen, and the temperature of the completed mixture when
discharged from the mixture. All test data used to develop the job mix formula shall
also be submitted. The job mix formula for each mixture shall be in effect until
modified in writing by the Engineer. Should a change in sources of materials be
made, a new job mix formula shall be established before the new material is used.
REVISIONS 2.5.2 The field laboratory to be used shall be capable of performing all the tests required
by this section, and the available equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant
DRAWN BY: ___________ sections of these contract documents.
DATE: _________________
2.5.3 The bituminous mixture shall be designed using procedures contained in Chapter 5,
CHK’D BY: ____________
Marshall Method of Mix Design, of the Asphalt Institute's Manual Series No. 2 (MS-
APPROVED
2), sixth edition, and shall meet the requirements of tables 1 and 2.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.5.4 The Contractor shall prepare a series of test specimens for a range of different
asphalt contents so that the test data show a well-defined curve. Tests should be
scheduled on the basis of 0.5% increments of asphalt content, with at least two
asphalt contents above optimum and at least two asphalt contents below optimum.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.5.5 To provide adequate data, triplicate test specimens shall be prepared for each
asphalt content to be used.
2.5.6 The mineral aggregate shall be of such a size that the percentage composition by
weight, as determined by laboratory screens, will conform to the gradation or
CERTIFIED gradations specified in table 3, when tested in accordance with ASTM Standard C
136 (dry sieve only). The percentage by weight for the bituminous material shall be
BY: ___________________
within the limits specified.
DATE: _________________
2.5.7 Table 1. Marshall Design Criteria
Test Value
Number of blows 75
Stability, minimum in newtons 8,000
Flow, in mm 2-4
Percent air voids 3-5
Percent voids in mineral aggregate See table 2
02560-4

FOR 72
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.5.8 Table 2: Minimum Percent voids in Mineral Aggregate
ASTM Max. Minimum Voids in

Sieve Particle Mineral Aggregate
Size mm Percent
1/2" 12.5 15
3/4" 19.0 14
1" 25.0 13
2.5.9 Table 3: Aggregate - Asphalt Concrete Surface Course
ASTM Sieve Percentage by weight passing sieves

Size 1" max. 3/4" max. 1/2" max.
1" 100 ----- -----

3/4" 84 - 100 100 -----
1/2" 74 - 88 82 - 96 100
3/8" 68 - 82 75 - 89 79 - 93
REVISIONS
No. 4 53 - 67 59 - 73 59 - 73
No. 8 40 - 54 46 - 60 46 - 60
DRAWN BY: ___________ No. 16 30 - 44 34 - 48 34 - 48
DATE: _________________ No. 30 20 - 34 24 - 38 24 - 38
CHK’D BY: ____________
No.50 13 - 25 15 - 27 15 - 27
No.100 9 - 17 8 - 18 8 - 18
APPROVED No. 200 3-6 3-6 3-6
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Asphalt Cement % 4.5 - 7.0 5.0 - 7.5 5.5 - 8.0
Bitumen content shall be calculated by weight of total mixture.
2.5.10 The gradations in table 3 represent the limits which shall determine the suitability of
aggregate for use from the sources of supply. The selection of any of the gradations
OPERATING DEPT.
shown in table 3 shall be such that the maximum size aggregate used shall not be
more than one-half of the thickness of the layer of the course being constructed. The
maximum aggregate size that shall be used in surface course is 3/4" unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
CERTIFIED
2.5.11 The aggregate, as finally selected, shall have a gradation within the limits designated
in table 3 and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the
BY: ___________________ adjacent sieve, or vice versa, but shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine.
DATE: _________________
2.5.12 The job mix tolerances shown in table 4 shall be applied to the job mix formula to
establish a job control grading band. However, the limits of the master grading band
as specified in table 3 will still apply if application of the job mix tolerances results in
a job control grading band outside the master grading band.
02560-5

FOR 73
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.5.13 Table 4: Job Mix Formula Tolerances (based on a single test)
Material Tolerance Plus or Minus

Aggregate passing No. 4 sieve or larger 7%
Aggregate passing Nos. 8, 16, 30 and
50 sieves 4%
Aggregate passing Nos. 100 & 200 sieves 2%
Bitumen 0.40%
Temperature of mix. 11 oC
2.5.14 The aggregate gradation may be adjusted within the limits of table 3 as directed,
without adjustments in the contract unit prices.
2.5.15 Should a change in source of materials be made, a new job mix formula shall be
established before the new material is used. Deviation from the final approved
design for bitumen content and gradation of aggregates shall not be greater than the
tolerances permitted and tests for bitumen content and aggregate gradation shall be
made at least twice daily. The mixture shall be tested for bitumen content in
accordance with ASTM D 2172 and for aggregate gradation in accordance with
REVISIONS
ASTM C 136.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.5.16 Tests on Marshall Specimens shall be made at least twice daily to retain job control.
DATE: _________________ The mixture shall comply with the requirements of table 1 & 2 when tested in
CHK’D BY: ____________
accordance with the Marshall method procedures contained in chapter 5 of the
Asphalt Institute's Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2) sixth edition. Failure to meet the
APPROVED design criteria will be cause for the Engineer to halt production until the problem is
ENGINEERING DEPT.
identified and corrected.
2.5.17 If the index of retained strength of the specimens of composite mixture, as

determined by ASTM D 1075, is less than 75, the aggregates shall be rejected or the
asphalt shall be treated with an approved anti-stripping agent. The amount of anti-
stripping agent added to the asphalt shall be sufficient to produce an index of
OPERATING DEPT. retained strength of not less than 75.
2.6 TEST SECTION
2.6.1 Prior to full production, the Contractor shall prepare a quantity of bituminous mixture
CERTIFIED
according to the job mix formula. The amount of mixture should be sufficient to
construct a test section at least 50m long and 7m wide placed in two sections and
BY: ___________________ shall be of the same depth specified for the construction of the course which it
DATE: _________________
represents. The underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section
is to be constructed shall be the same as the remainder of the course represented by
the test section. The equipment used in construction of the test section shall be the
same type and weight to be used on the remainder of the course represented by the
test section.
2.6.2 If the test section should prove to be unsatisfactory, the necessary adjustments to
the mix design, plant operation, and/or rolling procedures shall be made. Additional
test sections, as required, shall be constructed and evaluated for conformance to the
specifications. When test sections do not conform to specification requirements, the
pavement shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Full
production shall not begin without approval of the Engineer.
02560-6

FOR 74
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.6.3 In the event that a test section is incorporated in the final works, it should be placed
in an area where it will receive little or no traffic so that marginal quality trail runs can
be safely left in place.
2.7 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
2.7.1 The bituminous mixture shall not be placed upon a wet surface or when the surface
temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in table 5. The
temperature requirements may be waived, but only when so directed by the
Engineer.
2.7.2 Table 5: Base Temperature Limitations
Course Thickness Base Temperature

o
(minimum) C
75 mm or greater 4
greater than 25mm but less than 75mm 7
REVISIONS 25mm or less 10
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.8 BITUMINOUS MIXING PLANT

DATE: _________________
2.8.1 General
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Mixing plants shall be of sufficient capacity and have a sufficient hourly production
rate and are in accordance with the specifications as laid down in ASTM D 995.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size of aggregate and the
different sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to the cold
elevator. The plant yard and storage yard shall be neat and tidy.
2.8.2 Inspection of Plant

OPERATING DEPT.
The Engineer or his authorized representative shall have access, at all times, to all
parts of the mixing plant for checking adequacy of equipment, verifying weights,
proportions, and character of materials, and checking the temperatures maintained in
the preparation of the mixtures.
CERTIFIED
PART 3 EXECUTION
BY: ___________________
3.1 GENERAL
DATE: _________________
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the work
shall be approved by Engineer.
3.2 HAULING EQUIPMENT
Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds. To
prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the beds shall be lightly coated with a minimum
amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved material. Each truck shall have
suitable cover to protect the mixture from adverse weather, when necessary, so that the
mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature, truck beds shall be insulated
and covers shall be securely fastened.
02560-7

FOR 75
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3 BITUMINOUS PAVERS
3.3.1 Bituminous pavers shall be self-contained, power-propelled units with an activated

screed or strike-off assembly, heated if necessary, and shall be capable of spreading
and finishing courses of bituminous plant-mix material which will meet the specified
thickness, smoothness, and grade. Pavers used for shoulders and similar
construction shall be capable of spreading and finishing courses of bituminous plant-
mix material in widths shown on the drawings.
3.3.2 The paver shall have a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a uniform
spreading operation. The hopper shall be equipped with a distribution system to
place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed. The screed or strike-off assembly
shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture
without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.
3.3.3 The paver shall be capable of operating at forward speeds consistent with
satisfactory laying of the mixture.
REVISIONS 3.3.4 The paver shall be equipped with an automatic grade control system capable of
automatically maintaining the screed elevation as specified herein. The control
DRAWN BY: ___________ system shall be automatically actuated from either a reference line or surface
DATE: _________________
through a system of mechanical sensors or sensor-directed mechanisms or devices
which will maintain the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the
CHK’D BY: ____________
proper elevation to obtain the required surface.
APPROVED
3.3.5 The controls shall be capable of working in conjunction with any of the following
ENGINEERING DEPT.
attachments:
1) Ski-type device of not less than 9m in length or as directed by the Engineer.

2) Taut strangling (wire) set to grade.
3) Short ski or shoe.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.4 ROLLERS
Rollers may be of the vibratory, steel wheel, or pneumatic-tired type. They shall be in good
condition, capable of reversing without backlash, and operating at slow speeds to avoid
CERTIFIED displacement of the bituminous mixture. The number, type, and weight of rollers shall be
sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density without detrimentally affecting the
BY: ___________________
compacted material.
DATE: _________________
3.5 PREPARATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
The bituminous material shall be heated to the specified temperature in a manner which will
avoid local overheating and provide a continuous supply of the bituminous material to the
mixer at a uniform temperature. The temperature of the bituminous material delivered to the
mixture shall be sufficient to provide a suitable viscosity for adequate coating of the
aggregate particles, but shall not exceed the applicable maximum temperature set forth in
clause 2.3 and not be more than 4 oC above the temperature of the aggregate specified in
clause 3.6.
02560-8

FOR 76
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.6 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
The aggregate for the mixture shall be dried and heated to the temperature designated by
the job formula within the job tolerance specified. The maximum temperature and rate of
heating shall be such that no permanent damage occurs to the aggregates. Particular care
shall be taken that aggregates high in calcium or magnesium content are not damaged by
overheating. The temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating
and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory
workability.
3.7 PREPARATION OF BITUMINOUS MIXTURE
3.7.1 The aggregates and the bituminous material shall be measured or gauged and
introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the job mix formula.
3.7.2 The combined materials shall be mixed until a complete and uniform coating of the
particles and a thorough distribution of the bituminous material throughout the
aggregate are secured. Wet mixing time shall be approved by the Engineer for each
REVISIONS plant and for each type of aggregate used. Normally, the mixing time after
introduction of bituminous material should not be less than 30 seconds. For
DRAWN BY: ___________ continuous plants, the minimum mixing time shall be determined by dividing the
DATE: _________________
weight of its contents at operating level by the weight of the mixture delivered per
second by the mixer.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED Mixing time = Pugmill dead capacity in kg

ENGINEERING DEPT. (in seconds) Pugmill output in kg per second
3.8 TRANSPORTING, SPREADING, AND FINISHING
3.8.1 The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in vehicles
OPERATING DEPT.
conforming to the requirements of section 2520. Deliveries shall be scheduled so
that spreading and rolling of all mixture prepared for one day's run can be completed
during daylight, unless adequate artificial lighting is provided. Hauling over freshly
placed material shall not be permitted until the material has been compacted, as
specified, and allowed to cool to atmospheric temperature.
CERTIFIED
3.8.2 Immediately before placing the bituminous mixture, the underlying course shall be
cleared of all loose or deleterious material with power blowers, power brooms, or
BY: ___________________
hand brooms as directed.
DATE: _________________
3.8.3 Penetration bitumen application temperature range shall be so that appropriate

viscosity range for each application is achieved. If however the viscosity curve are
not available the values given in table 6 shall be generally consider as a guidance
moisture content of the mix shall not exceed 1%.
Table 6
BITUMEN GRADE
40/50 60/70 85/100
Application Temperature oC 150-170 145-165 140-160
02560-9

FOR 77
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.8.4 Upon arrival, the mixture shall be spread to the full width by an approved bituminous
paver. It shall be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is
completed, it shall have the required thickness and shall conform to the grade and
contour indicated. The speed of the paver shall be regulated to eliminate pulling and
tearing of the bituminous mat. Unless otherwise directed, placing shall begin along
the centerline of areas to be paved on a crowned section or on the high side of areas
with a one-way slope. The mixture shall be placed in consecutive adjacent strips
having a minimum width of 3 m, except where edge lanes require strips less than 3m
to complete the area. The longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer
immediately below by a least 30 cm.
3.8.5 Transverse joints in one layer shall be offset by at least 60 cm from transverse joints
in the previous layer. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum
of 3m.
3.8.6 One areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical
spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread, raked,
and luted by hand tools.
REVISIONS
3.9 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.9.1 After spreading, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted with power
rollers. Rolling of the mixture shall begin as soon after spreading as it will bear the
CHK’D BY: ____________
roller without undue displacement or hair checking. Rolling shall be initiated with the
APPROVED
drive wheel towards the paving machine. The sequence of rolling the first paving
lane should be to first roll the lower edge (with reference to the transverse slope) of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
the lane and then to roll the upper edge. The interior of the lane should then be
rolled from the lower side towards the upper edge with overlapping roller paths. On
adjoining paving lanes rolling shall begin by overlapping the joint (with the previous
lane) by 150 to 200mm and then rolling the outside edge of the new lane. The
interior should be with overlapping wheel paths. Alternate paths of the roller shall be
OPERATING DEPT. of slightly different lengths.
3.9.2 The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of
the hot mixture. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of
the roller or from any other cause shall be corrected at once by raking and applying
CERTIFIED fresh mixture.
BY: ___________________
3.9.3 Sufficient rollers shall be furnished to handle the output of the plant. Rolling shall
continue until all roller marks are eliminated, the surface is of uniform texture and
DATE: _________________
true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is obtained.
3.9.4 To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller the wheels shall be kept properly
moistened, but excessive water will not be permitted.
3.9.5 In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with
hot hand tampers.
3.9.6 Any mixture which becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or in any way
defective, shall be removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately
compacted to conform to the surrounding area. Skin patching and handworking shall
not be allowed.
02560-10

FOR 78
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.10 JOINTS
3.1.1 The formation of all joints shall be made in such a manner as to ensure a continuous
bond between old and new sections of the course. All joints shall present the same
texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course.
3.1.2 The roller shall not pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture except
when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary to form a transverse
joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead or by tapering the course, in
which case the edge shall be cut back to its full depth and width on a straight line to
expose a vertical face. In both methods all contact surfaces shall be given a tack
coat of bituminous material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
3.1.3 Cold longitudinal joints shall be cut back over their full length to expose a clean,
sound surface for the full depth of the course. All contact surfaces shall be given a
tack coat of bituminous material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
3.11 SHAPING EDGES

REVISIONS
While the surface is being compacted and finished, the Contractor shall carefully trim the
DRAWN BY: ___________ outside edges of the pavement to the proper alignment. Edges so formed shall be bevelled
DATE: _________________
while still hot with the back of a rake or a smoothing iron and thoroughly compacted by
tampers or by other satisfactory methods.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.12 ROUTINE TESTS ON MIXTURE

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.12.1 Approximately every 2 (two) hours during mixing periods an aggregate sample shall
be taken from each hot bin and its grading determined, together with that of the
combined grading. This combined grading shall be checked for compliance with the
grading of the approved job control grading band as specified and as directed by
Engineer.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.12.2 Additional samples of the mixed materials shall also be taken at the point of mixing at
least every four hours and not less than twice daily for making Marshall specimens
and their stability, flow, unit weight, and voids shall be determined. Aggregate
grading analysis and bitumen content determinations shall be carried out on material
CERTIFIED taken from the same samples.
BY: ___________________
3.12.2 The result of each analysis shall be submitted to the Engineer within four hours of
sampling and any adjustments shown to be required shall be made, with his
DATE: _________________
agreement, immediately. Until the adjustments have been made and a certificate to
this effect has been received by the Engineer, no further deliveries of mixed
materials shall be made from the mixing plant in question.
3.13 JOB MIX DENSITY
3.13.1 The density of compacted bituminous courses of all mixtures designed in accordance
with the Marshall Method shall be related to the "Job Mix Density". The "Job Mix
Density" shall be obtained by making from samples of the approved "Job Mix ", six
standard Marshall specimens, determining the bulk specific gravity of each and
comparing them with the mean value of the six.
02560-11

FOR 79
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.13.2 An individual result which differs from the mean by more than 1.5% shall be rejected
and provided not more than two results are so rejected the mean of the remaining
results shall become the "Job Mix Density".
3.14 FIELD DENSITY TESTS
3.14.1 Asphalt concrete will be accepted for density on a lot basis. A lot consists of 2,000
2
m for each layer and will be divided into four equal sub lots. One test shall be made
for each sub lot.
3.14.2 Each lot of compacted pavement will be accepted, with respect to density, when the
average field density is equal to or greater than 98% of the average density of the
laboratory-prepared specimens, and when no individual determination deviates more
than 1.8% from the average field density.
3.14.3 Four field density determinations shall be made for each lot. Cores taken from the
pavement shall be used to test the field density. The density of the cored samples
shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 2726 or D 1188, whichever is
REVISIONS applicable.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.14.4 The location of sampling sites within a lot's laying area shall be chosen on a random
DATE: _________________
basis. Cores shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of section 13.09.25.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.14.5 Asphalt concrete which does not meet the density requirements shall be cut out and
APPROVED
replaced or be subject to reduced payment.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.14.6 The cores shall also be used to determine the course thickness.
3.14.7 In lieu of the core method of density determination, acceptance testing may be
accomplished with a nuclear device in accordance with ASTM D 2950, subject to
approval of the Engineer.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.15 SURFACE FINISH TESTS
3.15.1 Tests for conformity with the specified level and grade shall be made by the
Contractor immediately after initial compaction. Any variation shall be corrected by
CERTIFIED the removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling.
BY: ___________________
3.15.2 The surface shall not vary more than 3mm for the surface course when tested with a
3m straightedge applied parallel with the centerline or 4mm at right angles to the
DATE: _________________
centerline. Except that 3% of the regular measurements may exceed this tolerance
by another 2mm.
3.15.3 After the completion of final rolling, the smoothness of the course shall again be
tested. Humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerances shall be
immediately corrected by removing the defective work and replacing with new
material, as directed by the Engineer. This shall be done at the Contractor's
expense. Skin patching will not be permitted.
02560-12

FOR 80
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.16 TOLERANCES IN COURSE THICKNESS
3.16.1 The course used for the field density tests shall also be used to determine the course
thickness. Additional cores may be required in case of deficiencies in thickness
exceeding the tolerances. The asphalt concrete surface course will be accepted for
thickness on the same lot basis.
3.16.2 Each lot of pavement will be accepted, with respect to thickness, when the average
total thickness of the asphalt concrete surface course is within a tolerance of 5mm
plus or minus the specified thickness.
3.17 SAMPLING PAVEMENT
Samples for determination of thickness and density of completed pavements shall be

obtained by the Contractor at no extra cost. The size, number, and locations of the samples
will be as directed by the Engineer. Samples shall be neatly cut with a core drill. The
Contractor shall furnish all tools, labor, and materials for cutting samples and replacing
pavement. The Contractor shall replace the pavement where samples are removed free of
charge.
REVISIONS
3.18 TESTING AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
The following testing and material requirements form part of this specification:
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Testing Requirements
APPROVED
ASTM C 29 Unit weight of aggregate
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM C 88 Soundness of aggregates by use of sodium sulphate or
magnesium sulphate
ASTM C 117 Materials finer than No. 200 sieve by washing
ASTM C 127 Specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate
ASTM C 128 Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate
OPERATING DEPT. ASTM C 131 Resistance to abrasion of small size coarse aggregates by
use of the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C 136 Sieve or screen analysis of fine and course aggregates
ASTM C 183 Sampling hydraulic cement
ASTM D 75 Sampling Aggregates
CERTIFIED ASTM D 423 Liquid limit of soils
ASTM D 424 Plastic limit and plasticity index of soils
BY: ___________________
ASTM D 1075 Effect of water on cohesion of compacted bituminous
mixtures
DATE: _________________
ASTM D 1188 Bulk specific gravity of compacted bituminous mixtures
using paraffin-coated specimens
ASTM D 1559 Resistance to plastic flow of bituminous mixtures using
Marshall apparatus
ASTM D 2172 Quantitative extraction of bitumen from bituminous paving
mixtures
ASTM D 2726 Bulk specific gravity of compacted bituminous mixtures
using saturated surface-dry specimens
AASHTO T 30 Mechanical analysis of extracted aggregate
The asphalt Mix design methods for asphlat concrete Institute's Manual No. 2 (MS-2)
02560-13

FOR 81
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Material Requirements
ASTM D 242 Mineral filler for bituminous paving mixtures

ASTM D 946 Asphalt cement for use in pavement construction
ASTM D 3381 Viscosity-graded asphlat cement for use in payment
construction.
C. Plant Requirements
ASTM D 995 Requirements for mixing plants
- END OF SECTION -
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02560-14

FOR 82
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02580 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Work includes, but is not limited to application of white or yellow paint for all
pavement markings which include road lane and edge lines, arrows, and parking
stalls.
A. Section 01039 Coordination and Meetings
B. Section 01340 Submittals, Substitutions & Guarantees

REVISIONS
C. Section 01400 Quality Control
DRAWN BY: ___________
D. Section 02513 Base Course and Asphaltic Concrete Paving
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ 1.3 REFERENCES

APPROVED
A. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (by Ministry of Communications).
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of section 01340.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Product Data: Provide data on materials properties.
C. Manufacturer’s Application Instructions.
D. Project Record Documents under provisions of Section 01700.

CERTIFIED

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ A. Perform works in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Highways
Standards.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years minimum experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with

minimum five (5) years documented experience.
02580-1

FOR 83
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the
temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Drying time – 3 minutes at 3 degrees C.
C. Softening point measured by the ring and ball method shall be between 93 and 105
degrees.
D. Aggregate settlement shall be none.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
REVISIONS A. The material shall consist of a light-colored aggregate, pigment and extender bound together
with a thermoplastic resin.
DRAWN BY: ___________
B. Colors: White and yellow paint as shown on drawings.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

C. Specific gravity 1.94 – 2.15.
APPROVED
D. Flash point greater than 240.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.2 GLASS BEADS
A. Total of 20% of glass beads to add to the thermoplastic paint. 10% shall be premixed
and the other 10% to be applied by pressure during the spraying. Glass beads shall
OPERATING DEPT.
have a minimum 1.5 refractive index, be spherical in shape and 100% passing No.
12 sieve.
B. Not less than 90% of glass beads shall be spherical.

CERTIFIED
C. Lead free, colorless, not wet or gathered glass beads.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. The pavement surface shall be dry and free from loose sand and mud or other
extraneous matter.
B. Application shall be by a self-propelled mobile sprayer, or template. The paint

material shall be sprayed at a rate of 1 liter of paint per 5 sq. m. of area. The
pressurized residual quantity of glass beads shall not be less than 450 grams per sq.
m.
02580-2

FOR 84
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Thermoplastic material shall be used at temperature between 200 - 220 deg. C.
D. Painting shall not be done during foggy weather or in the presence of blowing sand.
E. Painting shall be of thickness not less than 1.5 mm excluding glass beads.
F. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
3.02 FINISH
A. The finished lines shall be free from raggedness on sides and ends and be in true
plane with the general alignment of the street. The upper surface of the lines shall
be level, uniform and free from steaks and cracks.
3.03 SCHEDULE-EXTERIOR SURFACES
A. Asphalt Concrete Paving (Section 02513).

REVISIONS
1. Road striping, intersection markings and other pavement markings to be in
DRAWN BY: ___________ accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Device by M.O.C.
DATE: _________________
Locations as shown in the Contract drawings. Striping shall be yellow or
white as required.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2. Parking Stalls: White striping, size and orientation as shown in the Contract
drawings.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing shall be in accordance with SAES-H-100.

OPERATING DEPT.
- END OF SECTION -
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02580-3

FOR 85
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02667 - SITE WATER LINES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines.
B. Valves and fittings, and all required accessories for satisfactory completion and
acceptance of WORK as per drawings.
C. Valve Box

REVISIONS B. Section 02221 - Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
C. Section 02675 - Disinfection of Water Distribution System
DRAWN BY: ___________ D. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
DATE: _________________
E. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping
CHK’D BY: ____________
1.03 REFERENCES
APPROVED
A. ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
C. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,

Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
OPERATING DEPT.
D. ASTM A126 Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings
E. ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron

CERTIFIED
F. ASTM B62 Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
BY: ___________________
G. ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
DATE: _________________ Using Modified Effort
H. ASTM D1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80
I. ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
J. ASTM D2855 Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
and Fittings
K. ASTM D4253 Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of
Soils Using a Vibratory Table
02667-01

FOR 86
494
‫لمشعقي‬
L. ASTM D4254 Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of
Soils and Calculation of Relative Density
M. SAES-A-004 Pressure Testing
N. SAES-A-007 Hydrostatic Testing Fluids and Lay-up Procedure
O. SAES-S-070 Installation of Utility Piping Systems
P. SASO 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic
Q. SASO 15 Methods of Testing of Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic
R. SES-H-001.01 Paint Color Codes and Standards
S. SES-W-1 General Welding Criteria

REVISIONS
T. 01-SMSS-01 General Requirements for All Equipment/Materials
DRAWN BY: ___________ (Rev. 3)
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

U. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
APPROVED 1.04 SUBMITTALS

ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Submit under provision of Section 01300.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.

OPERATING DEPT.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of piping, mains, valves and connections.

CERTIFIED B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of
uncharted utilities.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
A. Perform WORK in accordance with applicable standards and codes.

B. Valves: Manufacturer’s name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.
B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

02667–02

FOR 87
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit operation, maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER PIPING
A. Underground and Concealed Piping
1 Plastic Pipe: PVC, ASTM D1785, schedule 80 or SAS 14/1396H, class 5.

2. Fittings: PVC, schedule 80, socket type.
3. Jointing: Shall be plain socket solvent weld with solvent cement conforming to
ASTM D2564.
B. Aboveground or Exposed Piping

REVISIONS
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless or welded, galvanized, schedule 40, threaded
DRAWN BY: ___________
connection.
DATE: _________________ 2. Fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A197, galvanized to ASTM A123, class 1034 kPa,
CHK’D BY: ____________ taper thread.
APPROVED 3. Joints: Threaded.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.02 WATER SPECIALTIES
A. Gate Valve:
1. 50mm and Smaller: Female threaded, corrosion resistant, Buna-N-O rings, molded,
OPERATING DEPT.
one-piece bonnet, PVC, NSF listed, 7.50 bars cold water, non-shock rating.
2. Larger than 50 mm: Flanged, ANSI B16.1, cast iron body & disc ASTM A126, Gr. B,
ASTM B62 bronze stem & trim, non-rising stem, 1034 kPa, water, non-shock.
CERTIFIED
B. Check Valve
BY: ___________________ 1. 50 mm and Smaller: PVC, threaded, Type 1, Grade 1, with viton-O ring and flat
DATE: _________________ seals, 7.50 bars cold water, non-shock rating.
2. Larger than 50 mm: Flanged, ANSI B16.1, regular pattern cast iron body and cover,
ASTM A126 Class B, bronze trim ASTM B62 or better, bolted cover, 1034 kPa cold
water, non-shock rating.
C. Union and Coupling
1. 50mm and under: Solvent weld PVC union or brass/PVC adaptor union with flat
gasket. PVC coupling and/or PVC coupling with brass insert, inside thread.
02667-03

FOR 88
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Union (Steel Piping): Class 1034 kPa, malleable iron, ASTM A197, screwed ends.
D. Valve Box (Telescopic): Two-piece cast iron sliding type with cover for buried water
valves. Cover shall be cast iron with the word “WATER” lettering.
2.03 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC/PIPE MARKERS
Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape; minimum 150 mm wide by 0.10
mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service and installed 150 mm below finish grade
above pipeline.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WATER SCHEME
Water systems to be installed shall be the scheme approved by the COMPANY, as

shown on the drawings.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
REVISIONS
All materials and equipment shall be installed using methods that are in strict accordance
DRAWN BY: ___________ with manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations, local and federal codes.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

3.03 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end of ferrous pipe.
APPROVED
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
ENGINEERING DEPT. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. All plastic parts will be threaded male connections for plastic to metal joints.
3.04 BEDDING
OPERATING DEPT. A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 02221 for WORK of this section. Hand
trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
B. Place 150mm sand bedding materials in trenches and around utility lines and shall be
compacted to 75% relative density as per ASTM D4253 and D4254 as required per SEC
CERTIFIED standards SCS-Q-002, Section 10.1.1.
BY: ___________________
C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction
density.
DATE: _________________
3.05 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with Uniform Plumbing
Code.
B. Group piping with other site piping WORK whenever practical.
C. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 20 mm.
D. Route pipe in straight line.
E. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
02667-04

FOR 89
494
‫لمشعقي‬
F. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 02675.
G. Slope water pipe and position drain at low points.
H. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 0.90 m of cover.
I. Install underground pipe markers continuous over top of pipe and buried 150 mm below finish
grade above pipeline.
J. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02221.
K. Transition from PVC pipe to steel pipe shall be made in horizontal branch at depth of burial. A
plastic to metal adapter coupling or flange shall be used for transition.
L. Install union or ranges for piping connected to equipment.
3.06 INSTALLATION - VALVES
REVISIONS A. Install buried shut off valves in valve box.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Set valves on solid bearing.

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

C. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.
APPROVED
3.07 INSTALLATION –WATER EQUIPMENT
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
3.08 DISENFECTION OF RAW AND POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM
Refer to Section 02675 for Disinfection of Water Piping System.

OPERATING DEPT.
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 15410.
CERTIFIED
B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557.
BY: ___________________ C. If tests indicate WORK does not meet specified requirements, remove WORK, replace
DATE: _________________ and retest at no cost to COMPANY.
02667-05

FOR 90
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02675 - DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Disinfection of cold water distribution.
B. Testing and reporting results.
A. Section 02667 - Site Water Lines

B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping
REVISIONS
1.03 REFERENCES
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ A. ACS-S-11 Saudi Aramco Construction Specifications - Contamination

CHK’D BY: ____________
Prevention Disinfection of Water System
APPROVED B. ANSI/AWWA B301 Standards for Liquid Chlorine

ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. ANSI/AWWA C651 Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.

OPERATING DEPT.
B. Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified
requirements.

CERTIFIED
A. Disinfection report, record:

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
1. Type and form of disinfectant used.
2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion.
3. Test locations.
4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet
tested.
5. Date and time of flushing start and completion.
02675-01

FOR 91
494
‫لمشعقي‬
6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.
B. Bacteriological report, record:
1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number.
2. Date and time of water sample collection.
3. Name of person collecting samples.
4. Test locations.
5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested.
6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested.
7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform to bacterial standards.
8. Bacteriologist's signature and authority.
Perform WORK in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651 and ACS-S-11.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
REVISIONS
A. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting cold water specified in this section
DRAWN BY: ___________ with one (1) year documented experience.
DATE: _________________
B. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing and examining cold water systems.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing the WORK of this section.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water
system.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS
CERTIFIED Chemicals: ANSI/AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine.
BY: ___________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
DATE: _________________
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected and pressure tested.
B. Perform scheduling and disinfection activity with start-up, testing, adjusting and balancing,
demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems.
02675-02

FOR 92
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 EXECUTION
A. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the WORK of this section.
B. Introduce treatment into piping system.
C. Upon completion of WORK, prior to endorsement, system shall be cleaned and sterilized.
D. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali caustic soda or soda
ash.
E. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
F. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
G. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

REVISIONS
H. Where final disinfectant residual test is more than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
I. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
CHK’D BY: ____________
J. Post warning signs until sterilization is complete.
APPROVED
K. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water
ENGINEERING DEPT.
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C301.
L. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection.
3.03 QUALITY CONTROL

OPERATING DEPT.
A. Provide analysis and testing of treated water under provisions of section 01400.
B. Test samples in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02675-03

FOR 93
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02732 - SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Pipe, fittings and accessories for sanitary sewerage and drainage piping including
sanitary sewer lines, condensate drain lines and storm drain lines.
B. Connection of building sanitary sewer system via sewer manhole to sewage holding
tank.
C. Cleanouts.
REVISIONS 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Section 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

B. Section 02222 Structural Excavations and Backfill.
APPROVED 1.03 REFERENCES

ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. ASTM D1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80
B. ASTM D2855 Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings
OPERATING DEPT.
C. ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for PVC Plastic Piping Systems
D. ASTM D4253 Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of
Soils Using a Vibratory Table
CERTIFIED
E. ASTM D4254 Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of
Soils and Calculation of Relative Density
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
F. SASO 14/15 Saudi Arabian Standard: Unplasticized PVC Pipe
G. ACS-S-6 Underground Installation of PVC and ABS Pipe
H. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
I. SASO 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic
J. SASO 15 Method of Testing of Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized

Plastic
02732-01

FOR 94
494
‫لمشعقي‬
K. SCS-Q-002 COMPANY Construction Specifications for Earthwork
1.04 DEFINITIONS
Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill
operations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provision of Section 01300.
B. Product Data:
Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings and valves.
Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, manholes, sewage holding tank,
REVISIONS and invert elevations.
DRAWN BY: ___________

DATE: _________________
Conform to applicable codes for materials and installation of the WORK contained on
CHK’D BY: ____________ this section.
APPROVED
1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated.
1.09 COORDINATION
OPERATING DEPT. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building,
connection to site sewer manholes and trenching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CERTIFIED
2.01 SEWER AND DRAINAGE PIPING MATERIALS
BY: ___________________
A. Sewer, Condensate Drain & Storm Drain Piping:
DATE: _________________ 1. Plastic Pipe: PVC, ASTM D1785, schedule 40 or SAS 14/1396H, class 4.
2. Fittings: PVC, schedule 40, socket type
3. Jointing: Shall be plain socket solvent weld with solvent cement conforming to
ASTM D2564.
2.02 SEWER AND DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES
A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering imprinted
with “Sewer Service” in large letters.
02732-02

FOR 95
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Sewer Manhole and Cover: Reinforced concrete as shown on the standard drawing no. SE-
1191926 with standard cast iron cover and frame.
C. Sewage Holding Tank: Construction detail shall be as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine all the materials and equipment to be free from defects prior to installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
3.03 BEDDING
A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 02221 for WORK of this Section. Hand
REVISIONS trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Place 150mm sand bedding materials in trenches and shall be compacted to 75%
DATE: _________________
relative density as per ASTM D4253 and D4254 as required per SEC standard SCS-Q-
002, Section 10.1.1.
CHK’D BY: ____________
C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction

APPROVED density.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.04 INSTALLATION – PIPE
A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings, with maximum variation from true slope
OPERATING DEPT.
of 3 mm in 3 meters.
C. Connect building sanitary sewer outlet to sewer manhole. Discharge it to sewage

holding tank.
CERTIFIED
D. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe. Buried 150 mm below finished grade
above pipe line.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ E. Place 150mm sand bedding materials at sides and over top of pipe in trenches and shall
be compacted to 75% relative density as per ASTM D4253 and D4254 as required per
SEC standard SCS-Q-002, Section 10.1.1.
F. Refer to Section 02221 for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe
when compacting.
G. Sewer line buried less than 900 mm deep passing through asphalt road shall be
provided with sleeve two (2) sizes larger than pipe.
02732-03

FOR 96
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provision of Section 15410, Part 3,
Item 3.04.
B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D4253 and D4254 as
required per SEC standard SCS-Q-002, Section 10.1.1.
D. If tests indicate WORK does not meet specified requirements, remove WORK, replace
and retest at no cost to COMPANY.
E. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with ACS-S-6.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.

REVISIONS
B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement while backfilling
DRAWN BY: ___________ operation is in progress.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02732-04

FOR 97
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
SECTION 02790 – ATHLETIC AND RECREATIONAL SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Furnishing of materials, tools, equipment and labor required to complete the application of
acrylic wearing surface coating (combination of texture and finish coats) system for basketball
and tennis/volleyball courts; and cushion surfacing for running track as shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
A. Section 02560 – Asphalt Concrete Paving

B. Section 02831 – Chainlink Fence and Gate

REVISIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Do not apply surfacing materials when rain is imminent and during wet or high
humidity conditions.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2. Do not apply surfacing materials when surface temperature is less than 50ºF and
more than 120ºF.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. Apply only when ambient temperature is greater than 50ºF.
B. Substrate Conditions
OPERATING DEPT. 1. Allow asphalt concrete surface to cure for minimum of 14 days prior to
application surfacing materials.
2. Allow asphalt emulsion filler to dry thoroughly prior to application of surfacing

materials.
CERTIFIED
3. Asphalt concrete surface shall obtain maximum leveling, slope, tight density prior
BY: ___________________
to application of surfacing materials.
DATE: _________________
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to the WORK SITE in original, new and sealed containers bearing
manufacturer’s name and label.
B. Do not store materials exposed to the weather elements. Store materials in well ventilated
sheds.
C. Keep materials container tightly closed when not in use.
02790 - 01

FOR 98
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS
A. Plexipave and Plexicushion Surfacing System by California Products Corporation
B. Latexite by STS
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Acrylic surface coating for basketball and tennis/volleyball courts shall consist of the following:
1. Court Patch Binder: Shall be high strength acrylic latex bonding liquid designed for mixing
with silica sand and Portland cement for patching new asphalt surface of depressions and
irregularities.
REVISIONS
2. Acrylic Resurfacer: Shall be asbestos free acrylic latex binder for mixing with silica sand to
DRAWN BY: ___________ obtain a fast drying filler coat to reduce asphalt surface porosity.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

3. Acrylic Filler Coat: Shall be mineral filled asphalt emulsion designed for use as filler coat
on asphalt surfaces.
APPROVED
4. Acrylic Finish Coat: Shall be asbestos free acrylic pigmented emulsion coating.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
5. Line Paint: Shall be 100% acrylic emulsion.
C. Latex surface coating for running track shall comprise of Styrene-Butadiene Rubber (SBR)
and EPDM granules, compressed plastic particles and mineral fillers. Recommended
OPERATING DEPT. product: Plexicushion by California Products Corporation or approved equal.
D. Synthetic grass systems for football filed include a drainage layer, a multi-layered backing
system (Rubber infill, sand, elastic layer, sube base), and resilient "grass" blades that are
infilled with a granular filler to resemble natural turf. "Infilled" means that the man-made grass
CERTIFIED blades are interspersed with a top soil created with sand and natural EPDM green color
without smell to provide the necessary stability, uniformity, and resiliency. Each blade
BY: ___________________ customarily stands above the infill material. The typical blade length and system
DATE: _________________
characteristics are determined by the specific activity requirements.
PAR 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTRATE (ASPHALT SURFACE) PREPARATION
A. Prior to application of coating materials, net post sleeves, center strap anchors and fencing
shall be installed.
B. Prior to application of coating materials, the entire surface shall be inspected and accepted for
abnormal depressions and irregularities. Entire surface shall be flood tested and any
depressions and irregularities found shall be filled with court patch binder.
02790 - 02

FOR 99
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Surface to receive finish coat shall be applied with acrylic filler coat to provide a dense and
smooth surface.
3.02 SURFACE COURSE PREPARATION
A. Prior to application of acrylic color courses, the surface shall be applied with acrylic resurfacer
in order to attain a level and dense surface.
B. Application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and

recommendations.
3.03. LATEX AND ACRYLIC FILLER AND FINISH (COLOR) COATING SYSTEM
A. Prior to application of finish coating system, a final and careful inspection of the entire surface
shall be conducted and remove any ridges, loose and foreign particles.
B. Acrylic filler and finish coats shall be applied in strict compliance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and specifications.
REVISIONS C. Playing lines shall be applied after the finish coat has set for minimum of four (4) hours. It shall
be accurately located, marked and painted in accordance with the manufacturer’s
DRAWN BY: ___________ recommendation and specification and dimensions shown on the drawings.
DATE: _________________
3.04 COMPLETION
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Upon completion, CONTRACTOR shall remove all debris, surplus materials, containers and
thoroughly clean and leave the SITE in orderly condition acceptable to COMPANY
ENGINEERING DEPT.
REPRESENTATIVE.

OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02790 - 03

FOR 100
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 02811 - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Pipe, fittings, valves and accessories.
B. Section 02221 - Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
REVISIONS C. Section 02667 - Site Water Lines
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.03 REFERENCES

DATE: _________________
A. ACS-S-6 Underground Installation of PVC and ABS Pipe
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
B. ASTM D1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes, Schedule 80
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. ASTM D2564 Solvent Cement for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC),
Plastic Pipe and Fittings
D. ASTM D2855 Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride, Pipes
OPERATING DEPT. E. SASO 14/15 Saudi Arabian Standard: Unplasticized PVC Pipe
1.04 SUBMITTALS
CERTIFIED Shop Drawings: Indicate piping layout to water source.

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ Record actual locations of all piping system and quick coupler valves.

Conform to Uniform Plumbing Code for piping and component requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 80 or UPVC SAS 14/15, Class 5.
02811-01

FOR 101
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Fittings: Same material as pipe formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee,
bends, elbows and other configuration required.
C. Joints: Solvent weld per ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.
2.02 IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES
A. Quick-Coupling Valves
1. The quick-coupling valves shall provide plug-in type underground water outlets for
the temporary connection of hoses.
2. The quick-coupling valves shall have a 25mm (1 inch) female pipe thread
connections. The valve keys shall have a 25mm (1 inch) male pipe thread
connections. The swivel hose ell shall have 25mm (1 inch) female pipe threads with
20mm (3/4 inch) hose connection on the swivel.
REVISIONS B. Quick-Coupler Valve Boxes:
DRAWN BY: ___________

1. All quick-coupler valves shall be installed in 250mm circular thermo-plastic valve
access boxes. Access boxes shall be equipped with approved thermo-plastic locking
DATE: _________________
covers.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. All valve access boxes shall be installed on a suitable base of gravel for proper
APPROVED
foundation of box and easy leveling of box to proper grade and also to provide
ENGINEERING DEPT. proper drainage of the access box.
3. All valve access boxes shall be provided with proper length and size extensions,
whenever required, to bring the valve boxes level with the finish grade.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
CERTIFIED A. Trench and backfill in accordance with Section 02221: Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and
Compacting.
BY: ___________________
B. Trench to accommodate grade changes.
DATE: _________________
C. Maintain trenches free of debris, material or obstructions that may damage pipe.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation and hydrostatic testing shall be in accordance with Saudi Aramco Construction
Specification, ACS-S-6.
B. Install pipes & valves in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Set valve box covers at finished grade elevations.

FOR 102
494
‫لمشعقي‬
02811-02
A. Prior to backfilling, the system shall be tested for leakage in accordance with Aramco
Construction Specification, ACS-S-6.
B. System is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure occurs during test period.
3.04 BACKFILLING
Backfilling trench and compact to sub grade elevation as specified in Section 02221:
Excavating, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. Protect piping from displacement.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
02811-03

FOR 103
494
‫لمشعقي‬
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________

FOR 104
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
SECTION 02831 - CHAINLINK FENCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing of materials, labor, tools and equipment required to complete installation and
relocation of chainlink fence as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTION

REVISIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (For Post Footing).
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.01 Comply with the provisions of the following Standards, except as otherwise shown or
specified:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. SCS-M-001 General Purpose and Perimeter Fencing Standard.
B. 71-SMSS-1 Materials Specifications for Fence, Chain Link (Galvanized)
OPERATING DEPT. C. SCS-M-001 General Purpose Fence
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CERTIFIED 3.01 Construction details and fencing layout shall conform to the following COMPANY
Standard Drawings:
BY: ___________________
A. SB-036131 Fencing Details, Type IV
DATE: _________________
B. SB-036132 Post and Fabric Details, Type IV
C. SC-036134 Fence Footing Details, Type IV
D. SE-036135 Lists of Materials for Standard Fence, Type IV
02831-01

FOR 105
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03005 REINFORCED CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions of
Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section covers the specifications for cast-in-situ structural concrete and reinforced
concrete work required by the Contract including formwork, concrete materials,
reinforcement, mix design, placement procedures and finishes.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

Concrete works shall be performed in strict accordance with the Specifications, Drawings and
the stipulations of the latest editions of American Concrete Institute Specifications (ACI), the
British Standard Specifications (BS), the specifications of the American Society for Testing
REVISIONS
and Materials (ASTM) and the designations of the American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) as referenced to throughout the section.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Codes and Standards:

CHK’D BY: ____________
Relevant COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Engineering Standards and Codes
APPROVED Relevant COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Construction Specifications
ENGINEERING DEPT.
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATION BS NO.
812 Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates, Sands and Fillers

3148 Tests for Water for Making Concrete
4466 Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Bars for the Reinforcement
OPERATING DEPT. 5075 Concrete Admixtures
5328 Specifying Concrete, Including Ready-Mixed Concrete
8110 Structural Use of Concrete
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS ASTM NO.
CERTIFIED
C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
BY: ___________________ C 40 Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete.
DATE: _________________ C 42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
C 78 Flexural Strength of Concrete.
C 131 Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by use of the Los
Angeles Machine.
C 136 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate.
C 138 Unit Weight, Yield, and air content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
C 174 Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores.
C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
C 33 Concrete Aggregates.
C 87 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar.
C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
03005-1

FOR 106
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C 127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.

C 128 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate.
C 150 Portland Cement.
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
C 172 Sampling Fresh Concrete.
C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
C 260 Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
C 618 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for use in Portland Cement
Concrete.
C 1059 Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete
D 98 Calcium Chloride
D 1751 Performed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement.
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete reinforcement.
A 616 Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
A 617 Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
REVISIONS ACI (American Concrete Institute)
ACI 211 Recommended Practice for Selecting proportions for Normal and Heavy-
DRAWN BY: ___________ Weight Concrete.
DATE: _________________
ACI 214 Quality Control Charts
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
CHK’D BY: ____________
ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixingg, Transporting, and Placing
APPROVED
Concrete.
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ACI 308 Recommended Practice for Curing of Concrete.
ACI 309 Recommended Practice for consolidation of Concrete.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
ACI 512 Precast Structural Concrete in Buidlings.
OPERATING DEPT.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
AASHTO NO.
M 182 Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf
CERTIFIED 1.4 SUBMITTALS
BY: ___________________
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division - 1
Specification Sections:
DATE: _________________
1.4.1 Product data for proprietary products, materials and items, including reinforcement and
forming accessories, water stops, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry shake finish materials, joint sealants and others as requested by the
Engineer.
1.4.2 Shop drawings for missing Details: Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings with
details required for the smooth execution of the project/ details which are missing or not
included in the design drawings.
03005-2

FOR 107
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.4.3 Shop drawings for reinforcement, for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Details for reinforced concrete shall show grade, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement,
special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures, etc.
1.4.4 Shop drawing for concrete construction joint locations, sequence of pouring and
method of curing and for formwork and for accessories.
1.4.5 Shop drawing for formworks reflecting proper shoring, brace and other support to
safely hold concrete during casting shall be subject for approval of Engineer prior to
fabrication and installation.
1.4.6 Shop drawings for missing Details: Contractor shall prepare and submit shop
drawings with details required for the smooth execution of the project/ details which
are missing or not included in the design drawings.
1.4.7 Samples of all materials to be used in the Works as specified and as otherwise
requested by the Engineer including names, sources and descriptions.
1.4.8 Laboratory test reports for concrete materials, mix and mix design tests as specified.
1.4.9 Material certificates, in lieu of or in addition to material laboratory test reports when
permitted or requested by the Engineer. Material certificates shall indicate the date of
REVISIONS
manufacture and shall be signed by the manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that
each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements.
DRAWN BY: ___________
1.4.10 Hot Weather Concreting, a procedure shall be submitted for proposed methods for
DATE: _________________ compliance with hot weather concreting including delivery, placement, curing, and
CHK’D BY: ____________ other requirements of ACI 305R.
APPROVED
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during the progress
ENGINEERING DEPT.
of the Works. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials or installed work, shall be done
at the Contractor's expense.
1.5.1 Concrete Testing Services: A testing laboratory and qualified personnel to perform
material evaluation tests, design concrete mixes and progress concrete testing shall
OPERATING DEPT. be founded on Site by the Contractor. Minimum equipment requirement shall be as
specified in Division - 1, Section 01400 "Quality Control" or engage a testing
laboratory acceptable to the Engineer to perform required tests.
CERTIFIED
1.6.1 Cement: Cement shall be delivered to Site in sealed bags bearing the manufacturer's
name and the type of cement.
BY: ___________________
Cement shall be fully protected during handling and transport from adverse weather
DATE: _________________ conditions, moisture and over-stacking.
Cement shall be stored in piles not more than ten bags high in perfectly dry weather-
proof sheds, clear from the ground on planks or other damp-proofing supports. Free
passages, minimum one meter wide, shall be left between stored bags and side
walls of buildings (if any) so that each bag shall be visible. Each consignment of
cement shall be stored apart
from earlier ones, and consignments shall be used in the order they were delivered.
Any consignment which has become lumped caked or otherwise adversely affected
shall be removed from Site immediately.
03005-3

FOR 108
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.6.2 Steel Reinforcement: Deliver and handle steel reinforcement in a manner to prevent
bending and damage. Store according to grade, length and diameter.
The following sections include requirements which relate to this section:
Section 01400 Quality Control

Section 07115 Waterproofing Membrane
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, type of cement used shall be ordinary Portland
cement to ASTM C150 for above grade castings and sulphate-resisting Portland cement to
ASTM C150 type V for below-grade castings.
Use one brand of cement for each type throughout the Project. The source of supply of
REVISIONS cement shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. The date of manufacture must be
recorded. Follow-up tests shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory and the
DRAWN BY: ___________ Contractor shall at all times furnish test certificates and proof that the required standard
DATE: _________________
specification has been complied with
CHK’D BY: ____________
Cement used in concrete work shall be less than six months old from date of manufacture.
APPROVED
2.2 AGGREGATES
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Aggregates shall neither contain harmful materials which may reduce the strength or
durability of concrete nor materials which may attack the reinforcement. Mixed coarse and
fine aggregates shall not contain together more than 0.05% chloride ions.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.2.1 Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall be gravel or crushed stone or a
combination thereof
Coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0.04% chloride ions by weight.
CERTIFIED Coarse aggregate shall be free from salt, mica, alkali, organic matter or other
deleterious material either free or as adherent coating on particles. It shall not
BY: ___________________
contain more than 0.25% by weight of clay lumps, not more than 1.0% by weight of
shale, not more than 5.0% by weight laminated, friable, flat, chip-like, thin or
DATE: _________________
elongated particles.
The maximum size of aggregate shall be governed by the type of structure element
in which concrete to be cast. Grading requirements of coarse aggregate shall be as
shown in Table 1.
2.2.2 Fine Aggregate: Furnish natural siliceous sands from approved pits, free from
opaline, felspar, mica, fool's gold, siliceous magnesium, limestone or other
deleterious or reactive substances. Fine aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable and
well graded.
03005-4

FOR 109
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Fine aggregates shall not contain more than 0.06% of chloride ions by weight.
Fine aggregate shall also be free from salt or alkali and shall not contain more than
0.5% by weight of clay lumps. When tested by approved methods, it shall conform to
the grading and percentage passing each sieve by weight as shown in Table 2.
2.2.3 The Grading of Aggregates: shall be such as to produce concrete of the specified
proportions which will work readily into position without segregation and without the
use of excessive water content. The grading limits for sand, gravel or all-in
aggregates given in Table I may serve as a guide for this purpose. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to design and work out concrete mixes to attain the
specified strengths.
TABLE 1
GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE AGGREGATE
SIEVE PERCENTAGE BY MASS PASSING BS SIEVES FOR NOMINAL SIZES

SIZE GRADED AGGREGATE SINGLE-SIZED AGGREGATE
REVISIONS Mm 40 mm 20 mm 14 mm 40 mm 20 mm 14 mm 10 mm
to 5 mm to 5 mm to 5mm
DRAWN BY: ___________ 50. 0 100 - - 100 - - -
DATE: _________________ 37.5 90-100 100 - 85-100 100 - -
CHK’D BY: ____________
20.0 35-70 90-100 - 0-25 85-100 100 -
14.0 - - 90-100 - - 85-100 100
APPROVED 10.0 10-40 30-60 50-85 0-5 0-25 0-50 85-100
ENGINEERING DEPT. 5.0 0-5 0-10 0-10 - 0-5 0-10 0-25
2.36 - - - - - - 0-5
OPERATING DEPT.
TABLE 2
GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR FINE AGGREGATE
PERCENTAGE BY MASS PASSING BS SIEVE

CERTIFIED SIEVE SIZE OVERALL ADDITIONAL LIMITS FOR GRADING
LIMITS C M F
BY: ___________________
10.00 mm 100 - - -
5.00 mm 80-100 - - -
DATE: _________________
2.36 mm 60-100 60-100 65-100 80-100
1.18 mm 30-100 30-90 45-100 70-100
600 microns 15-100 15-54 25-80 55-100
300 microns 5-70 5-40 15-18 5-70
150 microns 0-15* - - -
03005-5

FOR 110
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.2.5 Maximum Nominal Size of Coarse Aggregate: The maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be as large as possible within the limits specified in the code of
practice or as shown on Drawings but in no case less than 1/3 of the depth of slab,
provided that concrete can be placed without difficulty so as to surround all
reinforcement thoroughly and to fill corners of forms.
In no case shall maximum size of coarse aggregate exceed 3/4 of the minimum clear
spacing between bars or between reinforcing bars and forms.
For general purpose, a maximum size of 25 mm shall be satisfactory.
2.3 MIXING WATER
Mixing water for concrete shall be drinking water (potable water) or water of chemical
composition acceptable for drinking and be clean and free from organic impurities, industrial,
contamination oils, salts and any other substances that may be harmful to cement or steel
reinforcement.
REVISIONS 2.4 STEEL REINFORCING BARS
DRAWN BY: ___________ All reinforcing steel bars shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615 with minimum
DATE: _________________
yield strength of 420 MPa (60000 psi) in general. Grade 60 Epoxy coated deformed billet
steel bars shall be used for the below grade constructions at water logged areas and for the
CHK’D BY: ____________
structures submerged in water.
APPROVED
Reinforcement shall be as shown on Drawings and shall comply with the requirements of the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
corresponding ASTM Standard Specifications for:
A. Regular Reinforcement
1. Un-coated reinforcing steel shall be either of one of the following:

OPERATING DEPT.
a) Reinforcing steel bars shall be deformed conforming to ASTM A615M or
A706, Grade 60.
b) Plain steel wire conforming to ASTM A82 and plain steel bar conforming to
CERTIFIED ASTM A615M for spiral reinforcement.
BY: ___________________
2. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars
DATE: _________________
a) Galvanized reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A153M, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication and bending.
B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement
1. Epoxy-coated reinforcement shall be fusion-bonded epoxy coating and meet

the requirements of ASTM A775M and of this Specification. The coated bars shall be
use the Engineer approved epoxy resin and be supplied by the Engineer approved
coating supplier.
03005-6

FOR 111
494
‫لمشعقي‬
a) Reinforcement
 Reinforcement shall be free of contaminants such as oil, grease, or paint.
 Steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall meet the requirements of one of the following
Specifications:
(a) ASTM A615M, A706M, or A996M, Grade 60
b) Epoxy-Coating
 The epoxy coating material shall be an organic, powdered epoxy resin that is applied by
electrostatic spray method.
c) Additional Requirements for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement
 Surface Preparation
REVISIONS
(a) The surface of bars to be coated shall be blast cleaned to near white metal in accordance
with SSPC-SP 10.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ (b) After blasting, the cleaned surface of the bar shall be defined by SSPC-Vis 1, Pictorial
CHK’D BY: ____________
Standard ASa 2½, BSa 2½, or CSa 2½, as applicable.
APPROVED  Coating Application

ENGINEERING DEPT.
(a) The powdered epoxy resin coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface as soon as
possible after cleaning and before visible oxidation occurs.
(b) In no case shall the application of the coating be delayed more than 3 hours after cleaning.
OPERATING DEPT.
 Coating Thickness
(a) For acceptance purposes, at least 90% of all coating thickness measurements after curing
shall be 175 to 300 μm. A finding that more than 5% of the coating thickness measurements
are below 125 μm shall be considered cause for rejection. The upper thickness limit shall not
CERTIFIED
apply to repaired areas of damaged coating.
BY: ___________________  Continuity of Bonding

DATE: _________________
(a) Testing for continuity of bonding at the coating facility shall cover 100% of the coated surface.
(b) The data collected shall be retained with all other quality control data, and shall be traceable
to the batch number or other means of product identification adopted by the manufacturer.
 Where automated monitoring equipment is used, it shall set off an alarm in the event of:
(a) The specific number of holidays (pinholes) being exceeded.
(b) Failure of the holiday detection system.
03005-7

FOR 112
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Continuity of Coating
(a) On average, there shall not be more than 3 holidays per meter on a coated steel reinforcing
bar. The average applies to the full production length of a bar.
 Coating Flexibility
(a) The coating flexibility shall be evaluated by bending three coated steel reinforcing bars 180°
(after rebound) around a 150 mm diameter mandrel. The bend shall be made at a uniform
rate and completed within a 15-second time period. The two longitudinal ribs shall be placed
in a plane perpendicular to the mandrel radius and the specimen shall be 24°C ± 2°C. The
frequency of the test shall be as specified in ASTM A775M.
(b) No cracking of the coating shall be visible to a person with normal or corrected vision on the
outside radius of any of the three bent bars.
d) Coating thickness, holidays, bend test adhesion, and other requirements, per ASTM A775M
and additional requirements under this Section for epoxy-coated reinforcement, are subject to
verification in the field by independent check testing by laboratories under Contract to the
REVISIONS Engineer.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Mill certificates shall be submitted for each consignment of reinforcing steel. Mill certificates
DATE: _________________ shall state the place of manufacture, details of composition, manufacture, strength and mill
CHK’D BY: ____________
analysis and test reports. Follow-up tests shall be performed by an approved testing
laboratory. Specimens shall be selected by the representative of testing laboratory under the
APPROVED
supervision of the Engineer from batches received on Site.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.5 TIE WIRE
Tie wire shall be annealed steel, except where otherwise required; tie wire shall be minimum
1.52 mm diameter.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.6 WELDED WIRE FABRIC
Shall be deformed-steel, welded steel wire fabric according to ASTM standards.
Welded wire fabric shall have minimum yield strength of 75 psi (517 MPa) and shall conform
CERTIFIED to ASTM A497, W6 wires shall have a minimum nominal diameter of 0.276 in. (7mm).
BY: ___________________ 2.7 CURING MATERIALS

DATE: _________________
2.7.1 Water: Shall be as specified in Clause 2.3.
2.7.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Clear liquid membrane-forming curing

compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A. Moisture loss not more
than 0.55 kg/m2 when applied at a rate of 0.210 liter/m2.
2.7.3 Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf weighing approximately 300
g/m2 and complying with AASHTO No. M 182.
03005-8

FOR 113
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.8 SUPPORTS FOR REINFORCEMENT
Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing
bars in place and which may be in contact with forms, plain concrete footings or mud slabs,
shall have their legs or ends plastic protected or they shall be rust proofed or galvanized.
2.9 FORMWORK
Refer to Section 03100 Structural Concrete Formwork.
2.10 ADMIXTURES
The Contractor, may with the written approval of the Engineer, use admixtures in concrete for
special reasons such as waterproofing, retarding initial setting time, improve workability,
reduce amount of water, etc. The Contractor shall strictly use admixtures in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Use admixtures that contain not more than 2% chloride ions of the admixture weight or
0.03% of the cement weight.
REVISIONS
2.11 CONCRETE MIXES
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Designed mixes shall be used throughout the Works, unless otherwise shown on Drawings
CHK’D BY: ____________
and Bill of Quantities. Nominal concrete mixes can be used, if specifically called for and
APPROVED
noted on Drawings.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.12 DESIGNED MIXES
2.12.1 General: The Contractor shall design concrete mixes to satisfy the strength
requirements of various type and classes of concrete to be used in the Works.
OPERATING DEPT. Concrete mix design shall start as soon as practical, and well in advance of any
scheduled concreting work to allow adequate time for the design and testing of
concrete cubes as defined hereinafter. No concreting shall be commenced before
the satisfactory completion of design and testing of the designed mix samples.
Quantities of cement, fine and coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight,
CERTIFIED
Approved designed mixes shall be maintained throughout the duration of the
BY: ___________________
Contract.
DATE: _________________
Mix designs shall satisfy the specified characteristic concrete strength requirements
given in Table 4 In order to allow for unavoidable variations, the mix shall be
designed to have a mean strength equal to or exceeding 125% of the specified
works characteristic strength.
A set of minimum ten (10) cubes for each designed mix shall be prepared, three (3)
cubes shall be tested for compressive strength at 7-days and seven cubes at 28
days.
Concrete mix may be provisionally accepted on basis of 7-day results, when these
satisfy the requirements for 28-day results, and strengths shall not be less than
eighty percent of those required at 28-days.
03005-9

FOR 114
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Concrete grades required for this project shall be as shown in Table 4.
2.12.2 Trial Mixes: Trial mixes shall be prepared under full-scale conditions and tested in
accordance with ASTM, Methods of Testing Concrete.
Representative samples of materials to be used shall be taken and a trial mix using
the proposed proportions shall be made on each of three different days produced by
the same plant and under the same supervision. The workability of each of these
three trial mixes shall be determined, and a set of ten (10) cubes from each mix shall
be made, three for test at 7 days and seven (7) for test at 28 days. The proposed mix
proportions shall be accepted if the average strength of the three trial mixes is not
less than the characteristic strength plus 3MPa. Further trial mixes shall be made if
the cube results in any set are less than the specified characteristic concrete
strength or if the difference between the highest result and the lowest result in any of
the sets exceeds 20% of the overall average of the set.
2.12.3 Works Cube Tests For Control Purposes: Works cube tests shall be made on
concrete samples during the progress of the works as specified in BS 5328.
REVISIONS Concrete for test specimens shall be taken at the point of deposit. A minimum of nine
(9) cubes 150 mm shall be taken for each day's pour or each 100 m3 of concrete
DRAWN BY: ___________ poured whichever is smaller. Separate samples shall be taken for each structural
DATE: _________________
element if poured separately. From each sample three (3) cubes shall be tested after
7 days, three (3) after 28 days and three (3) kept as spares.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
If the number of cubes test is less than 20 cubes, the result of any cube test shall not
be less than the required range, and the difference between the highest and the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
lowest results shall not exceed 25% of the average of all results.
If the number of cubes test is more than 20 cubes, the number of results less than
the required range shall not exceed one (1) for every 20 results, and the difference
between the highest and the lowest results shall not exceed 25% of the average of
OPERATING DEPT. all the results.
TABLE 4
NON AIR ENTRAINED CONCRETE. GRADES

CERTIFIED
GRADE MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM CHARACTERIS- TARGET USES

BY: ___________________ AGGREGATE CEMENT WATER TIC STRENGTH SLUMP
DATE: _________________
SIZE CONTENT CEMENT AFTER 28 DAYS
RATIO
3
mm (kg/m ) (weight) MPa (mm)
A 25 400 0.50 34.5 50 Above Grade
B 25 450 0.50 38 50 Below Grade
C 38 250 0.55 21 75 Plain/Blinding
03005-10

FOR 115
494
‫لمشعقي‬
When the result of the 7-day test is unsatisfactory, the Contractor may elect to
remove and replace the defective concrete without waiting for the 28 day test. ' If the
result of the 28-day test is unsatisfactory, all concreting shall be stopped. The
Contractor shall then, test concrete of the suspected portions of the structure in such
a manner as may be appropriate to the particular conditions or parts of the works.
Should tests prove that concrete is unsatisfactory then the condemned concrete shall
be cut out, removed and replaced by the Contractor.
When works cube tests show concrete strengths consistently higher than those
specified, 'the contractor may reduce the number of tests to be made to the minimum
required by the Referenced Standards.
2.13.1 Supervision: The Contractor shall employ a competent person and permanently keep
him on Site until the completion of concreting work. His first duty shall be to
supervise all stages in preparation and placing of concrete He shall be responsible
REVISIONS for supervising a tests of materials, moulding and testing of concrete cubes and
maintaining and calibrating all mixing and measuring plant.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2.13.2 Aggregates: Separate storage bins with adequate provision for drainage shall be
provided for each size of aggregate used (40-20 mm, 30-20 mm, 25-20 mm, 20-10
CHK’D BY: ____________
mm, 10-5 mm, and 5 mm down).
APPROVED
The grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be determined at least once a week
ENGINEERING DEPT.
to check whether the gradings are similar to those of the samples used in trial mixes.
2.13.3 Batching and Mixing Plant: Concrete shall be machine mixed by appropriate drum-
type batch machine mixer.
OPERATING DEPT. About 10% of water required for the batch shall enter the drum in advance of cement
and aggregates. Remainder of water shall be added gradually while the drum is in
action so that required quantity is in the drum by the end of the first quarter of mixing
time. Concrete shall be mixed until a mixture of uniform colour and consistency is
obtained and mixing shall continue for at least 1. 5 minutes after all water has been
CERTIFIED added. In no circumstances shall mixing time be less than that recommended by the
manufacturer of the mixer. Should mixing be determined by a certain number of
BY: ___________________
revolutions of the drum, then adequate means and meters shall be provided to check
number of revolutions before the discharge of each batch mix.
DATE: _________________
The amount of concrete mixed in any one batch shall not exceed the rated capacity
of the mixer. The whole of the batch is to be evacuated before loading the drum with
a fresh batch. On cessation of work, including all delays exceeding 20 minutes, the
mixers and all handling plant shall be washed with clean water and any deposits of
old concrete in drums shall be cleaned out by rotating clean aggregate and water in
the drum, or by other appropriate means, before any fresh concrete 'is mixed. Mixers
shall be properly maintained and all worn out blades shall be replaced with new ones
or built-up by welding.
Concrete shall not be remixed if mixing water has been added to it for more than
twenty (20) minutes. No additions to concrete shall be permitted once mixed.
03005-11

FOR 116
494
‫لمشعقي‬
If concreting work is done by using ready mixed concrete it shall conform to (BS 53)
28 and concrete shall be mixed dry, transported in transit mixers to place of work
where water is to be added and final mixing is to be carried. If haulage distances are
very short, mixing can take place at the batching plant and concrete transported in
agitators or transit mixers.
2.13.4 Control of Water Content: Water/cement ratio shall be controlled at values

determined in trial mixes. Appropriate allowances shall be made for water contained
by the aggregates. Provisions shall be made to determine the moisture content of
aggregates.
2.13.5 Workability: Workability shall be controlled by direct measurement of water content,

making allowance for water contained by fine and coarse aggregates. Slump test
shall be used as a guide for workability.
Table 5 indicates the acceptable slump in mm for the corresponding type or

structure.
TABLE 5
REVISIONS SLUMP VALUES
DRAWN BY: ___________ _______________________________________________________________

DATE: _________________
TYPE OF STRUCTURE TYPE OF SLUMP. IN
COMPACTION MM (MAX.)
CHK’D BY: ____________
_______________________________________________________________
APPROVED
Reinforced Concrete Works Mechanical 50
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Plain concrete works Manual 75
_______________________________________________________________
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03005-12

FOR 117
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.14 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabrication requirements apply to both shop and site work.
2. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately bent, cut or formed to the dimensions

and configurations shown on the Contract Drawings and within the
tolerances specified in Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) “Manual
of Standard Practice” (MSP), and ACI 315.
3. During fabrication, all reinforcing steel shall be bent cold using pin sizes in
accordance with ACI 318RM.
4. Reinforcing steel having a reduced section, kinks, visible transverse cracks

at bends, defective or damaged in any way, shall not be used.
5. The ends of regular reinforcing bars which are to be mechanically connected

for splices shall be saw-cut only, in accordance with the tolerances specified
REVISIONS in par. 2.03 A.2.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 6. Welding of reinforcing steel bars is not allowed, unless reinforcement
DATE: _________________
complying with ASTM A706M is used.
CHK’D BY: ____________
7. Spiral reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated to the diameter and pitch
APPROVED
shown on the Contract Drawings. One and one-half (1½) finishing turns shall
be provided at both the top and bottom, unless shown otherwise on the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Contract Drawings.
B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement
1. Bar bending and cutting equipment for epoxy-coated bars shall have padded
OPERATING DEPT. supports at contact areas and shall be fitted with approved nylon or plastic
mandrels.
2. When epoxy-coated reinforcing bars are sheared, saw-cut, or cut by other

means during fabrication process, the cut ends shall be coated with the
CERTIFIED same patching materials used for the repair of damaged coating.
BY: ___________________
3. Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM
D3963M.
DATE: _________________
2.15 ACCESSORIES
1. Non-Shrink Grout Materials
a) Prepackaged Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Cementitious Grout
1) It shall be effective at consistencies from extremely fluid to plastic, and shall be

capable of developing full strength without confinement. It shall comply with
ASTM C1107 and the following additional properties:
03005-13

FOR 118
494
‫لمشعقي‬
(a) Minimum compressive strength, tested after 7 days at 20°C in accordance

with ASTM C109M, shall be 35 MPa for both plastic and fluid consistency
mixes.
(b) Hardened height change shall be in accordance with ASTM C157 at 0 to

0.05% at 28 days.
(c) Maximum 10 mm size of aggregate shall be used for repairs exceeding 75

mm in thickness.
b) Two or Three Component Prepackaged Epoxy Grout
1) Epoxy based moisture insensitive repair mortar shall conform to ASTM C881M
and the following additional properties:
(a) Minimum compressive strength, tested after 7 days in accordance with

ASTM C579 shall be 45 MPa.
(b) Bond Strength Pull-off Test shall be at Concrete Failure.

REVISIONS
c) The non-shrink cementitious grout shall be used for static loading, and the non-shrink
DRAWN BY: ___________ epoxy grout shall be used for machinery and vibrating equipment.
DATE: _________________
2. Joint Materials
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
a) Waterstops
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1) Waterstops shall be flat, dumbbell type or centerbulb type waterstops at
construction joints and other joints, as shown on the Contract Drawings. Web
thickness shall be not less than 5 mm for widths up to 120 mm, and not less
than 10 mm for widths 120 mm and over.
OPERATING DEPT. 2) Waterstops materials shall be as follows:
(a) Rubber waterstops shall comply with Corps of Engineers COE CRD
C513.
CERTIFIED (b) Polyvinyl chloride waterstops shall comply with Corps of Engineers COE
CRD C572.
BY: ___________________
b) Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers
DATE: _________________
1) As shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with SECTION 07920.
c) Joint Sealing Compounds
1) Joint sealing compounds shall be in accordance with SECTION 07920.
3. Floor Finish Materials
a) Chemical Floor Hardener
03005-14

FOR 119
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1) Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluorosilicate and

zinc fluorosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 240
grams of fluorosilicates per liter.
(a) Applied to exposed concrete slabs not indicated or scheduled to receive

any finishes.
(b) Applied to wet concrete surfaces and finished as integral part of concrete
slab.
b) Aggregate for Non-Slip Finish
1) As shown and located on the Contract Drawings.
(a) Fused Aluminum Oxide Grits or Crushed Emery
 Abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate

containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25%
ferric oxide.
REVISIONS
 Material shall be factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, non-glazing,

DRAWN BY: ___________ non-sparkling and unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning
DATE: _________________ materials.
CHK’D BY: ____________
(b) Silicon Carbide Grits
APPROVED
 Abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish material with sparkling
ENGINEERING DEPT.
appearance, factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, and unaffected by
freezing, moisture and cleaning materials.
c) Colored Wear-Resistant Finish
OPERATING DEPT. 1) Packaged, dry combination of materials formulated for producing colored and
wear-resistant monolithic surface treatments, consisting of portland cement,
graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments and dispersing agents.
2) Coloring pigments shall be finely ground, non-fading mineral oxides, inter-

CERTIFIED ground with cement. Color shall be as selected by the Engineer.
BY: ___________________ 3) Types

DATE: _________________
(a) Mineral Aggregate Heavy-Duty Wear-Resistant Finish
 Recommended for heavy-duty rubber-tired traffic at industrial

applications, interior or exterior those are subject to abrasion.
Aggregate formulated with portland cement for heavy-duty wear-
resistant monolithic.

 Traprock: Packaged, factory-graded, crushed natural fine to medium
igneous rock, such as diabase, basalt, or black granite; well-graded
in size from particles retained on a 5 mm sieve to particles passing a
9.5 mm sieve.
03005-15

FOR 120
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Emery: Packaged, factory-graded, crushed natural emery ore

containing not less than 35% aluminum oxide and not less than 25%
ferric oxide; well-graded in size from articles retained on a 0.32 mm
sieve to particles passing a 3 mm sieve.
 Quartz: Packaged, factory-graded crushed natural quartz with a

fineness modulus of 3.80 to 4.15 with 98% passing a 5 mm sieve to
97% retained on 0.35 mm sieve.
(b) Metallic Aggregate Heavy-Duty Wear-Resistant Finish
 Recommended for heavy-duty steel wheel traffic subject to impact

and abrasion.
 Packaged ground and graded cubicle iron particles with dispersing

agents formulated to blend with Portland cement for wear-resistant
monolithic surface treatment. Using iron aggregate free of non-
ferrous metals, oil, grease, rust and other impurities.
REVISIONS
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.1 CONCRETE

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

3.1.1 Measuring and Mixing: Measuring and mixing shall be carried out as specified under
Clause 2.13.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.1.2 Transporting: Concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to the place of final
deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or
contamination of the ingredients all as specified under Clause 2.13.3.
It shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling

or flowing.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.1.3 Placing
3.1.3.1 Advance Notice: The Contractor shall give sufficient advance notice to the
Engineer before starting to place concrete in any unit to permit the inspection
CERTIFIED
of forms, reinforcing steel placement and preparation for casting. No
concrete shall be placed in any unit, prior to the proper completion of
BY: ___________________ formwork and Placement of reinforcing steel and the Engineer's written
DATE: _________________
acceptance of such works.
3.1.3.2 Daylight: Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done in daylight
hours only. Placement shall not commence when it is evident that the work
cannot be completed before dark unless adequate provisions are made to
lighten the entire site of all operations.
3.1.3.3 Placing: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete form-work

installation, reinforcing steel, etc.. Notify other crafts to permit installation of
their work and cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Forms shall
be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, shavings, loose stones etc., and shall be
03005-16

FOR 121
494
‫لمشعقي‬
well soaked with water. No standing water shall be present inside forms
when concreting.
Concrete shall be placed in its final position before setting has commenced
and shall not be subsequently disturbed. Concrete shall be placed in layers
of such thickness that no concrete shall be placed on concrete that has
hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams of weakness. Place
each layer while underlying one is still plastic. Concrete shall not be freely
dropped more than 1.5 m without the use of tremies.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints

designated by the approved shop drawings. A detailed record shall be kept
by the Contractor for all concreting operations reflecting date, time, shade,
air temperature, relative humidity and weather conditions for every part of
the Works.
Screed slab surface with a straight edge and strike off to correct elevation.
Float surface using bull-float or derbies to form a uniform and open texture
REVISIONS surface, plane, free of humps or hollows.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.1.3.4 Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated in
DATE: _________________
shop drawings. Contact surfaces of hardened concrete shall be thoroughly
hacked, swept clean, wetted and covered either with a coat of neat cement
CHK’D BY: ____________
grout freshly mixed or use a bonding adhesive placed immediately before
APPROVED
receiving fresh concrete. Construction joints shall. be at right angles to the
main reinforcement of the member and provided with joggles where
ENGINEERING DEPT.
possible.
Additional reinforcement shall be placed at construction joints as shown on

Drawings.
OPERATING DEPT. All joints shall be formed to the correct dimensions as specified and shown
on Drawings and sealed with a sealing compound applied after the concrete
has cured. Sealant shall be applied in accordance with the printed
instructions of the manufacturer and as specified in Division-7, Section “Joint
Sealers".
CERTIFIED
3.1.3.5 Compaction: Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted during placing
BY: ___________________
operation and carefully worked around reinforcement, around embedded
fixtures and into comers of forms so that it will be in close contact with
DATE: _________________
reinforcement and free of honeycombs. Concrete shall be compacted by
approved immersion-type mechanical or electromechanical vibrators of
proper sizes and diameters best suited for the cast element. Over vibration
causing segregation shall be carefully avoided and transportation of concrete
through forms by vibrators shall not be permitted.
Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that begin to lose
plasticity.
03005-17

FOR 122
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.1.4 Curing: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying, Concrete shall be
kept constantly wet for seven days. This period may be reduced to five days for rapid
hardening cement. Water for curing concrete shall be same as that for concrete
mixing. As climate is hot, dry or windy, concrete shall be covered by a layer of
waterproof material immediately after placing, to be protected from rapid moisture
loss before and during finishing operation. Maintain cover in contact with concrete for
seven days.
Proper precautions and measures shall be taken to ensure proper curing of concrete
by either setting up a mechanical water fog-spray system covering the total
concreted surface, this system shall operate continuously during the curing period, or
2
by covering the concreted surfaces with burlap of not less than 300 g/m or
absorptive cover and thoroughly sature cover with water so that they shall be kept
moist continuously during the curing period.
Curing shall start immediately after the disappearance of free surface water. For
special purposes additional extra test cubes of each portion or member, if requested
by the Engineer, shall be cured in the same place and exactly in the same manner
as the portions or members they represent. After seven days, they shall be
REVISIONS transported to the laboratory where they shall be kept in water until tested.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Curing compound as specified in Clause 2.7.2 may be used for curing concrete in
DATE: _________________
lieu of water. Curing compound shall be sprayed to all exposed concrete surfaces as
soon as the surface of the freshly placed concrete becomes dull, or immediately after
CHK’D BY: ____________
form stripping of columns, vertical surfaces of walls and beam sides. Curing
APPROVED
compound shall be applied amply by means of sprayers and shall result in a
continuous whitish film. Rate of spraying shall be in strict conformance to the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
3.2.1 Cleaning: Immediately before placing concrete into forms, all steel for reinforcement
OPERATING DEPT. shall be cleaned and freed from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and grease or other
harmful matter that may destroy or reduce bond strength.
3.2.2 Placing: Concrete cover to reinforcing steel shall be as indicated on Drawings and
shall be measured from the outer surface of steel reinforcement and outer surfaces
CERTIFIED of stirrup in case of beams and columns. All reinforcement shall be placed and rigidly
maintained in positions shown on Drawings and secured against displacement. This
BY: ___________________
shall be ensured by tying, welding, using spacing blocks, hangers, bolsters, metal
clips or supports. Accurately place reinforcement and securely wire tie in precise
DATE: _________________
position at all points where bars cross. Tie stirrups to bars at both top and bottom. No
supports or metal clips shall be placed in contact with forms unless plastic-coated,
galvanized or rust proofed. The ends of binding tie wire shall be bent inward and
trimmed allowing no encroachment on the concrete cover trimmed with exercising
special care at surfaces of water-retaining elements and surfaces to remain exposed
and unpainted. Placing of reinforcement shall be checked by the Engineer and in no
case shall concrete be poured around any steel that has not been approved by the
Engineer.
03005-18

FOR 123
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.2.3 Bending: All bars shall be bent cold and in accordance with bending schedules.
All bending and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete shall comply
with BS No. 4466.
Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the
material.
Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent
back into approximately their original positions, care shall be taken to ensure that at
no time shall the radius of the bend be less than 4 bar diameters for normal mild
steel and 6 bar diameters for high-yield steel. Care shall also be taken when bending
back bars to ensure that concrete around bars is not damaged.
Splicing of reinforcing bars shall not be permitted except where shown on Drawings.
All splices and overlaps shall comply with the requirements of the ASTM.
3.3 FORMWORK
REVISIONS 3.3.1 General: Maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads
that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. It shall be
DRAWN BY: ___________ constructed so as to remain sufficiently tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar of
DATE: _________________
concrete. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size,
shape, elevation, alignment and position indicated.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Forms in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and treated with an approved
composition or form release agent before placing reinforcement. Care shall be taken
ENGINEERING DEPT.
not to spatter reinforcement with such composition.
3.3.2 Metal Formwork: Provide forms easy to remove without hammering or prying against
concrete surface.
OPERATING DEPT. Rust-stained steel formwork shall not be acceptable.
3.3.3 Reuse of Formwork: Clean surfaces of forms to be reused in work, remove fins and
laitance, apply coating.
CERTIFIED 3.3.4 Strutting: The design and erection of the formwork together with the adequacy of all
bracing and strutting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor
BY: ___________________
shall ensure that there shall be no deformations or failure of the shuttering during
concreting and shall include in his rates for all necessary scaffolding or staging,
DATE: _________________
boxing out for fittings and all other works incidental to the shuttering to be erected.
3.3.5 Provision for Embedded Articles: Provide openings in concrete formwork to

accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings
accurately. All pipes passing through concrete walls, beams or slabs shall pass
through sleeves fixed into position before concreting. All pipes and sleeves passing
through concrete shall have steel flanges welded to them.
Embedded articles shall be built-in as the work proceeds. Where impractical, steel
inserts shall be built-in or holes and box-outs shall be left for fixation after removal of
forms.
03005-19

FOR 124
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3.6 Removal of Forms: In any case, forms shall not be removed until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to ensure structural stability and to carry both dead load
and any construction loads that may be imposed on it. Concrete shall be hard
enough so that surfaces will not be injured in any way when reasonable care is used
in removing forms.
The minimum period of time that shall elapse between pouring concrete and removal
of forms shall be in no case less than the age shown in Table 8.
TABLE 8
MINIMUM AGE OF CONCRETE FOR

SAFE REMOVAL OF FORMS
_______________________________________________________________
TYPE OF FORMWORK MINIMUM AGE OF CONCRETE
_______________________________________________________________
Vertical sides of beams, walls and columns 24 hours

Soffit formwork to slabs 7 days
REVISIONS Soffit formwork to beams and props to slabs 10 days
Drops to beams 14 days
DRAWN BY: ___________ _______________________________________________________________
DATE: _________________
In no circumstances shall forms be removed and struck until concrete reaches a
CHK’D BY: ____________
cube strength of at least twice the stress to which concrete may be subjected at time
APPROVED
of striking.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Forms shall be removed with due care and attention avoiding all shock or vibration
that would damage concrete.
The Contractor shall make good concrete surfaces after removal of forms.
OPERATING DEPT. 3.3.7 Surface Finish: Brushed or rough-tamped finish shall be applied on top surfaces of
all cast in situ slabs.
3.3.8 Repairs: Should the stripping of forms of any concrete member or testing of any
structure reveal any defects then same shall be made good.
CERTIFIED
Clean, damper with water and brush-coat holes and voids with a bonding agent. Fill
BY: ___________________
and compact with cement mortar before bonding agent has dried.
DATE: _________________
3.4 SLAB ON GRADE
3.4.1 All ground floor slabs (reinforced concrete slabs on grade), shall be mechanically
trowelled (vibro-floated).
3.4.2 The slab shall be poured (cast) on top of:
a) Vapor barrier with polythene sheet of 6 MILS

b) 150mm thick leveling Compacted sand on 90% Procter density compacted
select fill material
03005-20

FOR 125
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.4.3 Sub-grade shall be a compacted structural backfill.
3.4.4 The thickness of the slab and reinforcement shall be as indicated in the Drawings
and the Bill of Quantities.
3.4.5 Concrete slabs shall be constructed mostly in panels with dimensions as directed by
the Engineer. Checkerboard lanes method shall only be used whenever grades and
panel dimensions are critical. Lane dimensions shall be approximately 4 m wide, and
18 m long. Lanes shall then be saw cut in a perpendicular direction forming
contraction (shrinkage) joints while reinforcement shall be pre-cut to the right
dimensions.
3.4.6 Isolation joints shall be used to isolate the slab from any fixed structure which is
expected to have a significant differential settlement, such as columns, or tie beams.
They are constructed by placing, vertical sheets of expanded polystyrene (styrofoam),
230 mm wide and 10 mm thick, between slab and structure.
3.4.7 Construction-joints shall separate concrete lanes in the longitudinal direction and
REVISIONS also used as terminal joints for ending a day's work. All the construction joints shall be
provided with straight dowels anchored one-sided in the slab on grade.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.4.8 Contraction joints shall be formed by saw cutting every 6 m with a depth of
approximately 1/3 of the slab thickness for "Controlled Cracking" as a result of
CHK’D BY: ____________
concrete shrinkage and inevitable slight differential settlement of the slab on grade.
APPROVED
3.4.9 Joints shall be filled and sealed with approved sealant.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.4.10 After concreting, floats shall be used to even the surface and prepare it for trowelling.
Mechanical power trowels shall then be used to produce a hard, smooth and sealed
finished surface. Saw cutting of contraction joints and approximately lm2 diamonds at
each column foundation shall start between 3 and 8 hours after slab finishing
OPERATING DEPT.
3.4.11 Concrete slabs shall be cured in accordance with industrial standards, either by
keeping the surface completely moist or by covering the slab with a water-tight
membrane or by means of a curing compound.
CERTIFIED 3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION
BY: ___________________
3.5.1 Testing of Concrete: Testing for compression strength of concrete sampled during
the progress of the work shall be as follows:
DATE: _________________
3.5.1.1 Sampling Concrete: Concrete for the test specimens shall be taken at point
of deposit to ensure that specimens are representing concrete cast into
structure members, a number of concrete samples shall be taken from
different points.
The quantity of each concrete sample shall be enough to mould the. number
of test specimens required and shall be taken from one work point. The
location from which each sample is taken shall be noted.
03005-21

FOR 126
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.5.1.2 Test Specimens: Test specimens shall be prepared as specified in ASTM.
3.5.1.3 Storage of Test Specimens: Test specimens shall be stored on Site, in the
same place as of concrete structural elements they have been sampled
from. Twenty-four hours after making specimens, they shall be released from
moulds, marked, stored and cured typically as concrete of the structure
member itself Specimens to be sent to a laboratory for testing, shall be
packed for transit in damp sand, or other suitable damp material and shall
reach the laboratory at least 24 hours before test time. On arrival at the
laboratory, they shall be similarly immersed in water until test date.
3.5.1.4 Method of testing: Tests shall be made at age of concrete corresponding to

that of the specified strength. Tests shall be made as specified in ASTM.
3.5.2 Testing of Steel Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement used in concrete shall be tested
before use for each consignment on Site. Tests shall be carried on three specimens
for each different diameter, the results of which shall comply with the characteristic,
strength given for tested grade.
REVISIONS 3.5.3 Core Testing of In Place Concrete: When strength tests have failed to meet the
specified acceptance criteria, perform core testing and take samples of in place
DRAWN BY: ___________ concrete as required. Results of in-place concrete core testing shall be evaluated in
DATE: _________________
accordance with ASTM standards.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.5.4 Repairs: No repairs or patching are to start before obtaining the approval of the
APPROVED
Engineer as to the techniques to be followed and the extent of the work. The
Engineer shall have the right to stop any or all work of repairs even after his approval
ENGINEERING DEPT.
of same if in his opinion the Contractor is not carrying the work properly or that there
may exist a hazard or danger to the structure. All repairs, if approved, shall be made
by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.
3.6 Tolerances of Reinforced Concrete

OPERATING DEPT.
The following are the allowable tolerances in Reinforced Concrete shall be applicable as
mentioned in the ACI 117 Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction
and Materials.
CERTIFIED 3.6.1 Variation in cross sectional dimensions of different elements (columns, beams,
thickness of walls and slabs) = ± 5 mm for dimensions less than 400 mm and 10
BY: ___________________
mm for dimensions more than 400 mm.
3.6.2 Variation in plan from specified location of the building 25 mm in any location.
DATE: _________________
3.6.3 Deviation in plan from any horizontal dimension (axes of columns, beams, walls, ±5
mm in any panel of 6 m in any direction.
3.6.4 Deviation from plumb 5 mm for 6 m height with a maximum of 25 mm for all the
building height (maximum 30 m).
3.6.5 Deviation in concrete cover shall be 6 mm for depth equal or less than 250 mm and –
8 mm for depth than 250 mm.
03005-22

FOR 127
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.6.6 Variation in distance between reinforcing bars for slabs, walls and stirrups shall not
be more than ± 20 mm
3.6.7 Variation from specified joint width = ±5 mm.
- END OF SECTION 3005-23
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03005-23

FOR 128
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03100 - FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to; furnishing, fabricating and erecting
formwork for cast-in-place concrete as indicated on the Drawing and as specified.
B. Provide formwork and shoring for cast-in-place concrete and installation of items into
formwork such as anchor bolts, setting plates, bearing plates, anchorages, inserts,
frames, nosings, and other items to be embedded in concrete.
1.02 Related Work
A. Surveying and Monumentation

REVISIONS
B. Section 02 - Concrete Reinforcement
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
C. Section 05 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
OPERATING DEPT. 1. ANSI A199.1, Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.04 Quality Assurance
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the latest editions of the
CERTIFIED following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise shown or
specified.
BY: ___________________
1. ACI 347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
DATE: _________________
2. ANSI A199.1: Construction and Industrial Plywood.
B. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Construct formwork to provide completed cast-in-place concrete surfaces

complying with the tolerance specified in ACI 347.
2. Before concrete placement check the lines and levels of erected formwork.
Make corrections and adjustments to ensure proper size and locations of
concrete members and stability of forming systems.
03100-1

FOR 129
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. During concrete placement check formwork and related supports to ensure

that forms are not displaced and that completed work will be within specified
tolerance.
1.05 Submittals
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for

materials including form coatings, manufactured form systems, ties and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Materials
A. Forms for Finish Concrete:
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct formwork for concrete

surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed or plywood-faced or other panel
REVISIONS type materials acceptable to the SEC, to provide continuous, straight, and
smooth cast surfaces.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to
conform to joint system shown on Drawings. Provide form material with
CHK’D BY: ____________
sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without
APPROVED
bow or deflection and without leakage of fines.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Form Ties:
1. Use factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form

ties, designed to prevent from deflection, and to prevent spelling concrete
surfaces upon removal.
OPERATING DEPT.
2. Unless otherwise shown, use ties so that portion remaining within concrete
after removal of exterior parts is at least 40 mm from the outer concrete
surface. Unless otherwise shown, use form ties which will not leave a hole
larger than 25 mm diameter in the concrete surface. Ties shall be
CERTIFIED galvanized and fully surrounded with concrete.
BY: ___________________
3. Provide ties subjected to hydrostatic pressure with acceptable water-stops,
such as metal washers, securely and continuously fastened to the ties.
DATE: _________________
4. Form ties fabricated on the project site and wire ties are not acceptable.
C. Form Coatings: Use commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not
bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair
subsequent treatment of concrete surface requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede
the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.
D. Formwork: Construct formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste

during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints
as required to prevent leakage and fines.
03100-2

FOR 130
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Form Construction
A. Forms: Construct forms to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown,
and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work
in finish structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses,
moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages
and inserts, and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required
finishes.
B. Form Fabrication: Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying
against concrete surfaces. Use crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may
damage cast concrete surfaces. Use top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope
is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of
removal.
REVISIONS C. Temporary Openings: Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for
DRAWN BY: ___________ placement of concrete. Brace temporary closures and set tightly to forms to prevent
DATE: _________________
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms in as inconspicuous
location as possible, consistent with project requirements.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
D. Covers: Chamfer all exposed corners;
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.02 Removal of Forms
A. General Forms: Formwork not supporting concrete, such as sides of beams, and
similar parts of the Work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than
10 degrees centigrade for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
OPERATING DEPT. sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operation and provided that
curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Support Forms: Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits,

joists, slabs, and other structural elements may not be removed until concrete has
CERTIFIED attained its designed 28 day compressive strength.
BY: ___________________
- END OF SECTION -3100-3
DATE: _________________
03100-3

FOR 131
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03200 - REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to; furnishing, fabrication and
placement of reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete, including bars, welded wire
fabric, ties and supports.
B. The extent of concrete reinforcement shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 Concrete Formwork
B. Section 05 Cast-in-Place Concrete

REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. ACI 301-89, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"
APPROVED
2. ACI 305R-91, "Hot Weather Concreting”.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. ACI 315-80, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
4. ACI 318-89, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete”.
OPERATING DEPT. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the latest editions of the codes,
specifications and standards indicated under the sub-section references, as
applicable except as otherwise indicated or specified.
CERTIFIED
1.05 SUBMITTALS
BY: ___________________
A. Mill Certificates: Furnish SEC with copies of the manufacturer's records of chemical
DATE: _________________
and physical tests.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of
concrete reinforcement. Show details of bars including types, sizes, spacing and
supports Comply with ACI 315: "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures". Submit bar bending schedules, diagrams of bent
bar types, arrangements and assemblies as required for the fabrication and
placement of concrete reinforcement.
03200-1

FOR 132
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcement Bars:
1. ASTM A615 M grade 60 deformed reinforcing steel bars shall be used for
above grade and below grade construction in General. Epoxy coated
deformed bars as per ASTM A775 shall be used for the foundations ,Earth
retaining structures etc. located in water logged areas and other structural
members submerged in water.
2. ASTM A185, Welded Wire Fabric.
B. Tie Wire:
1. Shall be mild steel or annealed iron minimum 2.03 mm diameter, PVC

coated for tying epoxy coated bars.
C. Spacers:
REVISIONS
Use only commercial type plastic (PVC) chairs.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
D. Touch-Up Compound:
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. Shall use to correct worn coating on epoxy coated rebars.
APPROVED
PART 3 EXECUTION
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.01 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions,

with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice".
OPERATING DEPT.
B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be
permitted in the Work.
1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.

CERTIFIED 2. Bend or kinks not indicated on Drawings or final shop drawings.
3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other
BY: ___________________
deterioration.
DATE: _________________
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the "Concrete Reinforcement Steel Institute (CRSI): "Manual
of Standards Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction".
B. Placement:
1. Position, supports, and secure reinforcement against displacement by

formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and
support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners bolsters, spacers and hangers,
as required.
03200-2

FOR 133
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverage for concrete protection

in accordance with ACI-318. For liquid retaining structures comply with
requirements of ACI 350R-77. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars
supports and reinforcement together with 1.52 mm wire to hold
reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations.
Set wire ties so that twisted end are directed away from exposed concrete
surfaces.
C. Supports: Provide sufficient numbers of supports and of strength to carry

reinforcement. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 50 mm beyond the last leg of
any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete
conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
D. Splices:
1. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in

contact, and tightly wire tying. Comply with requirements of ACI 381 for
minimum lap of spliced bars, except as otherwise indicated.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03200-3

FOR 134
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03300 - ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Description of Work: Work includes under slab vapor barrier and other accessories
as indicated on the Drawings.
A. Applicable Standards: Comply with Standards specified in this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
REVISIONS
A. Polyethylene Film : 200 microns, or as shown on the drawing.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
B. Inserts: Galvanized metal of type and size shown on the Drawings or required for
other trades.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Self-securing 20 gauge galvanized metal packed with readily
removable material.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
OPERATING DEPT. A. General: All bolts, anchors, dowels, fastenings or other items to be embedded in the
concrete shall be accurately and firmly secured against possible displacement when
concrete is placed. For other bolts or other items requiring high accuracy, the SEC’s
Representative may require the use of wooden templates carefully and accurately
made and set. Anchor bolts shall be placed plumb and within 2 mm (1/16 in) of the
CERTIFIED position shown on the design drawings.
B. Polyethylene Film: Except where vapor barrier are scheduled otherwise, install
BY: ___________________
minimum 200 microns thick polyethylene film under all concrete slabs on grade, and
where shown on the drawings. Stretch film level and weight edges to maintain
DATE: _________________
position until concrete is poured. Lap joints 150 mm.
C. Inserts: Build all inserts into concrete as shown, specified or as required by other
trades. Fill voids temporarily with readily removable material. Partially embedded
ferrous metal inserts in concrete shall be coated with zinc chromate primer prior to
concrete placement.
03300-1

FOR 135
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03347 - CONCRETE HARDENER
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provision of Contract, General Conditions, Conditions of Particular

Application and Division - I Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
This section covers the specifications for hardeners applied to exposed concrete floor
surfaces as indicated on Drawings and required in this Contract.
1.3 Related Sections
The following related sections include requirements which relate to this Section
REVISIONS
 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

DRAWN BY: ___________
 Concrete Floor Topping
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ 1.4 Submittals
APPROVED 1.4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including hardener label
ENGINEERING DEPT. analysis and application instructions for material proposed for use.
1.4.2 Samples: Prior to beginning work, submit samples for Engineer's review of
appearance, colour, texture and abrasion tests.
1.5 Delivery and Storage

OPERATING DEPT.
Deliver material to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label, name. of material, stock number and date of manufacture
and expiry date, contents by volume, application instructions and storage instructions.
CERTIFIED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
BY: ___________________ 2.1 Manufacturers

DATE: _________________
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work are limited to the one specialized and approved by Engineer.
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 Dust-Proofer and Sealer Compounds
It shall be specifically designed for use on interior or exterior concrete floors and form
a resin reinforcement to the concrete surface for maximum abrasion resistance. It
shall
03347-1

FOR 136
494
‫لمشعقي‬
resist wheeled and pedestrian traffic, acids, alkalies, solvents, grease, detergents
and corrosives.
Dust-proofer and sealer shall be used at the manufacturer's recommendation.
2.3 TPS Solution
It shall be trisodium phosphate solution and shall be used to clean all floors of any fats,
greases and oils before using the dust-proofer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Workmanship
Concrete or concrete screed shall be to the required elevation, plane, smooth, thoroughly
cured and at least 30 days old. The use of curing compounds to concrete surfaces where
hardeners shall be sprayed is to be avoided. Wet or paper curing should be used for best
result. Before hardener application cover joints which shall be caulked with elastomeric
sealants to avoid interference with sealant adhesion.
REVISIONS
3.2 Installation
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.2.1 Preparatory Work
CHK’D BY: ____________
Floors must be smooth, structurally sound, fully cured and dry. All oils, grease, dirt,
APPROVED
debris, mortar and paint drippings, curing compounds shall be removed. Floors shall
be cleaned 'of any fats, greases, oils, and other impurities with a hot TSP solution
ENGINEERING DEPT.
then rinsed thoroughly with clean water.
Floors must be absolutely dry, and immediately prior to application shall be rubbed
with a black cloth to check for signs of dust, If dust is present, floor shall be vacuum
cleaned until free of dust.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.2.2 Application Procedure
Hardener material shall be applied in two coats by brush, lambswool applicator or

spray. Care shall be taken not to overlap or splatter onto areas already wet. Puddling
CERTIFIED shall be avoided. The period between the application of the undercoat and the
finishing coat shall be at least 6 hours or as recommended by the manufacturer. The
BY: ___________________
finishing coat shall be cross-stroked for a more uniform finish.
DATE: _________________
Manufacturer's recommendations as to temperature and humidity levels shall be
strictly adhered to. Direct air currents over freshly applied coats shall be avoided,
since such a procedure would tend to skin dry the surface and entrap air bubbles.
Surface finish and color shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
3.3 Protection
Do not permit traffic on unprotected surfaces for at least 48 hours. Protect surfaces after
acceptance by Engineer until date of substantial completion.
- END OF SECTION -
03347-2

FOR 137
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03400 - CONSTRUCTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. Work in this Section includes but not limited to furnishing and placing construction
joints and expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 Related Work
A. Section 05 Cast-in-Place Concrete
A. General:
REVISIONS 1. Construction and expansion joints shown on Drawings shall not be omitted.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Construction and expansion joints shall not be added or relocated without
DATE: _________________
written approval of the SEC.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. Comply with the provisions of the references indicated under Sub-section
APPROVED
1.04 "Reference Standard", except as other wise shown or specified.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 920, Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

OPERATING DEPT.
2. ASTM C 962, Guide for Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
3. ASTM D 1751, Specification for Preformed Expansion joint Fillers for

Concrete Paving and Structural construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
CERTIFIED Bituminous types).
BY: ___________________
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
DATE: _________________
1. ACI-504-R-77, Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete Structures.
1.05 Submittals
A. Submit the following to SEC’s Representative for approval prior to ordering of

materials:
1. Product data for all materials stating the location where product will be used.
2. Certification that materials meet the Specifications.
03400-1

FOR 138
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. Manufacturer's application and installation instructions.
4. Samples of water stops and joint fillers.
5. Color samples or charts for joint compounds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Joint Compounds
A. General: Compounds abutting each other are to be compatible.
B. Horizontal Joints: Joint compound for joints in horizontal or nearly horizontal

surfaces conform to ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25. Use to (Traffic)
sealant in pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas, and use NT (Non-Traffic) in non-
vehicular areas.
C. Wall Joints: Joint compound for joints in walls conform to ASTM C 920, Type S or M,
REVISIONS Grade NS, Class 25
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.02 Bond Breaker For Joint Compounds

DATE: _________________
A. Polyethylene tape, coated paper, metal foil or similar type materials.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.03 Pre-molded Joint filler

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Shall comply with requirements of ASTM D 1751
B. Furnish joint filler with thickness equivalent to joint width indicated and of suitable
length and width.
OPERATING DEPT. C. Furnish sheets of correct width, as far as practicable, so no longitudinal field cutting
will be required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
CERTIFIED 3.01 Construction Joints
BY: ___________________
A. General: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the
drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as
DATE: _________________
acceptable to SEC’s Representative.
B. Provide keyways at least 38 mm deep in all construction joints. Place construction

joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across
construction joints.
C. Forms: Use slightly tapered key groove forms to permit form removal without
damage to groove after concrete is cured.
D. Concrete Placement: Consolidate concrete during placement in vicinity of key and

key groove. Do not remove key or key groove forms until after concrete has cured.
03400-2

FOR 139
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Concrete Cleaning and Protection: Clean key or key groove of laitance, curing
compound, foreign materials, protrusions of hardened concrete and blow out debris
and dust with oil-free compressed air. Protect exposed key and key groove from
damage.
3.02 Expansion Joints
A. General: Provide expansion joints where shown on Drawings. Place waterstops in

expansion joints where required and as indicated.
B. Sidewalk Curb and Slabs:
1. Provide 13 mm thick expansion joints at all changes in direction of curbs and

sidewalks, between sidewalks and property walls, between sidewalks and
curb and gutter and around all structures in sidewalks. An additional
expansion joints shall be provided at not more than 10.0 m maximum interval
in sidewalks, curbs and gutter and as shown in drawing.
2. Install the joint filler strips vertically and to the full depth and width of the
REVISIONS concrete being placed. Place strips perpendicular to straight curb or
sidewalks and radially to the line of curb or sidewalks on a curb and to the
DRAWN BY: ___________ top of any surface of the concrete. Trim off excess filler strip in a neat
DATE: _________________
manner. Before placing and vibrating the concrete, fix the filler strip rigidly
and securely in the proper position.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.03 Isolation Joints in Slabs on Ground

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Provide isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on
ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, machine bases and elsewhere as indicated.
3.04 Pre-molded Joint Filler

OPERATING DEPT.
A. General: Treat cut surface as recommended by manufacturer, when filler strips are
cut.
B. Placement:
CERTIFIED
1. Prevent disturbance of or damage to joint filler
BY: ___________________
2. Fill expansion joint completely.
DATE: _________________
C. Cleaning and Protection: Clean groove of laitance, curing compound, foreign

materials, protrusions of hardened concrete, blow out dust with oil-free compressed
air.
3.05 Joint Compound
A. General: Clean and dry concrete to be sealed in accordance with manufacturer's

printed instruction. Joints must be environmentally safe by using five proof
compound.
03400-3

FOR 140
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Compound Placement:
1. Prime concrete, fill flush with joint compound of required thickness, tool to
concave joint and seal, if required, all in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, and ASTM C 962.
2. Prevent spilling compound over adjoining surfaces. Use tape adjacent to

joint if required. Remove all tape completely from concrete surface.
3. Do not seal when compound, air, or concrete temperature is less than 40

degrees F.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03400-4

FOR 141
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03500 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. Work in this Section includes but not limited to providing cast-in-place concrete
consisting of Portland cement, fine and coarse aggregates, water and selected
admixtures; combined, mixed transported, places, finished, and cured.
1.02 Related Work
A. Surveying and Monumentation
B. Earthwork
REVISIONS C. Section 01 Concrete Formwork
DRAWN BY: ___________ D. Section 02 Concrete Reinforcement

DATE: _________________
E. Section 04 Construction and Expansion Joints.
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
2. ACI 304-73, Recommended Practice for Measuring Mixing, Transporting and

OPERATING DEPT. Placing Concrete.
3. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting
4. ACI 308, Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.

CERTIFIED
5. ACI 311, Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection.
BY: ___________________
6. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
DATE: _________________
7. ACI 503.2, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
8. ACI 503, Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete.
9. ACI 503.4, Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy

Mortars.
03500-1

FOR 142
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 31, Test methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field.
2. ASTM C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C 39, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens.
4. ASTM C 40, Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
5. ASTM C 42, Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete.
6. ASTM C 94, Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
7. ASTM C 143, Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.

REVISIONS
8. ASTM C 150, Specification for Portland Cement.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
9. ASTM C 157, Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic
Cement Mortar and Concrete.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
10. ASTM C 171, Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
11. ASTM C 172, Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
12. ASTM C 192, Test Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Laboratory.
OPERATING DEPT. 13. ASTM C 309, Specifications for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
14. ASTM C 494, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
CERTIFIED 15. ASTM C 827, Test Method for Early volume Change of Cementitious
Mixtures.
BY: ___________________
16. ASTM 3 154, Methods of Testing Materials for use as Vapor Barriers under
DATE: _________________
Concrete Slabs and as Ground Cover in Crawl Spaces.
C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. AASHTO M 182, Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf.
2. AASHTO T 277,
D. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO):
1. SASO 142, Physical and Mechanical Testing Methods of Portland Cement.
03500-2

FOR 143
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. SASO 143, Portland Cement Ordinary and Rapid Hardening.

3. SASO 226, Methods for Sampling of Concrete Aggregates.
E. Relevent Company and Saudi ARAMCO Specifications and Stantards.
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the codes and standards as
specified in this section.
B. Concrete Testing: Materials and installed work may require testing and and
retesting, as directed by SEC Representative, at any time during the progress of the
Work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times.
C. Tests for Concrete Materials:
1. Submit written reports to SEC’s Representative, for each material sampled

and tested, prior to the start of Work. Provide the project identification name
REVISIONS
and number, date of report, name of CONTRACTOR, name of concrete
testing service, source of concrete aggregate, material manufacturer and
DRAWN BY: ___________ brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced
DATE: _________________ specification for each material, and test results.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified
APPROVED requirements may be submitted in lieu of testing, when acceptable to SEC’s
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Representative.
1.05 Submittals
A. Products Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications with application and installation

instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, bonding
OPERATING DEPT. agents, waterstops and joint systems.
B. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit for each design test reports for compressive
strength in accordance with ACI-318, latest edition. The minimum required number
of concrete test cylinders for strength tests shall be 1 tested at 3 days, 1 tested at 7
CERTIFIED
days, and 2 tested at 28 days.
BY: ___________________ C. Placement Schedule: Prepare a placement schedule and submit for review prior to
DATE: _________________ start of concrete placement operations.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit completely detailed and dimensioned drawings for all structural
reinforced concrete. Reinforcement and bar bending schedules shall be submitted in
accordance with Section 03200 of this Specification. CONTRACTOR's drawings shall also
locate all sleeves, openings and embedded items required by architectural, mechanical and
electrical and shall be submitted to SEC’s Representative for approval prior to construction.
03500-3
PART 2 PRODUCTS

FOR 144
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.01 Concrete Materials
A. Concrete material shall be as per ACI-310.
B. Fine aggregates for normal weight concrete, consist of well graded sand conforming
to ASTM C-33.
C. Maximum aggregate size permitted, 20 mm. Use non-reactive aggregate as

determined by the "alkali aggregate reaction test".
D. Cement: Portland cement conforming with ASTM C-150 and of the following types:
1. Type 1: For above-grade structures.
2. Type V: For structure resting on soil or below grade.
E. Admixtures: No admixtures may be used without the approval of SEC’s

Representative. Admixtures for concrete shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM C-494 type A&D.
REVISIONS F. Water: Fresh, potable, clean and free from oil, alkali, acid or vegetable matter.
Water solids should not exceed 500 ppm.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
G. Storage: Stockpile aggregate in such a manner that good drainage is provided.
Store cement to ensure that it stays dry.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.02. Moisture Barrier

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material. Use only materials
which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154.
Polyethylene sheet shall not be less than 150 microns thick.
2.03 Bonding Agent

OPERATING DEPT.
A. Chemical Bonding Agent; Film-forming, freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable for
brush or spray application.
2.04 Concrete Curing Materials

CERTIFIED
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 290
BY: ___________________
g/sq.m and complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 3.
DATE: _________________
B. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, or approved equal.
B. Water: Fresh, potable, clean and free from oil, alkali, acid or vegetable matter. Total Dissolved
Solids (TDS) should not exceed 1000ppm.
03500-4

FOR 145
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.05 Proportioning and Design of Mixes
A. Proportion concrete in accordance with these applicable ACI standards.
B. All concrete is to be watertight complying with the following:
1. Minimum concrete compressive strength developed at 28 days shall be as

shown on the drawing.
2. The maximum allowable water cement ratio shall conform with the
requirement of applicable ACI standards.
3. Coarse aggregates gradation shall be as described in ASTM C 33.
C. Both course and fine aggregates to conform to the chemical and physical
requirements of ACI-318, latest edition.
D. Concrete mix design shall be submitted to SEC Representative for review and
REVISIONS approval 30 days in advance prior to commencement of concrete work.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.01 Concrete Mixing
APPROVED
A. General: Concrete may be mixed at batch plants or it may be transit-mixed as
ENGINEERING DEPT.
specified herein. Batch plants shall be approved by SEC Representative. Batch
plants must comply with the requirements of ACI 304, with sufficient capacity to
produce concrete of the qualities specified in quantities required to meet the
construction schedule. All plant facilities are subject to testing laboratory inspection
and acceptance of SEC’s Representative.
OPERATING DEPT.
B. Ready-mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94.
C. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before

charging each batch. Schedule rates of delivery in order to prevent delay of placing
CERTIFIED the concrete after mixing, or holding dry-mixed materials too long in the mixer before
the addition of water and admixtures.
BY: ___________________
3.02 Field Quality Control
DATE: _________________
A. Employ an Independent Testing Laboratory that is approved by SEC’s

Representative to perform field quality control testing.
B. SEC’s Representative shall be informed at least 24 hours prior to any concrete

batching or pouring.
C. All concrete must be supplied by a supplier approved by SEC’s Representative.
C. Quality Control Testing During Construction.
03500-5

FOR 146
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1. Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of
concrete, as follows:
a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump

to comply with ASTM C 94.
b. Slump: ASTM C 143, one test for each concrete load at point of
discharge.
c. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31, one set of 4 standard

cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed. Cylinders shall be cured and tested in the laboratory.
d. Concrete temperature shall not exceed 32 degrees C at time of

placement. All efforts shall be made to maintain a temperature of
less than 32 degrees C until completion of placement.
e. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39, 1 specimen tested at 3

REVISIONS days, 1 specimen tested at 7 days, and two specimens tested at 28
days.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2. Testing laboratory shall report test results in writing to SEC Representative
and CONTRACTOR on the same day that tests are made. Reports of
CHK’D BY: ____________
compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and
APPROVED
number, date of concrete placement, name of CONTRACTOR, name of
concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing service,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, design compressive strength of 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and
type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day tests.
OPERATING DEPT. E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete
when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics
have not been attained in the structure, as directed by SEC’s Representative and at
no cost to SEC.
CERTIFIED F. Testing by SEC’s Representative: SEC’s Representative retains the right to test
concrete or any of its constituent parts at any time. The CONTRACTOR is to supply,
BY: ___________________
at no cost to SEC.
DATE: _________________
G. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: The concrete will be considered acceptable if
the following criteria are met:
1. The average of any 3 consecutive strength tests shall be equal to or greater

than the specified minimum 28 day strength.
2. No individual strength test is more than 3.45 MPa below the specified
minimum 28 day strength.
03500-6

FOR 147
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. If the test shall fail to meet the requirements of the above clauses the
concrete will be considered to be deficient in strength and will be subject to
further testing or demolition and reconstruction at the CONTRACTOR's
expense as decided by SEC’s Representative.
3.03 Pre-Placement Inspection
A. General: The CONTRACTOR's Quality control shall assure the following by

providing a signed item check list to the SEC.
1. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation,

reinforcing steel, and securely install all required inserts, anchors sleeves,
conduits and other items specified under other sections or as shown on the
Drawings to be embedded or cast into the concrete.
2. Where concrete is placed on the ground or as a sub-course, the substrate

upon which concrete is placed shall be clean, damp, and free from standing
or running water. Prior to placing concrete, the earth foundation shall have
REVISIONS been satisfactorily compacted to comply with Section 02200 Earthwork, and
all sub-grades approved by SEC’s Representative.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3. Soil under cast concrete foundations shall be subject to testing for soil
bearing value by the Independent Testing Laboratory, as directed by SEC’s
CHK’D BY: ____________
Representative. Place concrete immediately after approval of foundation
APPROVED
excavations and compaction.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form
coatings are not used.
5. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with

placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.04 Concrete Placement
A. General: Place concrete in compliance with the practices and recommendations of

ACI 304, and as herein specified:
CERTIFIED
1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete
BY: ___________________
shall be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section
DATE: _________________
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein
specified. Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete is still
plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any
procedure which will cause segregation.
2. Concrete vibrator shall be used with necessary precautions to get good,

sealed solid concrete. A standby vibrator shall be made available at site.
03500-7

FOR 148
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. Place all concrete within 45 minutes from the time concrete arrived at site,
and in no case shall placement time exceed 60 minutes from the time water
added to the mixture.
4. The unconfined free fall distance of concrete shall not exceed one meter.
5. Concrete which is to receive other construction is to be screeded to the

proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting.
6. Water shall not be used to re-temper or regain loss of slump. Remove

rejected concrete from the project site and dispose of it in an acceptable
location.
B. Placement Schedule: Place concrete in conformance with the placement schedule

to ensure an even distribution of loads throughout the entire structure.
C. Concrete Conveying:
1. Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the concrete
REVISIONS conveying equipment and to the locations of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable by methods which will prevent segregation and loss of concrete
DRAWN BY: ___________ mix materials.
DATE: _________________
2. Provide mechanical equipment for conveying concrete to ensure a
CHK’D BY: ____________
continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Provide runways for
APPROVED
wheeled concrete conveying equipment from the concrete delivery point to
the locations of final deposit. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
including chutes, free of hardened concrete, debris, water, and other
deleterious materials.
D. Placing Concrete Into Forms:
OPERATING DEPT. 1. Concrete mix shall not be deposited into forms from chutes, hoppers and
brackets at a free fall height greater than one meter above horizontal
formwork and one meter above bottom of vertical formwork.
2. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 300 mm

CERTIFIED unless additional thickness is permitted by SEC’s Representative, and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consist of
BY: ___________________
several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
DATE: _________________
3. Consolidate concrete places in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment

supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the
recommended practices of ACI 309 to suit the type of concrete and project
conditions. Vibration of forms and reinforcing will not be permitted.
03500-8

FOR 149
494
‫لمشعقي‬
4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and

withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than
the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate
the layer of concrete and at least 150 mm into the preceding layer. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each
insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate
the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.
5. In order to allow for shrinkage or settlement, at least 2 hours shall elapse

after placing concrete in walls or columns or stems of deep T-beams before
depositing concrete in girders, beams or slabs supported thereon, unless
otherwise specified or shown. If the columns are structural steel encased in
concrete, the lapse of time to allow for shrinkage or settlement need not be
observed.
6. Concrete in beams, slabs, and shallow T-beam construction shall be placed

in one continuous operation.
REVISIONS 7. Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation and

allowed to set at least 2 hours before the caps are placed.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
8. No concrete shall be placed in the superstructure until the column forms
have been stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the concrete in
CHK’D BY: ____________
the columns, and the load of the superstructure shall not be allowed to come
APPROVED
upon abutments, piers, and column bents until they have been in place at
least 7 days, unless otherwise permitted by SEC Representative.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the

limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is
OPERATING DEPT. completed.
2. Maintain reinforcing steel in the proper position continuously during concrete

placement operations.
3. Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating
CERTIFIED equipment, so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and
other embedded items and into corners.
BY: ___________________
4. Bring slab surface to the correct level with a straight edge and strike off. Use
DATE: _________________
bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or
hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the
slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
F. Bonding:
1. Roughen surfaces of set concrete at all joints, except where bonding is

obtained by use of a concrete bonding agent, and clean surfaces of laitance,
coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner
to expose bonded aggregate uniformly and not to leave laitance, loose
particles of aggregate, or damages concrete at the surface.
03500-9

FOR 150
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that has set but is not
fully cured, as follows:
a. Dampen, but not saturate, the roughened and cleaned surface of set
concrete and apply a coat of the bonding agents.
b. Bonding agent shall be FOSAM NITOBOND EP epoxy resin

concrete bonding agent or approved equal. Apply to cleaned
concrete surfaces in accordance with the printed instructions of the
bonding material manufacturer.
3. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to fully-cured hardened concrete or

existing concrete by using an epoxy-resin bonding agent in accordance with
ACI 503.2, and as follows:
a. Handle and store epoxy-resin adhesive binder in compliance with

the manufacturer's printed instructions, including safety precautions.
b. Mix the epoxy-resin adhesive binder in the proportions

REVISIONS recommended by the manufacturer, carefully following directions for
safety of personnel.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
c. Before depositing fresh concrete, thoroughly roughen and clean
hardened concrete surfaces and coat with epoxy-resin grout not less
CHK’D BY: ____________
than 2 mm thick. Place fresh concrete while the epoxy-resin
APPROVED
material is still tacky, without removing the in-place grout coat, and
as directed by the epoxy-resin manufacturer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
G. Hot Weather Placing:
1. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as
OPERATING DEPT. herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement below 32 degrees C. Mixing water may be chilled or flaked ice
may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water
CERTIFIED equivalent to the ice is calculated in the total amount of mixing water.
Readings shall be made immediately before concrete is placed.
BY: ___________________
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes excessively
DATE: _________________
hot so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature
immediately before embedment in concrete.
4. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
03500-10

FOR 151
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.05 Piping
A. Joints shall be constructed as per Section 03251 Construction and Expansion Joints.
3.06 Monolithic Slab Finish
A. Floor Finish:
1. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces
which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing membrane
and as otherwise shown on Drawings or in schedules.
2. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for
floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared or when the
concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation of a power-driven
float, or both. Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats or by hand-
floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level the
surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 6 mm on the surface at not less
REVISIONS than 2 different angles. Cut down high spots and fill all low spots. Uniformly
slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, re-float the surface to a
DRAWN BY: ___________ uniform, smooth, granular texture.
DATE: _________________
B. Non-Slip Broom Finish:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior walkways, and elsewhere as shown
on the Drawings or in schedules.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by

brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use fiber-
bristle broom unless otherwise directed. Coordinate the required final finish
with SEC Representative before application.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.07 Concrete Curing and Protection
A. General: Initial curing shall begin as soon as free moisture has disappeared from the
concrete surface after placing and finishing. Curing shall be continuous for 14 days.
CERTIFIED Only sweet water shall be used for curing, as per para 2.04 of this section.
BY: ___________________
B. Curing Method: Provide moisture curing for all concrete by any of the following
methods:
DATE: _________________
1. Keeping the surface of the concrete continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Continuous water-fog spray.
3. Covering the concrete surface with the specified absorptive cover,

thoroughly saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive cover
continuously wet. Place cover so as to provide coverage of the concrete
surfaces and edges with a 100 mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
03500-11

FOR 152
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden form
or metal forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the
forms continually wet until they can be safely removed. After form removal the
concrete curing period shall continue as specified above.
D. Temperature of Concrete During Curing:
1. When the atmospheric temperature is 26 degrees C and above, or during

other climatic conditions which will cause too rapid drying of the concrete,
make arrangements before the start of concrete placing for the installation of
wind breaks or shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or moisture-
retaining covering. protect the concrete continuously for the concrete curing
period. Provide hot weather protection complying with the requirements of
ACI
2. Maintain concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, and protect from

rapid atmospheric temperature changes. Avoid temperature changes in
concrete which exceed 2 degrees C in any one hour and 10 degrees C in
any 24 hour period.
REVISIONS
E. Protection From Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, protect concrete from
DRAWN BY: ___________ damaging mechanical disturbances including load stresses, heavy shock, excessive
DATE: _________________
vibration, and from damage caused by rain or flowing water. Protect all finished
concrete surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operations.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.08 Concrete Surface Repairs

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. General: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
removal of forms, but only when directed by SEC Representative.
B. Patching: Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 12 mm diameter, and holes
left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case, to a depth of less
OPERATING DEPT. than 25 mm. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before
placing the cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the
area to be patched with neat cement grout. Before placing sand/cement mortar,
apply an approved bonding agent.
CERTIFIED C. Exposed Surfaces: For exposed surfaces, blend white Portland cement and
standard Portland cement so that, when dry, the patching mortar will match the color
BY: ___________________
of the surrounding concrete. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify
mixture and color match before proceeding with the patching. Compact mortar in
DATE: _________________
place and strike off slightly higher than the surrounding surface.
D. Large Repairs to Existing Structures: Repairs to existing structures are to conform to

ACI 503.2.
3.9 Deficiencies
A. Non-Conformance: Concrete Work which does not conform to the specified

requirements, including strength, tolerance, and finishes, shall be corrected at the
CONTRACTOR's expense. The CONTRACTOR shall
also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any work affected by or resulting
from corrections to the concrete Work.
03500-12

FOR 153
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Tests: In the event that additional testing becomes necessary, the CONTRACTOR
shall cooperate with and provide assistance to SEC’s Representative in proceeding
with the test.
- END SECTION -03500-13
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03500-13

FOR 154
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section,
This section covers the work of concrete floor toppings as required by the contract for
providing an increased thickness, higher strength, or' an undamaged finished floor and
includes the following items.
 Toppings for substrates of resilient flooring and carpets

REVISIONS  Sloped concrete for roofs (screed)
 Heavy-duty aggregate, abrasion resistant toppings:
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Extent of each type of concrete floor toppings is indicated on Drawings.
CHK’D BY: ____________
1.3 Definitions
APPROVED
Topping are used over base slabs in thin overlays from 20 to 50 mm thick to form a dense,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
low permeability high strength surface, to function effectively.
Concrete floor topping work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of
OPERATING DEPT. the British Standards (BS) and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), or other
equivalent international standards and Sound Practice.
1.5 Submittals
CERTIFIED Submit the required in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Division - 1
specification section.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
1.5.1 The Contractor shall finish data, samples, laboratory test as specified in Section 5
"Concrete and Reinforced Concrete"
1.5.2 Certificates Submit materials certificates from manufacturers attesting that materials
used provide heavy duty floor toppings and meet referenced standards, and comply
with requirements indicated.
1.6 Quality Control
1.6.1 Installer Qualifications: an experienced installer who has completed work similar in
material, design and extent to that for this project.
03532-1

FOR 155
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.6.2 Mock up: Cast topping mock-up to demonstrate typical surface finish, bonding,
textures, tolerances and standard of workmanship.
 Build mock-ups of approximately 6 m2 in location indicated

 Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed work.
1.7 Coordination of Work
Coordinate the work of concrete floor toppings with the work of other trades that penetrates
or adjoins toppings. Do not begin with pouring topping or screed at any area until penetration
work is complete.
1.8 Delivery and Storage
1.8.1 Deliver heavy-duty floor topping additives and curing compound in manufacturers
original unopened containers or packages. Each container shall bear the following
information:
REVISIONS
 Manufacturer's identification, brand name or trade mark.
 Manufacturer's batch number and date of manufacture.
DRAWN BY: ___________  Directions for storage.
DATE: _________________  Ingredients.
CHK’D BY: ____________  Mixing with other components and application instructions
APPROVED 1.8.2 Store Materials to comply with manufactures written instruction to prevent
ENGINEERING DEPT. deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.9 Project Conditions
1.9.1 Environmental limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for

substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity
OPERATING DEPT.
ventilation and other conditions affecting topping performance.
 Place topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of base slabs are
between 15º and 35 ºC.
CERTIFIED
 Close area to traffic during topping application and, after application for time period
recommended by manufacturer.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Portland Cement: Complying with BS12 and ASTM A150 "Ordinary Portland
Cement".
2.1.2 Standard-Aggregate: Aggregate constitute a large proportion of the concrete volume

and are a definite influence in the wear resistance of the floor surface. Standard
aggregates of gravel or crushed stone or other suitable materials, may be used.
Aggregates should comply with ASTM.
03532-2

FOR 156
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.1.2.1 Fine Aggregate: consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard,
and free from deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
Sieve Size Percent Passing

10 mm: 100 percent
No. 4: 95-100 percent
2.1.2.2 Coarse Aggregate: consisting of gravel or crushed stone of sufficient

toughness and hardness, clean, hard, free from dust and deleterious matter.
Grade by weight to pass sieve as follows:
BS. Sieve Size Percent Passing
13 mm: 100 percent

REVISIONS 10 mm: 30-50 percent
No. 4: 0-15 percent
DRAWN BY: ___________ No. 8: 0-5 percent
DATE: _________________
Furnish selected aggregate to match Engineer's finish sample.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.1.3 Aggregate for Heavy-Duty Toppings:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.1.3.1 Coarse Aggregate: Selected, clean, hard, and tough material, either natural
or crushed, granite, basalt, dolomite or other suitable material as acceptable
to Engineer.
Materials containing a large proportion of elongated or thin fragments should

OPERATING DEPT. not be used.
2.1.3.2 Mineral Aggregates: Factory-prepared, dry packaged mixture of graded,

crushed emery aggregate containing not less than:
CERTIFIED 50% aluminium oxide.

24% ferric oxide
BY: ___________________
and not more than 8% silica, and portland cement, plasticizer, and other
DATE: _________________
admixtures to which only water needs to be added at Project Site.
2
Compressive strength (28 days) 500 kg/cm .
2.1.3.3 Iron Aggregates: Factory prepared and dry package mixture of graded iron
aggregates portland cement, plasticizers, and other admixtures to which only
water needs to be added at Project Site.
2
Compressive strength (28 days) 720 kg/cm .
03532-3

FOR 157
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.1.4 Reinforcement: welded steel wire fabric.
2.1.5 Water: Clean potable water free from oil, salt, acid, alkali, organic or other
deleterious matter
2.1.6 Admixtures: Type approved by the Engineer and conforming to ASTM C494
2.1.7 Curing Compound: Type compatible with adhesives for overlaying finish materials,
approved by Engineer and complying with ASTM C 309.
2.2 Topping Mixes
2.2.1 Standard Topping (screed): Concrete mix shall be composed of I. m3 of coarse

aggregate, 0.5 m3 sand and 250 kg cement for roof sloped concrete, and 300.kg for
resilient flooring or carpet substrates.
Design mix to produce topping material with the following characteristics:
 Characteristic concrete compressive strength, 180 kg/cm at 28 days.

2
REVISIONS
 Slump; 200 mm maximum at point of placement for concrete containing high-range

DRAWN BY: ___________ water reducing admixture (super-plasticizer) and 75 mm maximum for other
DATE: _________________ concrete.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Maximum W/C ratio; 0.50.
APPROVED
Use of admixture is optional to the Contractor and at no additional cost to the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Employer. Type of admixture used shall be approved by the Engineer.
2.2.2 Heavy-Duty Topping: Design mix to produce heavy-duty topping material with the
following characteristics:
 Characteristic concrete compressive strength; 350 kg/cm at 28 days.

2
OPERATING DEPT.
 Slump; 200 mm maximum at point of placement for concrete containing high-range

water reducing admixture (super-plasticizer) and 75 mm maximum for other
concrete.
CERTIFIED
Maximum W/C ration; 0.44.

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
The amount of mixing water shall not be increased to produce workability.
2.2.3 High Abrasion Floor Topping: Ready-mixed topping complying with requirements of
ASTM C 94 may be used when acceptable to Engineer. Provide ready mix topping
materials consisting of special graded emery or iron particles, cement, and high
performance workability plasticizing agent.
Formulate, process, and package topping materials under stringent quality control at
manufacturer's owned and controlled factory or heavy-duty aggregates with cement,
sand and a plasticizing agent.
03532-4

FOR 158
494
‫لمشعقي‬
High abrasion topping shall provide a dense, non-porous, hard wearing and abrasion
resistant surface.
Provide material which will produce finish topping with 28 day compressive strength,
2 2
720 kg/cm or 500 kg/cm according to material and requirements.
Surface colour shall be as indicated on Drawings or directed by Engineer, white

cement may be used to obtain the required colour.
Available thickness 50 mm.

Minimum topping thickness; -25 mm.
2.2.4 Bonding Slurry: Mix portland cement with water to a thick paint consistency or mix I
part portland cement with 1½ to 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic bonding
agent, to a thick paint consistency.
2.2.5 Curing Materials: Evaporation retarder reduces moisture loss from topping surface
awaiting finishing in hot, dry and windy conditions:
REVISIONS
 Waterbome, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh

DRAWN BY: ___________ mortar.
DATE: _________________  Absorptive cover, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately
2
CHK’D BY: ____________
305 g/m when dry.
 Moisture retaining cover, polyethylene film or white burlaps polyethylene sheet.
APPROVED  Potable water.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.2.6 Epoxy Adhesive: 2 component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to
damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
2.3 Mixing
OPERATING DEPT. 2.3.1 Provide batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at project site.
Equip batch mixer with a suitable charging hopper, water storage tank, and a water-
measuring device. Use only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement,
and water into a uniform mix within specified time, and of discharging mix without
segregation.
CERTIFIED
3
Mix each batch of 0.750 m or less for at least 1 1/2 minute after ingredients are in
3
BY: ___________________ mixer. Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional 0.500 m or fraction
DATE: _________________
thereof
The amount of mixing water shall not be increased to produce workability.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Condition of Surfaces
Floor topping shall be placed in a relatively thin, non-reinforced layer of 25 mm to 50 mm or

shall be so determined to have finished floors elevations as indicated on Drawings and shall
be compacted by tamping, rolling, floating and trowelling. Water-content admixture must be
used.
03532-5

FOR 159
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Particular attention shall be paid to ensure full compaction as it is desirable to have maximum
coarse aggregate near the surface.
3.1.1 Topping Applied to Fresh Concrete: Do not begin placement of topping until water
ceases to rise to surface, and water and laitance have been removed from base slab
surface and while concrete is still plastic.
If topping is deferred within 72 hours of placing base slabs prior to placing topping
mixture, thoroughly dampen slab surface but do not leave standing water. Over
dampened surface, apply specified bonding compound mix and scrub bonding slurry
into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.5 to 3 mm without puddling, place
topping while slurry is still tacky.
3.1.2 Topping Applied to Hardened Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments,

unsound concrete, dirt, loose material, oil, grease, paint or other contaminants,
leaving a clean surface. Fill voids, cracks and cavities in base slabs.
When base slab surface is smooth and unacceptable for good bonding, roughen
REVISIONS surface by chipping, scarifying or mechanically abrade base slab to produce a
heavily scarified surface with an amplifies of 6 mm before cleaning.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Install joint filler strips where topping about vertical surfaces, such as column, walls,
and other locations indicated.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Extend joint filler full depth of topping terminating flush with topping surface or 13 mm
below topping surface where joint sealants are indicated.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Apply epoxy bonding adhesive mixed according to manufacturer's instruction and

scrub into dry base slab 1.5 to 3 mm without puddling.
Place topping mix while epoxy adhesive is still tacky.

OPERATING DEPT.
3.1.3 For Reinforced Toppings: provide necessary chairs or supports, and maintain
position of reinforcing mesh as shown on drawings.
3.1.4 Joints: Mark locations of joints in base slab so that joints in top course shall be
CERTIFIED placed directly over them.
BY: ___________________
3.2 Placing and Compacting
DATE: _________________
3.2.1 Float Finish: Spread topping mixture continuously in a single layer. Evenly over
prepared base to the required elevation, strike off and tamp to achieve tight contact
with bonding surface. Use highway straightedge, bull float, or derby to level surface.
After the topping has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water
sheen has disappeared, slope surfaces uniformly where indicated float the surface
with a wooden float, at least twice to a uniform sandy texture suitable for placing tile
foams or carpet. Re-straighten where necessary with highway straightedge. In large
areas use the disk of power driven floats as soon as topping can support equipment
and operator.
03532-6

FOR 160
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Check and level surface plane to tolerance not exceeding 5 mm in 3 m when Tested
cut down high areas and fill low areas, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth finish.
For sloped concrete screed on roof, uniformly slope surface to drains as indicated on
Drawings, minimum thickness near drains shall be 40 mm.
Where joints are required, construct to match and coincide with joints in base
slab. Provide other joints as shown.
Construct joint true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plans of topping.
3.2.2 Trowel Finish: After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power driven
trowels. Continue trowelling until surface is ready to receive final trowelling. Begin
trowelling when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface.
Continue final trowel operation and re-straighten to produce finished surface free of
trowel marks, smooth, uniform in texture and appearance.
REVISIONS 3.3 Grind Smooth Finish
DRAWN BY: ___________ To the maximum possible extent, lay topping in areas that can be covered and finished within
DATE: _________________
same work day.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Thorough compact topping by heavy tamping or mechanical means. Topping over 40 mm,
APPROVED
thick may be laid in 2 equal layers of same mix, rake or otherwise roughen lower layer and
immediately cover with the upper one.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Begin surface grinding, using power-driven, abrasive stone floor grinders, after wearing
course has hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodgment of aggregate particles. Keep floor
wet during grinding process, Remove ground-off material with squeegee and flush with
water.
OPERATING DEPT.
Fill air holes, pits, and other blemishes with cement grout of same materials as used for
topping. Spread grout over surface and work into openings with a steel straight edge. Rub
grout into floor surface by use of grinding machine. Keep floor moist an additional 3 days
before final grinding.
CERTIFIED
When topping surface is in proper condition, begin second or final grinding to remove grout
BY: ___________________
film and polish surface. After final grinding and polishing, wash thoroughly and remove
surplus material.
DATE: _________________
The introduction of smoothing compounds or other unspecified materials, or the sprinkling of

cement onto the surface of topping shall not be accepted.
Conduct grinding operations and use such techniques as required to provide surface finish to
match Engineer's sample.
3.4 Curing and Protection
3.4.1 Protect freshly placed topping from premature drying and excessive hot temperature.
Proper curing for topping is essential as soon as possible after finishing.

03532-7

FOR 161
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Cure and protect topping applications and finishes as specified in Section 03005
"Concrete and Reinforced Concrete" for at least a week.
Apply evaporation retarder to topping, surfaces in hot, dry or windy conditions before
and during finishing operations.
Begin curing immediately after finishing topping cure by one or a combination of the
following methods.
3.4.2 Moisture Curing: Keep surface continuously moist for not less than 7 days with water
and absorptive cover and kept continuously wet.
3.4.3 Moisture Retaining Cover: Cover concrete with a moisture retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width. Cure for not less than 7 days.
3.4.4 Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operation with power
spray or roller. Maintain continuity of coatings and repair damage during curing
period.
REVISIONS
3.5 Performance
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by a hollow sound when
tapped), or disintegration or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish, shall be
CHK’D BY: ____________
considered failure of materials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas of such
APPROVED
failures, as directed by the Engineer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03532-8

FOR 162
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03550 - FAIRFACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section,
This section covers the work of fairface concrete work as required by the contract for
providing smooth natural finish to required surfaces.
REVISIONS Flush wood doors work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the
British Standards (BS) and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), or other
DRAWN BY: ___________ equivalent international standards and Sound Practice.
DATE: _________________
1.4 Submittals
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Submit the required in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Division - 1
specification section.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.4.1 The Contractor shall finish data, samples, laboratory test as specified in Section
1.4.2 Certificates Submit materials certificates from manufacturers at testing that materials
OPERATING DEPT. used provide smooth natural fairface concrete and comply with requirements
indicated.
1.5 Quality. Assonance
CERTIFIED 1.5.1 Installer Qualifications: an experienced installer who has completed work similar in
material, design and extent to that for this project.
BY: ___________________
1.6 Coordination of Work
DATE: _________________
Coordinate the work of fairface concrete work with the work of other trades that penetrates or
adjoins surfaces.
1.7.1 Environmental limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for

substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity
ventilation and other conditions affecting fairface performance.
03550-1

FOR 163
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Cast concrete only when ambient temperature and temperature of surfaces

are between 15º and 35 ºC.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Formwork
Formwork for exposed concrete surfaces shall conform to the applicable

requirements of "Form Work" in addition to these specifications.
All concrete surfaces that are to be left exposed to view as a finished surface, shall
be produced by the surface of the form either metal or wood.
All quality of the surface of concrete exposed to view shall be consistent throughout
the Project and the following method shall be adopted to obtain the required finish.
1. Timber with one face treated in workshop to a smooth surface where vertical
REVISIONS
or horizontal shuttering is required as an exposed finish.
2. Metal forms of an approved type for smooth finish.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3. Hard-pressed fiber-board with one smooth face at least 6mm thick for
DATE: _________________ smooth finish.
CHK’D BY: ____________
The Contractor may submit alternative proposals for the Engineer's approval if he so
APPROVED desires.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Timber used throughout the project shall be aged at equal intervals and great care
shall be taken in stacking the timber on site and shall be equally exposed to climatic
conditions and sunlight.
2.1.2 Rigidity and Jointing

OPERATING DEPT.
All formwork shall be adequately rigid and well supported to avoid undue
deformation, loss of alignment and uneven vibration characteristics. All joints
between boards and between panels shall be well sealed. Method of jointing shall be
approved by the Engineer ahead of commencement of works.
CERTIFIED
2.1.3 Coating Forms with Mineral Oil

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
In addition to the above forms or linings, the forms shall be coated before placing
reinforcements with an approved colorless mineral oil free of kerosene.
All surplus oil on form surfaces and any oil on reinforcing steel shall be removed.
03550-2

FOR 164
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.1.4 Concrete Mixes
Aggregates shall be uniform throughout the project and cement shall be obtained
from one source. Aggregate, cement and water ratios and slump values shall be
adjusted to suit the required work.
2.1.5 Construction joints
Construction joints, if they are not clearly indicated on the Drawing, shall not be
allowed.
Construction joints, in cases where weather conditions so require shall be studied in

detail ahead of time and the joint shall be grooved in a predetermined pattern
approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Employer.
2.1.6 Release Agents
Only approved chemical release agents, mold creams (emulsion of water in oil) or
oils containing a minimum amount of surfactant are permitted. Water soluble
REVISIONS emulsions and oils without surfactant additive shall not be used. Oil based release
agents shall be applied in advance of concreting, by spray or by roller. Chemical
DRAWN BY: ___________ release agents shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's
DATE: _________________
recommendations.
CHK’D BY: ____________
PART 3 EXECUTION
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.1 Samples and Workmanship
The Contractor shall submit for approval a sample panel not less than 600 x 1200mm to
demonstrate the quality of the exposed concrete produced by forms at his own expense.
OPERATING DEPT. The quality of the finished work shall be measured against the quality of the approved
sample panel and work of inferior quality shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
Engineer without any additional cost.
The quality of the finished surfaces shall be uniform in color, and consistency, throughout the
CERTIFIED Project. Should there be any inconsistency, whether in color or in texture, in any of the
finished surfaces, the Engineer may order the repair in case of very minor defects as directed
BY: ___________________
by the Engineer or the demolition of that portion of concrete work and the reconstruction of
same at the expense of the Contractor and the Contractor shall have no right to claim for any
DATE: _________________
expenses or time delay incurred.
Alternatively, the Engineer may order the Contractor to plaster all exposed surfaces and
bush-hammer the entire area of concrete in the Project so as to render all exposed surfaces
of concrete consistent throughout the project at the Contractor's own expense.
3.2 Striking Formwork
Strike formwork after similar interval of time - not less than 4 days unless permitted by the
Engineer. Avoid touching freshly exposed concrete and postpone any cleaning operation
until at least 3 weeks after removal of formwork. Make good any surface damage
immediately.
03550-3

FOR 165
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3 Approval
All fairfaced concrete surfaces shall be smooth or textured as shown on drawings, fairface
concrete surfaces shall have same surface without any defects in color and in shape if any
surfaces rejected by the engineer the contractor shall take all necessary measures to treat
this surfaces by a skilled workmanship and material on his own expense and as directed by
the Engineer.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03550-4

FOR 166
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 03600 - GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Grout and Grouting.
A. Section 03005 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
B. Section 04200 Unit Masonry.
C. Section 07920 Sealant and Caulking

REVISIONS
E. Section 05520 Structural Steel Work.
DRAWN BY: ___________
1.3 REFERENCES
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ A. American Society for Testing & Materials

APPROVED
C 33 Concrete Aggregate.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C 150 Portland Cement.
1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE
OPERATING DEPT. A. Cement and Pre-Mixed Grout: Store in watertight buildings or bins.
B. Sand: Stockpile sand in manner to prevent contamination with other materials or

with other sizes of aggregate. Allow sand to drain until it has reached a uniform
moisture content before it is used.
CERTIFIED
1.5 SUBMITTALS
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ A. Manufacturer's data.
B. Design Mix.
C. Application Schedule.
03600-1

FOR 167
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Where true non-shrink characteristics are not mandatory, site mixed grout shall use
clean well graded sand that meets the requirements of Type V Portland cement (s
defined by ASTM C150) and potable water. Minimum 28 days compressive strength
shall be 13.8 MPa (2000 psi).
B. Where non-shrink characteristics are required cementitious grout of minimum 28 days

compressive strength shall be 34.5 MPa (5000 psi).
2.2 MIXES
A. General: Mix all parts by volume.
B. Site Mixed Grout: 1 part Portland cement, 1 part sand and the least amount of water
REVISIONS to provide hydration and workability.
DRAWN BY: ___________

C. Non-shrink Grout: As per manufacturer’s instructions.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

PART 3 EXECUTION
APPROVED
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Bearing surfaces to be grouted shall be roughened to expose coarse aggregate.
3.2 CLEANING
OPERATING DEPT. A. Prior to placing grout, remove all foreign matter from concrete bearing surfaces.
B. Pre-soak all surfaces to be grouted at least 24 hours prior to grouting with Portland
cement grout.
CERTIFIED
3.3 PRODUCT APPLICATION
BY: ___________________ A. Non-shrink Grout shall be used for precision, non-shrink grouting in the following
DATE: _________________ applications:
1. All grouting of structural base plates, of columns, beams and machinery.
B. Ordinary grout shall be used for all non-precision grouting such as structural back fill,
masonry grout, pipe sleeves and drains and other applications (precast) where non
shrink characteristics are not mandatory.
C. Ordinary grout shall be packed in place to ensure the complete filling of the area to
be grouted. It shall be cured for a period not less than 72 hours. When the water
cement ratio is 0.4 or less the grout shall be continuously water cured for a minimum
of 7 days.
03600-2

FOR 168
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Non-shrink grout to be cured at manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES
A. General: After being plumbed and properly positioned, column base plates, bearing
plates for beams and similar structural members, and machinery and equipment
base plates shall be grouted, as required by SEC Standards. Plates shall be set and
anchored to the proper line and elevation. Metal wedges, shims, and/or setting nuts
shall be used for leveling and plumbing structural members. Concrete and metal
surfaces in contact with grout shall be clean and free of oil and grease. Concrete
surfaces shall be free of laitance and shall be dampened but not puddled.
B. Non-shrink Grout: Literature and test data on the material shall be furnished
confirming that a flowable mixture will give a hardened grout with a slight expansion
and possessing the other properties needed for the application proposed. Mixing and
placing shall conform to the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Forms of
wood or other suitable material shall be used to retain the grout. The grout shall be
REVISIONS
placed from one side only quickly and continuously, completely filling the space
without segregation or bleeding of the mix. Grout shall be cured as per SEC
Standards.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ - END OF SECTION -03600-3
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
03600-3

FOR 169
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 04100 - MORTAR
PART 1 GENERAL

Particular Applications and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 Summary
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of mortar and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to. the following:
Mortar for unit masonry.

REVISIONS
1.3 Related Section

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ The following section includes requirements which relate to this section:
CHK’D BY: ____________
Section 04200 Unit Masonry
Section 09220 Plastering
APPROVED
Section 09310 Ceramic Tiles
Section 09350 Cement & Terrazo Tiles
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.5 Submittals
OPERATING DEPT. 1.5.1 Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for
materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are
delivered to the site.
1.5.2 Certificates: Submit certificates attesting to compliance with these specifications for
CERTIFIED approval. Obtain approval prior to shipment of materials.
BY: ___________________ 1.6 Quality Assurance

DATE: _________________
Materials shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to
applicable codes and requirements of local authorities handing jurisdiction.
British Standards (BS).

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one
manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each
aggregate.
04100-1

FOR 170
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.6.1 Tests
Test each mortar type in accordance with ASTM CT80.

Provide mortar materials for prism tests specified in Section 04200.
1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Deliver materials specified herein in manufacturer's unopened containers, with

manufacturer's name and point of origin on each container.
Deliver materials and handle as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the damage
of materials by water.
Store materials and equipment where designated and assume responsibility and security for
materials and equipment. Store materials off the ground, under cover and in a dry location.
Take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions.
Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.
REVISIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2.1 MATERIALS
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.1.1 Portland Cement shall be manufactured in Saudi Arabia and comply with the
APPROVED
following:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM C150, Type I or B.S. 12. Provide natural color, non-staining, without air-
entertainment.
2.1.2. Aggregates: Natural, clean, washed, hard sand particles of mineral origin conforming
to the following:
OPERATING DEPT.
Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C 144 or B.S. 1200.
Aggregates for Grout: ASTM C104.
Use white sand (natural or ground white stone) when non-staining is used and
CERTIFIED required.
BY: ___________________
2.1.3. Water: Potable and free of salts and deleterious substances.
DATE: _________________
2.1.4. Masonry Cements: The use of masonry cements is prohibited.
2.2 MIXES AND MIXING
Thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, comply
with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
Provide equipment and accessories required for mixing mortar.
Changing source or bands of materials during course of work is prohibited unless approved
by the Engineer.
04100-2

FOR 171
494
‫لمشعقي‬
The volume of mixed material per batch shall not exceed the manufacturer's rated capacity of
the mixer drum in cubic feet of mixed material.
Empty the drum before the succeeding batch is placed therein.
Keep mixers. wheel barrows, etc. clean. Mortar shall not be deposited upon or come in
contact with the ground.
Proportions shall be by volume. Mix mortar by machine only, for not less than five minutes.
Add a minimum quantity of water for workability.
Mixes
Mortar: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar specified.
Type S mortar for exterior masonry backup.
Type N mortar for non-load bearing walls.

REVISIONS
Grout: Comply with ASTM C476 for grout for use in construction of reinforced and
DRAWN BY: ___________ nonreinforced masonry. Use grout of consistence; indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of
DATE: _________________
consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will fill spaces intended to receive
grout.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 50.8mm in horizontal direction, unless otherwise
indicated.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Use coarse grout in grout spaces 50.8mm or more in least horizontal dimension, unless
otherwise indicated.
OPERATING DEPT. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Refer to Section 04200 "Unit Masonry".

CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
04100-3

FOR 172
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 04200 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL

Particular Applications and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 Summary
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of Unit Masonry and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein.
Work Included: Work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
REVISIONS 1. Interior concrete masonry unit walls and partitions.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Concrete masonry unit exterior wall back-up.

DATE: _________________
3. Concrete masonry unit lintels (Bond Beam Units).
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
4. Precast concrete lintels.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
5. Grouting of metal items into masonry work.
6. Furnishing dovetail anchor slots for installation in concrete for anchoring masonry.
7. Furnishing and installation of anchors, joint reinforcement, and wall Lies, joint filler
OPERATING DEPT. strips, expansion joints and other items as specified herein.
1.3 Related Section
The following section includes requirements which relate to this section:

CERTIFIED
Concrete
BY: ___________________
Mortar
Exterior Stone
DATE: _________________
Doors and Frames
Plaster
Other applicable related work in applicable specification sections
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for
materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are
delivered to the site. Product data shall be submitted on the following:
04200-1

FOR 173
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Concrete block.
B. Joint reinforcing.
C. Anchors, ties, control and expansion joints, and accessories.
1.4.2 Certificates attesting to compliance with these specifications shall be submitted

to the Engineer for approval. Obtain approval prior to shipment of materials.
Certificates shall include the following:
a. Concrete Block: Certification that block meets reference standard and fire
ratings specified herein.
1.4.3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval and
obtain approval before materials are delivered to the job site. Shop drawings shall
show the following:
a. Anchoring details.
b. Control joint locations and details.
REVISIONS c. Reinforced masonry lintels.
d. Coordinate shop drawings with work of Exterior Stonework.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.4.4 Samples
CHK’D BY: ____________
a. Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval, and obtain
APPROVED
approval before materials are delivered to the site.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
b. Deliver to the job site two samples of concrete masonry units for approval
of color and texture.
OPERATING DEPT. 1.5.1 Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein, required fire ratings and to applicable codes and requirements of
local authorities having jurisdiction.
a. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).

CERTIFIED
b. British Standards (BS)
BY: ___________________
c. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and
DATE: _________________
construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire
endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM El 19
by a recognized testing and inspecting.
1.5.2 Mockup
a. After approval of samples and prior to installation of masonry work, erect

sample mockup using materials, bond and joint tooling required for final
work. Locate mockup where directed.
04200-2

FOR 174
494
‫لمشعقي‬
b. Build sample mock-up indicating finish, texture, jointing, anchors,

reinforcement and workmanship to be expected in the completed work.
Mock-tip size as indicated on the drawings.
c. Reconstruct mockup until it meets with the Engineer's approval.
d. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of the mockup before

start of masonry work.
e. Retain mockup during construction as standard for judging completed

masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mockup until work is
completed and accepted by the Engineer.
1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Deliver materials specified herein, with manufacturer's name and point of origin, labeled or
tagged on Materials with each delivery.
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials fi6rn damage, moisture, dirt and intrusion of
REVISIONS foreign matter. Store masonry units and mortar materials on raised platforms and under
ventilated and waterproof cover. Immediately resea1 containers after partial use, Remove
DRAWN BY: ___________ and replace damaged materials.
DATE: _________________
Pack, deliver and store masonry units to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping, spalling or
CHK’D BY: ____________
other damage.Carefully unload and stack materials. Dumping is prohibited. Store, protect
APPROVED
and ventilate units at project site.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Store and protect reinforcement and anchors so that when placed, materials will be free of
soil, dirt, ice, loose rust or scale which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar.
Arrange storage of material or equipment on floors of the structure so as not to overstress

the supporting structure orany of its components.
OPERATING DEPT.
Protect work in progress from weather, dehydration and damage. Cover in completed work
until progress is resumed. Securely install covers in place. Ensure that there is free air flow
CERTIFIED sufficient to prevent heat build
BY: ___________________
Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be lcft exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
DATE: _________________
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by spreading covers on
ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
1.8 Pre-Installation Coordination
Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the start of masonry work, meet at the site and review
the installation procedures and coordination with other work. Meeting shall include
04200-3

FOR 175
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Contractor, Engineer and major material manufacturers as well as others whose work must
be coordinated with the masonry work.
Coordination With Inserts: Ensure coordination between masonry work and concrete work
such that all inserts and flashing reglets required for the proper installation of masonry work
are correctly pre-installed.
Pre-Installation Inspection: Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions
under which the masonry work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the installation of masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Concrete Masonry Units (Concrete Block) shall be manufactured in Saudi Arabia
conforming to the following:
REVISIONS a. Concrete masonry units shall be of nominal sizes of 300mmx400mm,

200mmx400mm, 150mmx400mm and 100mmx400mm in thickness as
DRAWN BY: ___________ indicated on drawings having two or three vertical cells, and not more than
DATE: _________________
3mm variation in actual dimension, rectangularity or surface wind.
CHK’D BY: ____________
b. Non-Load-Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks to Receive Plaster: ASTM C129
APPROVED
or B.S. 6073 Part 1, using concrete aggregates complying,.with ASTM
C33 or B.S. 882, with dry net concrete weight of not less than 2000 kg/cu.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
m., Type 1 or the equivalent grade of B. S. 6073, Parts 1 and 2.
c. Fairfaced Non-Load-Bearing Hollow Concrete Blocks: ASTM C129 or B.S.

6073 Part 1, using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C3 3 or B.S.
882, with dry net concrete weight of not less than 2000 kg/cu.m. , Type 1 or
OPERATING DEPT. the equivalent grade of B.S. 6073, Parts 1 and 2.
d. Fire Rating: Concrete masonry units used for fire-rated walls or partitions
shall be capable of providing ratings as defined by the applicable Building
Code. The producer of the concrete masonry units shall furnish certification
CERTIFIED from an independent testing laboratory confirming that 200mm or larger
masonry units meet all of the U.L. 618 requirements. For two (2) hours or
BY: ___________________
better, as required, referencing full scale fire test reports in accordance with
ASTM E 119.
DATE: _________________
e. Provide special shapes for bonding, rebated blocks to receive control joints,
bullnose units for corners except where corner guards installed by others are
indicated. Provide stretcher units, jamb units, header units, sash units, lintel
units, square comer units for painted work and other shapes as indicated.
f. Block wall insulation shall be loose fill vermiculite, treated for water
repellency and free flowing conforming to ASTM C516. Loose fill insulation
shall be poured from the bag into the CMU holes directly or via a hopper
placed on top of the wall. Pours will be made at any convenient interval, but
tha height of any pour shall not exeed three (3) meters. Block joints at
04200-4

FOR 176
494
‫لمشعقي‬
pilasters or other vertical members shall be sealed with morter prior to

pouring, or as per manufacturer's recommendations for filling CMU ith loose
fill materials.
2.1.2 Concrete Masonry Unit Lintels and Precast Concrete Lintels shall be manufactured
in Saudi Arabia conforming to the following:
a. Concrete Masonry Unit Lintels (Bond Beam Units) for fairfaced CMU shall
consist of "U" shaped concrete masonry units, conforming to requirements
b. for solid load-bearing units ASTM C145, Grade N-1, of matching texture and
appearance to adjacent units, reinforced with steel reinforcing bars, and fill
with 20 682 kPa (3000 psi) concrete conforming to requirements specified
under the "Concrete" section of the specifications. Lintels shall be 400mm
longer than opening. See schedule on drawings.
c. Precast Concrete Lintels for concrete masonry unit partitions and interior
walls shall be manufactured from concrete conforming to the applicable
requirements of the "Concrete" section of these specifications. Exposed
REVISIONS faces shall have texture to match faces of concrete masonry units. Lintels
shall be reinforced with 12.7mm diameter steel reinforcing bars, full length,
one at top and bottom for each 100mm of wall thickness. Lintels shall be
DRAWN BY: ___________
modular size and 200mm longer than masonry opening, at each side. See
DATE: _________________
schedule on drawings.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.1.3. Reinforcement
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. a. Horizontel Reinforcement for concrete block work shall consist of #9 gauge
butt welded truss or ladder bars with side bars, conforming to ASTM A82 or
B.S. 4482 for cold drawn steel wire. Width of truss/ ladder shall be 40mm to
50mm less than wall thickness. Provide horizontal reinforcement in every
alternative layers.
OPERATING DEPT. b. Vertical reinforcing bars for concrete block work shall be 12 mm dia, conform
to SASO SSA-2/79 with minimum yield strength of 420 mpa. Install vertical
bars at 600mm c/c. Lap length of vertical bars shall be minimum 48 times
bars diameters.
CERTIFIED c. Joint Reinforcement for composite walls shall consist of parallel 4.8mm
diameter side rods and No. 9 gauge butt welded truss or ladder bars,
BY: ___________________ conforming to ASTM A82 or B.S. 4482 for cold drawn steel wire.
DATE: _________________
1) Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties
spaced not more thin 400mm o.c.; side rods spaced for embedment within
each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to within 25.4mm of
exterior face of facing wythe.
2) Where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup,
use units with adjustable 2 piece rectangular ties.
d. Joint reinforcement shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication with

minimum 0.45 kg/m2 of surface zinc coming conforming to ASTM A 153
Class B2 or B.S. 729, Table 1.
e. Joint reinforcement, including prefabricated "T" and "L" shaped units.


FOR 177
494
‫لمشعقي‬
04200-5
2.1.4. Anchors and Ties
a. Dovetail Slot: Minimum 16 gauge hot-dip galvanized steel with holes for
nailing and supplied with polystyrene filler.
b. Dovetail Anchors: Minimum 14 gauge 25.4mm wide by length required to

suit condition, corrugated hot-dip galvanized after fabrication steel.
c. Adjustable Wall Ties: Composed of 14 gauge by 25.4mm by 177.8mm

with7.1 mm hole corrugated hot-dip galvanized anchor and 4.8mm diameter
mill galvanized ASTM 82 or B.S. 4482 cold drawn steel wire of proper length
required for embedment in wythe of masonry.
d. Wire Mesh: Galvanized after fabrication 16 gauge steel wire, 6.4 mm square
mesh, width 12.7mm less than wall thickness.
2.1.5. Expansion and Control Joint Fillers
REVISIONS a. Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strip : ASTM D1056, Grade RE41E1,

premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler strips capable of
DRAWN BY: ___________ compression up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated.
DATE: _________________
b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: ASTNI D2287, General Purpose Grade,
CHK’D BY: ____________
Designation PVC-63506; Polyvinyl chloride designed to fit standard sash
APPROVED
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Size and configuration
as indicated.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
c. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D226, Type I, No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic

roofing felt.
2.1.6. Hardware Cloth: Galvanized wire mesh with waterproof paper of length and widths
OPERATING DEPT. required to suit condition for laying across concrete masonry unit cells below
masonry units required to be filled solid with grout.
2.1.7. Masonry Restraints: Steel angles and anchorage will be furnished by Section 05500
for installation by this trade.
CERTIFIED
PART 3 EXECUTION
BY: ___________________
3.1 Examination
DATE: _________________
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.
3.2 Preparation
Refer to Section 4100 "Mortar" for mortar to be used.
Verify that masonry can be completed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations,
the referenced standards and the original design.
04200-6

FOR 178
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination,
scheduling and interfacing of the work of this section with the work of related trades (with
particular attention given to the installation of items embedded in masonry) so as not to
delay job progress.
Furnish items required to be cast into concrete work to respective trades for anchoring the
work of this Section.
3.3 Installation/Erection
3.3.1 Construction Tolerances
a. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and
arises do not exceed 6.4mm in 3m, or 9.5mm in a story height not to exceed
6m nor 12.7nun in 12m or more. For external comers, expansion joints,
control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6.4mm in any story
or 6m maximum, nor 12.7mm in 12m or more.
b. Variation From Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
REVISIONS grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6.4mm in any bay or
6m maximum nor 19mm in 12m or more.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
c. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related
portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 12.7mm in any bay or
CHK’D BY: ____________
6m maximum, nor l9mm in 12m or more.
APPROVED
d. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 6.4mm nor plus
12.7mm.
Set masonry to a line, with surfaces plumb and true; keep horizontal joints
continuously level and vertical joints in alignment.
OPERATING DEPT.
Set masonry from scaffolding erected for that purpose. Do not set or point
masonry exposed to view, overhand.
Build composite walls, floors and other masonry construction to the full
CERTIFIED thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of
the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.
BY: ___________________
Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades.
DATE: _________________
Provide not less than 200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb
of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. No chase shall be
cut into hollow wall units after they are built in place without the Engineer's
specific approval.
Leave openings for equipment to be instilled before completion of masonry

work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work
immediately adjacent to the opening.
04200-7

FOR 179
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with
uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints,
returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at comers,
jambs and wherever possible.
Use half size units for Fairfaced masonry units at corners, jambs and
intersection.
Where masonry walls abut soffits of slabs or beams, provide closed-cell

compressible filler and firesafing at fire-rated walls and a supporting steel
angle at both sides of wall.
Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses

accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
Where possible, build masonry unit walls and partitions after overhead ducts,
pipes and conduits are in place and tested. Masonry shall be neatly built
around such items.
REVISIONS In rooms and spaces scheduled to have concrete finish, make surfaces
suitable for paint application. In spaces without suspended ceilings, make
DRAWN BY: ___________ upper wall surfaces up to termination of structural ceiling suitable for
DATE: _________________
painting.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp,
APPROVED
unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to
fit adjoining work. Where possible, use full-size units.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Electrical conduits and mechanical pipes in hollow concrete blocks shall run
vertically within the cavity of the blocks. Cutouts for all electrical boxes shall
be cut with a motor driven carborundum saw to ensure straight and even cut
edges.
OPERATING DEPT.
All masonry partitions shall extend from top of structural slab to underside of
concrete slab above and into concrete pans.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 4 unit length in each course; do
CERTIFIED not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if
required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh
BY: ___________________
masonry.
DATE: _________________
3.3.2 Intersecting and Abutting Walls, Including Wall Comers
Provide intersecting masonry unit bond in each course at comers.
Unless vertical control joints are shown at structure, provide interlocking masonry
bond 900mm o.c. vertically.
In addition to masonry bonding, provide horizontal reinforcement using pre-fabricated

"T" and "L" units.
Wetting: Do not wet concrete masonry units.
04200-8

FOR 180
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3.3 Mortar, Bedding and Jointing
Lay concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout.
Lay concrete masonry walls with 9.5mm joint.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Strike concealed joints flush.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not
pound comers at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
Fairfaced Masonry Units : Fairfaced units that form the finished wall surfaces shall be
carefully laid so that all courses line up throughout and shall have a uniform
appearance. All cutting of exposed units shall be done with a motor driven
carborundum saw. All joints shall be tooled concave.
REVISIONS
3.3.4 Built-In Work
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Grout in door frames, access doors, louvers and other metal items embedded or built
into masonry work solidly with grout.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Grout under lintels, bearing plates and steel bearing on masonry with solid bed of
mortar.
Grout around sleeves, pipes, ducts and other items which pass through masonry
OPERATING DEPT. walls to provide airtight conditions.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar which have anchoring, supporting
or hanging devices embedded in the cell.
CERTIFIED Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar on each side of door frames to
400mm beyond.
BY: ___________________
Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar which ire below steel bearing
DATE: _________________
plates, steel beams, and ends of lintels, to 200mm beyond bearing and from floor to
bearing.
Fill vertical cells of masonry units around mechanical equipment rooms and where
indicated on the drawings solidly with mortar.
Fill with grout the first two courses of masonry units.
Place hardware cloth in horizontal joint below masonry unit cells to be filled with
mortar, to prevent mortar from dropping into unfilled cells below.
04200-9

FOR 181
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Where masonry walls indicated to have voids filled solid with grout, fill vertical cells of
masonry units solid with grout (as each course is laid), or use 100 percent solid (no
voids) concrete masonry units.
Coordinate installation of expansion joints.
3.3.5 Solid Wall Construction (Composite Walls)
Fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythe solidly with mortar by parging the in-
place wythe and shoving units into the parging.
Tie wythes with continuous header course of stone blocks at 800mm o.c. vertically.
In composite walls, instill masonry backing and face material at same time and
carefully bond together. 'Re spacing of the tics shall meet the requirements of the
local code. There shall be at least one metal tic for each 0. 18m2 of wall area.
3.3.6 Horizontal Joint Reinforcement
REVISIONS Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement for the entire length of joint. Install
ladder/truss type reinforcement with side rods in mortar for their entire length with a
DRAWN BY: ___________ minimum cover of 16mm on exterior side of walls 9.5mm elsewhere. Minimum Lap
DATE: _________________
length for the reinforcement shall be 48 times the dia of bar.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise
APPROVED
indicated.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and
"T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as follows unless

OPERATING DEPT. otherwise indicated.
a. For multi-wythe walls which are structurally bonded by masonry headers,

provide continuous stone course at 800mm o.c. vertically.
CERTIFIED b. For multi-wythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcement acts as

structural bond or tie between wythcs, space reinforcement as required by
BY: ___________________
code but not more than 400mm o.c. vertically.
DATE: _________________
c. For single-width walls, space reinforcement at 400mm o.c. vertically, unless
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 300mm wide, with horizontal joint
reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 200mm apart, immediately
above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of
600mm beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.
3.3.7 Anchors, Ties and Restraints
Anchor masonry to structure complying with the following:

04200-10

FOR 182
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Provide an open space not less than 12.7mm in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other
rigid materials.
Anchor masonry to structural members with metal anchors embedded in masonry

joints and attached to dovetail slot embedded in structure.
Restraints at heads of masonry:
Provide continuous steel angle restraints on both sides of masonry. Gap between
steel and masonry shall be at least 10mm and shall not exceed 15mm on each side.
Anchorage:
9.5mm diameter high strength steel bolts, cadmium plated. 65mm long stainless
steel expansion type anchor shields, drilled and set into concrete slab above.
3.3.8 Control and Expansion Joints:
Provide vertical and horizontal expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry
REVISIONS where shown and as specified. Build in related items as the masonry work
progresses.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
If location of control and expansion joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not
to exceed 9m o.c. In addition, locate joints at points of natural weakness in the
CHK’D BY: ____________
masonry work, including the following:
APPROVED
a. At structural column or joint between bays.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
b. Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.
c. Above major openings at end of lintels upward and below at ends of sills
downward. Place at one side ofjamb for openings less than 2100mm wide
OPERATING DEPT. and at both sides for openings over 1800mm wide.
d. At reduction column of wall thickness.
e. Where masonry abuts supporting structure.

CERTIFIED
Build in horizontal pressure relieving joints, construct joints by inserting non-metallic
BY: ___________________
compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of scalant. and backer
rod.
DATE: _________________
Locate horizontal pressure relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry
veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
Provide non-metallic expansion joint strips vertically at full height between end of
masonry partitions and concrete walls and columns. Thickness of Her shall be 12
mm and of width required to fill the joint to a point to permit installation of backer rod
and sealant.
04200-11

FOR 183
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3.9 Lintels
Provide masonry lintels at fairfaced masonry units and wherever openings of more
than 600mm for block size units are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
Provide minimum bearing of 200mm at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 Repair And Pointing
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except %weep holes, and fill with
mortar. Point-up joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat
uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.
REVISIONS 3.5 Protection
DRAWN BY: ___________ Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which
DATE: _________________
ensures unit masonry work is without damage and deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
04200-12

FOR 184
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METAL
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Performance of all work required to complete the structural steel work as indicated
on the drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards including,
but not limited to, those listed below:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
REVISIONS ASTM A-6 General Requirements for Rolled Steel Bars, Plates,
Shapes and Sheet Piling.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ASTM A-36 Carbon Structural Steel
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM A-53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
APPROVED
Welded and Seamless
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM A-307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
ASTM A-325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints

ASTM A-500 Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Structural Steel Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
OPERATING DEPT.
3. American Welding Society:
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
CERTIFIED 4. American Institute of Steel Construction:
BY: ___________________
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
DATE: _________________
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A-325 or A-490 Bolts.
B. Welding shall be performed in compliance with AWS D1.1 and using approved
welding procedures. All welders must be pre-certified by SEC. Assure that gas
hydrogen electrode control is carefully followed. A separate oven (with temperature
gage) and quivers shall be supplied before start of the welding.
05120-1

FOR 185
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Inspection and Testing:
1. All inspection and testing shall conform to the “Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges” published by the American Institute of Steel
Construction.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all
materials, installations, and workmanship, including those items or
installations supplied by any of the CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors or
vendors.
3. SEC has the right to inspect all materials and workmanship, and shall have
unrestricted entry to the shop of the fabricator at all times while work is being
performed. SEC may reject improper, inferior, defective, or unsuitable
materials and workmanship. All materials and workmanship rejected shall
be repaired or replaced by the fabricator as directed by SEC.
4. Inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance with the Structural

Welding Code, AWS D1.1.
REVISIONS
5. Inspection of high-strength bolted connections shall be in accordance with
DRAWN BY: ___________ AISC “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A-325 or A-490 Bolts”.
DATE: _________________
1.03 SUBMITTALS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Manufacturer’s Data:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Submit producers or manufacturer’s specifications and installation
instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and
other data as required to show compliance with specified requirements.
a. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports

OPERATING DEPT. covering chemical and physical properties.
b. Bolts and nuts.
c. Structural steel primer.

CERTIFIED
d. Non-shrink grout.
BY: ___________________
B. Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and
DATE: _________________
shop assembly of members and erection at site. Include details of cuts, connections,
camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show
size, length, and type of weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. Identify details by reference to
sheet and detail number of the Drawings.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver all material to the worksite properly marked to identify the structure
for which it is intended. Marking shall correspond to the marking indicated on shop
drawings.
05120-2

FOR 186
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Storage: Store all members in a manner for easy access identification and
inspection. Locate steel member off the ground using pallets, platforms or other
supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and
deterioration.
C. Handling: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacement
necessary to the approval of the SEC. Representative at no additional cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: Conform to ASTM A-6 and ASTM A-36.
B. Tubes: Shall conform to ASTM A-500.
C. Pipe: Shall conform to ASTM A53, Grade B.

REVISIONS
D. Anchor Bolts: Comply with ASTM A 307, headed type with heavy hexagonal nuts
DRAWN BY: ___________ unless otherwise indicated.
DATE: _________________
E. Threaded Fasteners: Comply with ASTM A 307, Grade A, Low Carbon Steel Bolts and
CHK’D BY: ____________
Nuts for all connections, unless otherwise indicated, with the exception that all
APPROVED
structures supporting cranes, hoists, or operating machinery shall be connected with
High Strength Bolts conforming to ASTM A-325, Type 1.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code (E-70XX electrodes).
G. Non-Shrink Grout: Use Class I grout as per.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:
1. Fabricate items in accordance with what is indicated on the approved shop

CERTIFIED drawings.
BY: ___________________
2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for
identification as to structure and site for which intended.
DATE: _________________
3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of

units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of
members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs and other
defects.
B. Bolted Connections: Install threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC

specification.
05120-3

FOR 187
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Welded Connections:
1. Welded construction: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance

and quality of welds and methods used in correcting welded work.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true
alignment of axes without warp. Refer to AWS D1.1, Chapter 3
requirements.
D. Holes for other Work:
1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing,
and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown
on the final shop drawings.
2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut
holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
E. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as required and
REVISIONS indicated on the approved drawings to receive other work.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.03 SHOP PAINTING

DATE: _________________
A. General
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Shop paints all new structural steelwork in accordance with Painting
Specification, Section 09900, except those members or portions of members
ENGINEERING DEPT.
to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel items.
2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with

friction-type connections.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be
painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag, and flux deposits.
Sandblast as required to conform to primer manufacturer’s specifications for surface
preparation.
CERTIFIED C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint
and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 1.6 mil. Use painting methods
BY: ___________________
which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces.
Refer to Painting Specification, Section 09900.
DATE: _________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SHOP FABRICATION
A. General: Comply with the provisions as herein specified.
B. Anchor Bolts
1. Furnish anchor bolts and other connections required for securing structural
steel to foundations and other in-place work.
05120-4

FOR 188
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Furnish templates and other devices necessary for presetting bolts and other
anchors to accurate locations.
C. Column bearing plates shall be shop welded to columns and attached to concrete
foundations by anchor bolts as shown.
B. Splicing: Splice members only where indicated unless approved by the SEC
Representative. Submit structural calculations signed by a structural engineer
licensed where the fabricator is located for all splices not indicated. All welded
splices shall be tested by non-destructive testing method (NDT).
E. Gas-Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the
structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members as
acceptable to the SEC Representative. Finish gas-cutting sections equal to a
sheared appearance when gas-cutting is permitted.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Comply with the provisions as specified herein.

REVISIONS
B. Survey: Establish permanent benchmarks necessary for the accurate erection of
DRAWN BY: ___________ structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and
DATE: _________________
locations of anchor bolts and similar items, before erection proceeds.
CHK’D BY: ____________
C. Temporary Shoring and Bracing
APPROVED
1. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.
2. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as

erection proceeds.
OPERATING DEPT. 3. Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members
are in place and final connections are made.
D. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms in

accordance with the SEC Construction Safety Manual.
CERTIFIED
E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates
BY: ___________________
1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of
DATE: _________________
base and bearing plates.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. If wedges or shims are to be left within grouting, they shall be of
stainless steel to prevent corrosion expansion and cracking of the grout.
Otherwise, the shims shall be removed after the grout has hardened, and the
voids left by the shim removal dry-packed with the same material as original
grouting.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure
that no voids remain.
05120-5

FOR 189
494
‫لمشعقي‬
F. Field Assembly
1. Set Structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align
and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or
structure before fastening permanently.
2. Clean the bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent
contact before assembly.
3. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in

elevations and alignment within specified limits.
4. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC
tolerances.
5. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary

connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to
field welds.
REVISIONS 6. Touch-up shop primer where abraded.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
- END OF SECTION –
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
05120-6

FOR 190
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05300 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Miscellaneous Metals includes items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates,
bars, strips, tubes, pipes, and castings as shown on the drawings which are not a
part of the structural steel or other metal systems.
A. Section 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
B. Section 07920 Sealants and Caulking

REVISIONS C. Section 09900 Painting

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards including,
but not limited to, those listed below:
APPROVED
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A53 Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless

Steel Pipe
OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings, on Products

Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel
Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips.
CERTIFIED ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
BY: ___________________ ASTM A283 Low and Intermediate Strength Carbon Steel Plates
DATE: _________________
ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts & Studs, 60000 psi Tensile
ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
ASTM A366 Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet (Commercial

Quality)
ASTM A500 Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes
05300-1

FOR 191
494
‫لمشعقي‬
ASTM A501 Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing
3. American Welding Society (AWS):
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
AWS A2.0 Standard Welding Symbols
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connections, attachments, reinforcing,

anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories in addition to materials to be
used and surface finishes. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where
applicable.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the project drawings and prepare
shop drawings based on actual field measurements.
REVISIONS Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s specifications, load tables,
DATE: _________________
dimension diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions for products used in
fabrication of miscellaneous metal work, including paint products.
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Delivery: Deliver all material to the worksite properly marked to identify the structure
for which it is intended. Marking shall correspond to the marking indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Storage: Store all members in a manner for easy access identification and
OPERATING DEPT. inspection. Locate steel member off the ground using pallets, platforms or other
supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and
deterioration.
C. Handling: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacement
CERTIFIED necessary to the approval of the Company Representative at no additional cost.
BY: ___________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DATE: _________________
2.01 MATERIALS
The materials shall conform to the respective specifications and standards as follows:
A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Plates/Sheets: ASTM A283, A366.
D. Pipes: ASTM A53, Grade B.
05300-2

FOR 192
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 Grade A or ASTM A325, Galvanized to ASTM
A153 for Galvanized Components.
F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Use materials of the size and thicknesses shown, or if not shown, of the required
size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in the finished
product for the intended use. All work shall be in accordance with SAES-M-001.
All work shall be true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces, and straight
sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless
otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
B. General welding requirements and welded construction shall be in accordance with

AWS D1.1.
REVISIONS
C. Weld corners and seams continuously. At exposed connections, grind exposed
DRAWN BY: ___________ welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Form exposed
DATE: _________________
connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Provide anchorage of the type shown, coordinated with the supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for the intended
ENGINEERING DEPT.
use in the work.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work indicated to receive finish
hardware and similar items of work.
OPERATING DEPT. D. Provide zinc coating for those items shown on the drawings or specified to be
galvanized, using the hot-dip process after fabrication.
1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing of iron and steel hardware.
CERTIFIED 2. ASTM A123 for galvanizing of iron and steel products.
BY: ___________________
E. Shop painting is required for miscellaneous metal work, except those members or
portions of members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces to be field welded, and
DATE: _________________
galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Remove scale, rust, and other
deleterious materials before the shop coat of paint is applied. Apply one shop coat
of metal primer paint to fabricated metal items. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces
which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to
distinguish it from the first. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on
metal primer paint, applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and at
a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 1.5 mils for each coat. Use painting
methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and all exposed
surfaces.
05300-3

FOR 193
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.03 PAINTING
Refer to Specification Section - 09900: “Painting” for material and application requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true
alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on project drawings and shop drawings. Comply
with AWS D1.1 for the procedures of welding, the appearance and quality of welds
made, and the methods to be used in corrective welding work.
REVISIONS D. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
miscellaneous metal items to be in place of construction; including threaded
DRAWN BY: ___________ fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,
DATE: _________________
wood screws, and other connectors as required.
CHK’D BY: ____________
- END OF SECTION -
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
05300-4

FOR 194
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,

Conditions of Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work
of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section covers the work of metal fabrications as required by the Contract,
Metal fabrications include items made from iron, steel, aluminium and brass shapes,
plates, bars, strips, tubes, angles, channels and rods which are not a part of structural
REVISIONS steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. It also includes grey iron castings for
utility manholes.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Types of work in this section include, but shall not be limited to, the following.
CHK’D BY: ____________
 Steel Ladders
APPROVED
 Stair Nosings
 Angle Guards
ENGINEERING DEPT.
 Loose Bearing and Levelling Plates
 Inserts, Sleeves and Anchors
 Steel Balustrades and Handrails
 Counter Angles - Bar Gratings
 Miscellaneous Steel Trim

OPERATING DEPT.
Steel Bollards
 Strip Dividers
 Manhole Covers and Frames
 Manhole Steps Iron.
CERTIFIED
Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing Tables.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
The following section includes requirements which relate to this section:

Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
Unit Masonry
Painting
Metal fabrications work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of
the Specifications of the American Society,for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the
British Standard Specifications (BS), as mentioned herein below, or other approved
international standards and Sound Practice.
05500-1

FOR 195
494
‫لمشعقي‬
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS

ASTM NO
A 27 Specification of Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel for General

Application
A 123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products
A 153 Specification of Zinc Coating
A 167 Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip
A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6 000 psi Tensile
A 312 Seamless and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe
A 480 General Requirements for Flat Rolled Stainless Steel and He Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip
A 554 Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing
A 743 Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and Nickel Base
Corrosion-Resistant for General Application
A 780 Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Castings
A 1107 Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
B 209 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Sheet and Plate
REVISIONS B 221 Specification for Aluminium Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods. Wire, Shapes and
Tubes
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
BS NO.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
497 Manhole Covers, Road Gully Gratings and Frame
1247 Manhole Step Iron
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4652Specifications for Zinc-Rich Priming Paint
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division I
OPERATING DEPT. Specification Section for the approval of the Engineer:
1.5.1 Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for

CERTIFIED products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications including paint products, non-slip
aggregates, non-slip aggregate surface finishes and grout.
BY: ___________________
1.5.2 Shop Drawings
DATE: _________________
Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Include plans,
elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others.
Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for
design loadings, include structural computations, material properties and other
information needed for structural analysis.
Submit fabrication drawings for the Engineer's approval prior to the manufacturer of any
of the required items.
05500-2

FOR 196
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.5.3 Samples
Submit 2 sets of representative samples of material and finished products, tread wearing
surfaces, railing components for SEC approval.
1.5.4 Qualifications:
Submit quality certificates for firms, persons and welders to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience, include list of completed projects with project name and
addresses, name of engineers and employers and other information.
1.6.1 Fabricator Qualifications
Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for
this project with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying
the work.
REVISIONS
1.6.2 Shop Assembly
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for transporting and handling limitations.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
APPROVED
1.6.3 Installer Qualifications:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm that
fabricated them.
1.6.4 Welders Qualifications:

OPERATING DEPT.
Qualify welding operators in accordance with requirements of the ASTM and BS
specifications.
Welds shall be sound, smooth, free from apparent porosity, cracks or incomplete fusion
CERTIFIED and the surface parts to be welded shall be free of oxide, scale grease, paint or other
extraneous matter.
BY: ___________________
Perform all welding of steel assemblies under continuous inspection of the Engineer.
DATE: _________________
Such work must be left unprimed until the Engineer gives his approval in writing.
1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect formed metal fabrications from corrosion, deformation and other damage during
delivery, storage and handling.
Store metal fabrications protected with a waterproof covering and ventilation to avoid
condensation.
05500-3

FOR 197
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Metal Surfaces, General
All steel work shall be constructed in mild steel and shall be heavily galvanized after
manufacture except where otherwise specified.
For fabrication of metal fabrications work which shall be exposed to view, use only
materials which are flat, smooth and free from surface blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
2.1.2 Ferrous Metals
 Cold Rolled
- Cold rolled steel sheets of thickness from 0.2 to 3 mm and larger than 600
REVISIONS nun shall comply with ASTM A794.
DRAWN BY: ___________ - Steel Strips shall comply to ASTM A109.

DATE: _________________
- Steel Sections shall comply to ASTM A308.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
 Hot Rolled
ENGINEERING DEPT.
- Steel strips and sheets of thickness from 0.8 mm to 8 mm and width from
10 mm to 2000 mm shall comply to ASTM A414.
- Steel sections comply to ASTM A794.
OPERATING DEPT.  Galvanized Steel Sheets: hot-dip galvanized, sheets thickness to 2 mm and not
larger than 1000 mm comply to ASTM E376.
 Steel Pipe: Electrically welded longitudinally, type and grade (if applicable) as
selected by fabricator and as required for design loading, black finish unless
CERTIFIED
galvanizing is indicated; light weight, unless otherwise indicated shall comply to
ASTM A691.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________  Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type, material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated
 Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either

malleable iron, or cast steel. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-
dip galvanized, after fabrication comply to ASTM A 123
 Checkered Plates: Thickness shall not be less than 6 mm. Raised lugs shall be
diamond shaped and shall have an angled and opposed pattern. Steel shall be
mild steel.
05500-4

FOR 198
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Wall Framing
Standard C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated with lipped flanges and
complying with:
Steel thickness: 1.0 mm

Flange width: 35 mm
Web Unpunched (to be punched as required)
Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry provide with welded
steel anchors 32mm wide by 6 mm thick and 200 mm long at 600mm intervals.
Furnish inserts if units shall be installed after concrete or masonry is executed.
 Stainless Steel
- Tubing: ASTM A 554

- Pipes: ASTM A 312
REVISIONS - Castings: ASTM A 743
- Plates: ASTM A 167
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ 2.1.3 Non-Ferrous Metals

CHK’D BY: ____________
 Brass Sheets, Bands and Strips
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
 Aluminium.
2.1.4 Welding Electrodes
2.1.5 Fasteners
OPERATING DEPT. Use fasteners made of corrosion-resistant materials and of same basic metal as
fastened metal. Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for the type. grade and class required.
 Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A Lap Bolts:
CERTIFIED
Square head type
 Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel
BY: ___________________  Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel
DATE: _________________  Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel
 Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields or metal straps capable to
sustain a load equal to 5 times the design load
 Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, class and style as required.
 Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel
 Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Internally threaded tubular expansion anchors and
machine bolts, carbon steel components zinc plated
05500-5

FOR 199
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.1.6 Grout- Shall be as follows:
 Metallic Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout

for heavy duty loading applications
 Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-

corrosive, non-gaseous grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Comply with ASTM A 1107.
 Ordinary Grout: Ordinary Portland cement according to BS12 and natural sand to
ASTM150 mixed at a ratio of 1 part cement to 21/2 parts sand by volume, with
minimum water required for mixing, placement and hydration. Shall be used for;
interior and exterior applications.
2.1.7 Concrete Fill:
Concrete materials and properties comply with requirements of Section 03005 "Concrete
and Reinforced Concrete" for normal weight, air entrained, ready mix concrete.
REVISIONS
2.1.8 Paint
DRAWN BY: ___________  Shop Primer for Ferrous Metals: According to BS No. 4652 fast-curing, lead-free,
DATE: _________________ abrasion-resistant, rust-inhibitive primer selected for compatibility with substrates
CHK’D BY: ____________
and with types of alkyd-type finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to
resist normal atmospheric corrosion and to provide a sound foundation for field-
APPROVED applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure
ENGINEERING DEPT.
 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in
galvanized steel complying to ASTM E 376.
 Bituminous Paint: Cold applied emulsion paint.

OPERATING DEPT.
 Epoxy Paint
2.2 FABRICATION GENERAL
2.2.1 Workmanship
CERTIFIED
Fabricate metal fabrications for locations shown with dimensions, spacing, details and
BY: ___________________ anchorages as indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings. Use new materials of
DATE: _________________ size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and
durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on
shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials
indicated or specified for various components of work.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from a maximum change in ambient temperature
of 40 ºC in the design, fabrication and installation of installed metal assemblies to
prevent buckling, opening of joints and overstressing of welds and fasteners, Base
design calculations on actual temperature of metals due to both solar heat gain and night
time sky heat loss.
05500-6

FOR 200
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately and remove burrs.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1.0 mm unless otherwise
indicated. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius pible without causing, grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
Remove sharp and rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
Weld corners and seams continuously. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds
smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not indicated,
REVISIONS Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate
DATE: _________________
and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
APPROVED
hardware and similar items.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide
Weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.2.2 Galvanizing:
OPERATING DEPT. Provide zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM E376, Fabricate joints which will be exposed
to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may
accumulate.
CERTIFIED 2.2.3 Shop Painting:
BY: ___________________
Clean surfaces of grease, rust, mill scale and other matter before applying shop prime
coat. Apply shop primer to surfaces of ferrous metal fabrications except those which are
DATE: _________________
galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2.4 Finishing of Metal Fabrications
 Ferrous Metal Fabrications
- Cast Iron: Cast iron metal fabrications employed under immersion condition
shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to BS No. 4360.
05500-7

FOR 201
494
‫لمشعقي‬
- Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to BS No. 4360 or comply with

requirements of Division-9, "Painting", as specified hereinafter
- Stainless Steel: High luster finish, No. 7 finish to ASTM A 480.
 Non-Ferrous Metal Fabrications
- Brass
Polished brass finish, metal buffed to a high gloss and synthetic coatings
applied
- Aluminium
Anodic Coating
Mechanical Finish:Nonspecular as fabricated

Chemical Finish:Etched, medium matte
Anodic Coating:Clear coating, 0,026 mm thick
REVISIONS Colour: As selected by the Engineer
DRAWN BY: ___________ Plastic Powder Coating

DATE: _________________
Chemical Finish: Cleaning with compatible inhibiting chemicals
CHK’D BY: ____________
Pretreatment: Thermosetting of chrome layer
APPROVED
Plastic Powder: Epoxy polyester powder, with no additives, 60
microns minimum dry film thickness
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Application: Electrostatic, 10 minutes drying time at 200'C
Colour and Texture: As selected by the Engineer
2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE
OPERATING DEPT. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and
other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork and for anchoring or securing, woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron
CERTIFIED washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections elsewhere,
furnish steel washers.
BY: ___________________
2.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
DATE: _________________
2.4.1 Ladders
Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and
anchorage as indicated.
 Steel Ladders: Unless otherwise indicated, provide two continuous structural steel
flat bar 13 mm x 60 mm as side rails (stringers) with eased edges, spaces 450
mm.
Stringers shall be parallel and straight throughout the rung portion.

05500-8

FOR 202
494
‫لمشعقي‬
All burrs, sharp edges and other imperfections likely to cause injury to the hands of
persons using the ladder shall be removed and made smooth before finishing
treatment. Ladder shall be given a suitable protective finish and it shall be an
epoxy paint for outdoor ladders.
Provide 22 mm diameter solid structural steel bar as rings, uniformly spaced 250
mm on centers.
Fit rings at center line of side stringers, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail
faces. The top rung shall be at same level as the platform, which shall be at a
distance not exceeding 80 mm from wall.
The ladder shall be vertical or inclined towards the surface to which it is fixed at an
angle not exceeding 15º from the vertical.
Securely fasten ladder stingers at their extremities at top and bottom and at
intermediate points spaced not more than 1500 mm. Use welded or bolted steel
brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage and to hold the ladder
stringers rigid throughout the length and clear of the wall surface with a minimum
REVISIONS of 180 mm clearance from wall to center line of rings. if the adjacent structures
does not extend above the top ring, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings,
DRAWN BY: ___________ extend stringers at 600 mm apart to 1050 mm above top ring and goose neck the
DATE: _________________
extended rail and return back to wall or structure unless other secure handholds
are provided to provide secure ladder access.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Provide non-slip surface on the top of each ring, either by coating the ring with
aluminium oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive or by using a manufactured
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ring of a type filled with aluminium oxide grout.
Ladders exceeding 3 meters in height shall be provided with safety cage

constructed of 3 vertical plates supported by flat steel hoops with a diameter of 750
mm hoops shall be at 700 mm center conforming to details shown on Drawings.
OPERATING DEPT.
 Stainless Steel Ship Steps: Steps shall be stainless-steel round bars 20 mm
diameter, 400 mm wide, projecting 200 mm from wall and fixed at a nominal
vertical intervals of 250 mm o.c. with a permissible deviation of ± 5%.
CERTIFIED The top step shall not be more than 350 mm from the underside of the cover.
BY: ___________________
Length of tail in the concrete shall not be less than 120 mm. Steel steps shall be
free from harmful defects, likely to reduce significantly the strength of the step.
DATE: _________________
Steps shall be bent without sharp edges.
Provide stainless steel pipe handrail if required.
2.4.2 Stair Nosings
Shall be cast iron or extruded aluminium nosings of chequered non-slip surface and shall
be fitted to all exposed concrete steps. Shape, profile and dimensions shall be as
detailed on Drawings. Nosings shall have welded end-slotted lugs of sufficient length for
embedment into concrete or drill for mechanical anchors and countersink.
05500-9

FOR 203
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.4.3 Angle Guards
Shall be 50 x 50 mm aluminium or stainless steel angles of a height as indicated on

Drawings. Drilled-in expansion anchors 70 mm long shall be used for fixing into concrete
at 500 mm intervals on centers.
2.4.4 Loose Bearing and Levelling Plates
Provide loose bearing and levelling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction, made flat, free from warps or twists and of required thickness and bearing
area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize plate
after fabrication.
2.4.5 Inserts, Sleeves and Anchors
Inserts, sleeves and anchors shall be galvanized steel fabricated to dimensions and
details shown on Drawings.
2.4.6 Steel Balustrades and Handrails

REVISIONS
Balustrades shall be constructed of steel sections of dimensions and configurations
DRAWN BY: ___________ indicated on Drawings. Base and anchor plates shall be provided as shown on Drawings
DATE: _________________
of 10 mm thick and not less than that required to support structural loads. Drill plates to
receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Handrails shall be steel pipes. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding
or welding with internal connectors unless otherwise indicated.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Grind and polish welds flush and smooth. Curves where indicated or necessary shall be
bent on a radius of not less than 150 mm.
2.4.7 Loose Steel Lintels

OPERATING DEPT.
Shall be fabricated from steel sections of size and shape indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions and at locations indicated on Drawings. Weld
adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Unless otherwise
indicated elsewhere, size loose lintels to provide an equal bearing length of 1/12 of the
CERTIFIED clear span but not less than 200 mm bearing at each side of opening.
BY: ___________________
2.4.8 Counter Angles:
DATE: _________________
Shall be steel angles of size indicated on Drawings and for attachment to concrete or
wall. Provide horizontally slotted holes at ends to receive 19 mm bolts, Galvanize
counter angles after fabrication).
05500-10

FOR 204
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.4.9 Bar Gratings
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, fabricate removable welded steel bar gratings
with bearing bars at 25 mm on centers and cross bars at 100 mm. on centers and with
banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include supporting
system and use cross sections of bearing and cross bars as indicated on Drawings.
Traffic surface of steel bar gratings shall be serrated. Steel finish shall be sprayed epoxy
coating or hot dipped galvanized or as indicated on Drawings.
2.4.10 Miscellaneous Steel
Trim: Shall be of shapes and sizes as shown on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated,
fabricate units from steel shapes, plates and bars with continuously smooth exposed
edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and
anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
Provide anchors, spaced not more than 600 mm o.c. welded to trim for embedding in
concrete or masonry.
REVISIONS 2.4.11 Steel Bollards
DRAWN BY: ___________ Shall be 10 mm wall thick steel pipes of welded steel top caps. Diameters shall be as
DATE: _________________
indicated on Drawings. Base plates shall be 10 mm thick steel square plates provided
with four slotted holes for anchor 19 mm bolts to concrete and grouting, unless otherwise
CHK’D BY: ____________
indicated elsewhere.
APPROVED
2.4.12 Strip Dividers: Shall be brass strips 5.0 x 2.0 mm.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.4.13 Manhole Covers and Frames
Shall be heavy-duty cast iron covers complete with frames conforming to BS No. 497 and
constructed to details shown on Drawings. Castings shall be tough, close-grained,
OPERATING DEPT. sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes. shrinkage, cold shuts and any other
defect. Clean and grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat true surfaces. Covers shall be
true and seat within ring at all points.
2.4.14 Step Irons

CERTIFIED
Shall be cast iron steps conforming to BS No. 1247. Step irons shall be wide enough for
BY: ___________________
a man to place both feet on it and be designed to prevent lateral slippage.
DATE: _________________
2.4.15 Steel Hinged Hatch door
Shall be fabricated of galvanized non-slip checker-plate of not less than 6 mm. thick
excluding, the raised pattern or steel sheets with abrasive materials metallically bonded
to steel by an appropriate process and shall be welded to perimeter steel frame and
reinforced with steel angle stiffeners as indicated on Drawings. Shall be fixed or
removable sections resting on a separate steel frame fixed to concrete or floor as
detailed. Steel sections for frame and reinforcement shall be hot rolled.
Cutting shall be by shear or by using saws, no cutting by torch shall be permitted.
05500-11

FOR 205
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Covers shall be continuously sealed to underside frame to prevent ingress of water and
provided with suitable galvanized steel hardware and special locking device which can
be operated from both sides and shall be provided with hinges and hasp for padlock.
Cover shall be provided with flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections,
one at each end of each section. Cover shall be designed for foot traffic only of 500
kg/m2 and the deflection shall not exceed 0.2% of the span.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Field Measurements
Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where
possible. Do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting where taking field
measurements before fabrication may delay work.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions

and directions for installation of anchorages such as concrete inserts, sleeves. Anchor
REVISIONS bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the Site.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.2 INSTALLATION
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.2.1 General
APPROVED
 Fastening to In-Place Construction:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing

miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction, including threaded
fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,
wood screws and other connectors as required.
OPERATING DEPT.
 Cutting, Fitting and Placement
Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level,
CERTIFIED true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide
temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into
BY: ___________________ concrete, masonry or similar construction.
DATE: _________________
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded
because of transporting size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up
shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which
have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or
screwed field connections.
05500-12

FOR 206
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Field Welding
Comply with ASTM and BS standards for procedures of manual metal-arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made and methods used in correcting welding
work.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
3.2.2 Setting Loose Plates
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not
remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing
plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations
where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations,
unless otherwise indicated.
REVISIONS
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.2.3 Setting Inserts, Sleeves and Anchors
CHK’D BY: ____________
Shall be fixed in place before concreting as shown on Drawings or as required. Set
APPROVED
sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations, protect sleeves from
water and concrete entry.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.2.4 Installing Nosing
Install with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.3.1 Touch-Up Painting
CERTIFIED Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used f6r shop painting.
BY: ___________________
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 50 microns.
DATE: _________________
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that will come into contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
- END OF SECTION -
05500-13

FOR 207
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General Conditions, and
Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work
of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
Steel pipe and tube handrails and railings

Extent of pipe and tube railings is shown on Drawings.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section
CHK’D BY: ____________
Section 03005 - Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
APPROVED
Section 09900 - Painting
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Pipe and tube railings shall be in strict accordance with the specifications, Drawings and
the stipulations of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) or other
equivalent International Standards and Sound Practice.
OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM NO
A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

CERTIFIED A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded
and Seamless
BY: ___________________
A 500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Round and Structural Shapes
DATE: _________________
C 1107 Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)
D 1187 Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsion for Use as Protective Coatings for
Metal
E 488 Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
E 894 Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails
for Buildings
E 935 Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and
Rails for Buildings
E 985 Specifications for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings
05521-1

FOR 208
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings
Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding the following structural loads
without exceedinsg allowable design working stresses of materials for handrails, railings,
anchors, and connections.
Top Rail of Guards Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:
 Concentrated load of 100 kg applied at any point and in any direction.

 Uniform load of 75 kg/m. applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load
of 150 kg/m applied vertically downward.
 Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Handrails not Serving as Top Rails Capable of withstanding the following loads applied
as indicated:
 Concentrated load of 100 kg applied at any point and in any direction.

REVISIONS
 Uniform load of 75 kg/m applied in any direction.
 Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 600 kg
2
CHK’D BY: ____________ applied to 1.0 m at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or
other elements composing infill area.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in
determining stress on guard.
1.5.2 Thermal Movement
Provide handrails and railings that allow, for thermal movements resulting from the
OPERATING DEPT.
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
CERTIFIED
Temperature Change (Range) 60 ºC, ambient; 100 ºC, material surfaces.
BY: ___________________ 1.5.3 Control of Corrosion

DATE: _________________
Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other
materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
Specification Sections.
1.6.1 Product Data: Provide product data for the following:
05521-2

FOR 209
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected handrails and railings

 Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
1.6.2 Shop Drawings
Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations,
sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.
For installed handrails and railings indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed by the engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.6.3 Samples for Initial Selection
Short sections of railing, sheet or flat metal samples showing available mechanical
finishes and manufacturer's full range of colours available for products with factory-
applied colour finishes.
1.6.4 Samples for Verification

REVISIONS For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components of same thickness
and metal indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal colour and texture variations,
DRAWN BY: ___________ include. sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

 150 mm long sections of each distinctly-different linear railing member, including
handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
APPROVED  Fittings and brackets.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
 Assembled sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including
top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at
intersections.
1.6.5 Qualification Data
OPERATING DEPT. For firms and persons to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineer and Employer and other information specified.
1.6.6 Product Test Reports

CERTIFIED
From a qualified testing agency indicating handrails and railings comply with ASTM E
BY: ___________________ 985, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
DATE: _________________
1.7.1 Testing Agency Qualifications
Testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.
1.7.2 Source Limitations
Obtain each type of handrail and railing through one source from a single manufacturer.
05521-3

FOR 210
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.8 STORAGE
Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place, protected from
moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures and humidity.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.9.1 Field Measurements
Verify handrails and railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and
indicated measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.9.2 Established Dimensions
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
REVISIONS
1.10 COORDINATION
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
CHK’D BY: ____________
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
APPROVED
masonry. Deliver such items to Project Site in time for installation.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.11 SCHEDULING
Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do
not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance
requirements.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
CERTIFIED
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
BY: ___________________
incorporated into the Work shall demonstrate their capabilities and experience of Work of
the same quality and importance and shall be approved by Engineer.
DATE: _________________
2.2 METALS
Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, and other
imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
2.2.1 Aluminium
Alloy and tempers as recommended by manufacturer and with not less than the strength
and durability properties of alloy and temper comply to ASTM and BS standards.
05521-4

FOR 211
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.2.2 Steel and Iron
Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following requirements:
Steel Pipe: finish, type, and weight class as follows:
 Black finish for interior installation unless otherwise indicated.

 Galvanized finish for exterior installation and where indicated.
Steel Tubing:Cold formed steel tubing, Grade A, unless another grade is required by
structural loads.
Steel Plates. Shapes, and Bars:
Brackets, flanges and anchors shall be cast or formed metal of same type of material
and finish as supported rails.
2.3 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS

REVISIONS
2.3.1 Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes
DRAWN BY: ___________ as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for colour match,
DATE: _________________ strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.3.2 Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction
APPROVED
Select fasteners of type. grade and class required to produce connections suitable for
anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
withstanding design loads.
For aluminium handrails and railings, use fasteners fabricated from stainless steel.
For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners with electrodeposited zinc
OPERATING DEPT. coating.
2.3.3 Fasteners for Interconnect in iz Handrail and Railing Components

Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials jointed.
CERTIFIED
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components and for
BY: ___________________ attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
DATE: _________________
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners. unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3.4 Cast-in-Place and Post Installed Anchors

Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials ,krith
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
05521-5

FOR 212
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Cast-in-place anchors.
 Expansion anchors.
2.4 PAINT
Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting".
2.4.1 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal
Fast-curing, lead and chromate free, universal modified alkyd primer, selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems
indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
2.4.2 Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel
Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility
with finish paint systems indicated
REVISIONS 2.4.3 Bituminous Paint
DRAWN BY: ___________ Cold-applied asphalt mastic containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt
DATE: _________________ emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.4.4 Backed Enameled Coating
APPROVED
Prepare metal by removing grease, dirt, oil, flux and other foreign matter. Apply coating
ENGINEERING DEPT.
according to paint manufacturer.
2.5 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
2.5.1 Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout

OPERATING DEPT.
Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non corrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications.
CERTIFIED 2.5.2 Erosion-Resistant Anchoring
BY: ___________________ Cement-Factory packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion

DATE: _________________
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pour able anchoring,
patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from
water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is
recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.5.3 Ordinary Grout
Ordinary portland cement, and fine desert sand mixed with the proportion of I cement to
2 V2 sand and necessary water to create a pour able compound.
05521-6

FOR 213
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.6 FABRICATION
Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than
that required to support structural loads.
2.6.1 Assembling
Assemble handrails and railings the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
Form changes in direction of railing member as detailed, by bending or by mitering at

elbow bends.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in Jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required, maintain cylindrical cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
REVISIONS deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.6.2 Welded Connections

DATE: _________________
Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components
CHK’D BY: ____________
at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for
APPROVED
this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
OPERATING DEPT. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
2.6.3 Non-welded Connections
CERTIFIED Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting members with concealed mechanical
fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to
BY: ___________________
produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
DATE: _________________
For aluminium fabricate pipe handrails and railings to interconnect members with
concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using standard system of
sleeve and socket fittings.
2.6.4 Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors
Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect

handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inserts
and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or
masonry work.
05521-7

FOR 214
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and

railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2.6.5 Fixation
 For Railing Posts Set in Concrete Provide preset sleeves of steel not less than
150 n-un long with inside dimensions not less than 12 mm. greater than outside
dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.
 Post in Core Drilled Holes: Core drill concrete to produce holes with a diameter at
least 20 mm larger than outside diameter of post and not less than 125 mm deep.
 For Removable Railing Posts Fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube whose ID
is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load,
measured it top, to not more than 1/14 of post height. Provide socket covers
designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.
Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
REVISIONS
2.6.6 Fabrication
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Ease. exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
APPROVED Form bent metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing the Work.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
OPERATING DEPT. handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from
condensation or other sources.
Fabricate joints that shall be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
CERTIFIED Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
BY: ___________________ Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close
DATE: _________________
ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 6 mm or less.
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings ,and at
edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crushed-resistant material,
where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports.
Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to
prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
05521-8

FOR 215
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.7 FINISHES
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including colour and texture,
of handrails and railings.
2.7.1 Steel Finishes
Galvanized Handrails and Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron handrails
and railings to comply with ASTM A 123. Hot-dip galvanize hardware for exterior steel
and iron handrails and railings to comply with ASTM A 153/A.
REVISIONS
Fill vent and drain holes that shall be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to
DRAWN BY: ___________ remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
DATE: _________________
For Non-galvanized Steel Handrails and Railings: Provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal
CHK’D BY: ____________
fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in
APPROVED
exterior concrete or masonry.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Preparation for Shop Priming After galvanizing, thoroughly clean handrails and railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrail and railing components, unless
otherwise indicated. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete
OPERATING DEPT. or masonry.
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces
Stripe paint edges, comers, crevices, bolts, and welds

CERTIFIED
2.7.2 Aluminium Finishes
BY: ___________________
Mechanical Finish:Non specular as fabricated
DATE: _________________
Chemical Finish:Etched, medium matte
Anodic Coating: Architectural, integrally coloured or electrolytically deposited
Colour Coating:0.02 mm. or thicker
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
05521-9

FOR 216
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.1.1 Cutting and Drilling
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails
and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established
lines and levels and free from rack.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of
steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.
3.1.2 Adjustment
Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at interval indicated about 600 mm o.k. but not less than that required
REVISIONS by structural loads.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.1.3 Fastening to In-place Construction

DATE: _________________
Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and
CHK’D BY: ____________
railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
APPROVED
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that shall be in contact with grout, concrete,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

OPERATING DEPT.
Use mechanical for permanently connecting railing component. Using wood blocks and
padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of
exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of handrails
and railings.
CERTIFIED
3.2.2 Welded Connections:
BY: ___________________
Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with
DATE: _________________
requirements for welded connections whether welding is performed in the shop or in the
field.
3.2.3 Expansion Joints
Install expansion Joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to
accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending (50 mm.)
beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 150 mm of post.
05521-10

FOR 217
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3 ANCHORING POSTS
3.3.1 Pipe Sleeves
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with the
anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3.2 Core Drilling
Form or core-drill holes clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions:
 Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.

 Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement.
REVISIONS 3.3.3 Flange Cover:
DRAWN BY: ___________ Cover anchorage joint with flange 60 x 60 x 10 mm or as indicated on Drawings of same
DATE: _________________ metal as post, attached to post as follows:
CHK’D BY: ____________
 Welded to post after placing anchoring material.
APPROVED  By set screws.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.3.4 Removable Railing
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in
concrete.
OPERATING DEPT. 3.4 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS
Anchor railing ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing
ends and anchored into wall construction with post installed anchors and bolts.
CERTIFIED
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces
BY: ___________________ Weld flanges to railing ends.

DATE: _________________
3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with (38 mm) clearance from
inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
Secure Wall Brackets to building construction as follows:
05521-11

FOR 218
494
‫لمشعقي‬
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3.6 CLEANING
Clean steel handrail by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting".
3.7 PROTECTION
REVISIONS Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with
temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer Remove protective
DRAWN BY: ___________ coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.
DATE: _________________
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
CHK’D BY: ____________
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
APPROVED
shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
- END OF SECTION -
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED 05521-12
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________

FOR 219
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the ornamental metal used in the construction for functional,
architectural and decorative effects according to the following:
 Ornamental railing fabricated from custom shapes

 Tapered brass mast for towers cap
REVISIONS
 Brass sphere for towers cap
 Brass metal flashing for towers
DRAWN BY: ___________  Metal reveals
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ Extent of ornamental metal is shown on drawings
APPROVED 1.3 RELATED SECTION INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING

ENGINEERING DEPT.
"Unit Masonry Assemblies"
"Metal Fabrications "for non ornamental metal fabrications

OPERATING DEPT.
1.4.1 Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings
Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for
structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and
CERTIFIED
ASTM E 935.
BY: ___________________ 1.4.2 Thermal Movements

DATE: _________________
Provide handrails and railings that allow thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night-time sky heat loss.
 Temperature Change (Rang) 20 ºC, ambient, 60 ºC,. material surfaces.
05700-1

FOR 220
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.4.3 Control of Corrosion
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division -I
1.5.1 Product Data
Provide product, data for each product used in ornamental metal, including
installation instructions, finishing, materials and methods
Include product data for grout and anchoring cement
1.5.2 Shop Drawings
REVISIONS Show fabrication and installation of ornamental metal.Include plans, elevations,

component details, and attachments to other work. Indicate materials thickness,
DRAWN BY: ___________ dimensions and profiles of ornaments metal member, fittings, joinery finishes,
DATE: _________________
fasteners, anchorages, accessory, Items and relation to adjoining construction.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and
APPROVED
other anchorages.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Patterns, models, or plaster castings made from proposed patterns for each design
of custom casting required.
1.5.3 Samples for Initial Selection
OPERATING DEPT.
Manufacturer's colour charts showing the full range of colors and other finish
characteristics available for each item indicated below:
 Ornamental metal with baked enamel coating

CERTIFIED  Ornamental metal with high performance coating
BY: ___________________ Samples for Verification: For each profile and pattern of fabricated metal and for
DATE: _________________
each type of metal finish required, prepared on metal of same size thickness and
alloy indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal colour and texture variations,
include samples sets, consisting of two or more units, showing the full range of
variations expected.
 Include 150 mm long samples of linear shapes

 Include 150 mm square samples of plates
 Include full size samples castings and forgings
05700-2

FOR 221
494
‫لمشعقي‬
For custom castings, submit finished samples of similar previous work to show ability
to reproduce detail, cast metal color, and quality of finish.
1.5.4 Welding Certificates
Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
1.6.1 Installer Qualifications
Arrange for installation of ornamental metal specified in this section by the same firm
that fabricated it.
The fabricator shall be a firm experienced in producing ornamental metal similar to

that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,
as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
1.6.2 Testing Agency Qualifications

REVISIONS
An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the
DRAWN BY: ___________ testing required.
DATE: _________________
1.6.3 Mockups
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Construct mockups for each item and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects
as well as quality of materials execution, workmanship or steel surfaces and welded
ENGINEERING DEPT.
or bolted connections.
Select sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability

of handrails and railings to comply with performance requirements.
OPERATING DEPT. 1.6.4 Welding Standards
Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASTM A769.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

CERTIFIED
Store ornamental metal inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and
BY: ___________________
masonry, and protected from weather moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures and
humidity.
DATE: _________________
Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platform or other supports.
Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or
rusty before use.
Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by sufficient excelsior to
ensure that products shall not be cracked or otherwise damaged.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.
05700-3

FOR 222
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Field Measurements: Where ornamental metal is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions
and proceed with fabricating ornamental metal without field measurements. Coordinate other
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.9 COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of anchorages for ornamental metal items. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
REVISIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

DATE: _________________
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
CHK’D BY: ____________
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, specialized fabricators and
APPROVED
manufacturers as selected or indicated by Engineer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.2 METALS
General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit.
Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
OPERATING DEPT.
2.2.1 Copper Alloys, Bronze
Provide copper alloy of type and form indicated to comply with the following
requirements:
CERTIFIED
Extruded Shapes: Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bonze).
BY: ___________________
Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: alloy UNS No.C28000, 60 percent copper).
DATE: _________________
Seamless Pipe and Tubes: Alloy UNS No. C23000 (red brass, 85 percent copper).
Composition Bronze: Casting ASTM B62, alloy UNS No. C83600 (composition
bronze).
2.2.2 Copper Alloys Brass
Provide copper alloy of type and form indicated to comply to ASTM and BS
standards.
05700-4

FOR 223
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.2.3 Stainless Steel
Grade and type designated below for each form required.
 Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 314.
 Pipe: ASTM A 3 12/A312M, Grade TP304.
 Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or Grade CF 20,
 Sheet. Strip. Plate. and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304
 Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
2.2.4 Wire Rope
Specially fabricated 1-by-19 wire rope that is drawn through die after laying to
produce a smooth outer surface; made from wire complying with ASTM and BS
standards.
REVISIONS

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Provide steel and iron in form indicated to comply with the following requirements:
CHK’D BY: ____________
 Tubing: Cold formed.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.  Steel Plate, Rolled Shapes. and Bars: shall be mild steel Grade 37 unless
otherwise specified.
 Steel Sheet: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, stretcher-leveled, carbon-steel sheet.
 Gray-1ron Castings
OPERATING DEPT.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.3.1 Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal

CERTIFIED
Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal
to be welded, complying with applicable specifications, and as required for colour
BY: ___________________ match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
DATE: _________________
2.3.2 Fasteners
Use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental metal components and

for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
05700-5

FOR 224
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.3.3 Cast in-Place and Post-Installed Anchors
Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete.
Provide toothed steel or lead shield expansion bolt devices for drilled in place
anchors.
Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installation.
 Cast-in-place anchors
 Expansion anchors
2.3.4 Wire-Rope Fittings
Connectors of types indicated, from stainless steel, and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength for wire rope with which
REVISIONS they are used.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.3.5 Grout

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

Provide grout for interior and exterior applications of Portland cement according to
BS12 and natural sand mixed at a ratio of 1part cement to 2 1/2 parts sand by
APPROVED
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.3.6 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal
Fast-curing, lead and chromate-free, universal modified alkyd primer with good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems
indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied top coats-
OPERATING DEPT. despite prolonged exposure.
2.3.7 Shop primer for Galvanized Steel
Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated steel and for
CERTIFIED compatibility with finish paint systems indicated.
BY: ___________________ 2.3.8 Bituminous Paint

DATE: _________________
Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with comply to ASTM and BS standards
except containing no asbestos fibers.
2.4 FABRICATION GENERAL

Form ornamental metal to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles.
Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to comply
with requirements indicated for structural performance.
Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work.
Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed fasteners
where possible.
05700-6

FOR 225
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed
side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux, and dress all exposed and contact
surfaces.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter comer joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration..
Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that
impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove
seams, gate marks, casting flash and other casting marks
Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well defined lines and arise.
2.4.1 Cutting
Cut metal by sawing, shearing or blanking. Make cuts accurate, clean, sharp, square
and free of burrs, without deforming adjacent surfaces or metals.
2.4.2 Holes
REVISIONS
Drill or cleanly by punch holes (do not burn) so that holes shall be accurate, clean,
DRAWN BY: ___________ neat and sharp, without deforming adjacent surface or metals.
DATE: _________________
2.4.3 Assemblies
CHK’D BY: ____________
Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
APPROVED
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for assembly and coordination installation. Use
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square and free of surface blemishes,
including pitting rust and scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and
roughness.
OPERATING DEPT.
Make-up wire-rope. assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with
fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for
dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes.
Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and
CERTIFIED orientations for coordinated installation.
BY: ___________________
2.4.4 Connections
 Non-welded Connections: Interconnect members with concealed mechanical
DATE: _________________
fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and
fittings to produce tight, flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints formed to exclude
water.
Provide connections to allow for thermal movement of metal at location

indicated.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive
where this is fabricator's standard splicing method.
05700-7

FOR 226
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Welded Connections: Welding shah be in accordance with ASTM and BS

standards and shall be done by electrodes or methods recommended by
fabricators. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to
provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose, Weld connections
continuously to comply with the following:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Weld shall be continuous except

where spot welding is specifically permitted.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
REVISIONS All welds behind surfaces exposed to view shall be done so that finished
surface shall be free from imperfections.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Provide welded connections for stainless-steel handrails and railings.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Provide welded connections for ferrous handrails and railings.
APPROVED
Test welding according to ASTM and BS standards
ENGINEERING DEPT.
 Brazed Connections: Fabricate copper-alloy handrails and railings for connecting

members by brazing. For connections made during fabrication, braze
corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
OPERATING DEPT. Use materials and methods that match colour of base metal, minimize
distortion, and develop maximum strength and corrosion resistance.
CERTIFIED At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and brazed surface matches contours of
BY: ___________________ adjoining surfaces.
DATE: _________________
2.4.5 Changes in Direction
Form changes in direction of railing members by method indicated below applicable

to change of direction involved
 By radius bends of radius indicated

 By flush radius bends
 By mitering at elbow bends
05700-8

FOR 227
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of handrail and railing components.
For handrails and railings with non-welded connections that are exposed to exterior
or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weep holes or another
means to drain water entrapped in hollow sections of railing members.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated;

close ends of returns.
Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with manufacturer's standard
prefabricated end fittings.
Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect

handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
REVISIONS
Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to
DRAWN BY: ___________ concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding
DATE: _________________
loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with
supporting structure.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 150
mm long and inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside
ENGINEERING DEPT.
dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.
2.5 FABRICATING METAL REVEALS
Fabricate metal reveals of 19 x 19 x 3 mm extruded-bronze channels. Drill for mounting

OPERATING DEPT. screws 150 mm from ends of channels and not more than 600 mm o.c. Locate mounting
screws at same heights for all channels. Provide black finished, hex socket, wafer-head
wood screws for mounting reveals.
2.6 FINISHES GENERAL

CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
temporary protective covering before shipping.
DATE: _________________
2.6.1 Copper-Alloy Finishes
 Buffed finish: Mechanical finish: buffed, smooth specular
 Hand-rubbed finish, lacquered mechanical finish: directionally textured, fine stain,

or : directionally textured, hand rubbed.
Coating : clear organic, air drying, as specified below:
05700-9

FOR 228
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Clear, organic coating Clear, air-drying, acrylic lacquer specially developed

for coating copper-alloy products, applied by air spray in two coats per
manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to total thickness
of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
 Statuary conversion coating over satin finish: Mechanical finish: directionally

textured, fine satin.
Chemical finish: conversion coating, sulfide
Colour: Match Engineers sample.
 Patina conversion coating: Mechanical finish: directionally textured uniform.
Chemical Finish: non-etched cleaned, degreased; or conversion coating,

ammonium sulfate.
Colour: Match Engineer sample.

REVISIONS
 Stature conversion coating, bright relieved. and lacquered: Mechanical finish:
matte finish, as cast, or buffed, as specified.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Chemical Finish: conversion coating, sulfide.

CHK’D BY: ____________
Coating: clear, organic, air drying,
APPROVED
Colour and Buffing: match Engineer sample
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Clear, Organic Coating: Clear, air-drying, acrylic lacquer specially developed

for coating copper-alloy products, applied by air spray in two coats per
manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying to a total thickness of
1 mil (0.025 mm).
OPERATING DEPT.
 Blackened Bright Relieved and Lacquered Mechanical finish: directionally texture,

coarse satin; coating: black, air drying or buffed, as specified.
Coating: clear, organic, air drying.

CERTIFIED
Blackening and Buffing. Match Engineering sample.

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
Clear Organic Coating Clear, air-drying, acrylic lacquer specially developed
for coating copper-alloy product, applied by air spray in two coats per
manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying to a total thickness of I
mill (0.025 mm).
2.6.2 Stainless Steel Finishes
Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally texture, polished finish
indicated free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
05700-10

FOR 229
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Finish shall be one of the specified below according Engineer requirements:
- Bright Cold-Rolled Unpolished Finish

- Satin Directional Polish
When polishing is completed passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.6.3 Iron and Steel Finishes
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled, pressed; and forged steel
shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized.
Fill vent and drain holes that shall be exposed in finished work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filling off smooth.
Preparation for shop priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean ornamental metal of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate
process.
REVISIONS
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and
DRAWN BY: ___________ pretreatment, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per
DATE: _________________
applied coat, to surfaces that shall be exposed after assembly and installation, and
to concealed, non galvanized surfaces.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
 Non Galvanized Metals
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Powder-Coated Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat non galvanized ferrous metal to
comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
Treat prepared metal with iron-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces.
OPERATING DEPT. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film
thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
 Galvanized Metals
CERTIFIED Powder-Coated Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with
resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other
foreign matter.
Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse and seal surfaces.
Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film

thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
05700-11

FOR 230
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing ornamental metal to
in-place construction.
Perform cutting drilling and fitting required to install ornamental metal, set products
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in form work for items to be built into concrete,
masonry or similar construction,
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated,
with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint filler. Where cutting, welding, and
grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of ornamental metal, restore finishes
to eliminate any evidence of such corrective work.
Do not cut or abrade finished work that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
REVISIONS items with such finishes to the shop for required alteration, followed by complete refinishing,
or provide new units as required.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Install concealed gaskets joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation.
APPROVED
Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet
to be performed at same location.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly finished
items to preclude non uniform oxidation and discoloration.
Field Welding: Comply with applicable specification for procedures of manual shielded metal
OPERATING DEPT. arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in correcting welding
work. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed welded joints smooth and restore finish
to match finish of adjacent surfaces.
CERTIFIED Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that shall be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
BY: ___________________
3.2 INSTALLING HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
DATE: _________________
Adjust handrails and railing before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joints.
3.2.1 Concrete-anchored Posts in Sleeves
Insert post in preset sleeves, cast into concrete concrete, and fill annular space
between posts and sleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.
05700-12

FOR 231
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.2.2 Concrete Anchored Posts in Core-Drilled Holes
Core-drill concrete to produce holes with a diameter at least (20 mm) larger than OD
of post and not less than (125 mm) deep. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts,
and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, non-metallic grout,
mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.
Cover anchorage joint with flange or escutcheon plate attached to post after filling
annular space.
Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off excess grout, and leave 3.0 mm build-up,
sloped away from post.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with fittings designed for this purpose.
Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components.

Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
REVISIONS Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws plastic cement filler coloured to
match finish of handrails and railings.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.2.4 Welded Connections
CHK’D BY: ____________
Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by welding
APPROVED
Cope or butt components to provide 100% contact or use fittings designed for this
purpose.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Anchor railing ends into concrete or masonry with fittings designed for this purpose.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with fittings using concealed fasteners, or by
welding.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL REVEALS AT WOOD PANELING
Install metal reveals between wood panels as paneling is installed. Secure to wood grounds
with specified screws.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
Extent and Testing, Methodology: Testing agency shall randomly select completed handrail
DATE: _________________
and railing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and
conditions in the completed work
Testing agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer.
Remove and replace handrails and railings where test results indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements, unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to
Engineer and shall comply with specified requirements.
05700-13

FOR 232
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Additional Testing: Where handrails and railings are removed and replaced or are repaired,
additional testing shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work
with specified requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
Clean aluminium and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and
rinsing with clean water.
Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that leaves
an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved sample.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division-9 Section "Painting".
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
REVISIONS galvanizing.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.6 PROTECTION

DATE: _________________
Protect-finishes of ornamental metal from damage during construction period with temporary
CHK’D BY: ____________
protective coverings approved by ornamental metal fabricator.
APPROVED
Remove protective covering at the time of substantial completion.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Restore finished damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence

remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop,
make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
OPERATING DEPT.
- END OF SECTION -
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
05700-14

FOR 233
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05720 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Conditions
of Particular Application, and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK
This section includes the following:
 Aluminium ornamental handrails and railing systems.

 Copper alloy ornamental handrails and railing systems.
 Stainless steel ornamental handrails and railing systems.
REVISIONS
 Steel and iron ornamental handrails and railing systems.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Extent of handrails and railings is shown on Drawings.

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
"Metal Fabrications"
"Ornamental Metal Work"
"Finish Carpentry"
"Marble and Granite"
OPERATING DEPT. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Handrail and railing systems shall withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
CERTIFIED 1.4.1 Structural Load
BY: ___________________ Of 100 to 500 kg/m, according to location, without exceeding the allowable design working
DATE: _________________
stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each
load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components.
Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads:
 Concentrated load of 100 kg applied at any point and in any direction
 Uniform load of 75 kg/m applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load
vertically downward
05720-1

FOR 234
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently
Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as
indicated:
 Concentrated load of 100 kg applied at any point and in any direction
 Uniform load of 75 ka/m applied in any direction
Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently
1.4.2 Thermal Movements:
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum change in ambient temperature in
fabricating, and installing han drails and railing systems to prevent buckling, opening of
Joints, overstressing of components and connections, and other detrimental effect. Base
calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime sky heat loss.
REVISIONS
Temperature Change (Range): 60 ºC ambient, and 100 ºC material surfaces.

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ 1.4.3 Control of Corrosion

CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
OPERATING DEPT. 1.5.1 Product Data
For manufacturer product lines of handrails and railing systems assembled from standard
components, include product data for grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
CERTIFIED 1.5.2 Shop Drawings
BY: ___________________ Showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings, including plans, elevations,
DATE: _________________
sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
1.5.3 Samples
 Manufacturer's colour charts showing the full range of colours available for units
with factory-applied colour finished, and in the form of short sections of railing or
flat sheet metal samples showing available mechanical finished.
 Each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components of same thickness

and metal indicated for final unit of Work.
05720-2

FOR 235
494
‫لمشعقي‬
150 mm long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including
handrails, top rails, posts and balusters.
Fittings and brackets.
Welded connections.
Assembled samples of railing system, made from full-size components, including

top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at
intersections.
1.5.4 Qualification Data
For firms and persons to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, and other information specified.
1.5.5 Product Test Reports Indicating compliance of handrails and railing systems with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.6.1 Pre-construction Testing Service

DATE: _________________
Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified testing agency to perform pre-construction
CHK’D BY: ____________
testing indicated. Test each type of handrail and system for compliance with requirements
APPROVED
specified, for performance and test methods.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Conduct tests using specimens and assemblies representative proposed materials and
construction.
Fabricate and install assemblies using personnel who shall perform the same tasks for the
Project.
OPERATING DEPT.
Select sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate the capability of
handrail, railing systems to comply with performance requirements.
1.6.2 Single-Source Responsibility

CERTIFIED
Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer.
BY: ___________________
1.6.3 Mock-ups
DATE: _________________
Construct mockups for each form of railing system and finish required to verify selections
made under sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups using materials indicated for final unit or Work
1.7 STORAGE
Store handrails and railing systems inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured
concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme
temperatures, and humidity.
05720-3

FOR 236
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing are indicated to 5t to other construction,
check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railing systems without field
measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond
to guaranteed dimensions.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any
means not satisfying structural performance requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
REVISIONS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
DRAWN BY: ___________ Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering handrails and railing
DATE: _________________
systems that may be incorporated in the Work shall demonstrate their capabilities and
experience for work of the same importance and magnitude and shall be approved by
CHK’D BY: ____________
Engineer.
APPROVED
2.2 METALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Provide metal free from surface blemishes, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, dis-
colourations, or other imperfections on finished units.
2.2.1 Aluminium
OPERATING DEPT.
Alloy and temper recommended by aluminium producer and finisher for type of use and
finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and
temper designated for each aluminium form required and complying with comply to ASTM
and BS standards alloy 6061 or 6063 T6.
CERTIFIED
Extruded Bar and Tube
BY: ___________________
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube
Drawn Seamless Tube
DATE: _________________
Plate and Sheet
Castings
2.2.2 Brass
Provide brass of type and form indicated to comply with the following requirements:
Extruded Shapes:Architectural brass

Seamless Pipe and Tube:Red brass, 85% bronze
Composition Bronze Castings:Composition commercial red brass
Sand Castings:Manganese bronze
05720-4

FOR 237
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.2.3 Stainless Steel
Dimensions grade and type designated for each form required as indicated on Drawings.
Complying with ASTM A554.
Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying with the requirements.
 Steel Tubing
- Cold-Formed or Hot Formed Steel Tubing
 For Exterior Installation: Where indicated, provide tubing with electrostatic powder
coating.
 Steel Plated, Shapes, and Bars
 Iron Casting: Malleable iron.

REVISIONS
 Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material
DRAWN BY: ___________ and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ Provide cast brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.2.5 Perforated Metal Sheets
Corrosion resistant hot dip galvanized metal sheet complying with Section 05500 "Metal
Fabrications" and Drawings, shall be electrostatically powder coated.
 Thickness: not less than 2.0 mm unless otherwise as indicated on Drawings.

OPERATING DEPT.
2.3.1 Fasteners
CERTIFIED
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade,
and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring handrails and
BY: ___________________ railing to other types of construction and capable of withstanding design loads.
DATE: _________________
 For Aluminium Railings: Provide fasteners fabricated from stainless steel.
 For Brass Railings: Provide fasteners fabricated from same base metal as railing
components or from stainless steel.
 For Stainless Steel Railing: Provide fasteners fabricated from stainless steel.
 For Steel Railings and Fittings: Use plated fasteners.
05720-5

FOR 238
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic

metal as the fastened metal. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible
with materials joined.
Provide concealed fasteners, for interconnecting handrail and railing components

and for attaching them to other work, except where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable,
Provide Phillips Flathead Machine Screw for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3.2 Cast-in Place and Post installed Anchors
Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete.
 Cast-in-Place Anchors
 Expansion Anchors
REVISIONS
2.3.3 Wood Handrails

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Hardwood handrails of species and profile indicated, or as selected by Engineer, bonded to
CHK’D BY: ____________
subrail with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
APPROVED 2.3.4 Paint

ENGINEERING DEPT.
Provide primes complying with applicable requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting".
 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal, Fast-curing, lead and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint, and
OPERATING DEPT. capability to provide a sound foundation for field applied top coats despite
prolonged exposure.
 Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for
priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated.
CERTIFIED
 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in

BY: ___________________ galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94% zinc dust by weight.
DATE: _________________
2.3.5 Grout and Anchoring Cement
 Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-

corrosive, non-gaseous grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
 Ordinary Grout: ordinary portland cement, and desert sand mixed with the
proportion of I cement to 2 ½ sand and necessary water
05720-6

FOR 239
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.4 FABRICATION
Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with the design, dimensions, details,
finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and
anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
2.4.1 Assemble Railing Systems
In shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces.
Form changes in direction of railing members as detailed, or by bending:
 By radius indicated
 By mitering elbow bends
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
REVISIONS curvature for each repetitive configuration required, maintain profile of member throughout
entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces
DRAWN BY: ___________ of handrails and railing components.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

2.4.2 Welded Connections
APPROVED
Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members by welding, cope
components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit. Weld comers and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
seams continuously to comply with the following:
 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
OPERATING DEPT.  Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
 Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
CERTIFIED
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours and adjoining
surfaces.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ 2.4.3 Mechanical Connections
Fabricate railing systems and handrails by connecting members with railing manufacturer's
standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to
produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this
represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.
05720-7

FOR 240
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and

anchors to connect handrail and railing members to other construction.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing systems to
concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable to withstand loads
imposed by handrails and Failing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting
structure.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than (150 mm)
long with inside dimensions not less than (12 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post,
and steel plate forming bottom closure.
For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube whose inside diameter
is sized for a close fit with movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not
more than 1/12 of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist
being dislodged.
REVISIONS
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal comers to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
CHK’D BY: ____________
otherwise impairing work.
APPROVED
Cut reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
and similar items.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of railing
members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.
OPERATING DEPT. Fabricate joints that shall be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings, use
flash welding or bolted connections with unexposed bolts.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close
CERTIFIED ends of returns unless clearance between end of the railing and wall is (6 mm) or less.
BY: ___________________
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around -openings and at the
edge of open-side floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
DATE: _________________
Fillers: Provide steel sheets or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to
support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through
wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finishes thickness. Size fillers to
produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
05720-8

FOR 241
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of adjacent pieces are acceptable

if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the
same piece are not acceptable.
2.5.1 Aluminium Finishes
 Mechanical Finish: Sand handrail, top rails, and intermediate rails in one direction only,
parallel to length of handrail or railing, with 120 and 320 grit abrasive. After
installation, polish top rail and handrails with No. 0 steel wool immersed in paste
wax; then rub to a luster with soft dry cloth
 Electrostatic Finish: Finishing shall be electrostatic powder coating 0.04 mm, thick
selected by Engineer from the full range of industry colours.
1 Prepare, clean with inhibited chemicals, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces
2.5.2 Brass Finishes

REVISIONS
 Buffed Finish: Mechanical finish, buffed, smooth specular.

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________  Hand-Rubbed Finish: Mechanical finish, directional textured, fine satin
CHK’D BY: ____________
 Clear Organic Coating: Clear, air-drying, acrylic lacquer specially developed for
APPROVED coating copper alloy products, applied by air spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's
ENGINEERING DEPT.
directions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1.0 ml (0.025 n1m).
2.5.3 Stainless Steel Finishes
Steel finish shall be either mat or gloss finish according to drawings or engineer request.
OPERATING DEPT. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform directional, textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
CERTIFIED
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ 2.5.4 Steel Finishes
All exposed steel units shall be finished as indicated on Drawings or at Engineer request:
 Electrostatic Powder Coated

 Baked Enamel
 Spray Enamel
Galvanizing Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with applicable

standard listed below:
ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

05720-9

FOR 242
494
‫لمشعقي‬
ASTM A 123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made from rolled, pressed, and forged
steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips.
Fill vent and drain holes that shall be exposed in the finished work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filling off smooth.
For galvanized handrails and railing systems, provide galvanized fittings, brackets,
fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
For non-galvanized steel handrails and railing systems, provide non-galvanized ferrous
metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded
in exterior masonry and concrete construction.
Preparation for shop priming, after galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil,
flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements.
Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components, unless
REVISIONS otherwise indicated. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or
masonry.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Stripe paint all edges, comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
APPROVED
 Baked-Enamel Finish Apply baked enamel finish complying with paint
ENGINEERING DEPT.
manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion, coating and painting.
Colours and gloss shall be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range
of colours and gloss
PART 3 EXECUTION
OPERATING DEPT.
3.1 PREPARATION
Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing
anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items
CERTIFIED having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
BY: ___________________
3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL
DATE: _________________
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
3.2.1 Cutting, Fitting, and Placement
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handras and railing, Set handrails
and railing accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
05720-10

FOR 243
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1 ½ mm in 1 m.
Align rails so that variation from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of
steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 2 mm in 1 m.
3.2.2 Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base materials.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove, welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that
no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining
surfaces.
REVISIONS
3.2.3 Corrosion Protection
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Coat concealed surfaces of the following, that shall be in contact with gout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar materials, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
 Aluminium alloys.
 Copper alloys.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at
abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by
structural loads.
OPERATING DEPT. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing handrails and railing systems and for properly transferring loads to
in-place construction.
3.3 FABRICATION
CERTIFIED
3.3.1 Railing Connections
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive Joints for permanently connecting
railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members
and fittings, Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic filler, cement
coloured to match finish of handrails and railing systems.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded Joints for permanently connecting railing
components by welding. Cope or use fittings designed for this purpose.
Expansion: Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not further apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
(50 mm) beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint
within (150 mm) of post.
05720-11

FOR 244
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3.2 Anchoring Posts
Use one of the following methods:
 Use steel anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeve preset and anchored into
concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space
between post and sleeve with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed
to comply with manufacturer's directions.
 Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core-drilling holes not less than (125
mm) deep and (20 mm) greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all
loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with
the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's directions.
- Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.

- Anchoring cement.
REVISIONS Cover anchorage joint with a round flange of same metal as post, attached to post as
follows:
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________  Welded to post after placement of anchoring material.

CHK’D BY: ____________
 By set screws.
APPROVED Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring materials, and leave 3 mm
ENGINEERING DEPT.
build-up, sloped away from post.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to meal supporting members as follows:
 For aluminium or copper alloy railings. Attach posts as indicated using. Fittings
OPERATING DEPT. designed and engineered for this purpose.
 For stainless steel or steel railing, weld flanges to post and bolts to metal
supporting surfaces.
CERTIFIED
3.3.3 Removable Railing System
BY: ___________________ Install removable railing-sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into
DATE: _________________ concrete. Accurately located sockets to match post spacing.
3.3.4 Attaching Handrails to Walls
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with (38 mm)
clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:
05720-12

FOR 245
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
 Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
 For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.
3.4 INSTALLATION PLASTIC HANDRAIL CAPS
Apply plastic handrail caps to top rails and handrails where indicated, complying with
manufacturer's instruction for cutting, mounting, forming welding, cleaning, applying end
caps, and finishing.
Minimize number of joints in plastic caps by installing in lengths as long as possible. Allow
for shortening of plastic cap caused by welding and splicing process, butt while material is
still warm.
Continuously weld, splice, miter, and end-cap joints using plastic cap manufacturer's
REVISIONS
electric welding iron designed for this purpose. Remove welding flash while material is still
warm
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Weld only prongs on underside of plastic cap at splice; miter and end-cap joints. After
CHK’D BY: ____________
cutting plastic cap, dress ends with file to produce a hairline fit between sections. After
mounting cap, polish top surface of plastic rail cap with cap manufacturer's solvent
APPROVED designed for this purpose becomes is purpose unit joint becomes almost invisible.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Testing Agency Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified testing agency to perform field
quality control testing
OPERATING DEPT. The testing agency shall randomly select completed railing assemblies for testing that are
representative of the different railing designs and conditions in the completed Work.
Testing agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer.
CERTIFIED Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements, unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the
BY: ___________________ Engineer so that they shall comply with specified requirements.
DATE: _________________
Additional Testing: Where railings are removed and replaced or are repaired, additional
testing shall be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Clean the following metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, followed by
rinsing with clean water.
Aluminium
Stainless steel
05720-13

FOR 246
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Clean copper alloys according to recommendations of metal finisher in a manner that

leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved sample.
3.7 TOUCHUP PAINTING
Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint are specified in Division 9.
For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing repair paint.
3.8 PROTECTION
Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction period
with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective
coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence
REVISIONS remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refined in the field to the shop,
make required alternations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
- END OF SECTION -
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
05720-14

FOR 247
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05850 - TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGN BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
Particular Application, and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK
This section includes the following:
 Traffic signs.
 Sign boards.
All signs shall be lettered in both English and Arabic, unless otherwise specified.
REVISIONS

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
CHK’D BY: ____________
"Metal Fabrications"
APPROVED
"Concrete Work"
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit manufacturer product catalogs and data sheets. The Contractor shall submit a written
request to the Engineer, for approval of all traffic sign material, giving makes, types, and
specification details, including a sample of a complete traffic sign, as shall be used in the
OPERATING DEPT. work.
Approval of material shall be obtained before ordering any traffic sign material.
Shop Drawings
CERTIFIED Submit shop drawing for material and erection of signs.
BY: ___________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DATE: _________________
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Concrete
Shall be in accordance with the requirements of section 3005 of the specification

using 1" maximum aggregate size. Quality shall be that of lean concrete or
reinforced concrete as the case may be.
05850-1

FOR 248
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.1.2 Bolts
Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of stainless steel conform to ASTM A276
chroming-nickel grade with a minimum yield strength of 2000 kg/sq.cm
2.1.3 Posts
Shall be made of steel tubes with a diameter as shown on the drawings and as
thickness of 3mm. The posts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The
weight of the zinc-coating shall be a minimum of 450 gram per square meter. The
top of the posts shall be closed or capped with a PVC cap.
2.1.4 Sign Plates
A. The standard road signs shall be of 3mm. or 5mm. T6 Alloy Aluminium

sheets. This plate shall be non-porous, smooth, flat, rigid, weather proof and
shall not rust or deteriorate. It shall be so cut that there are no sharp edges
and that the corners are rounded off to a radius of 30mm. Any trade mark or
other printing shall be carefully removed with lacquer thinner.
REVISIONS
B. Extruded aluminium panels when used shall have a minimum thickness of
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.7mm. The normal nominal panel width shall be 30 cm.
DATE: _________________
2.2 CONSTRUCTION OF SIGN FACE AND BACK FACE
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.2.1 The sign faces for different messages shall be made with wide angle reflective
sheeting which shall be processed on to the aluminium plate. The base of the sign
ENGINEERING DEPT.
face shall be normally of white, blue or yellow wide angle reflective sheeting or as
described in the foregoing paragraphs, but the particular sign message shall be
indicated on the drawings.
2.2.2 Prior to application of reflective film, the signs shall be cleaned and shall be waxfree.
OPERATING DEPT. They shall be greased by vapour or by alkaline immersion and etched by scrubbing
with abrasive cleaners, such as medium fine steel wool. They shall be rinsed
thoroughly and dried with hot air before applying any reflective material.
2.2.3 The sheeting shall be cut by any standard method by a band saw or a power
CERTIFIED guillotine. The cutting tool shall be clean and sharp. The sheeting shall be cut from
face side and held securely during cutting to avoid shattering and edge chipping.
BY: ___________________
2.2.4 The sheeting after application to the sign base shall not come off the edges nor shall
DATE: _________________
it peel off nor warp. The surface shall be smooth, flat and free from any bubbles,
pimples, edge chipping or edge shattering. It shall be washable and weatherproof.
2.2.5 The sheeting of different colors reflective or non- reflective shall have a life of 5 years
after application to the face of the sign.
2.2.6 This life of 5 years shall be the outdoor at-site life during which period it shall not
fade in color or its reflectivity nor shall it deteriorate in any way.
2.2.7 The backface of the aluminium sign plate shall be painted with medium gray color so
that the life of the two faces remains the same, i.e. about 5 years.
05850-2

FOR 249
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.3 LETTERING
2.3.1 The sign lettering shall be in both Arabic and English language as directed by the
Engineer.
2.3.2 The Arabic legend shall always be above the English legend. Where there are more
than one destination names on the same direction all the Arabic names shall be
grouped together above their English equivalent.
The type of letter to be used in the Arabic language shall be of the Naskh type
Alphabet.
The type of letter to be used in the English language shall be of the transport
medium type alphabet.
Sign lettering shall be in the English Language in clear, open Capital letters.
2.3.3 To improve legibility a relatively wide spacing between letters should be used. The
space between letters should be 1.5 widths of the letter stroke.
REVISIONS
2.3.4 The space between lines of copy should be approximately equal to the height of
DRAWN BY: ___________ upper case letters used in that line of copy. Space between lines of copy should be
DATE: _________________
approximately 3/4 of the average height of the upper case letters in adjacent lines of
copy.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.3.5 Spacing to top and bottom borders should be approximately equal to the height of
upper case in adjacent lines. Spacing to side borders from ends of longest line of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
copy should be approximately equal to height of upper case letters in that line.
Longest line should be "Visually Centered" on sign to account for slanted or open-
sided letters on either end.
2.3.5 A brilliant reflective border makes the sign more conspicuous. Border width should
OPERATING DEPT. be approximately 1/3 to 3/4 the stroke width of the largest letters of the sign unless
2.3.6 The Arabic Aleph height should be 1.7 times the x-height of the English lower case
letters.
CERTIFIED
2.3.7 The stroke width of the English letter is 0.2 times the selected x-height
BY: ___________________
2.3.8 The Arabic stroke width should be 1.5 times the English stroke width unless
DATE: _________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION OF ROAD SIGNS
3.1.1 All signs shall be mounted approximately at right angles to the direction of, and
facing, the traffic they are intended to serve.
3.1.2 To get maximum effectiveness from reflecting sheeting, the sign must be properly
located and should be faced slightly towards the road, according to this procedure:-
05850-3

FOR 250
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. If the center of the sign is 30 m or less from the centerline of the highway the
sign should be faced toward a point 160 m down the road. If more than 30
m the sign should be faced 250 m down.
B. To avoid specular glare the sign face should be tilted back two or three
degrees (about 1 cm. per 26 cm. of sign height)
C. Signs shall be installed at the locations and in accordance with details shown
on the drawings and in accordance with the approved samples and
materials.
D. All sign material shall withstand a wind load of 100kg per square meter of
sign surface without permanent deformation. Sign plates not exceeding 1m
in width shall be supported on single posts. Sign plates exceeding 1m in
width shall be supported on double posts, with or without bracing's.
E. Sign plates shall be attached to the posts with stiffeners, bolts, and screws
which shall be painted in the same color as the corresponding area of the
sign plate.
REVISIONS
F. The exact location of the sign shall be designated by the Engineer.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
G. Holes for posts shall be provided to a depth, which will permit the installation
of the post and the construction of the base to the depth indicated on the
CHK’D BY: ____________
drawings or required by the Engineer, when if blasting of rock or other
APPROVED
obstruction is necessary. All loose material shall be removed from
excavation and bearing surface of footings and excavation shall be cleaned
ENGINEERING DEPT.
and cut to a firm surface prior to the placement of concrete. Approved
backfill material shall be used. The adjacent surface shall be neatly graded
and compacted.
3.2 GUARANTEE BY CONTRACTOR

OPERATING DEPT.
3.2.1 All road signs shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against any defect in material
and workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of completion of the Works
under the Contract. If any defect should arise due to material or workmanship shall
be rectified by the Contractor at his own expense.
CERTIFIED
If such defect is rectified by other than the Contractor in accordance with the
BY: ___________________
Employer's instructions, the expense of such rectification shall be deducted from any
monies due on Contract or any other Contract as the Employer may decide.
DATE: _________________
- END OF SECTION -
05850-4

FOR 251
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of rough framing, miscellaneous blocking and curbing,

concealed wood framing and furring, and applied preservative and pressure treated
lumber. CONTRACTOR shall furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment required to
complete the WORK.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Federal Standards
REVISIONS TT-W-550 Wood Preservative, Chromated Copper Arsenate Mixture
DRAWN BY: ___________ TT-W-568 Wood Preservative, Cresote- Petroleum Solution

DATE: _________________
TT-W-570 Wood Preservative, Pentachlorophenol
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
TT-W-571 Wood Preservative, Treating Practice
ENGINEERING DEPT.
TT-W-572 Wood Preservative, Water Repellant
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D-2016 Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood

OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM D-2395 Specific Gravity of Wood and Wood Base Materials
ASTM D-2555 Establishing Clear Wood Strength Values
CERTIFIED C. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWFB) Standard
BY: ___________________
LP-2 Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Water-
Borne
DATE: _________________
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood Treatment Data: Submit copies of chemical treatment manufacturer’s instruction

for proper use of each type of treated material.
B. Submit for approval samples of preserved wood, identifying preservative, properties,

method treatment and expected service life.
06100-01

FOR 252
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Pressure Treatment:
1. Include certification by treatment plant stating chemicals and process used, net
amount of salts retained and conformance with applicable standards.
2. For water-borne preservatives, include statement stating moisture content of treated

materials was reduced to maximum 15% prior to shipment to PROJECT SITE.
D. Fire Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treatment plant stating treatment

material complies with governing ordinances and shall not bleed through finish surfaces.
E. Submit samples of nails and connectors including for every accessory and for each type
of nail with description of application.
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect against
exposure to weather and contact with damp and wet surfaces. Stack lumber and
REVISIONS plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Coordination: Fit rough carpentry WORK to other WORK, scribe and cope as required for
DATE: _________________
accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailer, blocking, grounds and similar supports to
allow proper attachment of other WORK.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. Examine Substrates and supporting structures and conditions where carpentry WORK
will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
ENGINEERING DEPT.
corrected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
OPERATING DEPT. 2.01 GENERAL
A. Lumber
1. Provide nominal sizes except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide actual sizes
CERTIFIED as required by PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use.
BY: ___________________
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise shown or specified.
DATE: _________________
3. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
4. Grades specified shall be as stated in National Design Specifications for Structural

Grade Lumber and Fastening, Table No.1, National Forest Products Association,
latest edition.
06100-02

FOR 253
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Accessories
1. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations
and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit
application. Length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 25 mm (1 inch) into
supports.
2. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit
application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated
wood; plain finish for other interior locations.
3. Fasteners: Toggle-bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and
lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete bolts or power activated
type for anchorage to steel.
C. General Use Plywood: Prod. Std. PS1, grade and thickness as indicated on the
drawings.
REVISIONS D. Grading and Marking:
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Lumber shall bear the grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating
DATE: _________________
grades of material and rules or standards of production. Identifying marks on
material shall be in accordance with the rule or standard of production, including
CHK’D BY: ____________
requirements for qualifications and authority of inspecting organization, usage of
APPROVED
authorized identification, and information included in the identification. The
inspection agency for lumber shall be certified by the Board of Review, American
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used. Except for plywood, bundle
marking or certificates will be permitted in lieu of marking each individual piece.
2. Sizes: Lumber sizes shall conform to Prod. Std. PS 20, and unless otherwise
specified, lumber shall be surfaced on four sides. Sizes for materials other than
OPERATING DEPT. lumber shall conform to requirements of the rules or standards of production and as
shown on drawing.
E. Moisture Content: At the time lumber and other materials are delivered and when
installed in the WORK, their moisture content shall be as follows:
CERTIFIED
1. Treated and untreated lumber 50 mm (2 inches) or less in thickness, 19 percent
BY: ___________________
maximum.
DATE: _________________
2. Treated and untreated lumber over 50 mm (2 inches) in thickness, 25 percent
maximum.
3. Materials other than lumber: In accordance with materials standard of production.
F. Delivery and Storage: Materials shall be delivered to the SITE in undamaged condition,
stored in fully covered, well ventilated areas, and protected from extreme changes in
temperature and humidity.
06100-03

FOR 254
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Brush or spray one coat of preservative treatment for wood will be cut in contact with
cementitious and metallic materials. Unless otherwise specified, it shall include wood
members exposed to weather or in contact with soil, water, masonry or concrete.
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Redry to

19% moisture content.
C. Wood treated with oil-borne preservatives shall be clean, free from surface oil and
properly seasoned for use in building construction. Wood treated with water-borne
preservative shall be air dried or kiln-dried to moisture content specified for lumber and
marked with the word "Dry".
3.02 INSTALLATION
REVISIONS A. Install blocking, furring, cants, nailing strips and framing true to line, plumb, level and
secure in place.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
B. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible length.
CHK’D BY: ____________
C. Nailing shall be in accordance with the Recommended Nailing Schedule as contained in
APPROVED
the NFPA (National Forest Products Association), Manual for House Framing. Where
detailed nailing requirements are not specified nail size and nail spacing shall be
ENGINEERING DEPT.
sufficient to develop an adequate strength for the connection without splitting the
members.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
06100-04

FOR 255
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
Furnishing and installation of finished carpentry including casework, cabinets, interior

and exterior trims, and miscellaneous finished wood items as shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D1324 Specification for Modified Wood

REVISIONS
ASTM D1760 Pressure Treatment and Timber Products
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ASTM D2559 Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use
Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ASTM D2915 Practice for Evaluating Allowable Properties for Grades
and Structural Lumber
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM D3110 Specification for Adhesives Used in Non-Structural Glues Lumber

Products
B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)

OPERATING DEPT.
AWI Quality Standards:
Section 300 - Trim

Section 400 - Casework and Countertops
CERTIFIED Section 600 - Shelving
Section 700 - Miscellaneous Work
BY: ___________________
C. Woodwork Institute of California (WIC) “Manual of Millwork”
DATE: _________________
Section 10 & 12 - Trim

Section 14 - Wood Casework
Section 15 - Plastic Laminate Casework
Section 11 - Shelving / Miscellaneous Work
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review and approval shop drawings of woodwork indicating materials,
component profiles, fastening details, jointing details, finishes and accessories.
06200- 01

FOR 256
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Submit samples of each wood specie to receive finish at WORK SITE.
C. Submit samples of nails, connectors and exposed hardware.
D. Submit component profiles, fastening details, jointing details, finishes and accessories.
E. Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature of specialty items.
F. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials:
1. Softwood lumber shall be custom grade in compliance with AWI Quality Standards;
REVISIONS maximum moisture content of 10%.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Hardwood lumber shall be premium grade in compliance with AWI Quality
DATE: _________________
Standards; maximum moisture content of 10%.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. Softwood plywood shall be premium grade in compliance with AWI Quality
Standards; veneer core material and sanded two sides.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. 4. Hardwood plywood shall be premium grade in compliance with AWI Quality
Standards; veneer core material and of grain type sufficient to receive opaque finish.
5. Hardboard shall be pressed wood fiber with resin binder and tempered service
grade.
OPERATING DEPT.
6. Plastic Laminate - comply with NEMA LD3 and WIC or AWI Custom Grade. Plastic
laminate shall be as per submittal approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
7. Stainless Steel – shall be 1.00mm thick, hairline finish.

CERTIFIED
8. Solid Polymer Countertop and Splashblock:
BY: ___________________
i. Provide one-piece solid polymer countertop and splashblock as specified in
DATE: _________________
section 06650. Height of backsplash is as shown on drawing.
B. Accessories:
1. Nails shall be of size and type to suit application.
2. Bolts, nuts, washers, lags, screws and hardware shall be of size and type to suit
application; non-corrosive to exterior, high humidity and treated wood locations; plain
finish at interior locations.
06200- 02

FOR 257
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Mark each unit of WORK with mills and fabricator’s identification and grade mark, located
on surfaces and shall not be exposed after installation.
D. Sizes and Patterns: Lumber sizes and patterns shall conform to product standard PS 20,
and unless otherwise specified, shall be surfaced on 4 sides. Sizes and patterns for
materials other than lumber shall conform to requirements of rules or standards specified
for production. Size references, unless otherwise shown on drawing, are nominal sizes
and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard
specified for production.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. Utility shelving in
cabinets shall be plywood, interior type, grade A-B, 12mm (1/2 inch) thick, any species
group.
REVISIONS B. Verify mechanical, electrical and other building WORK affecting the section are in place
and ready to receive the WORK. Inspect delivered cases and cabinets and related parts
DRAWN BY: ___________ for indication or location, size required by field measurements, finishing hardware and
DATE: _________________
similar preliminary WORK.
CHK’D BY: ____________
C. Prime paint surface of items and assemblies in contact with cementitious materials.
APPROVED
D. Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, including, but not
ENGINEERING DEPT.
limited to, hinges, door pulls, magnetic catches, door locks, adjustable shelf standards,
adjustable shelf clips, adjustable shelf standards for back or wall mount.
E. Doors and Other Moving Parts: Re-fit as necessary to ensure proper and easy operation.
Re-fit where necessary all cabinet hardware, test for proper operation. Replace cases
OPERATING DEPT. and parts damaged at no additional cost to COMPANY.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
06200- 03

FOR 258
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
of Particular Application and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
This section covers the work of finish carpentry as required by the Contract.
Finish carpentry includes non-structural carpentry work which is exposed to view, and is
not specified as part of other sections and Include the following:
REVISIONS  Plywood paneling

 Board Paneling
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ Extent of finish carpentry is shown on Drawings and in finishing tables.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
The work of this section shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the British
Standard Specifications (BS).
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIF11CATIONS

BS NO.
OPERATING DEPT.
1186 Quality of Timber and Workmanship in Joinery
CERTIFIED The following sections include requirements which relate to this section:
 Rough Carpentry
BY: ___________________  Damp-Proofing and Waterproofing
DATE: _________________
 Finish Hardware
 Painting
1.5 Submittals
1.5.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, specifications detail of

construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profile,
texture and installation instructions for each item of factory-fabricated and process.
06200-1

FOR 259
494
‫لمشعقي‬
For treated wood provide certification by treating plant stating type of solution,
process used and net amount of preservative retained.
For fire retardant treated wood include certification by treating plant that treated
materials comply with specified standards.
1.5.2 Samples: Submit representative samples in 300 mm long for lumber and 200 x 200
mm, for panels for each species, profiles, textures type of panelling and cut or
pattern with non factory-applied finish and with factory-applied finish.
1.5.3 Shop Drawings: including plans, elevations, sections, assemblies, large scale details
indicating profiles, installation, splice joints between sections, anchorage, fasteners,
and relation to adjoining work and finishes.
1.5.4 Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for
handling, storage, application and finishing treated materials.
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
REVISIONS Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar
operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in
CHK’D BY: ____________
installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be
APPROVED
stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified
for installation areas.Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to
ENGINEERING DEPT.
weather and contact with damp and wet surfaces. Stack lumber and panels, provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
1.7 Extended Warranty
OPERATING DEPT. Laminated plastic work shall not warp or delaminate for a period of not less than 2 years
from date of defects Liability Certificate.
Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace panelling

that fails in materials or workmanship within 10 years. Failure include but are not limited to
CERTIFIED deformation, or deterioration of paneling.
BY: ___________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DATE: _________________
2.1 General Millwork Requirements
Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp applied to ends or back
of each piece.
Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored or otherwise damaged or defective

material.
All wood specified or indicated to receive stained finish shall be of the same species of
hardwood and shall be Oak or other approved equal species.
06200-2

FOR 260
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Grades of lumber used shall be the highest grade of the species for stain finish and the
second grade for paint finish. Wood for stain finish shall be selected for compatible grain
and uniform color.
Nominal sizes are indicated on Drawings, except as shown by detailed dimensions, provide
worked and dressed lumber as applicable to actual sizes and patterns as shown.
Lumber shall be machine sanded at the mill and sandpapered smooth at the project when
installed. Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standard-stock moldings
and members conforming to the requirements of this section and approved design and
type.
Joints shall be made in an approved manner to conceal shrinkage and shall be tight. Trim
shall be secured with fine steel finishing nails and with screws and glue where required.
Nails shall be set for putty stopping.
Wood finish shall be set straight, plumb and level, in perfect alignment and shall be closely
fitted.
REVISIONS Skirting shall be in as long lengths as possible.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.2 Materials

DATE: _________________
2.2.1 Woods, General: Employed woods shall be first grade stocks which shall be properly
CHK’D BY: ____________
treated, adequately seasoned and free from warping (cuping or bowing), twisting,
APPROVED
chipping, loose knots and warning. All woods shall conform to BS No. 1186
Plywoods.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Provide lumber or plywood with each piece factory marked with grade stamps.
Stamp shall be applied to ends or back of each piece.
2.2.2 Softwoods
OPERATING DEPT.
 Yellow Fir : Yellow wood of average intensity not less than 450 kg/m3 at
12% moisture content.
 Douglas Fir: Reddish wood of straight compacted fibers. Average intensity
shall not be less than 530 k9/m3 at 12% moisture content.
CERTIFIED
 Pitch Pine: Reddish dark yellow wood of clear wide rings. Average intensity
BY: ___________________ shall not be less than 670 kg/m3 at 12% moisture content.
DATE: _________________
2.2.3 Hardwoods
 Oak Wood (White): Shall be fine grained wood of strong, compact,

homogeneous fibers and uniform texture. Average intensity shall not be less
than 720 kg/m3 at 12% moisture content.
 Beech Wood: Shall be fine grained wood of strong, compact, homogeneous

fibers, of light colour (white) and uniform texture. Average intensity shall be
720-950 kg/m3 at 12% moisture content.
06200-3

FOR 261
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.2.4 Plywoods
 General: Shall be best quality conforming to ES No.' 949. Employed

plywoods shall be of grade indicated below. Moisture content shall not
exceed 12%. Thickness shall be as indicated on Drawings.
 Beech Plywood: All layers shall be of Beech wood.
 Oak Plywood: Natural Oak grain veneer face.
2.2.5 Plastic Laminate Faces: Shall be high pressure decorative laminates. Colours and
patterns shall be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard products.
Nominal thickness shall be 1.25 mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.2.6 Blockboards: Shall be composite boards consisting of a core made up of strips laid
separately or glued or otherwise jointed together to form a slab. Outer veneer shall
be excellent grade for transparent finish and Grade 1 for painted finish and shall be
glued to sides with the direction of the grain of the core strips running at right-angles
REVISIONS
to that of the veneers. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm and beetle holes
and splits.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ 2.3 Hardwood or Softwood Paneling (Board-Type)

CHK’D BY: ____________
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide tongued and grooved, end matched
APPROVED wood paneling of standard widths and lengths as required and fabricated for attachment by
concealed metal clip system.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.4 Miscellaneous Materials
2.4.1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws, bucks and other anchoring
devices of the type, size, material and finish required to provide secure attachment,
OPERATING DEPT. concealed where possible, firmly secured in precise position to receive, support and
engage the several parts of the work. Bucks and nailing blocks embedded in
concrete or masonry shall be formed of lumber coated with cold applied bitumen
emulsion as specified in Division - 7 and Waterproofing and shall be securely
anchored with bolts, spikes or approved other anchorages.
CERTIFIED
Provide nails of sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 38 mm into substrate.

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating.
2.4.2 Waterproof Glue: Shall be first quality casein or phenolic resin glue, for general
carpentry use capable of withstanding extreme climatic conditions of dampness,
heat, cold and dryness.
2.5 Wood Preservative Treated Materials
Mark each treated item with the quality mark requirements, kiln-dry material before and
after treatment.
06200-4

FOR 262
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.5.1 Preservative Chemicals
Impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities. Use

chemical formulation that do not bleed through or adversely affect finishes. Do not
use colorant in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated one.
Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
2.5.2 Fire – Retardant
Use chemical formulation indicated by a pressure process to produce materials with

fire-test response characteristic specified.
2.6 Cupboards
Cupboards shall be installed where indicated on Drawings and shall comprise Yellow Fir
frames, block board sliding or side-hinged sashes complete with handles, drawers, locks
and shelves.
REVISIONS
Where sashes are sliding, handles shall be recessed type and flames shall be rebated or
DRAWN BY: ___________ otherwise equipped with double channel metal tracks to suit the performance of sliding
DATE: _________________
sashes.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Sashes and uprights shall be constructed of block boards lipped with 16 mm thick
APPROVED
hardwood (Beech) bandings at all edges and shall be free from warp and twist. Dimensions
and thicknesses shall be as indicated on Drawings. External and internal surfaces of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
cupboards shall be finished as specified in Division-9, Section 09900 "Painting".
2.6.1 Shelves: Shelves shall be constructed of 16 mm thick block-boards with filled front
edge. Shelves shall be built up in sections of the lengths and widths indicated on
Drawings. Provide uprights with suitable means for supporting shelves as indicated
OPERATING DEPT. on Drawings.
2.6.2 Clothes Rods: 38 mm diameter clear, kiln dried hardwood rods
2.7 Running Trim

CERTIFIED
Provide finished lumber molded to pattern indicated clear, kiln - dried selected for
BY: ___________________
compatible grain and color.
DATE: _________________
2.8 Paneling
Factory finished paneling, tongue and groove fabricated for attachment by concealed metal
clips.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, moldings and details indicated.
06200-5

FOR 263
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.2 Preparation
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas

prior to installing.
Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior or, where indicated. Comply
with requirements of Section 09900 "Painting" for primers and their application.
3.2.1 Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at project Site prior to delivery of finish carpentry
materials and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper
installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work.
3.3 Installation
3.3.1 General: Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted,
improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work
REVISIONS with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements or which are of defective
manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Install the work plumb, level, true, straight with no distortions and aligned with
adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. Install to a
CHK’D BY: ____________
tolerance of 3 mm in 2.4 m for plumb and level countertops; and with 2 mm
APPROVED
maximum offset in flush adjoining 3 mm. maximum offsets in revealed adjoining
surfaces.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts.
Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly

OPERATING DEPT. attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk
nails, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing
steel nails for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface and
matching final finish.
CERTIFIED
Attach siding to framing to comply with siding manufacturer's instructions including
BY: ___________________
requirements for type, size, materials, location and spacing of fasteners.
DATE: _________________
3.3.2. Standing and Running Trim: Install, with minimum number of joints possible, using
full-length pieces from maximum length of lumber available to the greatest extent
possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at
corners, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of
joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting.
Countersink fasteners heads in exposed works and fill holes.
06200-6

FOR 264
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.3.3. Pre-finished Hardwood Paneling, Board-Type: Install in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions for concealed nailing, Arrange in random width pattern
suggested by manufacturer, unless boards are of uniform width. Stagger end joints in
random pattern for best visual effect (uniformly distributed on each wall). Install with
uniform tight joints, with only tongued and grooved or end-matched joints within each
field of paneling.
Where grain character and colour of boards vary noticeably, select and arrange
boards for best visual effect as directed by the Engineer.
3.3.4 Softwood Paneling System, Board Type: Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions by method indicated below, or if not indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer for substrate provided.
Fasten paneling to wood substrates using manufacturer's concealed-clip system.
Fasten paneling to gypsum wallboard substrates using adhesives.
REVISIONS 3.3.5. Hardwood Plywood Paneling: Install with uniform tight joints between panels. Attach
panels to support with adhesive or fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by
DRAWN BY: ___________ panel manufacturer. Concealed fasteners to greatest practical extent. Arrange
DATE: _________________
panels with joints over supports. Arrange panels with V-grooves and joints over
supports and nail with type and spacing of fasteners recommended by panel
CHK’D BY: ____________
manufacture, with pre-finished heads on fasteners selected to match V-groove
APPROVED
colour.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.4 Adjustment, Cleaning, Finishing and Protection
3.4.1 Adjustment: Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to
eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly,
replace wood-work. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.4.2 Cleaning: Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4.3 Finishing: Refer to Division 9, Section 09900 "Painting" for final finishing of installed
CERTIFIED finish carpentry work.
BY: ___________________
3.4.4 Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise the Contractor of final
protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that finish carpentry
DATE: _________________
shall be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance or time of handing
over to the Employer.
- END OF SECTION -
06200-7

FOR 265
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07100 - WATERPROOFING, CAULKING AND SEALING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. Work in this Section includes, but not limited to furnishing and applying materials for
waterproofing where required, caulking and sealing as specified and as indicated in
the drawing.
1.02 Related Work
B. Division 03 : Section 01 Concrete Unit Masonry and Accessories
REVISIONS 1.03 Reference Standards
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
DATE: _________________
1. ASTM E 96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2. ASTM C 156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Federal Specification (FS):
1. TT-C 00598C (1) (COM-NBS) for Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin
Base Type (for Building Construction), Type I.
OPERATING DEPT. 2. TT-S-227E (3) (COM-NBS) for Sealing Compound; Elastomeric Type, Multi-
Component (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and other
Structures), Type II, Class A.
3. TT-S-00230C (2) (COM-NBS) for Sealing Compound; Elastomeric Type;

CERTIFIED Single Component (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and other
Structures), Type II, Class A.
BY: ___________________
C. MIL-A-148E Military Specification.
DATE: _________________
D. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI504R-77 Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete Structures.
07100-1

FOR 266
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Materials
A. Fluid Applied Waterproofing: Two-Component, self-priming, coal tar epoxy APCS-3
1. Bitumastic 300-m by Koppers Company, Incorporation, Pittsburgh, PA or

approved equal.
2. 46-413 Tneme-Tar by Tnemec Company, North Kansas City, MO or

approved equal.
3. Carbomastic No. 14 by Carboline Company, Street Luis, MO or approved

equal.
B. Caulking: FED. SPECS. TT-C-00598C, Type I, elastic oil or resin base compound
grey in color and non-staining.
C. Silicone Sealant: FED. SPECS. TT-S-00230C (2) (COM-NBS), Type II, Class A,
REVISIONS single component silicone rubber, non-staining.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Primer: Quick drying, colorless, non-staining, type and consistency as
DATE: _________________
recommended by silicone sealant manufacturer.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Color: As selected by the SEC’s Representative from manufacturer's
APPROVED
standard colors.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. Bond Breaker:
a. Polyethylene tape - pressure sensitive.
b. Aluminum foil - Military Specification MIL-A-148E.

OPERATING DEPT.
c. Waxpaper - PED. SPECS. UU-P-270F (2). Primer, Solvent,
Cleaning Agents: As recommended by the manufacturer of
accepted sealant material, and tested in combination with sealant for
staining and durability on samples of the actual surfaces to be
CERTIFIED tested.
BY: ___________________
D. Backup material:
DATE: _________________
1. For Caulking: Provide fiberglass, polyurethane.
E. Vapor Barrier:
1. Polyethylene Sheet of 0.15 mm thickness in largest possible size.
07100-2

FOR 267
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 General
A. Where pipes conduits or other items pass through the areas to be waterproofed and
where drains occur in such areas this water proofing shall be installed after the
flashing.
3.02 Preparation
A. Waterproofing: Insure that surfaces are clean, dry, free from dust and dirt, and
prepared as recommended by the material manufacturer.
B. Caulking and Sealant:
1. Insure that surfaces and joint cavities are clean, dry, and free from loose
particles, oil, grease, asphalt, tar, dirt, rust, wax, grease, asphalt, tar, dirt,
rust, wax, waterproofing, form release agent and other materials that may
result in the loss of bond.
REVISIONS
2. Dust concrete and masonry surfaces with a stiff brush and blow clean before
DRAWN BY: ___________ caulking.
DATE: _________________
3. Wipe metal surfaces contacting caulking compound with mineral spirits or
CHK’D BY: ____________
other suitable solvents and dry thoroughly before caulking.
APPROVED
4. Remove rust, mill scale and corrosion from metal surfaces to be in contact
ENGINEERING DEPT.
with sealant by hand or by mechanical brushing.
5. Remove protective coatings, factory-applied finishes, oil, grease, lacquers,

and dirt by use of a solvent that leaves no residue. Wipe metal surfaces with
clean rags or lint-less paper soaked in solvent and then wipe dry.
OPERATING DEPT.
3.03 Application
A. Caulking:
CERTIFIED 1. Do not thin or delute caulking material.
BY: ___________________
2. Apply caulking when ambient temperature is between 50 and 100 degree F.
DATE: _________________
3. Completely fill joints with caulking using a cartridge type ratchet handgun.
4. Tool caulking smooth, free from wrinkles and sufficiently convex to result in a
flush joint when dry.
B. Sealant:
1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions regarding

mixing, surface preparation, application life, and application procedure.
2. Apply when ambient temperature is between 40 and 100 degree F.

07100-3

FOR 268
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. Prime concrete, masonry, wood and other porous surfaces.
4. Mask finished surfaces on both sides of joint cavities to protect from sealant
smears. Remove masking after joint are sealed and tooled.
5. Install backup material of suitable size and shape in joints so that when
compressed 25 to 50 %, the backup material will fit the joint and provide
sealant dimensions indicated.
6. Avoid stretching, twisting or braiding backup material when installing in joint

cavities.
7. Use bond-breaker strips where there is insufficient room for backup material.
8. Install bond-breaker strips in the bottom of the joint cavity for the full width
and between the sealant and the supporting type of backup materials.
C. Fluid Applied Waterproofing:
REVISIONS 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation specifications.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Thin first coat.

DATE: _________________
3. Apply second coat to produce a minimum dry film thickness of 10 mil.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
D. Vapor Barrier:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Place polyethylene sheeting of the largest practicable width on top of fill
under concrete floor slabs on grade or where shown in the drawing.
2. Lap sheets 152 mm (6 in.) with the top sheet placed in the direction of
concrete placement.
OPERATING DEPT.
3. Turn sheeting up at the walls and seal all lap joints.
3.04 Repair of Defective Work
CERTIFIED A. Patch or replace defective or damaged caulking and sealant.
BY: ___________________
B. Repair or replace damaged or defective vapor barrier and waterproofing with new
materials.
DATE: _________________
3.05 Cleaning
A. Remove smears, stains and other soil resulting from the caulking and sealing.
B. Clean sealant from adjacent Work area as the Work progress using a solvent or
cleaning agent recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
07100-4

FOR 269
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07200 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING OF UNDERGROUND

CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description
A. General:
All underground reinforced concrete structures when located within the water table
and the capillary fringe and as shown on the drawing shall be totally enveloped with
waterproofing membrane.
This section does not cover reinforced concrete structures above water table and out
of capillary fringed.
B. Work Included: This section covers the furnishing and installation of membrane
REVISIONS waterproofing materials as required on concrete structures. The contractor shall
furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to complete the work.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
CHK’D BY: ____________
General Specifications
APPROVED
Quality Control
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
Division 01 : Section 05 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
OPERATING DEPT. 1.02 Applicable Codes and Standards
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of quality for
materials and products. The requirements of latest editions of these codes and standards
shall apply. In case of conflict between these standards and text of this Specifications, the
CERTIFIED Specification text shall govern.
BY: ___________________
A. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
DATE: _________________
ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
Damproofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM D4586 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free
(Summer Grade)
07200-1

FOR 270
494
‫لمشعقي‬
ASTM E96 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
1.03 Quality Control
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all work and materials to be used in the
Work and shall propose quality control program for review. The program shall cover shop
inspection, field supervision and the installation procedures in compliance with Section 01400
“Quality Control”.
1.04 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following information, data and drawings, to the SEC’s
Representative:
A. Before commencing work:
1. Manufacturer’s recommend specification and instructions for transporting,

handling and storage of materials.
REVISIONS 2. Certificate of compliance stating that the materials used and the installation
procedures conform to all requirements of this Specification.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3. Qualification of the waterproofing membrane installers.
CHK’D BY: ____________
4. Contractor’s proposed installation procedures based on instructions and
APPROVED
recommendations by the manufacturer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
5. Manufacturer’s Quality Control and Quality Assurance Program related to the
production, testing and handling.
6. Catalogue data sheets related to proposed materials and 3 sets of samples

for all proposed materials.
OPERATING DEPT.
B. At Completion of Work:
1. As-built drawings.
CERTIFIED 1.05 Product Handling
BY: ___________________
1. All materials shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original containers and
pallets.
DATE: _________________
2. The materials shall be checked against packing lists on delivery to the work site and
shall be inspected for damage. Damage materials shall be removed from the site.
3. Each container and individual roll of membrane sheet shall be labeled to show brand
name, type of material, lot and shelf life, date of manufacture, batch number and
instructions for storage and handling, if any.
4. All materials shall be adequately protected during shipment, loading and unloading,
storage and installation against incidental damage, sunlight and UV radiation, rain,
and high temperatures.
07200-2

FOR 271
494
‫لمشعقي‬
5. The materials shall be stored in dry, shaded and covered areas. In open areas the
material shall be covered with a heavy duty black PVC sheet. The rolls of membrane
shall be stored vertically on a smooth hard surface.
6. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire hazards in the storage area
and during installations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 General
All materials and products covered by these Specifications shall preferably be procured from
one supplier.
2.02 Materials
2.2.1 Membrane:
Shall be performed, cold applied, self-adhering, laminated sheet membrane. The

REVISIONS laminate shall consist of glass fiber core coated on both sides with a polymer
modified rubber bitumen compound. The membrane shall have a polypropylene film
DRAWN BY: ___________ bonded on one side and a siliconized release paper backing on the adhesive side.
DATE: _________________
The nominal thickness of the laminate shall be 1.5 mm. Moisture vapor transmission
2
rate shall not exceed 0.2 gm/m /24 hours measured according to ASTM E96.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2
APPROVED
The glass fiber core shall be nonwoven mat with minimum mass of 50 gms/m .
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.2.2 Solar Reflective Membrane:
Shall have similar construction as the membrane above but the exposed face shall
have solar reflective properties.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.2.3 Primer:
Shall be solvent based bituminous primer conforming to ASTM D41. The primer
shall be compatible with the membrane ans shall ensure proper adhesion.
CERTIFIED 2.2.4 Flashing Compound:
BY: ___________________
Shall be trowel grade, cold applied rubberized bitumen cement, conforming to ASTM
D4586.
DATE: _________________
2.2.5 Fillets:
Shall be extruded PVC triangular shaped 40 x 40 mm Sections coated with self-

adhesive compound.
2.2.6 Protection Board:
Shall be 6 mm thick sandwich board. The core shall consist of fine aggregates
bounded in modified bitumen covered with 2 layers of tough asphalt paper.
07200-3

FOR 272
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 Installation
Typical installation details shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations

and specified herein.
1. The concrete surfaces shall be dry and free of all dust and debris. All sharp
protrusions shall be ground smooth and all hollows and honeycomb voids, and
similar surface defects shall be filled with approved concrete fillers in accordance
with Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.
2. The concrete surfaces shall be painted with one coat of bitumen primer and allowed
to dry until touch dry.
3. The adhesive side of membrane sheets shall be unrolled onto prepared surfaces
after progressively peeling back the protective release paper. The sheets shall be
rolled to ensure exclusion of air under the membrane.
REVISIONS
4. A minimum lap of 75 mm shall be provided at the edges and 150 mm at the ends
DRAWN BY: ___________ between the adjacent sheets. Edge and end laps shall be rolled with pressure to
DATE: _________________
ensure complete adhesion.
CHK’D BY: ____________
5. Two layers of membrane shall be laid directly over the horizontal surface of blinding
APPROVED
under the footing and a layer of screed 50 mm thick shall be cast over it before
erecting forms for footings.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
6. All angles and corners, external or internal, shall be reinforced with an extra strip of
300 wide membrane sheet. The external and internal corners shall have “cut and
cloaked” membrane pieces.
OPERATING DEPT. 7. External corners shall have a minimum 25 mm chamfer and internal angles between
slab and walls shall be provided with a 40 x 40 mm preformed fillet.
8. In no case the membrane shall be stretched at the angles or corners. The

membrane shall be dressed and eased around corners and angles.
CERTIFIED
9. At the location of pipes through the walls and floor slabs, reinforcing strips and
BY: ___________________
collars shall be used.
DATE: _________________
10. For structures projecting above ground, the membrane shall be extended at least
150 mm above grade and terminated and finished in a 20 x 20 mm chase in the
concrete. The chase shall be pointed immediately with bitumen flashing compound
prior to backfilling.
11. Portions of membrane exposed to sunlight and UV radiation shall be of solar

reflective construction and shall have an end lap of 200 mm.
07200-4

FOR 273
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 Protection
1. All below ground membrane surfaces shall be protected with protection boards
before the backfilling operations can begin.
2. On horizontal surfaces with membrane, where reinforcing steel is to be placed, 25

mm thick layer of sand/cement screed shall be cast. Placing of formwork,
reinforcement and concrete shall only begin after the screed has sufficiently
hardened. Other membrane protection materials in lieu of screed may be used
provided approval is obtained from the SEC’s Representative.
3. Areas with membrane shall be protected either with screed or protection board at the
end of a working day. No storage of materials or traffic shall be allowed on the
unprotected membrane areas.
4. Care shall be exercised during the backfilling operations so as not to dislocate the
protection boards and damage the membrane.
3.03 Inspection
REVISIONS
Before covering the installed membrane, a careful inspection shall be made of all areas
DRAWN BY: ___________ where membrane work has been completed. Any damaged to the membrane shall be
DATE: _________________
repaired by patching.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
07200-5

FOR 274
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07210 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
of Particular Application and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this
section.
This section covers the work of thermal insulation as required by the Contract and includes
the following items:
 Concealed building insulation.
REVISIONS Extent of each item of insulation work is shown on Drawings and indicated by provisions of
this section.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
The work of thermal insulation shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations
APPROVED
of the latest edition of the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM), as referenced to throughout this section, or other approved international
ENGINEERING DEPT.
standards and Sound Practice.

ASTM NO.
OPERATING DEPT. C 549 Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation

C 578 Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
C 612 Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
C 631 Specification for Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering
E 96 Test Method for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials
CERTIFIED C 165 (2007) Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of
Thermal Insulations
BY: ___________________
C 552 (2007) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
C 553 (2008) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation
DATE: _________________
for Commercial and Industrial Applications
D 1621 (2004a) Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
D 383/D383M Water Vapor Transmission of Pressure Sensitive Tapes
1.4 Submittals
07210-1

FOR 275
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions

for each type of insulation material required.
 Samples: In full size units of each type of insulation indicated, and if of exposed type
for each colour specified.
 Certified Test Report: Submit copies of certified test reports evidencing compliance of
insulation products with specified performance values, including thermal
resistance, densities, compression strengths, fire performance characteristics,
permeability ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties.
 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating arrangement of exterior insulation

and finish system, width and locations of joints and details for installations around
openings and projections (if any).
Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source. Identify materials with
REVISIONS
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.6 Related Sections

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
APPROVED Membrane Sheet Waterproofing

ENGINEERING DEPT.
Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
1.7 Delivery Storage and Handling
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling storage and protection during
installation.
OPERATING DEPT.
Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying

legible and intact.
Protect insulations from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling and
CERTIFIED
other sources.
BY: ___________________ Store materials inside and under cover in a dry location, protected from weather, direct
DATE: _________________
sunlight, surface contaminated, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from
construction, traffic and other causes.
Stack insulation board flat and off the ground
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Insulating Materials
2.1.1 General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for
materials, compliance with referenced standards and other characteristics.
07210-2

FOR 276
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Preformed units shall be of sizes to fit applications indicated on Drawings, selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths.
2.1.2 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: the external walls of the proposed buiding shall be
propely installed with Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed-cells and integral high
density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to
comply with ASTM C 578 for:
3
Type VII: 35 kg/m minimum density.
Burning characteristics:
Maximum Flame Spread 75

Smoke Developed 450
Provide products fabricated with tongue and groove edges.
2.1.3 Unfaced Mineral-Wool Insulation: Thermal Insulation combining rock wool, slag wool fiber
with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612.
REVISIONS
3
Normal density: 96 kg/m .
DRAWN BY: ___________
3
DATE: _________________
Density: 64 kg/m
CHK’D BY: ____________
Burning Characteristics:
APPROVED
Flame Spread 15
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Smoke Developed 5
2.1.4 Filter Fabric (Vapour Retarder): Fabric shall be a pervious sheet of polyethylene and/or
polypropylene filaments oriented in a stable network so that the filaments retain their
relative position to each other. The fabric shall be composed of continuous or
OPERATING DEPT. discontinuous filaments held together by thermal bonding. Needling or needle-punching
fabric shall not be allowed. The edges of the cloth shall be salvaged or otherwise finished
to prevent the outer material from pulling away from the cloth. The cloth shall be
manufactured into a width greater than 1.8 m. The fabric shall conform to the following
physical requirement:
CERTIFIED
Physical
BY: ___________________
Parameter Requirement
DATE: _________________
 Thickness 0. 15 mm
 Water permeability: 500 m
 Effective maximum pore: 0.1 mm
 Tensile strength: 8 KN/m

2
Load at 5% extension: 2.9 KN/m
 Flame Spread 5
 Smoke Developed 75
- Securing Pins: Securing pins shall be allowed.
07210-3

FOR 277
494
‫لمشعقي‬
- Seams: Seams shall be required in applications where stress transfer from one
fabric to another is necessary. Seaming may replace overlapping at the
Contractor's option.
Seam types shall be either a flat or prayer seam. Stitch counts shall range from 1 to 2 per
cm,
Sewing machinery shall make a double thread chain stitch and be capable of penetrating
four layers of the fabric. Machines may be hand-held or table equipment-mounted,
depending on fabric employed.
Sewing thread shall consist of nylon polypropylene, polyester or Kevlar thread.
A minimum of 50 mm of fabric shall extend beyond the seam threads or a length sufficient
to develop the required seam strength.
Seam strength shall be measured using grab-tensile procedures (ASTM D 4632). Seam
efficiency is defined as the ratio of tensile strength across the seam to the strength of the
REVISIONS intact fabric.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Factory sewing shall be utilized wherever possible to eliminate or reduce field seams.
DATE: _________________
2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work shall be limited to the specialized manufacturers approved by
ENGINEERING DEPT.
SEC Representative.
2.3 Insulation Fasteners
2.3.1 Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
OPERATING DEPT. securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2. 3. 2 Spindle Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle, capable of holding insulation of
thickness indicated, securely in position with self-locking washer in place.
CERTIFIED  Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon steel sheet 0.8 mm thick by 50 mm.
BY: ___________________  Spindle: Copper coated low carbon steel, fully annealed 2-5 mm in diameter length
DATE: _________________
to suit depths of insulation indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection and Preparation
Examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work shall be performed. Do
not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected by the manufacturer.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapour retarder, including

removing projections that interfere with insulation attachment
07210-4

FOR 278
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular of installation in each
case,
Extend undamaged, dry insulation in thickness indicated over entire area to be insulated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections
which interfere with placement.
Apply a single layer or multiple layers of insulation to produce total thickness indicated.
Installation of metal fittings and similar work affecting the insulation shall be finished
before work begins.
All cracks, breaks, holes, sharp projections or other unusual irregularities in the surface
shall be remedied before insulation work is begun.
Surfaces shall be clean, dry, free from grease, loose materials, excessive dust and
REVISIONS foreign material which would interfere with the insulation application.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by insulating
DATE: _________________
materials or system manufacturer.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Roof decks shall be properly graded to all outlets using concrete floor screed topping as
APPROVED
indicated on Drawings and specified in Division-3. Deck shall be swept free of dust and be
reasonably smooth.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Protect top surface of horizontal insulation, not covered by polyethylene sheet water-
proofing, from damage during concrete work by application of protection board.
3.2.2 Installation of Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated. If no

OPERATING DEPT. specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with small pads of adhesive spaced
approximately 600 mm o.c. both way on inside face or use mechanical anchorage to
provide permanent placement and support of units.
Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying mastic or

CERTIFIED sealant to edges of each units to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids
in completed installation with mastic or sealant
BY: ___________________
Place vapour retarder facing warm side of construction.
DATE: _________________
Installation of Roofing Filter Fabric: The filter fabric shall be placed in the manner and at
the locations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
At the time of installation, fabric shall be rejected if it has defects, ribs, holes, flaws,
deterioration or damage incurred during manufacture, transportation, storage or
placement. Visual review of the fabric shall be performed once the fabric has been placed
and prior to placement of any overlaying materials.
07210-5

FOR 279
494
‫لمشعقي‬
The fabric shall be placed with the machine direction (long dimension) down slope or
normal to the natural slope, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, and shall be laid
smooth and free of tension, stress, folds, wrinkles or creases. The strips shall be laid
smooth top provide a minimum overlap width of 300' mm, for each joint. Overlap joints
and seams shall be measured as a single layer.
The fabric shall be laid over the extruded insulation board where indicated on Drawing.
No joints or overlaps shall be within 1.0 m of roof edges or comers. The fabric shall be out
to fit closely as practical around penetrations and openings and shall be extended up the
parapet to end above the gravel level.
The fabric shall be protected at all times during construction from contamination by
surface runoff and any fabric so contaminated shall be removed and replaced with
uncontaminated fabric.
Should the fabric be damaged during any step of the installation, the torn or punctured
section shall be repaired by placing a piece of fabric which extends at least 450 mm in all
directions beyond the damage area. The fabric shall be sewn as described above or other
REVISIONS methods as approved by the Engineer.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.3 Protection of Insulation

DATE: _________________
Protect installed insulation from harmful weather exposures and from possible physical
CHK’D BY: ____________
abuses, where possible by non-delayed installation of filter fabric or, where that is not
APPROVED
possible, by temporary covering or enclosure.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.4 Insulation Schedule
Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, apply insulating materials as follows:
• 50 mm thick extruded polystyrene boards for all roofs which shall be overlain by
OPERATING DEPT. filter fabric.
3.5 Protection
Protect installed insulation and vapour retarders from damage due to harmful weather
CERTIFIED exposures or physical abuse. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected from permanent construction
BY: ___________________
immediately after installation.
DATE: _________________
07210-6

FOR 280
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07256 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
Section includes supply and sprayed fire proofing material for the construction steel members
in order to comply with the required fire resistance rate.
A. Qualification of Applicator
Licensed by a manufacturer of fireproofing materials.
B. Codes and Standards Requirements:
REVISIONS 1. Uniform Building Code requirements for fire resistance ratings of areas to
receive sprayed fireproofing materials.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.: Fire Resistance Directory, latest edition.
CHK’D BY: ____________
C. Testing: Fire resistance rating of assemblies ASTM E119.
APPROVED
D. Rating Schedule: (Unless otherwise noted)
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Columns, beams, Girders, Underside of Metal Decking: 1 hour.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
OPERATING DEPT. A. Product Data: Submit the manufacturer's product specifications and installation
instructions for each type of material and application method required.
B. Test Reports:
CERTIFIED Submit certified test reports of acceptable testing agencies which perform testing in
accordance with ASTM E119.
BY: ___________________
C. Certificates:
DATE: _________________
1. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed

specification requirements which include UL design numbers of members or
sections being fireproofed.
2. Furnish applicator's certification that material used has been as specified to

meet fire resistance ratings, thickness requirements, and application
requirements in conformance to UL Fire-Resistive Directives/Fire-Resistant
Directory Design.
07256-1

FOR 281
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of the manufacturer

and product identification.
B. Reject damaged packages found unsuitable for use and remove from the jobsite.
C. Store materials above the ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces.
D. Keep materials dry at all times.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply sprayed insulation when temperature of

substrate materials is below 40 degrees F (4.4 degree C) and the surrounding air
temperature is below 40 degree F (4.4 degree C).
B. Protection:
REVISIONS
1. Provide ventilation in areas to receive sprayed fireproofing, introducing fresh air
DRAWN BY: ___________ and exhausting air continuously during and 24 hours after the application to
DATE: _________________
maintain a non-toxic, unpolluted, safe working area.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air.
APPROVED
3. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage from over spray fall-out,
ENGINEERING DEPT.
and dusting off of sprayed fireproofing materials.
4. Provide fire extinguishers and post caution signs warning against smoking and
open flames when working with flammable materials.
OPERATING DEPT. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sprayed-on Cementitious Aggregate Fireproofing: Perlite or vermiculite aggregate,

CERTIFIED inorganic cement, and manufacturer's standard asbestos-free reinforcement, fillers
and additives, for spray-on-cap application. Mix with water and with air at spray
BY: ___________________
nozzle to form a rigid, porous, non-combustible (passes ASTM E136 test) covering of
uniform density and thickness as indicated. Apply in one or more courses, to provide
DATE: _________________
fire-endurance ratings as indicated.
1. Dry Density: Within range of 15 to 35 lb. per cu. ft. (ASTM E 605).
2. Comprehensive Strength: 500 psf for 10% of deflection (ASTM E 761).
3. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion, from Military Specification

test method ML E-527, for metal surfaces to be covered.
4. Bond Strength: 200 psf minimum (ASTM E 736) for each application
substrate.
07256-2

FOR 282
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Water: Clean, free of mineral or organic substances.
2.3 MIXES
Mix sprayed fireproofing materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, frost, or other matter which
could affect the bonding of sprayed fireproofing.
B. Sand blast members to receive sprayed fireproofing to remove incompatible

materials which would affect the bond when scraping, brushing, or washing will not
remove the materials.
C. Assure that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate
the sprayed fireproofing are placed before installing fireproofing.
REVISIONS
D. Verify that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items, which would interfere with
DRAWN BY: ___________ application of fireproofing, are not positioned until sprayed fireproofing work is
DATE: _________________
completed.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.2 APPLICATION
APPROVED
A. Apply sprayed fireproofing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
ENGINEERING DEPT.
and UBC Standard 43-8 complying with fire rating requirements.
B. Provide thickness in accordance with the UL Fire Resistance Directory Design with
the corresponding fire rating of such structures or assemblies or as required for
compliance with indicated fire-endurance ratings, whichever is greater in each
OPERATING DEPT. instance. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over the entire area of each substrate
to be protected. Except as otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer,
install the body of fireproof covering material in a single course.
Required thickness for:

CERTIFIED
1. Columns:
BY: ___________________
Rating 1 hour
DATE: _________________
Thickness 15.9 mm
Authority - UL design # 708
2. Beams:
Rating 1 hour
Thickness 12.7mm
Authority - UL design # N-711
07256-3

FOR 283
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Provide a sprayed-in-place installation of fireproofing materials to the greatest extent

possible. Following spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by
troweled installation or other appropriate placement method recommended by
manufacturer.
D. Maintain ambient conditions during installation and for the cure period following
installation, as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide ventilation and avoid an
excessive rate of drying. Protect from exposure to the sun.
3.3 PATCHING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of spraying operations in each containable

area of the project, remove over-spray and fall-out of materials from surfaces of the
work and clean surfaces, to remove evidence of soiling. Repair or replace damaged
work to an acceptable condition.
B. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other work so as to minimize the need for
other trades to cut into or remove installed fireproofing. As other trades successively
complete installations of their work, patch fireproofing installations which have
REVISIONS been cut away to facilitate such installations, so as to maintain complete coverage of
full thickness on all substrates to be protected with fireproofing. Trowel-applied
DRAWN BY: ___________ fireproofing materials are acceptable for patching of work. Do not allow work
DATE: _________________
requiring patching to be covered over or otherwise concealed before patching is
completed.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.4 SCHEDULE
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Refer to the drawings.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
07256-4

FOR 284
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07300 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of joint sealers for concrete, masonry, metallic, glazing,
acoustic treatment and joint fillers as shown on the drawings and where required to
obtain a weathertight structure and as specified herein.
B. Section 04200 Concrete Masonry and Accessories
C. Section 08120 Aluminum Doors and Frames

REVISIONS
D. Section 08135 Steel Doors and Frames
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
E. Section 08500 Aluminum Windows and Frames
CHK’D BY: ____________
F. Section 09260 Gypsum Board System
APPROVED
G. Section 09030 Ceramic Wall and Floor Tiles
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.03 REFERENCES
OPERATING DEPT. ASTM C-790 Recommended Practices for Use of Latex Sealing
Compounds
ASTM C-804 Recommended Practices for Use of Solvent Release Type

Sealants
CERTIFIED
ASTM C-962 Specifications for Electromeric Joint Sealants
BY: ___________________
ASTM C-1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
DATE: _________________
ASTM D-1565 Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and

Copolymers (Open Cell Foams)
B. Federal Specifications
SS-S-200 Sealing Compounds, Two Component, Elastomeric,

Polymer Type, Jet-Fuel Resistant, Cold Applied
07300-1

FOR 285
494
‫لمشعقي‬
TT-S-227 Sealing Compounds, Rubber Base Two Component
TT-S-230 Sealing Compounds, Synthetic Rubber Base, Single

Component, Chemically Curing
TT-S-1543 Sealing Compounds, Silicon Rubber Base
A. Comply with recommendations and instructions of Sealant Council of America and

manufacturers recommendations for material and installation of WORK of this
Section.
B. Obtain elastomeric materials from one manufacturer who will, when required, send
qualified technical representative to PROJECT SITE, for the purpose of advising the
installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials.
C. Installer: CONTRACTOR with successful experience in application of types of

materials required, and who agrees to employ only skilled tradesmen for the WORK.
REVISIONS
D. Prepare mock-up installation of each type and use of sealant. Install sealant
DRAWN BY: ___________ between materials matching those used on the PROJECT, complying with conditions
DATE: _________________
similar to anticipated PROJECT conditions. Prepare mock-up well in advance of
scheduled installation, so that nominal cure-time is allowed and final adjustments can
CHK’D BY: ____________
be made, before processing.
APPROVED
1.05 SUBMITTALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Manufacturer’s Data: For information only, submit copies of manufacturer’s

specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant
and associated material required. Include manufacturer’s published data, or letter of
certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies
OPERATING DEPT. with requirements and intended applications.
B. Samples: Submit 300 mm long samples of each color required (except black) for
each type of sealant exposed to view. Install sample between 2 strips of material
similar to surfaces where sealant or compound will be used, held apart to represent
CERTIFIED typical joint widths. Samples will be reviewed by the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE for color and texture only. Compliance with requirements is the
BY: ___________________
exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
DATE: _________________
C. Guarantee: Submit 2 copies of written Guarantee agreeing to repair or replace
sealant failing to perform as air-tight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion,
cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration
resistance, stain resistance or general durability; or appear to deteriorate as inherent
quality of material for exposure indicated. Provide guarantee signed by the installer
and CONTRACTOR. Guarantee commences upon final acceptance.
1. Guarantee period is 2 years.
07300-2

FOR 286
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Conditions of other WORK: Examine joint surfaces, backing, and anchorage of units
forming sealant rabbet, and conditions where sealant WORK shall be performed, and
notify the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing of conditions detrimental to
proper and timely completion of WORK and performance of sealant. Do not proceed
with sealant WORK until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
accepted by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealant under adverse

weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s
recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with WORK only when forecasted
weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond
strength. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install
elastomeric sealant when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer’s
recommended installation temperature range, so that sealant will not be subjected to
excessive elongation and bond stress at subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate
time schedule with CONTRACTOR to avoid delay of WORK.
REVISIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

DATE: _________________
A. Colors: Provide black or other natural color where no other color is available. Where
CHK’D BY: ____________
compound is not exposed to view, provide manufacturer’s standard color with the
APPROVED
best overall performance characteristics for application shown.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Provide custom colors, to match the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s samples or to
match the adjoining surfaces as determined by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Hardness shown and specified are intended to indicate general range for overall
performance. Consult manufacturer’s technical representative to determine actual
OPERATING DEPT. hardness recommended for conditions of installation and use. COMPANY
REPRSENTATIVE will furnish information concerning anticipated joint movement
related to actual joint width and installation temperature. Provide compounds within
the following ranges of hardness (Shore A, fully-cured, at 75 degrees Fahrenheit):
CERTIFIED 1. 5 to 20 for high percentage of movement and minimum exposure to weather

and abrasion.
BY: ___________________
2. 15 to 35 for moderate percentage of movement and moderate exposure to
DATE: _________________
weather and abrasion.
3. 30 to 60 for low percentage of movement and maximum exposure to

weather and abrasion (including foot traffic on horizontal joints).
C. Modules of Elasticity: For joints subject to movement, either thermal expansion or

dynamic movement provides elastomeric sealant with the lowest modulus of
elasticity consistent with exposure to abrasion. For horizontal joints subject to traffic
provide sealant with high modulus of elasticity. Comply with manufacturer’s
recommendations where no other requirements are indicated.
07300-3

FOR 287
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its compatibility

with joint surfaces, joint fillers and other materials in joint system. Provide only
materials (manufacturer’s recommended variation of the specified materials) known
to be fully compatible with actual installation conditions, as shown by manufacturer’s
published data or certification.
2.02 TWO-COMPONENT ELASTOMERIC SEALANT
A. Two-Component Polysulfide Sealant (Vertical Joints): Polysulfide-based, 2-part

elastomeric sealant, complying with FA TT-S-00227, Class A, Type 2 (non-sag)
unless Type 1 recommended by manufacturer for application shown.
B. Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant (Horizontal Joints): Polyurethane-based, 2-

part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS-TT-S-00227, Class A, Type 1 (self-
leveling) unless Type 2 (non-sag) recommended by manufacturer for application
shown.
2.03 NON-SKINNING MASTIC SEALANT
REVISIONS A. Polyisobutylene Mastic Sealant (Acoustical, Concealed Sealant): Either liquid or

preformed ribbon (coiled with release paper) or polyisobutylene-based mastic, non-
DRAWN BY: ___________ drying, non-skinning, non-hardening, non-migrating, heavy bodied as recommended
DATE: _________________
by manufacturer for large joints subject to shear movement but not subject to normal
joint movement.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.04 CAULKING COMPOUNDS

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
One part Solvent Acrylic Sealant.
2.05 STRUCTURAL SILICONE SEALANT FOR BUTT-JOINT GLAZING
One-part silicone rubber sealant, shall be “One-Part Silicone Rubber Sealant, General
OPERATING DEPT. Electric Silicone Construction Sealant 1201”, clear (translucent).
A. Joint Cleaner: Provide type of joint cleaning compound recommended by sealant

CERTIFIED manufacturer, for joints surfaces to be cleaned.
BY: ___________________
B. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type for joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant
manufacturer, for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
DATE: _________________
C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by

sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to
substrate or joint filter shall be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock closed-cell, extruded, polyethylene

foam, designed as backer for Elastomeric Sealant. Provide size and shape of rod
that will control joint depth for sealant placing, break bond or sealant at bottom of
joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide highly
compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is
compressed.
07300-4

FOR 288
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound.

Remove dirt, sand, laitence, debris, insecure coatings, moisture and other
substances that will interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound.
B. For elastomeric sealant, do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint
surfaces painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other
treatment or coating unless laboratory test for durability (adhesion), in compliance
with Paragraph 4.3.9 of FS-TT-S--00227, has successfully demonstrated that sealant
bond is not impaired by coating or treatment. When laboratory test has not been
performed, or shows bond interference, remove coating or treatment from joint
surfaces before installing sealant.
C. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless sealant
manufacturer’s printed instructions indicate alkalinity does not interfere with sealant
bond and performance. Etch with 5 percent solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with
REVISIONS dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant
installation.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
D. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non-porous materials, where
sealant manufacturer’s data indicates lower bond strength than for porous surfaces.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Rub with fine abrasive cloth or wool to produce dull sheen.
APPROVED
3.02 INSTALLATION
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s printed instructions, except where more

stringent requirements are shown on specified, and except where manufacturer’s
technical representative directs otherwise.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where shown or recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealant, except where shown to be
omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application
CERTIFIED shown.
BY: ___________________
D. Install bond breaker tape where shown and where required by manufacturer’s
recommendations to ensure elastomeric sealant will perform properly.
DATE: _________________
E. Employ only proven installation techniques, ensuring sealant will be deposited in

uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of
joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill
sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where
horizontal joints are between horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form
slight cover, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
F. Install sealant to depths as shown or, where not shown, as recommended by sealant
manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin)
section of the bead:
07300-5

FOR 289
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1. For horizontal, joints sealed with elastomeric sealant and subject to traffic
and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to depth equal to 75
percent of joint width, but neither more than 16 mm deep nor less than 10
mm deep.
2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealant, but not subject to
traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but neither more
than 12 mm deep nor less than 6 mm deep.
3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealant and caulking compounds, fill
joints to depth in range of 75 percent to 125 percent of joint width.
G. Spillage: Do not allow sealant or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining

surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces including rough textures such
concrete panels. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent
staining of adjoining surfaces, by either primer/sealer of sealant/caulking compound.
H. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as work progresses. Clean

adjoining surfaces to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to adjoining
REVISIONS surfaces or finishes.
DRAWN BY: ___________ I. Polysulfide Sealant Installation: Comply with manufacturer’s standards, except
DATE: _________________
where more stringent requirements have been shown or specified, or have been
issued by sealant manufacturer as either requirements or recommendations.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.03 CURE AND PROTECTION

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Cure sealant and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal
cohesive strength and surface durability.
B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer’s procedures required for curing and
OPERATING DEPT. protection of sealant and caulking compounds during the construction period, without
deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at the time of
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s acceptance.
3.04 TESTS FOR PERFORMANCE

CERTIFIED
A. After nominal cure of exterior joint sealant exposed to weather, test for water leaks.
BY: ___________________
Flood joint exposure with water directed from 20 mm garden hose held perpendicular
to wall face, 600 mm from joint, connected to water system with 200 Kpa minimum
DATE: _________________
normal water pressure. Move stream of water analog joint at approximate rate of 6
meter per minute.
B. Test approximately 5 percent of total joint system, in locations typical of every joint
condition, and can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct test in
the presence of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, who will determine the actual
percentage of joints to be tested and the actual period of exposure to water from the
hose, based upon the extend of observed leakage, or lack thereof.
C. Repair sealant installation at leaks or, where leakage is excessive, replace sealant
installation as directed.
07300-6

FOR 290
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Where nature of observed leakage indicates possibility of inadequate joint bond

strength, COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will direct that additional testing be
performed at time when joints have been fully cured, followed by natural exposure
through both extreme temperatures and returned to lowest range of temperature
where it is feasible to conduct testing. Repair or replace work as required. Perform
testing at reasonable time within 24 months of installation date, as directed.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
07300-7

FOR 291
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING
PART 1 GENERAL
section
This section covers the metal flashing work as required by the Contract.
Exposed Trim
Metal Flashing
Roof-Expansion - Joint Covers
REVISIONS Copings
DRAWN BY: ___________ Extent of each type of flashing work is indicated on Drawings.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
All flashing work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Specifications, Drawings
and the stipulations of the British Code of Practice (C.P.) as noted hereinbelow and the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
British Standard Specifications (B S.) and the Specifications of the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM).
BRITISH CODE OF PRACTICE

CP NO.
OPERATING DEPT.
143 Part 5 Sheet roof and wall covering
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND WALL COVERING

ASTM NO.
CERTIFIED
A 526 Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) hot dip process commercial
BY: ___________________
quality
A 527 Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) hot dip process, lock-forming
DATE: _________________
quality
B 32 Solder metal
B 101 Lead coated copper sheet and strip for building construction
B 209 Aluminiurn and aluminium alloy sheet and plate
B 370 Copper sheet and strip for building construction
1.4 Performance Requirements
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
07620-1

FOR 292
494
‫لمشعقي‬
The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section.
 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

 Concrete Masonry
 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
 Rough Carpentry
 Joint Sealants
 Panting
1.6 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with conditions of the Contract and Division - 1
REVISIONS
 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions
and general recommendations for the specified sheet material and flashing
accessories.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________  Samples: Submit 200 mm square samples of specified metal sheet materials to be
CHK’D BY: ____________ exposed as finished surfaces and all accessory items. Where finish involves
normal colour and texture variations include sample sets composed of 2 or more
APPROVED units showing the full range of variations expected.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles methods of joining,
and anchorages details of flashing work, including expansion joint systems.
1.7 Delivery Storage and Handling

OPERATING DEPT.
Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing
of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of the work and
protection of materials and finishes.
CERTIFIED
1.8 Mock-Ups
Construct mock-ups indicated to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
BY: ___________________ demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-
DATE: _________________ ups using materials indicated for final unit of work. Locate mock-ups on site in the location
and of size indicated. Obtain Engineer's approval of mock-ups before start of final unit of
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Flashing Materials
2.1.1 Sheet Metal Flashing/Trim: Zinc-coated steel ASTM A 526, commercial quality or ASTM A
527 for lock-forming, G90 hot-dip galvanized, with 0.20% copper, mill phosphatized, where
indicated for painting not less than 1.0 mm thick except as otherwise indicated.
07620-2

FOR 293
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Joints between the ends of sheets shall be made either by means of drip or welts.
2.1.4 Copper Sheet: shall be cold rolled except where 060 is required, thickness shall not be less
than 0.55 mm.
2.1.5 Lead-Coated Copper: Shall comply to ASTM B 101 cold rolled copper sheet, not less than
0.7 mm thick both sides coated with lead weighing not less than 5.4 and not more than 6.8
kg/m2.
2.1.6 Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories
 Solder (if needed) (ASTM B 321): For use with lead, provide 50-50 tin/lead solder
with rosin flux.
For use with stainless steel, provide SN 60 with an acid flux, use a non-corrosive
rosin flux over tinned surfaces. Comply with ASTM B 32.
 Fasteners: Same metal as metal flashing or, other non-corrosive metal as

REVISIONS recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material
being fastened.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________  Bituminous Coating: Solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur,
CHK’D BY: ____________
compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
APPROVED  Elastomeric Sealant: Comply with requirements of Division 7, Section 07920 "Joint
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Sealers" and recommended by manufacture of metal fabrication.
 Mastic Sealant: Polysobutylene non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-

migrating sealant.
 Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for

OPERATING DEPT.
waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.
 Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with
material being installed, non-corrosive, size and thickness as required for
CERTIFIED
performance.
BY: ___________________  Polyethylene Underlayment: Thick black polyethylene film resistant to decay and
DATE: _________________ 0.15 mm thick.
 Reglets: Plastic or metal zinc-coated steel units compatible with flashing, of type and
profile indicated, non-corrosive, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate
reglet and counter flashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated.
 Surface Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable waterproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at
top edge.
 Plaster Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to
match thickness of applied finish material.
07620-3

FOR 294
494
‫لمشعقي‬
 Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete
materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete, and guides to ensure
alignment of reglet section ends.
2.2 Fabrication of Metal Flashing Sheets
2.2.1 General - Sheet Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate
sheet metal items in thickness needed. Comply with design, dimensions and details shown,
fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for
running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the
Work. Form work to fit substrates, true to line and levels indicated without excessive
buckling and tool marks, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.2.2 Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum 3m. Where lapped or bayonet-
type expansion provisions in work cannot be used, or would not be sufficiently
water/weatherproof form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25
mm deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
REVISIONS 2.2.3 Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper performance of work, form in metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
DRAWN BY: ___________ sealant.
DATE: _________________
2.2.4 Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive
CHK’D BY: ____________
substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating
APPROVED
or other permanent separation.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Examine substrates and conditions, under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
OPERATING DEPT. 3.1 Installation Requirements
General: Except as otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing to comply with
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Anchor units of work
securely in place by methods indicated providing for thermal expansion of metal units;
CERTIFIED conceal fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof
BY: ___________________
3.1.1 Reglets: Install reglets to receive metal flashing in manner and methods indicated. Where
DATE: _________________
shown on Drawings: in concrete parapets furnish reglets to trades of concrete work, and in
masonry furnish reglets to trade of masonry work. Install counter flashing in reglets in a
waterproof manner, either by snap-in and sealant arrangements, or by welding in place for
anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, depending on degree of
sealant exposure.
3.1.2 Separators: Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosives substrates by coating
concealed surfaces, at location of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent
separation recommended by manufacturer.
07620-4

FOR 295
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.2 Cleaning and Protection
3.2.1 Cleaning: Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause
corrosion of metal, or deterioration of finishes.
3.2.2 Protection: Provide and maintain required procedures for protection of flashings metal work
during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration, other than
natural weathering, at time of substantial completion.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
07620-5

FOR 296
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07841 - FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL
PART 1 GENERAL
section.
This section covers the work of through-penetration fire stopping and smoke seals for
penetrations through fire resistance-rated assemblies and as required by the Contract.
The extent and applications for fire stopping and smoke seals as work of this section
includes both empty openings and openings penetrating:
REVISIONS
 Floors
DRAWN BY: ___________  Roofs
DATE: _________________  Walls and partitions
CHK’D BY: ____________
 Around mechanical and electric assemblies penetrating fire separations
APPROVED 1.3 Reference Standards

ENGINEERING DEPT.
The work of this section shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of
the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

ASTM NO.
OPERATING DEPT.
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stop

CERTIFIED
1.4.1 Fire stopping shall consist of furnishing and installing tested and listed firestop systems,
BY: ___________________ combination of materials, or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of
DATE: _________________
flame, smoke and gases, and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls, partitions,
floors, and ceiling-floor assemblies, including through-penetrations and construction joints
and gaps. Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes, conduit,
wires, cables and vents. Construction joints include those used to accommodate
expansion, contraction, wind, or seismic movement; fire stopping materials shall not
interfere with the required movement of the joint. Gaps requiring fire stopping include gaps
between the curtain wall and the floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and
the roof or floor deck above.
07841-1

FOR 297
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.4.2 System Performance: Except as otherwise indicated, fire stopping and smoke seals are
required to establish and maintain airtight and fireproof continuous seals on a permanent
basis, within recognized limitations of wear and aging as indicated for each application.
Failures of installed fire stopping to comply with this requirement shall be recognized as
failures of materials and workmanship.
1.4.3 Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last
3 years at least 3 fire stopping and smoke seals applications similar in type and size to that
of this Project.
1.4.4 Single Source Responsibility for Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Materials: Obtain fire
stopping and smoke seals materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
1.4.4 Reconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion
to joint substrates where indicated by Engineer. Do not use sealants which fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
1.5 Submittals
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ Specifications Sections:
DATE: _________________
1.5.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and prefabricated devices, providing
CHK’D BY: ____________
documentation, description including illustration, for specifications, handling, preparation,
APPROVED
installation, curing instructions and performance test data sheets for each type of
through-penetration fire stop system products.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.5.2 Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration fire stop system, show each kind of
construction, condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of
penetrating item.
OPERATING DEPT. 1.5.3 Certified Tests: With product data submit manufacturer's certified test reports for fire
stopping and smoke seals on aged performances as specified, including hardness, stain
resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility,
compression set, modules of elasticity, water absorption and resistance (aging, weight
loss, deterioration) to heat and exposures to ozone and ultraviolet.
CERTIFIED
1.5.4 Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each type and colour of fire
BY: ___________________
stopping required. Install fire stopping and smoke seals samples in 12 mm wide joints
formed between two 150 mm long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed
DATE: _________________
surfaces adjacent to fire stopping and joint smoke seals.
1.6.1 Installer Qualification Data: An experienced installer who is qualified and has necessary
experience, submit data complying with requirements specified. Include list of completed
projects with project name, addresses, names of Engineers and Employers, plus other
information specified.
07841-2

FOR 298
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.6.2 Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Submit reports from fire stopping and smoke
sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and smoke sealant
backing have been tested for compatibility and adhesion for each kind of penetration and
construction condition. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative
to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed to obtain adhesion.
1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Delivery materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with intact legible
manufacturer's labels showing manufacturer product name, colour, expiration period of
use, curing time and mixing construction for multi-component materials.
Store and handle materials according to manufacturer's recommendations to prevent

deterioration, damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants or other
causes.

REVISIONS
The specified work shall be coordinated with other trades. Fire stopping materials, at
DRAWN BY: ___________ penetrations of pipes and ducts, shall be applied prior to insulating, unless insulation meets
DATE: _________________
requirements specified for fire stopping. Fire stopping materials at building joints and
construction gaps shall be applied prior to completion of enclosing walls or assemblies.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Cast-in-place firestops devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete
APPROVED
placement. Pipe, conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast-in-place device
after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made inaccessible.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Do not proceed with installation of fire stopping and smoke sealers where joint width are
less than allowed by through-penetration fire stopping and smoke sealer manufacturer for
application indicated.
Do not proceed with installation when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
OPERATING DEPT. outside the limits permitted by through-penetration fire stopping and smoke sealers
manufacturers, or when substrate are wet due to construction or other causes.
Do not proceed with installation of fire stopping and smoke sealers until contaminations
capable of interfacing with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
CERTIFIED
Submit in writing, prior to commending installation full detailed descriptions of materials and
BY: ___________________
methods to be employed for fire stopping work.
DATE: _________________
Ventilate through-penetration fire stop system by natural means or, where this is
inadequate, forced air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 General Sealer Requirements
Provide colours indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by the Engineer from
manufacturer's standard colours. Select fire stopping and smoke sealers, joint fillers and
other related materials for compatibility with one another and with the substrate forming
joint surfaces and other indicated exposures, under conditions of services and application
required.
07841-3

FOR 299
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.2 Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals
Provide components for each through-penetration fire stop system that are needed to
install fill materials.
2.2.1 Single-Component Silicon Sealant: Asbestos free materials and systems capable of
maintaining an effective barrier against flame smoke and gases and shall not exceed
opening sizes for which they are indicated.
2.2.2 Fiber Type: Non-asbestos mineral fiber fire stop system materials system are to meet
requirements for time rating specified on Drawings.
2.2.2 Sealant: Fire stop materials in putty, gunnable and packable forms used in combination
with other materials: damming, backing materials to prevent leakage and sagging for
vertical joints.
2.3 Primers
Shall be to manufacturer's recommendations for specific materials. Substrate and end use.
REVISIONS
2.3.1 Water: (If applicable), potable, clean and free from injurious amount of deleterious
DRAWN BY: ___________ substances.
DATE: _________________
2.4 Fill Materials
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.4.1 Damming and Back-up Materials
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Supports and anchoring devices as manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance
with assembly being installed.
 Fire Stop Devices: Factory assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined
with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetration.
OPERATING DEPT.
 Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water resistant putties containing

non-solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone.
 Pillow Bags: Reusable, heat expanding pillows, bags consisting of glass fiber cloth
CERTIFIED filled with a combination of mineral fiber, water insoluble expansion agents and fire
retardant additives.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection
Installer must examine substrates (joint surfaces) and conditions under which fire stopping
and smoke sealer work is to be performed and must notify the Contractor in writing of
unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with fire stopping and smoke sealer work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 Joint Preparation

Examine size and condition of voids to be filled to establish correct thickness and
installation of materials.
07841-4

FOR 300
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Clean out joint surfaces immediately before installation of through-penetration fire stop
system. Remove all foreign materials, dust, dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other
substances which could interfere with bond. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated and where recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Confine primer/sealer to areas of bond, do not allow spillage or migration
onto, exposed adjoining surfaces.
Maintain insulation around pipes and duct penetrating fire separation without interruption to
vapour barrier.
3.3 Installation
Comply with manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified.
Install forming, damming, backing materials to support fill materials during their application
and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depth required.
REVISIONS
Seal holes or voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials and penetrating
DRAWN BY: ___________ items in joint as indicated on Drawings, to achieve fire resistance rating indicated.
DATE: _________________
Coordinate with other work, do not leave voids or gaps poke-through termination devices,
and un-penetrated openings or joints to ensure that continuity and integrity of fire
CHK’D BY: ____________
separation are maintained.
APPROVED
Install sealant backer rod for liquid-applied sealant, except where shown to be omitted.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Fill materials that shall remain exposed, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces, flush
with adjoining finishes.
Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces.
OPERATING DEPT.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
Employ only proven installation techniques which shall ensure that fire stopping are
deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets. Except as otherwise
CERTIFIED indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.
BY: ___________________
3.4 Cleaning
Notify Engineer when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping
DATE: _________________
materials and services penetration assemblies.
Remove, and clean off excess materials and debris form surfaces adjacent to joints as
work progresses by method and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of
through-penetration fire stop system.
Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation to ensure
through-penetration systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
07841-5

FOR 301
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Work includes providing sealant and caulking for all buildings and sheds as indicated
on Drawings or as described herein.
B. The required applications of sealants include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
following general locations:
1. Flashing reglets and retainers.
2. Exterior wall joints, including the exterior and interior perimeter of metal door,
window and storefront frames.
REVISIONS 3. Flooring joints.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 4. Sidewalk joints.

DATE: _________________
5. Other exterior joints noted on Drawings.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
6. Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other services
and equipment.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
7. Fire rated sealant as required for any penetrations of fire rated walls, decks
and floors.
C. The required applications of caulking include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
OPERATING DEPT. following general locations:
1. Perimeter of interior door, window and storefront frames.
2. Other interior joints noted on Drawings.

CERTIFIED
3. Precast concrete wall joints.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
A. Section 03300 Cast-In Place Concrete
B. Section 04200 Unit Masonry.
C. Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D. Section 09111 Metal Stud Framing System.
07920-1

FOR 302
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Section 09260 Gypsum Board System.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C790 Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.
B. ASTM C804 Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
C. ASTM C834 Latex Sealing Compounds.
D. ASTM C919 Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
E. ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM D1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
G. ASTM D1565 Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers

Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).
REVISIONS
H. ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers
DRAWN BY: ___________ for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
DATE: _________________
I. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant
CHK’D BY: ____________
and Caulking Guide Specification.
APPROVED
1.4 SUBMITTALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance

criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability.
B. Samples: Submit two samples, 4 inch (100 mm) in size illustrating sealant colors for
OPERATING DEPT. selection.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface

preparation, or perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
CERTIFIED 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
BY: ___________________
A. Perform work in accordance with SWRI requirements for materials and installation.
DATE: _________________
B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
C. The Conntractor shall submit to the Engineer the copies of the manufacturer’s
published recommendations to support the selection of and compatibility of the
various related materials with respect to the type of joint for which each material is
intended.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.
07920-2

FOR 303
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 2 years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer

during and after installation.
B. No sealants work shall be done when tha air temperature is below 4ºC or above
32ºC without the written concurrence of the sealant manufacturer’s instructions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01041.
B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.9 GUARANTEE
REVISIONS
Provide 5 year guarantee warranting materials against defects and failures. Repair or
DRAWN BY: ___________ replace materials which become defective or fail within the contract warranty period, at no
DATE: _________________
additional expense to the Owner.
CHK’D BY: ____________
1.10 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
APPROVED
A. Deliver to site in manufacturer’s external shipping containers, unopened, with brand
ENGINEERING DEPT.
names, date of manufacture, color and material designation clearly marked.
B. Elastomeric sealant containers shall be clearly marked as to Type, Grade, and Use
per ASTM C920.
OPERATING DEPT. C. Store all sealants at temperatures not exceeding 40 degrees C nor less than 5
degrees.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
CERTIFIED 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
BY: ___________________
A. All goods and products covered by these Specifications shall be procured, when
available, from an in-Kingdom manufacturer. Procurement of all goods and products
DATE: _________________
manufactured out-of-Kingdom shall be approved by the Engineer.
B. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply all products
specified in this Section from the same manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same caulking and sealant system materials throughout the
project.
B. Colors: Colors of caulking and sealant materials will be selected by a Engineer from
the manufacturer's standard colors.
07920-3

FOR 304
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Compatibility: Before purchasing of each specified sealant, investigate the

compatibility of the joint fillers and other materials in the joint system.
Provide only materials which are known to be fully compatible with the actual
installation condition, as shown by manufacturer's published data or certification.
D. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene

jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible,
permanent, durable non absorptive material as recommended for compatibility with
sealant by the sealant manufacturer. The rod will control the joint depth for sealant,
break bond of sealant at bottom of the joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on
the back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of
sealant extrusion when the joint is compressed.
E. Sealant: Acrylic based, single component, chemical, curing to withstand movement

of up to 50 percent of the joint width and to be satisfactorily applied throughout a
temperature range of 40 - 120 degree F shall be used for roof flashing, interior
glazing, duct work and any general interior usage for sealant. NITOSEAL 105 or a
REVISIONS suitable equal, approved by ENGINEER, shall be used.
DRAWN BY: ___________ F. Sealant: Polysulfide, 2 part complying with federal specs. TT-S-00227C Type II
DATE: _________________
Class A, exterior control joints, exterior glazing, anodized window systems, door
frames and any other exterior application, not mentioned previously. SIPCO, Brimo-
CHK’D BY: ____________
kol sealant or equal, approved by Engineer shall be used.
APPROVED
G. Fire-rated Sealant: Provide dow-corning fire-rated sealant (#3-6548 silicon RTV
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Foam) 3M fire barrier penetration and nelson flame seal or approved equal for
pipe/duct penetrations in fire rated walls.
H. Concrete Pavement Sealant: Cold applied two part elastomeric sealant, heavy duty
conforming to U.S. Federal Specifications SS-S-200E H:1984. It shall have a
OPERATING DEPT. movement accommodation factor 25% for butt joints. COLPOR 200 by FOSAM Co.
Ltd. Or approved equal shall be used.
I. Interior Sealant shall be conforming to ASTM C 834, or ASTM C 920, Type S or M,

Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. And Exterior Sealant for joints in vertical surfaces
CERTIFIED shall be conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. For
joints in horizontal surfaces shall be conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade
BY: ___________________
P, Class 25, Use T.
DATE: _________________
J. Primers shall be used where required by the sealant manufacturer and shall be non-
staining and suitable for the surfaces intended.
K. Bond breakers, where required shall be polyethylene tape, or others, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
L. Solvents, cleaning agents shall be oil free and as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
07920-4

FOR 305
494
‫لمشعقي‬
M. Joint sealant for metal thresholds, control & expansion joints, slabs, ceramic tiles and
walkways, where indicated, shall be a one component acetoxy curing silicone rubber
joint sealer. It shall be capable of curing when exposed to atmospheric moisture.
When cured, it shall form a tough elastic seal which will accommodate thermal,
shrinkage or moisture movements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION WORK
A. Inspection: Examine joint surfaces to receive caulking and sealant materials, and
report to Engineer, all unacceptable conditions.
REVISIONS B. Cleaning:
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. General: Thoroughly clean all joints scheduled to receive caulking and
DATE: _________________
sealant materials. Rake joint to full width and depth. Remove loose
particles present or resulting from cleaning operations, by blowing out joints
CHK’D BY: ____________
with oil free compressed air. All traces of bituminous materials must be
APPROVED
removed.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Porous Surface: Clean surface, such as concrete by grinding, blast-
cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these
methods to provide a clean, sound base surface for caulking and sealant
adhesion. Remove form oils by blasting-cleaning. Insure that concrete is
fully cured and free from laitance, loose aggregate and surface treatments.
OPERATING DEPT. If surface treatments are present, test for adhesion before proceeding with
sealing work.
3. Nonporous Surfaces: Clean surfaces, such as metal and glass, in

accordance with system manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use
CERTIFIED solvents that leave a residue. Apply and remove solvents with clean white
cloths. Do not allow solvents to air dry without wiping.
BY: ___________________
C. Protection: Prior to priming, apply masking tape to adjacent surfaces. Leave
DATE: _________________
masking tape in place until tooling operation is complete.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Employ only proven installation techniques which will insure that sealants
will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets and with
complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as
otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below
adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a
vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that the joint will not trap moisture
and dirt.
07920-5

FOR 306
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Back-up: Install back-up material to a proper depth in all joints. Use back-up material
of a suitable size and shape, so that when compressed (25 to 50%), it will fit in all
joints as required. When using a back-up of hose or rod stock, roll the material into
the joint to avoid lengthwise stretching. Do not twist or braid the hose or rod stock.
Use bond-breaker strips in all joints, where sufficient room for back-up material does
not exist and where required by manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Primer: Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

allow drying before applying sealing material.
D. Caulking and Sealing: Follow manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, pot life
and application procedure. Do not apply sealing materials when the temperature of
the material, air or substrate is below 7.2 Deg. C (45 Deg.F) or during wet or humid
weather. Apply sealing materials in full bead and force into joint.
E. Polysulfide Sealant Installation: Comply with standards issued by Thiokol Chemical

Corporation, except where more stringent requirements have been shown or
specified, or issued as recommendations by the sealant manufacturer.
REVISIONS
F. Tooling: Tool joints to compress the compound into the joint. Except as
DRAWN BY: ___________ recommended by the sealing material manufacturer, do not use liquid solutions to
DATE: _________________
moisten tools. Remove masking tape immediately after cooling.
CHK’D BY: ____________
G. All sleeves penetrating floors or fire rated walls or partitions shall be sealed by an
APPROVED
approved sealant equivalent to the rating of the floor/wall partitions.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
H. All ducts and pipes which pass through fire wall shall have sheet metal sleeve
around them.
3.4 CLEANING
OPERATING DEPT. Remove excess sealing materials from adjacent surfaces. Clean surfaces using procedures
recommended by the sealing material manufacturer.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
CERTIFIED A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01600.
BY: ___________________
B. Protect sealants until cured.
DATE: _________________
07920-6

FOR 307
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of steel doors and frames, anchors, hardware and accessories
to locations shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Unit System

B. Section 09010 - Gypsum Board System
C. Section 09900 - Painting
DRAWN BY: ___________ A.. Steel Door Institute (SDI)

DATE: _________________
1. SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Doors and Frames
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. SDI-105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
APPROVED
3. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors, Reinforcement Application
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA-80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
1.04 SUBMITTALS
OPERATING DEPT.
A. Submit shop drawings for review and approval indicating the following:
1. Elevations of each door and frame type.

2. Profile and thickness of steel.
CERTIFIED 3. Wall conditions and anchorages details.
4. Typical and special details of construction.
BY: ___________________
5. Label requirements.
6. Finish hardware location, reinforcing and preparation.
DATE: _________________
7. Specification for surface preparation and shop priming.
8. Other pertinent and necessary information.
B. Samples: Submit two (2) 300 mm x 300 mm section of door showing internal
construction, edge detail and reinforcement for butts; two (2) "L" section of frame showing
corner detail and two (2) 300 mm lengths of removable stop.
C. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300.
08100-01

FOR 308
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle steel doors and frames to prevent damage and deterioration.
B. Provide packaging including cardboard or other containers, separators, banding,

spreaders and paper wrappings to protect steel doors accessories.
C. Store doors upright, in protected dry area, at least 25 mm aboveground or floor and at
least 6 mm between individual door units.
D. Doors and frames shall have a steel tag with the door number thereon.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL DOORS
A. Exterior and interior personnel steel doors shall be acoustically sealed, thermally
insulated, honeycombed core construction and approved and labeled for Class C (3/4
REVISIONS Hour) fire resistance rating per Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
B. Steel doors shall be fabricated from 1.2mm thick (18 gauge) for interior doors and 1.5mm
DRAWN BY: ___________
thick (16 gauge) exterior doors, cold-rolled steel sheets conforming to ASTM A366,
DATE: _________________
internally reinforced and top and bottom closed flushed with 1.5mm (16 gauge) steel
CHK’D BY: ____________ channels. Steel sheets shall be galvanized to ASTM A525, Designation G90.
APPROVED C. Steel doors shall be fabricated in conformance with the requirements of Steel Door
ENGINEERING DEPT. Institute (SDI) specifications, SDI-100.
D. Gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
1. Hinge Reinforcement : 5mm (Gauge No. 7)

OPERATING DEPT. 2. Reinforcement for lock face,
flush bolts, closers and door pulls : 3mm (Gauge No. 12)
2.02 STEEL FRAMES

CERTIFIED
A. Steel frames shall be welded and shop assembled type, 1.5mm thick (Gauge No. 16) for
interior frames and 1.87mm thick (Gauge No. 14) for exterior frames conforming to ASTM
BY: ___________________ A366, and classified and approved for Class C (3/4 Hour) fire resistance rating per
DATE: _________________ Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
B. Door frames shall be fabricated to have 50mm faces, double backbends to enable the
frame to grip the wall firmly, double rabbet type and depths shall be sized to fit wall
thickness. Frames shall have construction joints welded full depth and width.
Reinforcement and stiffeners shall be welded to inside surface of frames.
C. Door frames shall be provided with integral stops and heavy duty vinyl sealing strips.
Single door frames shall be punched and provided with three (3) rubber silencers. It shall
be provided with steel spreaders.
08100-02

FOR 309
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Door frames shall be provided with a uniform coat of rust inhibiting quality primer and
finished with catalytically cured epoxy coating system.
E. Gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
Wall Anchors : Same thickness of frame material
Frame Splines : Same thickness of frame material
Hinge Reinforcement : 4.76mm x 45mm x 250mm
Strike Reinforcement : 4.46mm x 40mm x 100mm
Closer and Holder Reinforcement : 3.40mm (approx. gauge 10) by the required length &
width
F. Anchors:
1. Adjustable anchors for frames on masonry walls shall be "T" shaped steel. Frame
REVISIONS leg shall be full width of the jamb depth less required clearances to fit. Stem of
anchor shall be 75mm wide, corrugated or perforated for mortar bond and extend at
DRAWN BY: ___________ least 250mm into the masonry.
DATE: _________________
2. Jamb for openings up to 1500mm high shall be provided with two (2) anchors and an
CHK’D BY: ____________
additional anchor shall be provided for every 750mm of additional height or fraction
APPROVED
thereof.
ENGINEERING DEPT. 3. Frames set at grade shall be provided with angular base anchor or steel plate at
each jamb, 38mm x 38mm x jamb depth less 3mm. Jamb leg shall be furnished with
two (2) holes for power driven attachment to floor.
2.03 HARDWARE
OPERATING DEPT.
A. Lockset:
1. Exterior Doors: Exit device series no. 3600, including exterior entry trim series no.
3018, as manufactured by Adams Rite or approved equivalent.
CERTIFIED
2. Interior Doors: Mortise cylinder deadlock; deadbolt by key outside and inside and by
turn knob from inside; master keyed; Best Lock Corporation Catalog No. 29H6K or
BY: ___________________ approved equivalent.
DATE: _________________
B. Hinge: Full mortised stainless steel, five knuckle ball bearing type, 5 inches, Stanley
Hardware Series FBB-199 or approved equivalent.
C. Pull Plate: Stainless steel rod 25 mm diameters x 250mm long, and plate 100mm wide x
400mm long x 5mm thick. Brookline Industries Style No. 54 x 807 or approved
equivalent.
D. Push Plate: Stainless steel plate, 100mm wide x 400mm long x 2mm thick, Brookline
Industries Style No. 54RC or approved equivalent.
08100-03

FOR 310
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Door Closer: Surface mounted, overhead type, LCN Super Stock Series No. 1461 or
approved equivalent.
F. Flush Bolt: Lever operated, extension type, Stanley Hardware Series No. 393.5 or
G. Thresholds:
1. Interior Door: Extruded aluminum alloy, 16mm x 100mm, Pemko Series No. 198A or
2. Exterior Door: Extruded aluminum alloy with neoprene insert, Pemko Series No.
277AR or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Hardware Preparation: Hardware provision for steel doors and frames shall be prepared
REVISIONS
at the manufacturer’s plant in accordance with template furnished and shall be drilled and
tapped to receive hardware as indicated on the hardware templates. Preparation shall
DRAWN BY: ___________
conform to ANSI A115.1.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ B. Shop Finish:
APPROVED 1. Fill door edges with mineral filler to conceal seams.

ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Chemically treat nongalvanized and nonbonderized steel surfaces with phosphate
compound to assure maximum paint adherence.
3. Thoroughly clean steel surfaces of rust, scale, grease, rough spots and other foreign
matter will prevent paint adhesion.
OPERATING DEPT.
4. Labeled doors and panels shall be primed on interior surfaces as per certifying
laboratory or agency requirements.
5. Primed surfaces shall be smooth and suitable to receive the finish coats.
CERTIFIED
3.02 INSTALLATION
BY: ___________________ A. Install frames level, plumb and square with anchors and inserts accurately located. Use
DATE: _________________ only steel shims to level frames.
B. Steel spreaders on frames will be set in concrete shall remain in place. Steel spreaders
on frames set at finish floor level shall not be removed until frames are securely anchored
in place with permanent anchors.
C. Install doors in method to achieve the intended function operation and appearance.
E. Do all drilling and tapping of doors and frames as required for surface applied hardware.
08100-04

FOR 311
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 08211 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of wood doors, steel frames, hardware and trims including
accessories as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry

B. Section 09900 - Painting
1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
A. National Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. S.1 Series of Wood Flush Doors
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. American National Standards Institute
APPROVED
ANSI A135.4 Specification for Basic Hardboard
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. Underwriter CONTRACTOR’s Laboratory, Inc.
UL 120 ISO Fire Doors
OPERATING DEPT. D. National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 80 Standards for Fire Doors and Windows
1.04 SUBMITTALS
CERTIFIED
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for review and approval before commencing
BY: ___________________
WORK:
DATE: _________________
A. Copies of complete manufacturer’s technical specifications including detailed installation
instructions and instructions for installation of hardware.
B. Shop drawings indicating the following:
1. Elevation of each type of door.

2. Door and frame details.
3. Typical and special details of construction.
4. Label requirements.
08211-01

FOR 312
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Samples:
1. Three (3) 300mm by 300mm section of door showing internal construction and edge
details.
2. Three (3) 300mm by 300mm of each type of face materials proposed unless
included in the above samples.
A. Stack doors flat on three (3) pieces of 50mm by 100mm lumber, laid one each 300mm
from each end and one across the center.
B. Under bottom of door and over top of stack, provide plywood or corrugated cardboard to
protect door surface. Provide corrugated cardboard between doors when stacked.
C. Doors shall be protected from direct sunlight.

REVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ 2.01 GENERAL

CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Wood flush doors shall meet the applicable requirements of NWMA 1.S.1.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. B. Hardboard Faces: Shall meet or exceed the minimum performance requirements of
tempered, S2S, 3mm thick hardboard in accordance with ANSI A135.4, and modulus of
rupture shall not be less than 41.37 Mpa (6000 psi).
C. Adhesive: Adhesive shall be waterproof, melamine fortified urea type.
OPERATING DEPT. D. Door Frames: Refer to Section 08100, Steel Doors and Frames.
E. Hardware:
1. Lockset: Mortise cylindrical, deadbolt by key outside and inside and by turn knob
CERTIFIED from inside. Master keyed "Yale series 5400" or approved equivalent.
BY: ___________________
2. Hinge: Full mortised brass five knuckle ball bearing type 4 1/2 inches, Stanley
hardware series FBB-191 or approved equivalent.
DATE: _________________
3. Closer: Surface mounted, overhead type, LCN Super Stock Series No. 1461 or
4. Threshold: Extruded aluminum alloy, 16 mm (5/8 in.) high x 100 mm (4 in.) width;
Pemko Manufacturing Co. Series No. 198A or approved equivalent.
5. Pull bar (for toilet): Brass rod, 25mm diameter by 250mm long; and solid brass plate,
100mm wide by 400mm long by 5mm thick. Brookline Industries Style No. 54 x 807
or approved equivalent.
08211-02

FOR 313
494
‫لمشعقي‬
6. Push Plate (for toilet): Solid brass plate, 100mm by 400mm long by 5mm thick,
Brookline Industries Style No. 54RC or approved equivalent.
7. Provide one (1) masterkey for external doors and other utility doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
A. Moisture Content: 12% maximum for wood materials at time of fabrication.
B. Face Panels:
1. Face panels of two or more veneer plies, 2mm total minimum thickness before
sanding.
2. Bond hardwood veneer to core construction for 3-ply stile and rail core construction
REVISIONS
or to horizontal cross banding for 5 or 7-ply construction.
3. Side match veneers for grain and color at meeting stiles for doors hung in pairs.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ 4. Side edge bands to match the face veneers species or side edge bands to match
CHK’D BY: ____________ laminated plastic faces to type of door.
APPROVED 3.02 INSPECTION

ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. CONTRACTOR shall verify steel door frames are of type required for each door and are
installed as required for correct installation of doors. Fire rated doors shall be installed in
corresponding labeled fire rated frames.
3.03 INSTALLATION
OPERATING DEPT.
A. Doors shall be installed in strict compliance with the door manufacturer’s written
instruction.
CERTIFIED
B. Fire rated doors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80 recommendations and
only in pressed steel frames. Maximum clearances are as follows:
BY: ___________________ 1. 3mm : between door frames

DATE: _________________
2. 19mm : between door and floor surface excluding the existence of raised sill or
threshold
3. 3mm : between doors for pair of doors
C. Install finish hardware as recommended by the hardware manufacturer.
08211-03

FOR 314
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. CONTRACTOR shall replace and rehang doors that are hinge bound and do not swing
and operate freely.
B. CONTRACTOR shall replace doors damaged during handling and installation. Refinished
where acceptable by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
C. CONTRACTOR shall refinish or replace WORK SITE finished doors damage during
handling and installation.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
08211-04

FOR 315
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 08300 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of aluminum doors and frames and accessories to locations
shown on the drawings and as specified herein shall furnish materials, labor, tools, plant
and equipment required to complete the WORK.
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers

B. Section 08710 - Hardware
C. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing
REVISIONS
1.03 REFERENCES
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM B221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,
APPROVED
Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes
ENGINEERING DEPT. ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
OPERATING DEPT. Difference
ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
CERTIFIED
B. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):
AAMA 608.1 Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically

BY: ___________________ Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
DATE: _________________
C. European Wrought Aluminum Association (EWWA).
D. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:
SASO 79 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Products for Architectural

Applications
SASO 80 Testing Methods of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys Products

For Building Purposes
08300-01

FOR 316
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Hollow Extrusions : 0.25mm

2. Size Tolerances : Dimensions within 1.6mm
B. Quality Control:
1. Air Infiltration Test: Exterior door and frame units, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E283, shall have a maximum infiltration of 0.000024 cu. m/sec/m crack
length.
2. Water Penetration: Exterior door and frame units, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E331, shall have no water penetration for 15 minutes when window unit is
subjected to rate of flow of 0.203 cu. m/sec/sq. m with a differential pressure across
the window unit of 0.3 kPa.
3. Wind Load Test: Exterior door and frame units, when tested in accordance with
REVISIONS ASTM E330 to a minimum 1.5 kPa positive and negative load for 10 seconds, shall
have a maximum deformation of frame member 0.4% of span length with no damage
DRAWN BY: ___________
to fasteners and hardware.
DATE: _________________
C. Warranty
CHK’D BY: ____________
Provide 5 years written warranty by and Installer to replace/repair defective materials and
APPROVED
workmanship.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE the following for review

and approval prior to commencing WORK:
OPERATING DEPT.
1. Shop drawings including complete door schedule, elevations of each type of door,
glazing schedule, anchorage details for each different wall condition. Head, jamb,
mullions and sill details shall be full size.
CERTIFIED 2. Three (3) samples of corner assembly for each type of door showing joints and joint
materials, glazing frames and accessories.
BY: ___________________
3. Three (3) copies of technical data showing finish proposed is suitable for the
DATE: _________________ environmental conditions of the WORK SITE.
4. Written warranty countersigned by door and frame manufacturer stating WORK

executed under this Section shall be free from defects in material, workmanship and
performance for a period of two years from date of final acceptance.
08300-02

FOR 317
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Doors and frames assembly shall be individually wrapped or crated to avoid aluminum to
aluminum contact during shipping.
B. Doors and frames assembly shall be stored in vertical position above ground and in dry
area.
C. Sealing materials shall be delivered in manufacturer’s sealed containers, fully identified

with trade name, color, size, hardness, type, class and grade.
1.07 PROTECTIVE COVERING
Aluminum surfaces shall receive protection covering at factory. Covering shall be

waterproof material or adhesive paper.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
REVISIONS
Aluminum doors and frames shall be furnished by manufacturer regularly engaged in

DRAWN BY: ___________ manufacture of aluminum doors and frames. Doors and frames shall be the type and
DATE: _________________ size indicated on the drawings. Each unit shall include subframe, frame, door,
CHK’D BY: ____________
weatherstripping, applicable hardware and anchors. Units shall be assembled at factory
and shall be suitable for receiving single or double glazing as indicated on door
APPROVED
schedule. Glass shall be factory installed and in accordance with Section 08800, Glass
and Glazing.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Frames: Frames with sidelights and transoms shall be extruded aluminum, type 6063-T5
alloy in accordance with ASTM B-221, of profile and dimensions as shown on the
OPERATING DEPT. Drawings, complete with extruded aluminum security type snap-in glass stops for
sidelights and transoms of profile to suit frame section. Nominal wall thickness shall be
3mm. Frames for use in precast concrete and masonry openings without sidelights or
transoms shall be extruded aluminum, type 6063-T5 alloy in accordance with ASTM B-
221. Frames shall be of profile and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and shall have
CERTIFIED a nominal thickness of 3mm.
B. Doors: Aluminum doors and frames shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum 6063-T5
BY: ___________________
alloy. Main frame and sash members shall have a nominal wall thickness of 3mm.
DATE: _________________ Frames shall be carefully machined and fit to hairline joinery and mechanically fastened
to develop the strength of joined members or heli-arc welded on unexposed surfaces.
Watertight joints shall be provided at all corners. Screws, fasteners and accessories shall
be non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum.
C. Finishing: After fabrication, fabrication oils, tool marks and scratches shall be removed
leaving surfaces free from discoloration, blemishes and defects. Aluminum surfaces shall
be first applied with medium matte finish by caustic soda etching or by mechanical
methods. Finish coating shall be electrolytically deposited color anodic finish in
accordance with AAMA 608.1. Coating shall be designation A44 and shall be 0.7 mil (18
microns) or thicker. Color shall be as indicated on the drawings.
08300-03

FOR 318
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Performance Requirements: Doors and frames shall have provisions for thermal
movements and shall be detailed to provide for expansion and contraction of component
materials will be caused by ambient temperature range from 0C to 60C without causing
harmful buckling, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental
defects.
E. Structural Properties: Doors and frames shall be designed to withstand inward and
outward pressures in accordance with ASCE 7 (ANSI A58.1), "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures." Doors shall be designed to withstand both inward and
outward acting pressure applied separately.
F. Weatherstripping: Silicone treated pile weatherstripping (exterior and interior of each

panel) with metallic base shall have a minimum pile height of 6mm when installed
2.03 HARDWARE
A. Door leaf shall be equipped with adjustable mechanism located on top rail near lock stile
and will provide for minor clearance adjustments after installation.
REVISIONS
B. Exterior doors shall have manufacturer’s standard weatherstripping installed on frame of
door. For double leaf door, weatherstripping shall also be provided on one meeting stile.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ C. Unless otherwise indicated, the following items of hardware shall be the manufacturer’s
CHK’D BY: ____________ recommended standard type to suit application:
APPROVED 1. Closers concealed in frame.

ENGINEERING DEPT. 2. Pivots or Hinges.
3. Dead Latches.
4. Push Plates and Pull Bars.
5. Strike Keepers.
6. Latch Handles.
7. Cylinder Locks, Thumb Turns.
OPERATING DEPT.
8. Operating Mechanism and Switching Device.
9. Stops where required.
10. Exit Device (Panic Hardware).
2.04 FABRICATION
CERTIFIED
A. Fabricate aluminum doors and frames to allow for clearances and shim spacing around
BY: ___________________ perimeter of assemblies to enable installation into prepared openings. Provide for thermal
DATE: _________________ movement.
B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and solidly attach door and frame assemblies in
place.
C. Accurately and rigidly fit together joints and corners. Match components ensuring
continuity of line and design. Ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and
weatherproof.
D. Provide drain routes and outlets to exterior for moisture entering and condensation
occurring within frame construction.
08300-04

FOR 319
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Make provision for hardware and provide internal reinforcing.
F. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed surface in contact with cementitious and
dissimilar materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR shall ensure door openings conform to dimensions and tolerances shown
on Contract Drawings.
B. CONTRACTOR shall correct unsatisfactory conditions prior to installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of doors and frames, hardware
and accessory component.
REVISIONS
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp and rack of frames.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
C. Anchor frames solidly to surrounding construction to prevent distortion and misalignment.
CHK’D BY: ____________
D. Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible materials
(dissimilar materials).
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. E. Install butt installation (for internal windows) to shim space around perimeter of window
and frame units to maintain continuity of acoustic barrier.
F. Install perimeter sealant and related backing materials in accordance with Section 07920,
Joint Sealers.
OPERATING DEPT.
A. Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and shall tight when closed.
B. Lubricate hardware where required and recommended by the manufacturer to provide

CERTIFIED
free and smooth operation.
BY: ___________________ C. Clean aluminum surfaces and remove excess SEALANT.

DATE: _________________
D. Remove debris from the WORK SITE.
E. Glazed openings shall be marked during construction for safety purposes.
08300-05

FOR 320
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 – GENERAL
Furnishing and installation of aluminum windows and accessories to locations shown on

the drawings and as specified herein shall furnish materials, labor, tools, plant and
equipment required to complete the WORK.
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ASTM B221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM C542 Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. ASTM C1048 Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
CERTIFIED
B. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ AAMA 608.1 Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically
Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
C. European Wrought Aluminum Association (EWWA).
D. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:
SASO 79 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Products for Architectural

Applications
SASO 80 Testing Methods of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys Products

For Building Purposes
08520-01

FOR 321
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Hollow Extrusions : 0.25mm

2. Size Tolerances : Dimensions within 1.6mm
B. Quality Control:
1. Air Infiltration Test: Exterior window units, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E283, shall have a maximum infiltration of 0.000024 cu. m/sec/m crack length.
2. Water Penetration: Exterior window units, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E331, shall have no water penetration for 15 minutes when window unit is subjected
to rate of flow of 0.203 cu. m/sec/sq. m with a differential pressure across the
window unit of 0.3 kPa.
3. Wind Load Test: Exterior window units, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330
REVISIONS to a minimum 1.5 kPa positive and negative load for 10 seconds, shall have a
maximum deformation of frame member 0.4% of span length with no damage to
DRAWN BY: ___________ fasteners and hardware.
DATE: _________________
1.05 SUBMITTALS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE the following for review
and approval prior to commencing WORK:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Shop drawings including complete window schedule, elevations of each type of

window, glazing schedule, anchorage details for each different wall condition. Head,
jamb, mullions and sill details shall be full size.
OPERATING DEPT. 2. Three (3) samples of corner assembly for each type of window showing joints and
joint materials, glazing frames and accessories.
3. Three (3) copies of technical data showing finish proposed is suitable for the
environmental conditions of the WORK SITE.
CERTIFIED
4. Written warranty countersigned by window manufacturer stating WORK executed
BY: ___________________
under this Section shall be free from defects in material, workmanship and
performance for a period of two years from date of final acceptance.
DATE: _________________
08520-02

FOR 322
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Windows assembly shall be individually wrapped or crated to avoid aluminum to

aluminum contact during shipping.
B. Windows assembly shall be stored in vertical position above ground and in dry area.
C. Glass shall be securely and safely crated for delivery, handling and storage. Glass shall
be stored in dry, well ventilated area, protected from soiling, atmospheric condensation
and other moisture. Each piece of glass shall be delivered with factory labels, intact,
indicating glass type, quality and thickness. Labels shall not be removed until installation
is accepted.
D. Sealing materials shall be delivered in manufacturer’s sealed containers, fully identified

with trade name, color, size, hardness, type, class and grade.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REVISIONS
2.01 MATERIALS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. Aluminum Windows: Aluminum windows shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum
6063-T5 alloy. Main frame and sash members shall have a nominal wall thickness of
CHK’D BY: ____________
3mm. Frames shall be carefully machined and fit to hairline joinery and mechanically
APPROVED
fastened to develop the strength of joined members or heli-arc welded on unexposed
surfaces. Watertight joints shall be provided at all corners. Screws, fasteners and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
accessories shall be non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum.
B. Finishing: After fabrication, fabrication oils, tool marks and scratches shall be removed
leaving surfaces free from discoloration, blemishes and defects. Aluminum surfaces shall
be first applied with medium matte finish by caustic soda etching or by mechanical
OPERATING DEPT. methods. Finish coating shall be electrolytically deposited color anodic finish in
accordance with AAMA 608.1. Coating shall be designation A44 and shall be 0.7 mil (18
microns) or thicker. Color shall be as indicated on the drawings.
C. Performance Requirements: Windows shall have provisions for thermal movements and
CERTIFIED shall be detailed to provide for expansion and contraction of component materials will be
caused by ambient temperature range from 0C to 60C without causing harmful
BY: ___________________
buckling, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental defects.
DATE: _________________
D. Structural Properties: Windows shall be designed to withstand inward and outward
pressures in accordance with ASCE 7 (ANSI A58.1), "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures." Windows shall be designed to withstand both inward
and outward acting pressure applied separately.
E. Aluminum frames for exterior windows shall be provided with continuously poured-in-
place structurally joined polyurethane thermal (break) barrier to separate exterior from
interior metal surface.
08520-03

FOR 323
494
‫لمشعقي‬
F. Insulated Glass:
1. External windows shall be manufacturer’s standard units consisting of two (2) lites of
tempered glass permanently and hermetically sealed together at edges with spacers
and sealant, separated by dehydrated air spaces with insulating film in between two
air spaces, with an overall thickness of 24mm. Solar bronze tinted tempered safety
glass for the exterior side and clear tempered safety glass for the interior side and
shall conform to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 3, Quality q3 (Glazing Select).
Thickness shall be as recommended by the aluminum window manufacturer.
G. Glazing Accessories:
1. Glazing Structural Gasket: Shall be neoprene structural gaskets in shape and

arrangement as shown on the drawings. Gasket shall be formed by injection molding
process and factory vulcanized into complete assembled units with no field joints
except for filler member. Gasket shall conform to physical properties listed in ASTM
C542, Black.
REVISIONS 2. Glazing Compounds: Glazing compounds shall be as recommended by the glass

manufacturer for the intended application. In no case shall glazing be performed
DRAWN BY: ___________ with any oleo-resinous or oil-based compounds, nor shall glazing sealant be diluted
DATE: _________________
or thinned with any solvent.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive WORK, and unsatisfactory conditions shall be corrected by

CONTRACTOR prior to installation. Application or installation of materials shall not
constitute acceptance of the WORK.
OPERATING DEPT.
B. CONTRACTOR shall ensure door openings conform to dimensions shown on the
Contract Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
CERTIFIED
A. Window Frames and Accessories:
BY: ___________________
1. Comply with the manufacturer’s installation of units, hardware and other
DATE: _________________
components.
2. Set units plumb, level and true to line without warp or rack of frames.
3. Anchor frames solidly to surrounding construction to prevent distortion and

misalignment.
4. Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible

materials (dissimilar materials).
08520-04

FOR 324
494
‫لمشعقي‬
5. Install butt installation (for internal windows) to shim space around perimeter of
window and frame units to maintain continuity of acoustic barrier.
6. Install perimeter sealant and related backing materials in accordance with Section
07920, Joint Sealers.
B. Glazing:
1. Clean glazing stops and rebates will receive glazing materials from obstructions and
deleterious substances will impair the WORK. Remove protective coatings will cause
adhesion failure or interfere with bond of sealant.
2. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations, using recommended primers.
3. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation.
4. Locate setting blocks at the quarter points of sill, but no closer than 150mm to corner
REVISIONS of glass.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 5. Set glass in a manner that produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in
DATE: _________________
appearance.
CHK’D BY: ____________
6. Glazing materials from different sources shall not be used in the same joint system,
APPROVED
unless the manufacturer of each material cite in writing that such material is fully
compatible with the other material.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and shall tight when closed.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Lubricate hardware where required and recommended by the manufacturer to provide
free and smooth operation.
C. Clean aluminum surfaces and remove excess SEALANT.
CERTIFIED D. Remove debris from the WORK SITE.
BY: ___________________
E. Glazed openings shall be marked during construction for safety purposes.
DATE: _________________
08520-05

FOR 325
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 08710 - HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of hardware, thresholds, weather stripping and accessories as

indicated in the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Installation of hardware in compliance with the manufacturer's instruction and

recommendations.
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry

REVISIONS B. Section 08100 - Steel Doors and Frames
C. Section 08211 - Wood Doors
DRAWN BY: ___________ D. Section 08300 - Aluminum Doors and Frames
DATE: _________________
1.03 REFERENCES
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A115.1 Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-3/4 Inch
Doors
A115.2 Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4
Inch Doors
OPERATING DEPT.
A115.3 Door and Frame Preparation for Bore or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/8 Inch
Doors
A115.4 Door and Frame Preparation for Level Extension Flush Bolts
CERTIFIED
A115.5 Frame Preparation for 181 and 190 Series Deadlock Strikes
BY: ___________________
A115.6 Door and Frame Preparation for Unit Door Locks
DATE: _________________
A115.7 Door and Frame Preparation for Floor Closers, Light Duty Center Hung
Single or Double Acting
A115.8 Door and Frame Preparation for Floor Closer, Center Hung, Single or
Double Acting
A115.9 Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting
A115.10 Door and Frame Preparation for Hospital Door Roller Latches
08710-01

FOR 326
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A115.11 Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Locks for 1-3/8 Inch Doors
A115.12 Door and Frame Preparation for Offset Intermediate Pivot
A115.13 Door and Frame Preparation for Tubular Deadlocks
A115.14 Preparation for Standard Steel Doors for Open Back Strikes
A156.1 Butts and Hinges
A156.2 Locks and Lock Trims
A156.3 Exit Devices
A156.4 Door Controls (Closers)
A156.6 Architectural Door Trim
REVISIONS A156.7 Template Hinges
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.04 SUBMITTALS

DATE: _________________
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for review before commencing WORK:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Submit samples of each type of hardware required, indicating style and finish.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Submit shop drawings and product data indicating locations and mounting heights of
each type of hardware.
3. Furnish templates to door and frame manufacturer (s) proper and accurate sizing
and locations of cutouts for hardware.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to WORK SITE, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items not immediately replaceable, and
BY: ___________________
completion of WORK shall not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after
installation.
DATE: _________________
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
Coordinate hardware with other WORK. Tag each item and package separately with
identification related to the final Hardware Schedule. Furnish hardware items of proper
design for use on doors and frames of thickness, profile, swing, security and similar
requirements indicated, and as necessary for proper installation and function.
Individually packaged hardware items shall be delivered at proper times to proper
locations at the WORK SITE for installation.
08710-02

FOR 327
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL FABRICATION
A. General
1. Hand Door: Drawings show the swing of hand or each door leaf (left, right, reverse
bevel). Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the
door swing as shown.
2. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not use manufacturer's products having names or

trade names are displayed on visible location (omit removable nameplates), except
in conjunction with required UL labels.
3. Base Metals: Produce hardware units using the manufacturer's standard metal
alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser commercially
recognized quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS FF-H-106,
FS FF-H-111, FS FF-116 and FS- FF-H-121. Do not substitute "optional" materials
REVISIONS or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 4. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates generally
DATE: _________________
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware prepared for self-
tapping sheet metal screws.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed screws to match the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
hardware finish or, where exposed on surfaces of the WORK, to match the finish of
other WORK as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" on surfaces to
receive painted finish.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when the door is closed.
OPERATING DEPT.
Provide tools for maintenance as specified herein.
5. Door Stops: Interior swing doors, except access doors and doors located above
floor level, shall open against doorstop. Install wall type only, except where
CERTIFIED conditions prevent the use of wall stops.
BY: ___________________
B. Metal Door
DATE: _________________
1. Lockset: Mortise cylinder deadlock; deadbolt by key outside and inside and by turn
knob from inside; master keyed; Best Lock Corporation Catalog No. 29H6K or
2. Hinge: Full mortised stainless steel; five knuckle ball bearing type; 5 inches; Stanley
Hardware Series FBB-199 or approved equivalent.
3. Pull: Stainless steel 25 mm (1 in.) diameter type; 250 mm (10 in.) long; Brookline
Series No. 809 or approved equivalent.
08710-03

FOR 328
494
‫لمشعقي‬
4. Closer: Surfaces mounted, overhead type, LCN Super Stock Series No. 1461 or
5. Bolt: Flush bolt-lever operated extension type; Stanley hardware Series No. 393.5
or approved equivalent.
6. Threshold: Extruded aluminum alloy; 16 mm (5/8 in.) x 100 mm (4 in.) width, Pemko
Series No. 198A or approved equivalent.
7. Exit Device: Adams Rite Series No. 3300, fire rated or approved equivalent.
C. Aluminum Door
1. Lockset: Mortise cylinder deadlock; deadbolt by key outside and inside and by turn
knob from inside; master keyed; Best Lock Corp. Catalog No. 29H6K or approved
equivalent.
2. Hinge: Pivot hinge full mortise forged brass, heavy-duty anti-friction bearing by
Stanley or equivalent. Series A1711 per BHMA A156.11.
REVISIONS
3. Closer: Concealed offset pivoted overhead type, Door-O-Matic Series No. 2351 or
DRAWN BY: ___________ approved equivalent.
DATE: _________________
4. Bolt: Flush bolt lever operated extension type; Stanley Hardware Series No. 393.5 or
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
5. Pull: Brass, 8 in. centers; 2 in. x 12 in. and 18" plate; Brookline Series No. 825 or
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT. 7. Exit Device: Adams Rite Series No. 3300, fire rated or approved equivalent.
D. Wood Doors
1. Lockset: Mortise cylindrical, deadbolt by key outside and inside and by turn knob
CERTIFIED from inside. Master keyed "Yale series 5400" or approved equivalent.
BY: ___________________
2. Hinge: Full mortised brass five knuckle ball bearing type 4 1/2 inches, Stanley
hardware series FBB-191 or approved equivalent.
DATE: _________________
3. Closer: Surface mounted, overhead type, LCN Super Stock Series No. 1461 or
5. Provide one (1) masterkey for each department, external doors and other utility
doors.
08710-04

FOR 329
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builder's

Hardware" by NBHA, except where shown otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrate.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with Industry Standards.
E. Cut and fit threshold and floor cover to profile of doors frame, with mitered corners and
hairline joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut
REVISIONS smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, where any.
DRAWN BY: ___________ F. Screw threshold to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws of proper type for permanent
DATE: _________________
anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel and will not corrode in contact with the
threshold metal.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
G. At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds on bed of either butyl rubber
sealant or polysobutylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude
ENGINEERING DEPT.
moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove
excess sealant.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
OPERATING DEPT. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication
recommended by manufacturer (graphite type where no other recommended). Replace
units where cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as
intended for the application made.
CERTIFIED
3.03 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
BY: ___________________
Make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area immediately
DATE: _________________
prior to final acceptance or occupancy. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware on doors. Adjust door
control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
08710-05

FOR 330
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing of materials, tools and equipment required for installation and workmanship of
glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 08300 - Aluminum Doors and Frames

B. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows
1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ASTM C-162 Definition of Terms Relating to Glass and Glass Products
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM C-452 Specification and Methods of Test for Elastomeric Structural Glazing
APPROVED
and Panel Gaskets
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM C1048 Specifications for Heat-Treated Flat Glass
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI Z-97.1 Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing
OPERATING DEPT. Material Used in Building
C. Federal Specifications (FS)
FS-DD-1403b Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet Figured and Spandle (Heat Strengthened
CERTIFIED and Fully Tempered)
BY: ___________________
FS-16CFR120 Federal Safety Standard for Tempered Glass
DATE: _________________
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Provide glass and glazing produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal
temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (where applicable), without failure
including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and
airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials, and other defects in the WORK.
B. Provide specified glass, heat strengthened or fully tempered where recommended by the
glass manufacturer to withstand thermal stress, wind pressure and suctions, and other
conditions specified, for each condition of use. Submit supporting documentation from
glass manufacturer as required.
08800-01

FOR 331
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Glazing Standards:
Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) “Glazing

Manual” and “Sealant Manual”, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
Refer to FGMA publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise
defined in this Section or other referenced standards.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data:
Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass
product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Samples:
Before WORK is fabricated, submit the following samples, in triplicate, of actual proposed
REVISIONS materials.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Glazing Gaskets with Vulcanized Corners: 900 mm long, each type.
DATE: _________________
2. Weathering Gaskets, Tapes and Separators: 900 mm long, each type.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
3. Glass: 300 mm square samples of each type except clear monolithic units.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4. Sealants: 300 mm long samples of each color except black for each type of sealant
exposed to view.
C. Sealant Material Test Reports:
OPERATING DEPT. Submit the following sealant manufacturer’s data and information for review:
1. Adhesion test data of sealant bond to actual production samples of finished metal
and glass that will be incorporated into the WORK. Perform adhesion tests in
accordance with ASTM C794.
CERTIFIED
2. Compatibility statement that materials in contact with sealant, such as gaskets,
BY: ___________________
spacers, setting blocks, are compatible with the sealant after 21 days exposure to
2,000 to 4,000 microwatts of ultraviolet radiation.
DATE: _________________
3. Stress statement that sealant dimensions (per detail) do not exceed 20 psi when
exposed to the specified wind load (6:1 Safety Factor)
4. Certification from sealant manufacture that sealant manufacturer has reviewed all
sealant details and finds same suitable for the purpose intended and compatible with
surfaces to be in contact.
08800-02

FOR 332
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Warranty:
Submit manufacturer’s standard 2-year product warranty for glass and glazing products.
Guarantee period is two (2) years after Date of Substantial Completion.
Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with
manufacturer’s directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and
damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation,
of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun and from other causes.
Environmental Conditions:
Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limit permitted by glazing material manufacturer and when joint substrates
are wet due to rain, condensation and other causes. Install glazing sealant only when
REVISIONS temperatures are in middle third of manufacturer’s recommended installation
temperature range.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.01 GLASS PRODUCTS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Glass shall conform to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 3, Quality q3 (Glazing Select)
B. Insulated Glass: Manufacturer’s Standard units consisting of two (2) lites of 6 mm (1/4
inches) thick tempered glass permanently and hermetically sealed together at edges with
spacers and sealant, to provide a dehydrated air space with insulating film in between two
OPERATING DEPT. air spaces with an overall thickness of 28 mm. Fabricated to sizes and shapes indicated,
comprising of 6 mm thick tempered tinted bronze glass on exterior and 6 mm tempered
clear glass on interior.
2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS

CERTIFIED
A. Sealants and Gaskets: Provide sealants and gaskets recommended and guaranteed by
BY: ___________________
the manufacturer to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking, non-migrating, and
weatherproof for the life of building. Comply with recommendations of sealant, gasket
DATE: _________________
and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing materials having performance
characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.
Select sealants and glazing materials with proven compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation and under service conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing and field
experience.
B. Structural Glazing Gaskets: Shall be neoprene structural gasket in shapes and

arrangements as shown. Gaskets shall be formed by injection molding process and
factory vulcanized into complete assembled units with no field joints except for filler
member. Gaskets shall conform to physical properties listed in ASTM C542, black.
08800-03

FOR 333
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Setting blocks used to support fixed glass shall be dense neoprene extrusions
conforming to ASTM D395 Method B of 90 5 Shore A durometer hardness, in profiles as
indicated on the Drawings. Shore A durometer hardness, length, and location shall be as
recommended in writing by acceptable glass manufacturer.
D. Edge blocks shall be used to center the glass and prevent lateral “walking” and shall be
as recommended in writing by the applicable glass manufacturer in neoprene conforming
to ASTM D395 Method B of 90  5 Shore A durometer hardness, length and locations
shall be recommended in writing by applicable glass manufacturer.
E. One-part low modulus silicone sealant with 50% joint movement capability and
conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Class A.
2.03 FABRICATION
Glazing channel dimensions shown are intended to provide necessary minimum bite on
glass, minimum edge clearance, and sealant or gasket thickness, with reasonable
tolerances. Glass fabricator is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within
tolerance and dimensions established by glass manufacturer. Perimeter clearance shall
REVISIONS be sufficient to avoid point loading.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ PART 3 - EXECUTION

CHK’D BY: ____________
3.01 INSTALLATION
APPROVED
A. Glazing, General:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Comply with “Glazing Manual: by Flat Glass Marketing Association, except as

shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise
by glass manufacturer and by manufacturers of glazing materials used.
OPERATING DEPT. 2. Require glazier to inspect WORK of glass framing erector for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including size, squareness, offsets at
corners; presence and functioning of weep system; existing of minimum required
face or edge clearance; and effective sealing of joinery. Obtain glazier’s written
report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing WORK. Do not allow
CERTIFIED glazing WORK to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
BY: ___________________ 3. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate pieces with
DATE: _________________
edge damage or face imperfections. Provide clean cut edges; no nipped, coped, or
seamed edges will be permitted. Do not cut, seam, nip, or abrade glass that is
tempered, heat strengthened, or coated.
4. Perform glazing in accordance with best trade practices without springing or forcing.
Follow glass manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Glazing Preparation:
1. Clean glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately

before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to the substrate.
08800-04

FOR 334
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width
from each corner, but no closer than 150 mm, unless otherwise required. Set blocks
in thin course of sealant that is acceptable for heel bead use.
3. Provide spacers inside and outside, of correct size and spacing to preserve the
required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 1270 mm, except where
gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide
three (3) mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape the thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
4. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard,

except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
C. Sealant/Compound Glazing:
1. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by

sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass
channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface and to control depth
REVISIONS of sealant for optimum performance unless otherwise indicated.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Use sealing materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions,
DATE: _________________
applied by mechanics specially trained or experienced in their use. Provide
sealants, tapes, gaskets, separators, joints fillers, and back-up materials that are
CHK’D BY: ____________
physically and chemically compatible with each other and with adjacent materials.
APPROVED
3. Before applying sealant, remove all mortar, dirt, dust, moisture, and other foreign
ENGINEERING DEPT.
matter from bond surfaces. Clean metal surfaces with oil free solvent, i.e., Toluene
or Xylene. Wash one small area at a time and then dry with clean white cloth before
solvent evaporates. Do not apply sealant to damp surfaces. Apply primers
recommended by manufacturer and successfully demonstrated in sealant evaluation
testing. Mask adjoining surfaces when required to maintain a clean and neat
OPERATING DEPT. appearance.
4. Force sealants and compounds into channel to eliminate air pockets and voids
(other than expansion voids), and to ensure complete “wetting” and bond of sealant
to glass and channel surfaces.
CERTIFIED
D. Tape Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends of tape together at corners so that tape will not
BY: ___________________
pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in glazing system.
DATE: _________________
E. Structural Glazing Gaskets:
1. Comply with ASTM C716 and gasket manufacturer’s printed recommendations.
2. Comply with glass manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for use of

setting blocks, liquid sealants, and weep holes in glazing rabbets of structural
gaskets.
08800-05

FOR 335
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass. Remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Where contaminating substances come in contact with glass, remove
immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete at frequent intervals during
construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali
deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue,
remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during
construction period, including natural causes and accidents.
REVISIONS *** End of Section 08800 ***
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
08800-06

FOR 336
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09000 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Furnishing of labor, materials, tools and equipment required the application Portland
cement plaster as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Unit System
D. Section 09900 - Painting
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
DATE: _________________
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland cement
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ASTM C35 Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM C206 Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime
ASTM C631 Specification for Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering
ASTM C926 Application for Portland Cement-Based Plaster

OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM C897 Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
CERTIFIED ANSI A42.4 Specification for Interior Lathing and Furring
BY: ___________________
C. American Concrete Institute
DATE: _________________
ACI 524 Guide to Portland Cement Plastering
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE the following items for

review and approval before commencing WORK:
1. Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each plaster accessory

required.
09000-01

FOR 337
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. 300mm length samples of accessories proposed.
3. When requested, two (2) finished samples of plaster on lath measuring 300mm x
300mm.
A. Deliver, handle and store materials in such a manner as to prevent damage; store above
ground and in a dry place. Each bag shall bear the name of manufacturer, type of
cement, lime or sand.
B. Accessories shall be handled or delivered in their original containers bearing the name of
the manufacturer and item identification.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Plaster WORK shall be done when the air temperature is between 13°C and 35°C.
REVISIONS
B. Ventilation shall be provided to properly dry plaster during and subsequent to its
DRAWN BY: ___________ application.
DATE: _________________
C. Where glazed sash are not in place and the building is subject to hot dry winds and
CHK’D BY: ____________
temperature differentials from day to night of 11°C or more, openings shall be screened
APPROVED
with cheese cloth or similar materials. Set retarding agents will be used where
recommended by the plaster manufacturer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.07 PROTECTION
Finished doors, window frames and other surfaces when do not receive a plaster finish
shall be protected during plaster application.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL LATH

CERTIFIED
A. Metal Lath for Exterior Stucco Walls. Self-furring latch for exterior Portland cement plaster
BY: ___________________
with staggered indentations horizontally and vertically to hold the body of the lath not less
than 6mm away from base material, galvanized.
DATE: _________________
B. Metal Lath for Interior Plaster Vertical Furring. Expanded diamond mesh pattern,
galvanized.
C. Metal lath sheets shall square on ends, galvanized and weigh not less than 1.8 kg/sq.
meter.
09000-02

FOR 338
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.02 PLASTERING MATERIALS
A. Cement: Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I.
B. Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C35.
C. Lime: Shall be hydrated finishing lime conforming to the requirements of ASTM C206,
Type S. Lime shall not be used on exterior plaster.
D. Water: Shall be potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts of oils, salts, alkali,
organic matter and other harmful materials.
E. Mix proportion for plaster mix.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
REVISIONS
A. Prior to commencement of plaster WORK, carefully inspect and verify related WORK is
complete to conditions plastering will properly commence.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ B. Verify lath and plaster are installed in accordance with the referenced Codes and
CHK’D BY: ____________ Standards and the design requirements.
APPROVED C. Prior to application, ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to receive
ENGINEERING DEPT. cement plaster are tested and approved.
D. Examine to ensure that finished plaster surfaces shall be true to line, level and plumb,
without requiring additional thickness of plaster. Maximum variation of surface to receive
plaster shall be 6 mm in 1.2 m from the required plane when measured with straightedge.
OPERATING DEPT. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Plaster Mixes. Accurately measure ingredients and proportion successive batches alike in
strict conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations for the type of plaster being
used.
CERTIFIED
B. Installation of Metal Lath

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
1. Use metal lath of type and weight required to comply with maximum support spacing
requirements of ANSI A42.4 for various applications required in the WORK. Provide
intermediate metal furring supports to reduce distance between supports to
maximum permissible spans, where required.
2. Attach lath to support in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A42.4 for the
kinds of supports shown.
3. Do not bridge control or expansion joints with the lath.
4. Metal lath shall be attached to metal studs simultaneously with gypsum sheathing.
09000-03

FOR 339
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Installation of Plaster
1. Prepare surfaces to receive plaster by cleaning and removing dust, laitance, loose
material and other deleterious substances that will impair the WORK. Masonry and
concrete surfaces shall be applied with bonding agent prior to the application of
cement plaster. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Mechanically mix plaster materials; do not hand mix except where small amounts
are needed.
3. Plaster shall consist of three-coat WORK on lathed surfaces, two-coat WORK on

masonry, and two-coat on exterior WORK.
4. Do not use materials that are caked or lumpy or are contaminated with foreign
materials.
5. Size batches for complete use within a maximum of one (1) hour after mixing and to
set within a maximum of four (4) hours, except during hot, dry weather, reduce
REVISIONS maximum placing time as required to prevent premature stiffening of plaster.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Do not retemper stiffened plaster with additional water.
DATE: _________________
6. Apply 3-coat plaster overall metal reinforcing, consisting of first (scratch coat),
CHK’D BY: ____________
second (brown coat) and finish coats as further specified. Minimum total thickness
APPROVED
shall be 19 mm measured from back of lath.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
7. Exterior Application: Shall consist of two-coat WORK, brown coat and finish coat.
Maximum total thickness shall be 16mm measure from the face of masonry or
concrete. Lime shall not be used on exterior plaster.
8. Apply first base coat with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through
OPERATING DEPT. metal reinforcing and to embed reinforcing. After first coat is firm, scratch (score) in
one direction only, to provide mechanical bond for second coat.
9. Apply second base coat with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact
with first base coat. Bring surface to a true, even plane by rodding, and float to a
CERTIFIED uniformly rough surface. Fill defects and scratches with plaster.
BY: ___________________
10. Finish Coat Application
DATE: _________________
a) Apply finish coat to 3mm nominal thickness to base coat, scratch in tight and
double back to uniform surface and uniform thickness.
b) Remove trowel marks and surface imperfections by drawing-up or laying down

the surface with light trowel pressure when plaster has stiffened.
c) Water trowel to density and polish the surface.
d) For a floated finish, when plaster has stiffened, float with a wood float to
produce a surface free from slick spots or other blemishes.
09000-04

FOR 340
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Moisture Retention, Curing
1. Dampen previous plaster coats that have dried out prior to time of application of next
coat.
2. CONTRACTOR is responsible for determining the most effective procedure for

curing and time lapse between applications of coats based on climatic and WORK
conditions.
E. The maximum variation of the finished plaster surface, in any direction, shall be 3mm in 3
m when measured with a 3 m long straightedge placed on any plane surface or edge.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09000-05

FOR 341
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09010 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
PART - GENERAL
Furnishing of labor, materials and equipment for the complete installation of gypsum
wallboard partitions and ceilings including metal studs, sealants, joint treatments,
attachments, anchorage and other accessories required.
A. Section 07213 - Batt/Blanket Insulation

B. Section 08100 - Steel Doors and Frames
C. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows
REVISIONS D. Section 09000 - Portland Cement Plaster
E. Section 09900 - Painting
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.03 REFERENCES
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ASTM C22 Specification for Gypsum
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM C36 Specification for Gypsum Wallboard
ASTM C79 Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board
OPERATING DEPT. ASTM C442 Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard
ASTM C475 Specification for Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard
Construction
CERTIFIED ASTM C514 Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboards
BY: ___________________
ASTM C630 Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
DATE: _________________
ASTM C645 Nonload (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid
Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board
ASTM C646 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board to Light-Gage Steel Studs
ASTM C754 Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-
Resistant Back Board
09010-01

FOR 342
494
‫لمشعقي‬
ASTM C840 Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
ASTM C893 Specification for Type G Steel Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board to Gypsum Board
ASTM C931 Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board
ASTM C954 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board
to Steel Studs from 0.33 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (284 mm) in
Thickness
ASTM C955 Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Track), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of
Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases
ASTM C-1002 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board
REVISIONS A. Gypsum board internal partition system shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified in the section.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
B. Comply with Fire Resistance Ratings as required by UBC Codes. Provide materials,
accessories and systems listed by UL and have been tested and approved by UL and
CHK’D BY: ____________
according to ASTM E119 for type of construction shown.
APPROVED
C. Fire Rated Construction: Drawings and Specifications herein for fire rated walls are based
ENGINEERING DEPT.
on tested, rated and approved system and materials. Materials and arrangements used
shall be the same manufacture and arrangements as used in tested, rated and approved
system.
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed variation of 3mm in 3000mm from plumb, level and flat (all
OPERATING DEPT. directions); and do not exceed 2mm offset planes and joints between panels, shim panels
to comply with tolerances.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
CERTIFIED A. Submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE the following items for review and approval
prior to commencing WORK:
BY: ___________________
1. Samples of gypsum board and manufacturer’s certification that materials meet or
DATE: _________________
exceed specification requirements.
2. Manufacturer’s instruction for installation of steel framing, gypsum board and

accessories.
09010-02

FOR 343
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers, bundles and packages, fully

identified with manufacturer’s name, brand, type and grade. Protect from weather,
soiling, and damage from handling equipment.
A. Examine substrates and spaces to receive gypsum board partition and conditions where
will be installed and do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected and accepted by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Environmental Conditions: During installation and joint finishing, temperatures within the
building shall be maintained uniformly within the range recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the
building during installation.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.01 MATERIALS

DATE: _________________
A. Steel Framing: Studs and runners shall be C-shape; one (1) mm thick (20 gauge) light
CHK’D BY: ____________
gauge steel with manufacturer’s standard zinc protective coating, depth as shown on the
APPROVED
drawings, and conforming to ASTM C645. Provide steel studs of size indicated with
runners of compatible size for friction fit to studs.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Gypsum Board: Gypsum wallboard shall be 15 mm thick with paper-face surface suitable
to receive decorative finish and with long edges tapered to receive manufacturer’s
standard joint treatment. For fire rated application provide water resistant and “fire code
C” gypsum board (Type "X" requirements), conforming to ASTM C36.
OPERATING DEPT.
C. Blanket (Batt) insulation: Inorganic fibers insulation blankets with foil or kraft Laminated
facing on both sides, thicknesses as shown on the drawings, manufacturer's standard
sizes, drawing a minimum thermal resistance factor ® of 4 per 25mm thickness.
CERTIFIED D. Joint Treatment Materials:
BY: ___________________
1. Joint Tapes: Plain or perforated and shall conform to ASTM C475.
DATE: _________________
2. Joint Compound: Adhesive with or without fillers complying with ASTM C475.
3. Water-Resistant Joint Compound: Water-resistant type for treatment of joints,

fastener heads, and cut edges of water-resistant backing board.
E. Fasteners: Provide Phillip head screws, self-drilling, self-tapping (Type S and S-12) and
shall conform to ASTM C646.
09010-03

FOR 344
494
‫لمشعقي‬
F. Metal Trim Accessories: At external corners provide corner bead with smooth and rigid
steel nose. Where gypsum board abuts or intersects dissimilar construction, provide
square edge semi-finishing casing bead (no joint treatment compound required). Provide
one-piece expansion joints with two (2) smooth and rigid steel noses. Provide end
screeds and miscellaneous trim as required for complete installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install steel framing and accessories in accordance with

manufacturer are printed in instructions and in accordance with ASTM C754.
B. Install metal framing members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with
maximum variation of 3 mm in 3 meters in any direction.
C. Install double studs at door frames.

REVISIONS
D. Coordinate installation of electrical and mechanical WORK will be placed in or behind
DRAWN BY: ___________ partition framing. Allow such items will be installed after framing is complete.
DATE: _________________
3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in direction most practical and economical with
ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Use screws for fastening gypsum board to metal framing.
OPERATING DEPT. D. Treat cut edges and holes of gypsum board with sealant recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces.
CERTIFIED F. Use longest practical lengths in placing corner reinforcements. Place edge trim where
gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
BY: ___________________
G. Tape, fill and sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings and fixings, to produce a
DATE: _________________
surface ready to receive final finishes.
H. Remove and re-do defective WORK.
09010-04

FOR 345
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09030 - CERAMIC WALL AND FLOOR TILES
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of glazed ceramic tile on walls and vitrified ceramic tile on
floors for toilets, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials, labor, tools and equipment required to complete
the WORK.

REVISIONS B. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Unit System
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
DRAWN BY: ___________ D. Section 09010 - Gypsum Board System
DATE: _________________
1.03 REFERENCES
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ANSI A118.1 Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar
ANSI A118.4 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
ANSI A118.6 Ceramic Tile Grouts

OPERATING DEPT.
ANSI A137.1 Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile
B. Tile Council of America (TCA)
CERTIFIED TCA Handbook of Ceramic Tiles Installation
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
A. Conform to ANSI installation specifications as follows:
ANSI A108.1A Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement
Mortar
ANSI A108.4 Ceramic Tile Installed with Water-Resistant Organic Adhesives or

Water Cleanable tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive
ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grout in Tile Work
09030-01

FOR 346
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for review and approval before commencing
WORK:
1. Three (3) full size samples of each pattern and color of ceramic floor and wall tiles
proposed; including trims and special shapes.
2. Submit product data, specifications and instructions for using adhesives and grouts.
3. Mount tile, adhesive and grout on 600mm x 600mm plywood panel, COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE of pattern, color variation and grout joint size variations.
4. Submit maintenance data, including cleaning methods, cleaning solutions

recommended, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes recommended.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.01 TILE MATERIALS

DATE: _________________
A. Vitrified Ceramic Floor Tile: Shall be standard grade; unglazed finish, cushion edge, non-
CHK’D BY: ____________
skid surface and conforming to ANSI A137.1.
APPROVED
B. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: Shall be standard grade, glazed finish, cushion edge and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
conforming to ANSI A137.1.
C. Style, pattern, size, and color shall be as selected by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
D. Internal corners shall be cove and external corners shall be bullnose, except where
OPERATING DEPT. glazed wall tile is flush with finished wall above.
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Premix Mortar (Mortar bed): Use good quality pre-mixed mortar, Follow manufacturer’s
CERTIFIED instruction.
BY: ___________________
B. Latex Portland Cement Mortar (Bond Coat): Shall comply with applicable requirements of
ANSI A118.4.
DATE: _________________
C. Mortar Bed Reinforcement. Metal lath, ASTM C847.
D. Waterproofing/Cleavage Membrane: Any of the following
1. Asphalt Saturated Roofing Felt : ASTM D226

2. Reinforced Asphalt Paper, Duplex : ASTM C171
3. Polyethylene Sheet, 6 mil : ASTM C171
09030-02

FOR 347
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Grouting Materials: Conform to ANSI A118.6.
1. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: Use latex additives in grout compatible with Latex-
Portland Cement Mortar.
2. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: Pre-blended compound composed of Portland

cement and additives formulated for the type of tile installed.
F. Expansion Joint Materials
Sealant : Single Component Polyurethane, ASTM C920

Back-Up Strip : Butyl Rubber
Filler : Mineral Fiber Filler Board
G. Recommended Products: Vetonit Ceramic Tile Fix and Vetonit Grout by SAVETO,
Masterflow 95 by MBT, Conbextra GP by Fosroc or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
REVISIONS
3.01 INSPECTION
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. Examine surfaces to receive ceramic floor and wall tiles, setting beds and accessories
before commencing WORK for the following:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Variation of surfaces to receive tiles shall fall within maximum variations as follows:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Portland Cement Mortar: 3mm in 2400mm for walls and 3mm in 3000mm for floors.
Organic Adhesives: 3mm in 2400mm for walls and 3mm in 1800mm for floors.
2. Do not proceed with tile WORK until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
OPERATING DEPT. 3. Surfaces to receive tiles shall be firm, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, wax and
dust.
4. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical WORK in or

behind tiling shall be installed prior to proceeding with tile WORK.
CERTIFIED
3.02 LAYOUT
BY: ___________________
A. Determine location of movement joints prior to beginning of tile WORK.
DATE: _________________
B. Locate position of plumbing fixtures and accessories before beginning of tile WORK.
C. Minimize cutting of tiles cuts to less than half tile in size and position cut tiles on walls and
floors less conspicuous. Smooth out exposed cut tile edges.
D. Fit tiles carefully against trims, plumbing fixtures, pipes and other accessories.
E. Align wall joints to produce straight uniform grout lines, level and plumb. Align floor joints
to produce straight uniform grout lines parallel with the walls.
09030-03

FOR 348
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.03 SETTING METHODS
A. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile:
1. On concrete Masonry Wall: Comply with applicable requirements of TCA Method

W211, Cement Mortar, Bonded.
2. On Gypsum Wallboard: Comply with applicable requirements of TCA Method W242,

Organic Adhesive
B. Vitrified Ceramic Floor Tile:
1. On Concrete (Slab-on-Grade) Subfloor: Comply with applicable requirements of

TCA Method F112, Cement Mortar, and Bonded.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of TCA Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation.
REVISIONS
B. Premix Mortar, for use over concrete slabs:
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Expansion joints shall be installed, but not over 4800mm on center in both directions.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Apply setting bed and layout tiles following manufacturer’s procedures.
APPROVED
3. Soak glazed wall tile before setting. Determine joint widths by strings, pegs or
ENGINEERING DEPT.
spacers.
4. Bed tile into mortar. Cut through setting bed horizontally or vertically every 425 mm
to 600 mm.
OPERATING DEPT. 5. Grout, clean and prevent too rapid drying. Damp cure for three (3) days.
C. Organic Adhesives, ANSI A136.1, Type 2, for use overall flat or reasonably smooth
nondusting surface of gypsum wallboard:
CERTIFIED 1. Apply underlayment where surfaces need leveling.
BY: ___________________
2. Apply primer sealing coat to backing material or underlayment when recommended
by manufacturer.
DATE: _________________
3. Set tile using float method consisting of spreading adhesive over the backing surface
with a trowel, notched as recommended by the manufacturer and pressing tile into it.
4. Carefully remove adhesive from the face of the tile, using solvents recommended by
the adhesive manufacturer.
5. Grout shall be Latex-Portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.6, and shall be applied
complying with ANSI A108.10.
09030-04

FOR 349
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Cover newly tiled floors with heavy duty, non-staining construction paper, marked in
place.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for a minimum of three (3)
days.
C. Cover newly tiled floors with wood planks for 7 days where foot and wheel traffic is
unavoidable.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean tile surfaces as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting.
B. Remove all grout haze, observing both tile and grout manufacturer’s recommendations as
to use of acid and chemical cleaners.
REVISIONS C. Polish surface of tile WORK with soft cloth.
DRAWN BY: ___________ *** End of Section 09030 ***

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09030-05

FOR 350
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09100 - CARPET TILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing of labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation
of carpet tiles as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ASTM D-418 Method of Testing for Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM D-1335 Method of Testing for Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction
APPROVED
ASTM D-2401 Test Method for Service Change of Appearance of Pile Floor Covering
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Materials
ASTM D-3676 Specification for Rubber Cellular Cushion Used for Carpet or Rug
Underlay
OPERATING DEPT. ASTM D-3936 Specification for Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile
Floor Coverings
ASTM F-655 Specification for Test Carpets and Pads for Vacuum Cleaner Testing
CERTIFIED B. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
BY: ___________________
SAE AMS-3809 Tape, Adhesive, Pressure-Sensitive Double Faced, Carpet Tie Down
DATE: _________________
A. Installer: Engage carpet installer with successful experience in carpet installation similar
in size and type of carpeting WORK required for this PROJECT.
B. Manufacturer’s Representative: Obtain carpeting from one manufacturer only.

Manufacturer, when requested, shall send qualified technical representative to PROJECT
SITE to advise installer regarding proper installation procedures for the type of carpeting
selected.
09100-01

FOR 351
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Flame Spread Rating: Provide carpet material, tested and certified, with flame spread
rating of not greater than 25 per ASTM E84.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items for review and approval before commencing
WORK:
A. Samples
1. Carpet: Three (3) pieces of each type, color and pattern.
2. Tackless Strips and Edge Strips: Three (3) pieces each, 150 mm long.
B. Shop Drawings. Drawings shall include the following:
1. Dimension of carpeted areas
REVISIONS 2. Pattern direction
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3. Seam diagram

DATE: _________________
4. Location of edge strips
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. Manufacturer’s literature indicating installation instructions, including allowable
temperature range and complete maintenance and cleaning instructions.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT. A. Deliver carpeting and accessories in manufacturer’s original, protective packaging.
B. Store carpeting and accessories as recommend by the manufacturer, above ground and
in a dry place.
CERTIFIED 1.07 EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
BY: ___________________
A. Inspect substrate before commencing WORK. Do not proceed with WORK until defects
are corrected. Carefully check dimensions and conditions, and CONTRACTOR shall be
DATE: _________________
responsible for proper fitting of carpet in designed areas.
B. Commencing of WORK shall constitute acceptance of surface and substrate as suitable

for receiving materials and accept full responsibility for quality and final appearance of
finished WORK.
C. Leveling compound used shall be latex base compound, non-shrinking, and shall provide
positive and permanent adhesion to subfloor, non-water soluble, and capable of being
troweled to feather edge, hard and durable upon curing, and shall be compatible with
carpeting and adhesive. Leveling compound shall be the type not requiring priming of
substrate.
09100-02

FOR 352
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Carpeting material shall be in accordance with the following:
Generic Type : Fusion Bonded

Face Fiber : 100% Zeftron (TM) Nylon
Yarn Ct./Ply : 2.65/2 cc
Ends : 12.4 in.
Tufts : 6.7 in.
Tufts Density : 83. sq. in.
Type Tuft :U
Density Factor : 332,940
Yarn Weight : 28 oz/sq. yd
Pile Height : 0.250 in.
Free-Lay Backing : 131.85 oz/sq. yd
Structure : Glass Bag (TM) Vinyl
REVISIONS Total Weight : 160 oz/sq. yd
Total Thickness : 0.345 in.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Size : 18" x 18"
DATE: _________________
LB1 : 90
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. Adhesive tape used shall be double sided adhesive tape, 50 mm width or the type and
APPROVED
make recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. Colors and pattern shall be as selected by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
OPERATING DEPT. 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances
detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow substrate to thoroughly
dry.
CERTIFIED
B. Ensure substrates are level, with a maximum surface variation of 5 mm per 3 meters.
BY: ___________________
C. Ensure substrates are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to
DATE: _________________
acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes, and for leveling.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Layout the carpet tiles for COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE Approval.
B. Check matching of carpet tiles to ensure no visible variation between dye lots.
09100-03

FOR 353
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Layout joints in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the
carpet installation or decrease its life expectancy. Ensure joints are straight, not
overlapped or peaked and free of gaps.
D. Vacuum clean substrate. Lay adhesive tape as recommended by manufacturer to ensure

proper adhesion of carpet tile edges.
E. Do not change joint pattern in any one room or from one room to next where continuous
through a wall opening.
F. Cut and fit carpet tiles neatly around PROJECTions through floor and to walls and other
vertical surfaces.
3.03 CLEANING
Upon completion of the installation, CONTRACTOR shall dispose of properly all waste
and excess materials, all tools and equipment and shall carefully and thoroughly vacuum
clean the entire floor surfaces.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ *** End of Section 09100 ***

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09100-04

FOR 354
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09200 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
Furnishing and installation of suspended acoustical ceiling system as shown on the Drawings,
room finish schedule and as specified herein.
A. Section 16510 - Lighting

B. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm System
1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ASTM A446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Structural (Physical) Quality
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ASTM B20 Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM C423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by Reverberation Room Method
OPERATING DEPT.
ASTM C635 Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels Ceiling
ASTM C636 Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panels
CERTIFIED
ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
BY: ___________________
ASTM E90 Laboratory Measurement and Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
DATE: _________________
Building Partitions
ASTM E119 Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material
09200-01

FOR 355
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items for review and approval before
commencing WORK:
1. Submit three (3) full size samples of each type of acoustical material to illustrate
color and range of appearance.
2. Submit three (3) 300mm long samples of each suspension system member,
moldings and hangers.
B. Shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Layout indication.
2. Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details.
3. Splicing method for main and cross runners.
4. Acoustical unit support at ceiling fixtures.
5. Access door dimensions and locations.
6. Acoustic ceiling tile on gypsum board on metal runners and furring.
REVISIONS
C. Manufacturer’s Literature. Literature indicating manufacturer’s recommendation for
DRAWN BY: ___________ installations of suspension system.
DATE: _________________
D. Certificates
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1. Furnish certification of fire endurance rating and flame spread index by fire rating
organization.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Furnish certification of materials and systems conforming to specification

requirements.
E. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300.

OPERATING DEPT.
A. Installation of acoustical WORK shall not begin until wet WORK, including plastering, is
completely dry. Windows and doors shall be placed and glazed.
CERTIFIED
B. Humidity shall not be more than 75% in area where acoustical materials shall be installed.
BY: ___________________
C. CONTRACTOR shall maintain uniform temperature in the range of 12°C to 30°C prior to
DATE: _________________
and during installation of materials.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL
Furnish spare materials equal to 5% of each type of acoustical material supplied and
suspension system components supplied.
09200-02

FOR 356
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Suspension System
1. Suspension system shall be an exposed one directional metal grid system consisting
of extruded aluminum components in white enamel finish.
2. Main runners shall be 40 mm high screw slot Tee at 610 mm centers. Special
hanger units will be slid into the upper rib of the Tee runners and spaced at 1220
mm center. Tee runners shall be supported with not less than No. 12 gauge
galvanized wire hangers or approved suspension material attached to the structural
roof systems.
3. Wall angles as shown on the Drawings shall be fixed to the wall.
4. Cross bracing aluminum tee shall be fixed on top of main runners and connected at
1220 mm centers to ensure lateral rigidity of suspension system.
REVISIONS
B. Metal Ceiling Panels: Pre-formed, metal ceiling panel with non-woven acoustic fleece for
DRAWN BY: ___________ sound absorption
DATE: _________________
1. Ceiling Panel Properties:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
a. Non-woven acoustic fleece: 0.2 mm.
b. Flammability: Class 1 per ASTM E84.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
c. Unit Size: Nominal 600mm by 600mm.
d. Edge Condition: Square.
e. Acoustic Fleece Color: Gray.
f. Metal Panel Color: White
g. Perforated (2.5mm hole diameter) with 8cm plain border
OPERATING DEPT. h. Thickness: 0.6 mm.
i. Sound Absorption Coefficients: ASTM C423-90a.
Frequencies (Hz) 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 NRC

6mm thick: 0.37 0.59 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.09 0.55
CERTIFIED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine areas scheduled to receive suspended acoustical units for unevenness,

irregularities and dampness affecting quality and execution of WORK.
B. Mark access provisions as to size and location before beginning of installations.
C. Do not install acoustical ceilings over WORK, including mechanical and electrical
requiring inspection, until inspections are made and WORK is certified complete.
09200-03

FOR 357
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical ceiling system in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and

ASTM C636 to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels and free from warped,
soiled, or damaged grid of lay-in panels.
B. Installed ceiling system shall be capable of supporting superimposed loads, with

maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of 4mm
in 3 meters.
C. Install after major above-ceiling WORK is completed. Coordinate location of hangers with
other WORK. Ensure layout of hangers and carrying channels are located to
accommodate fittings and units of equipment will be placed after installation of ceiling grid
system.
D. Where ducts and other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels, as required, to span the
required distance.
REVISIONS E. Center ceiling tiles on room axis leaving equal border pieces.
DRAWN BY: ___________ F. Do not install fixtures to eccentrically load main runners and cross runners. Where fixture
DATE: _________________
installation will produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars.
CHK’D BY: ____________
G. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum
APPROVED
lengths, straight, true to line and level, miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions
with other ceiling finishes. Where bullnose concrete block corners occur, provide
ENGINEERING DEPT.
preformed closer to match edge molding.
H. Fit acoustic lay-in tiles in place, free from damaged edges and other defects detrimental
to appearance and function.
OPERATING DEPT. I. Install lay-in tiles level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp, and dents.
J. Adjust sags and twists developed in the ceiling system and replace damaged and faulty
materials.
CERTIFIED *** End of Section 09200 ***
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09200-04

FOR 358
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09546 LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Linear Metal Ceiling. Linear metal ceiling strips backed with non-woven acoustic fleece.
1.02 REFERENCES:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C635 : Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings.
REVISIONS ASTM C423 : Standard Specification for Testing Noise Reduction Coefficient.
ASTM E84 : Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristic of

DRAWN BY: ___________
Building Materials.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ 1.03 SUBMITTALS
APPROVED A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data including fire-resistive
ENGINEERING DEPT. characteristics, finishes, details of installation, and the following:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Certified test reports indicating compliance with Performance Requirements

specified herein.
OPERATING DEPT.
B. Samples: 2 full size sets of Samples.
C. Closeout Submittals:
CERTIFIED
1. Operating and Maintenance Manual, including cleaning and maintenance
instructions.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
2. Extra Material for Owner’s stock.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain panel units for entire Project from a single
manufacturer.
09546-01

FOR 359
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than Closeout Submittals: At least 3
years experience in manufacturing of products similar in complexity to those required for
this Project.
C. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 2 years experience in installation of
products similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific
requirements indicated.
1. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects.
A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brands,
names, and production lot numbers clearly marked on these containers.
B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Store products in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight.
REVISIONS 2. Protect from the elements and from damage.
DRAWN BY: ___________

DATE: _________________
A. Environmental Requirements within building:
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. Ceiling strips do not require special environmental conditions.

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. 2. Systems may be installed at any stage of construction.
B. System can be installed in cold storage rooms and rooms with high humidity.
1.07 SCHEDULING
OPERATING DEPT.
When applicable, do not install acoustical ceilings until work to be performed in plenum
space above is completed, tested, and approved.
1.08 WARRANTY
CERTIFIED
Provide manufacturer's written warranty.
BY: ___________________
1.09 MAINTENANCE
DATE: _________________
A. Extra Materials for Owner's Stock: Deliver not less than 5 percent of each type, color,
and pattern of material, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation.
1. Furnish Extra Materials from same production run to verify run for color.
2. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate

labels.
09546-02

FOR 360
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Metal Ceiling Strips: Pre-formed, metal ceiling strips with non-woven acoustic fleece for
sound absorption
1. Ceiling Strips Properties:
a. Non-woven acoustic fleece: 0.2 mm.

b. Flammability: Class 1 per ASTM E84.
c. Unit Size: 150mm width.
d. Edge Condition: Square.
e. Acoustic Fleece Color: Gray.
f. Metal Panel Color: White
g. Perforated with1.6 mm hole diameter along length.
h. Thickness: 0.6 mm.
i. Sound Absorption Coefficients: ASTM C423-90a.
REVISIONS
Frequencies (Hz) 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 NRC
6mm thick: 0.37 0.59 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.09 0.55
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
APPROVED Suspension System: Refer to Suspended Acoustical Ceiling System.

ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09546-03

FOR 361
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09613 - MARBLE
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of marble as shown in the drawings.
1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS A. ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. ASTM C150 Portland Cement

DATE: _________________
C. ASTM C206 Finishing Hydrated Lime
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
D. ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.04 SUBMITTAL
A. CONTRACTOR shall to the COMPANY Representative, prior to purchase, items review

and approval prior to installation. Such submittal shall include but not limited to the
following:
OPERATING DEPT.
1. Samples for approval of finish, color and marking. Samples shall be approximately
300mm x 300mm and shall match the existing marble.

CERTIFIED
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the quality of all material proposed to be
BY: ___________________
used in the Work and shall proposed a program and method for obtaining and testing,
such as to achieve the specified quality, in accordance with SECTION 01400, "QUALITY
DATE: _________________
CONTROL".
B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a qualified representative on-site during all Marble
Flooring operations, in accordance with SECTION 01400, "QUALITY CONTROL".
09613-01

FOR 362
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be, when available, from an
in-Kingdom Manufacturer. All goods and products must be approved by COMPANY
Representative.
2.02 STORAGE
Store materials at site, clear of ground, and protect with non-staining materials.
2.03 STONE MATERIALS
Marble shall be 30 mm thick, (unless otherwise indicated) polished finish on exposed

surface. Panels shall be selected to avoid contracts in color markings in adjoining panels.
Exposed surfaces shall be in plane with straight arrises. Round exposed edges slightly to
prevent spalling. Dress beds and joints at right angles to faces. Marble shall be free of
REVISIONS defects which would impair strength durability or appearance. Texture and color shall be
within range of variation established by approved samples.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2.04 MORTAR
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Aggregate for mortar shall conform to the requirements as specified in SECTION: 04100
APPROVED
Mortar and Grout.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Water used in mortar shall conform to the requirements as specified in SECTION: 03300
Cast in Place Concrete Reinforce Steel and Formwork.
C. Lime for mortar shall conform to the requirements as specified in SECTION: 04100,
Mortar and Grout.
OPERATING DEPT.
D. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements as specified in SECTION: 03300 Cast
In Place Concrete Reinforce Steel and Formwork.
E. Non-staining cement shall conform to Fed. Spec. SS-C 181e, minimum 0.03% soluble
CERTIFIED alkali content.
BY: ___________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
DATE: _________________
3.01 GENERAL
Perform necessary cutting, drilling and fitting of marble to accommodate items described
in this and other sections as indicated on approved shop drawings.
09613-02

FOR 363
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. For floors and walls.
1. Clean concrete slab and cover with a thin bed of fine, dry sand.
2. Install on underbed of one part Portland cement, three parts sand and minimum of
water for workability. Tamp and screed underbed to required level.
3. Set Marble in place, with 1.5mm joints and tamp until firmly bedded at proper
finished level.
4. Sport and set base in Portland cement mortar with full buttered joints. Joints shall not
exceed 1 mm thick, cut flush. External angles shall be butt jointed. Set base strips in
longest practical pieces.
5. Allow floor to cure for 24 hours, then grout joints with water and neat non-staining
cement. Remove excess grout and allow floor to set for at least 6 days before final
cleaning and machine surfacing.
REVISIONS
B. For countertops.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Clean surface and check level of counter support.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Set Marble in place, with 1.5mm joints and level at proper counter height.
APPROVED
3. Anchor marble firmly with metal brackets, support and adhesives.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4. Polish marble edges to finish.
3.03 CLEANING
OPERATING DEPT.
After marble flooring is complete clean with stiff fibre brushes, water mild soap. Rinse all
surfaces with soft cloth or mechanical polisher.
3.04 PROTECTION
CERTIFIED
A. Cover all floors with heavy-duty, non-staining construction paper, masked in place, just
BY: ___________________
before final acceptance of marble floor remove paper and clean surface.
DATE: _________________
B. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using newly laid marble floor at least 7 days. Where
use of newly laid floors in unavoidable use shall be permitted 3 days after installation,
only if a minimum of 25mm thick X 550 mm wide flat boards are placed in walkways and
wheelways.
09613-03

FOR 364
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of vinyl floor tiles and wall base including accessories as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
A. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
B. ASTM F1303 Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing
CHK’D BY: ____________
1.04 SUBMITTAL
APPROVED
A. Submit manufacturer’s specification and installation instruction prior to purchase for
ENGINEERING DEPT.
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s review and approval prior.
B. Submit samples and seaming plan.
C. Submit cleaning and maintenance data to include maintenance procedures,

OPERATING DEPT. recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping
and rewaxing.
CERTIFIED 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
BY: ___________________
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve
temperature stability.
DATE: _________________
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by the adhesive manufacturer three days prior to,
during and 24 hours after installation of materials.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide 2% of vinyl floor tiles and accessories for maintenance purposes.
09650-01

FOR 365
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Tile and Vinyl Wall Base
1. Pure vinyl sheet and abrasive grains of aluminum oxide.
2. Chemical resistant to acids, alkalis and solvents.
3. Impact resistant, load limit of 0.86 MPa (125 psi).
4. Size: 300mm x 300mm x 3mm (12" x 12" x 1/8")
5. Vinyl Wall Base: Shall be standard top-set, vinyl complying with FS-SS-W-40, Type
II with preformed internal and external corner pieces. Shall be 100 mm high and 3
mm thick.
B. Accessories
REVISIONS
1. Subfloor filler shall be white premix latex or as recommended by the tile
DRAWN BY: ___________ manufacturer.
DATE: _________________
2. Primers and adhesives shall be waterproof or as recommended by the tile
CHK’D BY: ____________
manufacturer.
APPROVED
3. Metal edge strips and recommended by the tile manufacturer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4. Sealer and wax as recommended by the tile manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
OPERATING DEPT.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencement of WORK, verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum
allowable variation of 3mm in 3 meters and are ready to receive WORK.
CERTIFIED
B. Verify concrete surfaces are dry to a maximum moisture content of 6% and exhibit
BY: ___________________
negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
DATE: _________________
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove substrate ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, and joints with substrate
filler.
B. Apply, trowel and float filler to leave a smooth, flat and hard surface.
C. Vacuum clean substrate. Apply primer to substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install vinyl tile in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and recommendation
where shown on room finish schedule.
09650-02

FOR 366
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
C. Set tiles in place; press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Install tiles to square grid pattern with all joints aligned.
E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges and where tiles terminate.
F. Scribe tiles to walls, columns, floor outlets and other fix appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.04 PROTECTION
Prohibit traffic on installed tile finish for at least 48 hours after installation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, walls and other affected surfaces without damage.
REVISIONS
B. Clean, seal and wax floor finish in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09650-03

FOR 367
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Furnishing of labor, materials, tools, equipment and appliances required in surface

preparation, priming, painting, staining and applying finishes to surfaces scheduled in this
section and as shown on the drawings.
B. WORK shall mean coating system materials to include, but not limited to, primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers.
1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
REVISIONS A. The following categories of WORK are not included as part of the field-applied finish
WORK, or are included in other sections of these specifications.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Shop Priming: Fabricated components such as prefinished casework, and shop-
fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2. Prefinished Items: Metal toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, casework, finished
mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
distribution cabinets, and equipment.
3. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on

surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible
areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and duct shafts.
OPERATING DEPT.
4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel,
chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish
painting, unless otherwise indicated.
CERTIFIED 5. Labels: Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters'
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance
BY: ___________________
rating, name or nomenclature plates.
DATE: _________________
A. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories

B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors
C. Section 16160 - Cabinets/Enclosures
D. Section 16190 - Supports and Fasteners
E. Section 16470 - Panel boards
09900-01

FOR 368
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.04 REFERENCES
A. SES-H-001 COMPANY Painting Standard

B. 78-SMSS-XX COMPANY Paint Specifications
C. SES-H-001.01 COMPANY Paint Color Codes and Standards
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer and Color Chips. Within 45 days after Contract is in force, submit the name
of the proposed paint manufacturer, together with a complete line of color chips, to
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and approval prior to preceding the WORK.
B. Samples; Painting. Submit samples to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and

approval of color and texture. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Provide a listing of the material and application for each
coat of each finish sample.
1. Submit samples, for review and approval, on a 12 x 12 in. (305 x 305 mm)
hardboard indicating each color and material, with texture to simulate actual
REVISIONS conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until acceptable sheen, colors and
texture is achieved.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2. For wood surfaces, submit 4 x 8 in. (102 x 203 mm) samples of each natural and
stained wood finish as required. Label and identify each as to location and
CHK’D BY: ____________
application.
APPROVED
3. For concrete and masonry surfaces, submit 4 in. (102 mm) square samples of
ENGINEERING DEPT.
masonry for each type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish coat.
4. For other interior building components duplicate painted finishes of the prepared
samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of surface as directed, provide full-coat
finish samples until required sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished
OPERATING DEPT. lighting conditions for review of in-place WORK.
C. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) of paints and thinners shall be used.

CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
A. Deliver materials to the WORK SITE in original, new and sealed containers bearing
DATE: _________________
manufacturer’s name and label, and the following information:
Name or Title of Material

Manufacturer’s Name
Manufacturer’s Stock Number
Contents by Volume
Thinning Instructions
Application Instructions
Color Name and Number
Date of Manufacture
09900-02

FOR 369
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Assign a room in the building for the exclusive use of storing and mixing of paint
materials. Before moving paint materials into this area, furnish and lay a suitable
protective covering over the entire floor area of the paint storage room. When use of the
space is no longer needed, clean the room thoroughly so that the final finishes reflect no
evidence of the paint storage.
C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperatures of 7°C and a maximum of 32°C,
in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Provide precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
E. Provide adequate portable fire extinguishers and "NO SMOKING" signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINTING
A. Epoxy Coating Systems:

REVISIONS
1. Comply with 78-SMSS-1 and 78-SMSS-18.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2. Provide vehicle resins for finish coats of either amine-cured or polyamine-cured.
Apply to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 4 mils per coat, color and gloss
CHK’D BY: ____________
as approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
APPROVED
B. Primers, Sealers and Undercoats: The following primers, sealers and undercoats are
ENGINEERING DEPT.
specified, to Material Standard Specifications, for establishing minimum quality. Provide
primers, sealers and undercoats as recommended by finish paint manufacturer to meet or
exceed minimum requirements:
1. Metal (Exterior and Interior) Surfaces: Comply with the following for application over
OPERATING DEPT. hand-cleaned or blast-cleaned steel surfaces, aluminum surfaces and galvanized
steel surfaces shall be finish painted.
78-SMSS-4 Primer: Structural Metal; Zinc Chromate

78-SMSS-15 Lacquer: Spraying Sanding Sealer (Sealer for Decorative Use)
CERTIFIED
2. Concrete, Plaster and Masonry Surfaces: Comply with the following for application
BY: ___________________
on surfaces shall be finish painted:
DATE: _________________
78-SMSS-10 Primer: Sealer; Porous Surfaces
78-SMSS-11 Undercoater for Enamels
3. Gypsum Wallboard and Wood Surfaces: Comply with the following for application
78-SMSS-12 Paint: Interior; Flat; Emulsion, White and Colors

78-SMSS-15 Lacquer: Spraying, Sanding Sealer
09900-03

FOR 370
494
‫لمشعقي‬
4. Aluminum and Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Comply with the following for application
78-SMSS-4 Primer: Structural Metal; Zinc Chromate
C. Finish Paint Materials: The following finish paints are specified, to Material Standard
Specifications, for establishing minimum quality. Provide finish paints, as recommended
by paint manufacturer, to meet or exceed minimum requirements and shall be compatible
with primers, sealers and undercoating materials.
1. Metal (Interior) Surfaces: Comply with the following:
78-SMSS-2 Enamel: Exterior; High Gloss
2. Metal (Exterior) Surfaces: Comply with the following:
78-SMSS-1 Catalytically Cured Epoxy and Epoxy-Phenolic Coatings for

Atmospheric Service
REVISIONS 78-SMSS-2 Enamel: Exterior; High Gloss
DRAWN BY: ___________ 78-SMSS-8 Aluminum Pigmented Paint

DATE: _________________
3. Concrete and Plaster Surfaces: Comply with the following:
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4. Gypsum Wallboard and Wood Surfaces: Comply with the following:

OPERATING DEPT.
78-SMSS-3 Varnish: Spar; Exterior
CERTIFIED 78-SMSS-16 Lacquer: Spraying Clear and Pigmented
BY: ___________________
5. Fire Retardant Surfaces: Comply with the following:
DATE: _________________
78-SMSS-13 Paint: Chlorinated Rubber Systems
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR shall examine areas and conditions where painting WORK shall be
applied. Conditions detrimental to application of WORK shall be corrected before
commencing.
09900-04

FOR 371
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Do not apply paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, and
conditions detrimental to formation of durable paint film.
3.02 FLOATING AND TAPING GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum wallboard shall be taped and floated.
B. Joints in fire-rated drywall partitions such as joints between two pieces of gypsum board
or joints between gypsum board and other materials including pipes and concrete shall
be taped and floated.
C. V-grooves formed by abutting edges of gypsum wallboard shall be prefilled with, joint
compound-full applied with flexible joint finishing knife. The "V" shall be filled flush and
excess compound above groove shall be wiped off, leaving a level, flat joint, clear to
prefill, to receive taping. Prefill coat shall have hardened prior to next application.
D. Apply reinforcing tape using joint compound taping with suitable applicator for applying
compound in thin uniform layer over the joint. Taping coat shall harden fully.
REVISIONS
E. Apply 90 joint compound fill coats to minimum height, no more than necessary to fill the
DRAWN BY: ___________ joint flush with the board. This coat shall be allowed to harden. Where drying-tape
DATE: _________________
compound is used, it shall be fully dry before finish coat is applied.
CHK’D BY: ____________
F. Apply joint compound-Topping, to minimum crown, extending beyond the fill-coat to
APPROVED
feathered edge. Imperfections, such as, nail holes, dents, tape taped joints shall be filled
and feather edged over an area large enough to completely invisible in finished stage.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Surface shall be thoroughly sanded with fine grade sandpaper so that joint is flush with
gypsum board surface.
G. Gypsum wallboard shall be painted as specified herein.
OPERATING DEPT. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General
1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in compliance with the paint

CERTIFIED manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein.
BY: ___________________
2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting
fixtures and similar items not to be finish-painted; or provide surface-applied
DATE: _________________
protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. After completion of
painting, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove

oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so
that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted
surfaces.
09900-05

FOR 372
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Cementitious Materials
1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete masonry unit, and cement

plaster by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and by roughening
as required to remove glaze.
2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing

appropriate test. Where surfaces are found to contain alkaline to cause blistering
and burning of finish paint, this shall be corrected before application of paint. Do not
paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds 12% or as permitted in the
manufacturer’s printed directions.
C. Wood
1. Clean wood surfaces dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply thin
coat of white shellac or other recommended approved sealer, before application of
the priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with
putty or plastic wood-filler, sandpaper smooth when dried.
REVISIONS
2. Prime, stain, and seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery to the SITE.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including
DATE: _________________
cabinets, counters, cases, paneling, etc.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for back priming.
APPROVED
4. Back prime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster and other wet wall
ENGINEERING DEPT.
construction occurs on backside.
5. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with heavy coat of varnish
or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to SITE.
OPERATING DEPT. D. Ferrous Metals
1. Clean ferrous surfaces not galvanized and shop coated of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill
scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
CERTIFIED 2. Touch up shop-applied coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other
sections of these specifications. Clean and touch up with the same type shop primer.
BY: ___________________
3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free from oil and surface contaminants with acceptable
DATE: _________________
nonpetroleum based solvent.
3.04 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in
storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
09900-06

FOR 373
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and stir as
required during application of paint materials. Do not stir film formed on surface into the
material. Remove film and where necessary, stain material before using.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. General
1. Apply water-base paints when surface temperature and surrounding air temperature
is between 50°F (10°C) and 90°F (32.2°C), unless permitted by the paint
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
2. Apply solvent-thinned paints when surface temperature and surrounding air

temperature is between 45°F (7.2°C) and 95°F (35°C), unless permitted by the paint
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3. Do not apply paint in rain, sandstorm, fog, mist, when relative humidity exceeds
85%, and damp and wet surfaces.
REVISIONS
4. Painting will be continued during inclement weather, only where areas and surfaces
DRAWN BY: ___________ to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits permitted by the
DATE: _________________
paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
CHK’D BY: ____________
5. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Use applicators and
APPROVED
techniques suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
6. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains and other conditions shown through
the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
Ensure surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, weld, and exposed fasteners
receive a dry film thickness equivalent to flat surfaces.
OPERATING DEPT. 7. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as exposed
surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat before
final installation of equipment.
8. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with flat,
CERTIFIED nonspecular black paint.
BY: ___________________
9. Paint backsides of access panels, removable covers, and hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
DATE: _________________
10. Finish doors on top, bottoms and side edges the same as faces, unless otherwise
indicated.
11. Sand lightly between succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
12. Omit first coat (primer) on shop-primed and touch-up painted metal surfaces, unless
required.
13. Insides of drawers shall be applied with one coat of spar varnish, satin finish.
09900-07

FOR 374
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Scheduled Painting
1. Apply first-coat material to surfaces cleaned, pretreated and prepared for painting
immediately after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat until paint has dried firm, does not deform and feel sticky under moderate
thumb pressure and application succeeding coat do not cause lifting and loss of
adhesion of undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness. Apply paint according to manufacturer’s recommended

spreading rate to establish total dry film thickness as indicated. Where not indicated, as
recommended by paint manufacturer.
D. Prime Coats:
1. Apply prime coat to materials to be painted and finished and not been prime coated
by others.
REVISIONS
2. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots and unsealed
DRAWN BY: ___________ areas in first coat to ensure finish coat with no burn-through and other defects due to
DATE: _________________
insufficient sealing.
CHK’D BY: ____________
E. Textured Finish. Roll and redistribute paint to even and fine texture. Leave no evidence
APPROVED
of rolling such as lamps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, and other surface
imperfections.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes. Completely cover to provide opaque and uniform finish,
color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness and other surfaces imperfections shall not be acceptable.
OPERATING DEPT. G. Transparent (Clear) Finishes. Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final
coats, unless otherwise indicated.
CERTIFIED H. Completed WORK. Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Finished
WORK shall be uniform, of approved color, smooth and free from runs, sags, defective
BY: ___________________
brushing and clogging. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and
clean, without overlapping. Remove, refinish and repaint WORK not complying with
DATE: _________________
3.06 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Cleanup. During the progress of WORK, remove from WORK SITE discarded paint
materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each WORK day. Upon completion of
painting WORK, clean paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and
scraping, using care not to scratch and damage finished surfaces.
09900-08

FOR 375
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Protection
1. Protect WORK of other trades against damage by painting and finishing WORK.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
2. Provide "Wet Paint" signs, as required, to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their WORK
after completion of painting operation.
3. At completion of WORK of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged and

defected painted surfaces.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
09900-09

FOR 376
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10155 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
Furnishing and installation of floor and wall mounted phenolic core toilet, including
hardware, fittings and accessories as shown on the drawings and as specifed herein.
A. Section 09030 – Ceramic Wall and Floor Tiles

B. Section 15440 – Plumbing Fixtures
C. Section 10800 – Toilet Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCES
REVISIONS
A. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
DRAWN BY: ___________ Building Materials
DATE: _________________
B. ASTM A480 Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and
CHK’D BY: ____________
Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
APPROVED
C. ASTM A666 Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Flat Bar
A. Panels, hardware, fittings and accessories shall be stored at the SITE in protected
OPERATING DEPT. location. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing continuous protection during
delivery, handling and after installation.
1.05 WARRANTY
CERTIFIED A. WORK shall be warranted for a period of not less than two (2) years against defects and
workmanship commencing after final acceptance of installation.
BY: ___________________
1.06 SUBMITTAL
DATE: _________________
A. Submit the following for review and approval by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE:
1. Shop drawings indicating panel sizes, layout, details and required supports, static
and dynamic loads, adjacent construction and finish trims, and stacking size.
2. Product data indicating partition, fittings, hardware and accessories, colors and
finishes.
3. Submit samples including surface finish, quality, colors and texture for selection.
10155- 01

FOR 377
494
‫لمشعقي‬
4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions indicating procedures, location of installation

conditions that require special attention, and installation sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Panels, Pilasters, and Doors
1. Panels, pilasters and doors shall be fabricated of multiple layers of phenolic resin
impregnated kraft papers compressed under heat and pressure and phenolic
component is decoratively faced as integral part of the core.
2. Doors shall be fabricated of phenolic core to correct dimensions producing door unit
of not less than 20mm thick. Partition panels units shall be 12mm thick. Pilasters,
panels and door units shall be pre-pierced for application of fittings and hardware.
REVISIONS B. Fittings
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Mounting brackets shall be formed from 2mm thick, type 304 stainless steel per
DATE: _________________
ASTM A66, no. 4 finish, per ASTM A480, and adjustable to keep panels clear from
walls. Pilaster shoe and cover bases shall be 75mm high, no. 304 stainless steel,
CHK’D BY: ____________
ASTM A666.
APPROVED
C. Hardware
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Door panels shall be equipped with surface mounted hinge set. Hinge sets shall
consist of 2mm thick stainless steel, no. 4 finish, hinge brackets.
2. Slide latch, combination door strike and keeper, door bumper, and coat hooks shall
OPERATING DEPT. be type 304 stainless steel, no. 4 finish per ASTM A480. Hardware except coat hook
shall be through bolted. One-way type theft proof screws and fasteners shall be
provided for all hardware. Latches shall be surface mounted and made from 3mm
thick stainless steel.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
3.01 EXAMINATION
DATE: _________________
A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrates and conditions where partitions shall be
installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and accepted by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Verify floor flatness and wall plumbness of 3mm in 3.00 meters and shall be non-
cumulative.
C. Location Measurements: Take actual location measurements prior to preparation of shop

drawings.
10155- 02

FOR 378
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Partitions shall be installed by experienced installer in accordance with the

manufacturer’s printed instructions, unless otherwise acceptable to the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb and level. Maintain spacing between wall and
panels, and between panels and pilasters.
C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with theft-resistant one-way thru bolt screws.
Equip each door with hinges, slide latch, coat hook and bumper.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust operating parts to work easily, smoothly and correctly. Adjust and align hardware
to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 5mm.
REVISIONS B. Adjust hinges to position doors in full position when unlatched.
DRAWN BY: ___________ C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line and plane.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
10155- 03

FOR 379
494
‫لمشعقي‬
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10522 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Fire Extinguishers
B. Accessories
1.02 RELATED SECTION
Section 09900 – Painting: Field paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. FM Factory Mutual Approval Guide
REVISIONS B. SES-H-001.01 Paint Color Codes and Standards

(Rev. 3)
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
C. 90-SMSS-3 Portable Fire Extinguishers
(Rev. 1)
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
D. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
E. UL 711 Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish.

OPERATING DEPT.
B. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements
of fire extinguishers.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
A. Provide units conforming to UL 711.
DATE: _________________
B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL or FM label or marking.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
Extinguishers shall conform to 90-SMSS-3 requirements.

10522-01

FOR 380
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. PFE-2: Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers, multi-purpose, in accordance with the applicable
requirements of 90-TMSS-3. UL Rating / Capacity: 20A; 80 B:C / 9 kgs.
B. PFE-3: Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers, in accordance with the applicable

requirements of 90-TMSS-3. UL Rating / Capacity: 10 B:C / 9 kgs.
C. Finishes: Provide colors and finishes of materials for portable fire extinguishers as
indicated, or where not indicated, as selected by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE from
manufacturer’s standards.
1.02 ACCESSORIES
Extinguisher wall mounting hooks or brackets.
REVISIONS
3.01 INSTALLATION
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
DATE: _________________
B. Secure rigidly in place.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
10522-02
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

FOR 381
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
Furnishing and installation of toilet room accessories as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
A. Section 09000 - Portland cement Plaster

C. Section 09030 - Ceramic Floor and Wall Tiles
D. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures
REVISIONS 1.03 SUBMITTALS
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE the following items for
DATE: _________________
review and approval before commencing WORK on the relevant items:
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. One sample of each accessory proposed for use accompanied by the
APPROVED
manufacturer’s descriptive data indicating materials of construction, fasteners
proposed for each type of wall and mounting instructions.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Certification from the manufacturer stating that accessories delivered to WORK SITE
are in conformance with requirements of this Section.

OPERATING DEPT.
Deliver and handle toilet accessories protected and prevented from being damage; store in
secure place. Accessories shall be in original packaging with seals unbroken and shall bear
CERTIFIED the name of manufacturer and product. Damaged and unsuitable items shall be immediately
removed from the WORK SITE.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER WITH WASTE RECEPTACLE
A. Paper towel dispenser shall be roll type; wall mounted steel, white enamel and crank
operated with crank on right side. Fort Howard Paper, universal roll type, Mark II Stock
No. 562 or equal.
10800-01

FOR 382
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Waste receptacle shall be surface mounted, Bobrick Model No. B-279 or equal, for each
roll type paper towel dispenser, 355mm (14") wide, 457mm (18") high, and 152mm (6")
deep.
2.02 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER
Toilet tissue dispenser shall be controlled single-roll toilet tissue holder, as manufactured
by Bobrick, Model No. B-2730 or equal, in each toilet. Paper holder shall be aluminum
casting with satin finish, holding a molded and extruded plastic spindle equipped with a
retractable pin and concealed pocking mechanism. Holder shall accommodate all
standard tissue rolls and have controlled delivery operation. Furnish screws or other
devices for firmly fastening the holder to metal partitions or to ceramic wall files.
2.03 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER
Liquid soap dispenser shall be surface (wall) mounted, 20 gauge stainless steel body,
206mm (8-1/2") high, 121mm (4-3/4") wide, locked filler cap, with level indicator window.
Bobrick, Model No. B-11 or approved equal.
REVISIONS 2.04 CABINET, FIRST AID MEDICINE
DRAWN BY: ___________ First aid medicine cabinet shall be surface (wall) mounted type, all metal construction,
DATE: _________________
baked white enamel finish, with right or left hand mounting, flush appearance door
suitable for painting, complete with two glass shelves, nominal size 152 mm (6") x 406
CHK’D BY: ____________
mm (16") x 559 mm (22"), Perma Built Industries, Inc., Model P-1021-WE-0 or equal.
APPROVED
2.05 MIRROR
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Mirror shall be 750mm x 600mm mirror with stainless steel frame and without shelf above
each standard lavatory. Bobrick B-290, Bradley 700 or equal. Mirror shall have type 304
heavy stainless steel channel frame with satin finish, one-piece roll formed construction.
Mirror shall be made of 6mm (1/4") polished plate glass, silvered and electrolytically
OPERATING DEPT. copper plated, protected on back with shock-absorbing waterproof polystyrene backing.
2.06 GHUTRA HANGER (COAT HOOK)
Ghutra hanger shall be heavy-duty coat hook, surface (wall) mounted, brass casting with
CERTIFIED satin nickel finish, as manufactured by Bobrick, Model B-2116 or approved equal.
BY: ___________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
DATE: _________________
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessories only to finish surfaces and after contiguous WORK has been
completed.
B. Install toilet accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Accessories shall be of matching design and finish. Where accessories vary, they shall
be referred to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for approval before installation.
10800-02

FOR 383
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 CLEANING
Protect toilet accessories from damage after installation. Before acceptance by

COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, clean and restore finishes, replace any defective parts
or units. Remove packing materials and construction debris and leave area broom clean.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
10800-03

FOR 384
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Provide all tools, labor, materials and equipment for the installation of hangers and
supports for pipes, ductwork and equipment as per the Contract Drawings.
2. Incorporate in the design of pipe hangers and supports the manufacturer’s
recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production components, parts and
assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s pipe hanger catalog.
3. Establish maximum load ratings with consideration for allowable stresses prescribed by
ASME B31.1.
4. Utilize hangers and supports to support systems under all conditions of operation, allow
free expansion and contraction and to prevent excessive stresses from being introduced
into pipe work or connected equipment.
REVISIONS
A. Plumbing Piping, Vent
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Conform to ASME B31.9
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable
CHK’D BY: ____________
swivel, split ring or clevis type.
APPROVED
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 75 mm and smaller: Cast iron hooks.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
OPERATING DEPT. B. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring or
clevis type.
CERTIFIED 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 50 to 100mm: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
BY: ___________________
5. Multiple or Clevis Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 75 mm: Cast iron hook.
DATE: _________________
7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp.
8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
10. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
15140-01

FOR 385
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.02 ACCESSORIES
Hanger Rods:
1. Mild steel threaded both ends or continuous threaded.

2. Safe loads for threaded hanger rods shall be based on the root area of the threads and
allowable stress of the material.
3. In no case shall hanger rods less than 9.5 mm ( 3/8 in.) diameter be used for support of pipe
NPS 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller or less than 12.5 mm (½ in.) diameter rod for supporting
pipe NPS 12.5 mm (½ in.) and larger. See Table 121.7.2(A) of ASME B31.1 for carbon
steel rods.
4. Pipe, straps or bars of strength and effective area equal to the equivalent hanger rod
may be used instead of hanger rods.
5. Hanger rods, straps, etc., shall be designed to permit the free movement of piping caused by
thermal expansion and contraction.
6. Welded link chain of 5 mm (3/16 in.) or larger diameter stock or equivalent area, may be used
for pipe hangers with a design stress of 62 MPa (9000 psi) maximum.
7. Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A48M may be used for bases,rollers, anchors and parts
of supports where the loading will be mainly compression. Cast iron parts shall not be used
REVISIONS
in tension.
8. Malleable iron castings in accordance with ASTM A47M may be used for pipe clamps, beam
DRAWN BY: ___________ clamps, hanger flanges, clips, bases, swivel rings and parts of pipe supports, but their use
DATE: _________________ shall be limited to temperatures not in excess of 230°C (446°F). This material is not
CHK’D BY: ____________ recommended for services where impact loads are anticipated.
9. Brackets shall be designed to withstand forces and moments induced by sliding friction in
APPROVED addition to other loads.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.03 INSERTS
A. Furnish and set inserts in concrete forms.
B. Provide reinforcing rods for pipe sizes over 75 mm (3 in.) or equivalent.

OPERATING DEPT.
C. Concrete inserts shall be as follows:
1. Black malleable iron universal type for threaded connections with lateral adjustment, for
pipe sizes up to 200 mm (8 in.).
CERTIFIED
2. For pipes 200 mm (8 in.) and over or equivalent group of pipes

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
1.04 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 0.5mm thick (26 gage) galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counter flashing: 0.8 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized steel.
C. Lead Flashing:
1. Waterproofing: 24.5 kg/sq. m sheet lead

2. Soundproofing: 5 kg/sq m (1 lb/sq ft) sheet lead.
C. Caps: Steel, 0.8 mm (22 gage) minimum; 1.5 mm (16 gage) at fire resistant elements.
15140-02

FOR 386
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.05 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non Fire Rated Floors: 1.2 mm thick (18 gage) galvanized
steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non Fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 1.2 mm thick (18 gage) galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire
Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals.
D. Stuffing or Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non combustible.
E. Caulk: Acrylic sealant of fire rated type.
1.06 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 1.2mm (18 gage) galvanized steel shell and base, mitered
75mm cant, variable step to match root insulation, 40mm thick insulation, factory
installed wood nailer.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15140-03

FOR 387
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15170 - MOTORS
PART 1 PRODUCTS
1.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's
standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Electrical Service: As per Equipment Schedule.
C. Type:
1. Open drip-proof except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 50 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation
class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.
D. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, rpm, full load
REVISIONS amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service
factor, power factor, efficiency.
DRAWN BY: ___________ E. Wiring Terminations:
DATE: _________________
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and
CHK’D BY: ____________
materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70,
threaded for conduit.
APPROVED 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide
ENGINEERING DEPT.
threaded conduit connection in end frame.
1.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
OPERATING DEPT.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA
Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class F (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service
CERTIFIED Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
1.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature
rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings,
automatic reset overload protector.
1.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
15170-01

FOR 388
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.

C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run
motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating
speeds.
F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service
Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class F (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service
Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 APPLICATION
A. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans: Split phase type.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans: Permanent split capacitor type.
C. Single phase motors for fans: Capacitor start type.
REVISIONS D. Single phase motors for fans: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.
E. Motors located in exterior locations: Totally enclosed type.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15170-02

FOR 389
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 PRODUCTS
1.01 NAMEPLATES
Description: Laminated, three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
1.02 TAGS
Metal Tags: Aluminum with stamped letters; tag size minimum 40 mm diameter with
smooth edges.
1.03 PIPE MARKERS
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon
REVISIONS tape, minimum 150 mm wide by 0.10 mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.04 CEILING TACKS

DATE: _________________
A. Description: Steel with 20mm diameter color coded head.
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. Color code as follows:
APPROVED
1. Green – Plumbing Valves
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION
OPERATING DEPT. A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 mm below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
CERTIFIED D. Equipment: Identify fans and other HVAC equipment with plastic nameplates.
E. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15190-01

FOR 390
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15245 - VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Inertia Bases
B. Vibration Isolation
1.02 PRODUCT FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Placement of isolators in floating slabs
REVISIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
DRAWN BY: ___________

B. Section 15140 – Supports and Anchors
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.35kW, plus connected
piping and ductwork
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Upper floor locations shall be considered critical unless otherwise indicated.
C. Use concrete inertia bases for fans having static pressure in excess of 0.85kPa wg. or
motors in excess of 30 kW, and on base mounted pumps over 7.5 kW.
OPERATING DEPT.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and
CERTIFIED
dynamic load on each.
B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and setting
dimensions.
15245-01

FOR 391
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INERTIA BASES
A. Structural Bases:
1. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and
to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.
2. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets, supporting equipment
and motor with motor slide rails.
B. Concrete Inertia Bases:
1. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
2. Construction: Structured steel channel perimeter frame, with gusseted brackets and
anchor bolts, adequately reinforced, concrete filled.
REVISIONS 3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.
4. Concrete: Reinforced 20 MPa concrete.

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Spring Isolators (For Air Cooled Condensing Units) as per manufacturer’s

APPROVED
recommendation.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Neoprene Pad Isolators (Floor Mounted Air Handling Unit):
1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.

a) 30 durometer
OPERATING DEPT.
b) Minimum 13mm thick
c) Maximum loading 275 kPa
d) Heights of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width.
2. Configuration: Single layer, 13mm thick waffle pads bonded each side of 6mm thick
CERTIFIED
steel plate.
BY: ___________________ 3. Flexible Hose Connector (For Pumps):

DATE: _________________
a) Tubing: Corrugated types 321 stainless steel with stainless wire braid outer
shield.
b) Flanger: ASA 1034 kPa.
2.03 ISOLATION HANGERS (FOR SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT)

A. Combination spring and neoprene isolation hangers: Hanger rod shall swing through a
30-degree angle without contracting the neoprene. Select hangers based on achieving
a minimum of 25mm spring deflection.
15245 - 02

FOR 392
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Set air handling units on vibration isolators located as recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Air handling units shall be furnished with internal fan section vibration isolators.
Provide flexible connectors between air handling units and ducts.
C. Bleed Air Fan and Exhaust Fans: Set units on vibration isolators located as
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install isolation for all motor driven equipment.

REVISIONS
C. Bases:
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Set steel bases for 25 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 50 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. Adjust equipment level.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
D. Install spring hangers without binding
E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially

different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height.
When full load is applied, adjust isolator to allow shim removal.
OPERATING DEPT.
F. Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently for scheduled distance to
nearest flexible pipe connector.
G. Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop.

CERTIFIED
H. Piping entering and leaving the chiller shall be isolated with flexible stainless steel hose
connectors located as close as possible to the chiller.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
I. Suction and discharge piping connection to the pumps shall be provided with flexible
connectors.
15245-03

FOR 393
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 HOT WATER & REFRIGERATION PIPING
A. Material: ASTM C534, flexible, closed-cellular elastomeric in tubular form.

B. Thermal Conductivity: ASTM C177, 0.040 W/mK at 24C mean temperature
C. Service Temperature Range: -40C to 120C
D. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-in.
E. Water Absorption by weight: ASTM D1056, 3%
F. Density: 64 kg/m3
G. Thickness: 25 mm
H. Adhesive : Air-dried, contact adhesive compatible with insulation
I. Ozone Resistant
1.02 JACKETS FOR INSULATION IN OUTDOOR APPLICATION

REVISIONS
A. Material: ASTM B209, aluminum
DRAWN BY: ___________
B. Thickness: 0.508 mm sheet
C. Finish: Smooth
DATE: _________________
D. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps
CHK’D BY: ____________ E. Fittings: 0.40 mm thick die shape fitting covers with factory attached protective liner
F. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide x 0.38 mm thick aluminum
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15260-01

FOR 394
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Ductwork Insulation
B. Insulation Jackets
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
B. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
REVISIONS C. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
DRAWN BY: ___________ D. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
DATE: _________________
E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
F. TCS-K-100.01 - SCECO-East Construction Standard - HVAC Systems and
Equipment Installation
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS FIBER BOARD, RIGID
OPERATING DEPT. A. Insulation: ANSI/ASTM C612; rigid glass fiber board non-combustible faced with factory
applied foil reinforced Kraft vapor barrier for application on exterior of ductwork.
1. Thermal Conductivity: ASTM C518, 0.033 W/m° C at 24°C mean temperature
CERTIFIED 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 121°C
BY: ___________________
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.20% by volume.
DATE: _________________
4. Density: 56 kg/m3
5. Thickness: 25mm & 50mm thick for indoor and outdoor application respectively.
B. Vapor Barrier Tape: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
C. Adhesive: Waterproof type and fire resistant, suitable for the type of insulation applied.

15290-01

FOR 395
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15310 - FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 FIREWATER PIPING, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
Refer to Section 02667.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15310-01

FOR 396
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Electric Driven Fire Pump
B. Diesel Driven Fire Pump
C. Electric Jockey Pump
D. Controllers
1.02 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 15170 - Motors

REVISIONS
B. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ C. Section 15310 - Fire Protection Piping

CHK’D BY: ____________
1.03 REFERENCES
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B. ASTM A105 Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components
C. ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron

OPERATING DEPT.
D. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
E. NFPA 20 Installation of Stationary Pumps
CERTIFIED G. 90-TMSS-2 Fire Water Pumps
BY: ___________________
H. UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
DATE: _________________
I. UL 393 Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire Protection Service
J. UL 1478 Fire Pump Relief Valves
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
15320-01

FOR 397
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, weights,

clearances, and methods of assembly.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature including general assembly, pump

curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system, operating point
indicated, NPSH curve, controls, wiring diagrams, and service connections.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Indicate support details, connection

requirements, and include start-up instructions for fire pump system.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fire pumps meet or exceed specified

requirements at specified operating conditions. Submit summary and results of shop
tests performed in accordance with NFPA 20.
F. Field Reports: Indicate summary of hydrostatic test and field acceptance tests
performed in accordance with NFPA 20.

REVISIONS
A. Operation Data: Include manufacturers instructions, start-up data, trouble-shooting
DRAWN BY: ___________ checklists for pumps, drivers, and controllers.
DATE: _________________
B. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers literature, cleaning procedures, replacement
CHK’D BY: ____________
parts lists, and repair data for pumps, drivers and controllers.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Perform WORK in accordance with NFPA 20.
B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL or FM label or marking.

OPERATING DEPT.
C. Provide two (2) copies of each document on SITE.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. MANUFACTURER: Company specializing in manufacturing of products specified with

CERTIFIED
minimum five (5) years documented experience.
BY: ___________________
B. INSTALLER: Company specializing in performing WORK of this Section with minimum
DATE: _________________ three (3) years documented experience.
A. Conform to 90-TMSS-2 and NFPA 20 for installation and testing of fire pumps, drivers
and controllers.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE approval of field

acceptance tests.
15320-02

FOR 398
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept fire pump and components on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect fire pump and components from physical damage including effects of weather,
water, and construction debris.
C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps, and maintain in place until installation.
Accurately record actual locations of fire pump, piping, valves and connections.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. ELECTRIC DRIVEN FIRE MAIN PUMP: The fire main pump shall be of manufacturer’s
REVISIONS
standard design and shall meet or exceed the requirements of 90-TMSS-2.
DRAWN BY: ___________
1. Electric Motor Drive
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ a. Motor: Squirrel cage induction type; in open drip proof NEMA MG-1 enclosure.
APPROVED b. Controller: Limited service type, UL listed with built-in pressure switch, full voltage
ENGINEERING DEPT. starter, in NEMA 250 enclosure, including the following:
i. Circuit Breaker: Trips in each phase calibrated at least to 300% of the motor
full-load current, 24 KA interrupting capacity (minimum).
OPERATING DEPT.
ii. Motor Starter: Energized automatically through pressure switch or manually
by externally operable handle.
iii. Minimum Run Timer: Shall provide a 0-10 minutes adjustable timer to
prevent short cycling of the fire pump motor assembly.
CERTIFIED
iv. Pilot Lamp: Indicates circuit breaker closed and power available.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
v. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
vi. Alarm Relay: Energizes alarm to indicate circuit breaker open or power
failure.
vii. Manual Selector Station: On enclosure marked "Automatic" and "Non-

Automatic".
viii. Pressure Switch: 2068 kPa brass bourdon tube pressure switch with
independent low turn-on and high turn-off settings.
15320-03

FOR 399
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. DIESEL DRIVEN FIRE PUMP
The diesel driven pump shall be of manufacturer’s standard design and shall meet or
exceed the requirements of 90-TMSS-2.
C. JOCKEY PUMP
1. Electrically operated, horizontal, close-coupled, regenerative turbine type with horizontal

motor. Pump shall be provided with casing relief valve per NFPA 20.
Body : Cast Iron

Impeller : Bronze
Shaft : 416 Stainless steel
Ball Bearing : Steel
Mechanical Seal : EPR/Carbon/316 Stainless steel
2. Control by automatic jockey pump controller with full voltage starter and minimum run
timer to start pump on pressure drop in system and stay in operation for minimum period
REVISIONS of time. Fire main pump shall start automatically on further pressure drop or on jockey
pump failure.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
D. FIRE PUMP ACCESSORIES
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. Eccentric suction reducer and strainer on suction side of fire pump.
APPROVED
2. Concentric increaser and check valve in fire pump discharge and OS&Y
ENGINEERING DEPT.
gate valve on system side of check valve.
3. Main relief valve and open type waste cone.
4. Suction pressure gage with snubber, valve cock and lever handle.
OPERATING DEPT.
5. Discharge pressure gage with snubber, valve cock and lever handle.
6. Circulation relief valve.

CERTIFIED
E. EXTRA MATERIALS
BY: ___________________
Provide one (1) set of gaskets and seals for each pump type and model supplied.
DATE: _________________
F. TEST HEADER: Cast brass body, back inlet with brass plate lettered “PUMP TEST
CONNECTION”, brass hose gate valves, male hose threaded outlets, caps and chains.
G. WATER FLOW METER
1. Flow Range: 1893 to 7570 lpm.
2. Indicating Flow Meter: Dry single diaphragm type with dual scale reading in either LPM
or GPM.
15320-04

FOR 400
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3. Valves: Flow meter shall include an equalizing valve and two bleed valves.
4. Flow Element: Averaging pitot differential pressure type and shall consist of a fabricated
sensing tube with two internal chambers. The sensor shall have a diamond cross
sectional shape and shall have an equal number of sensing ports facing upstream and
downstream.
5. Accuracy: Flow measurement shall be within plus or minus 1.10%.
6. Approval: Flow meter shall be Factory Mutual Research Corporation, Inc.(FM) approved
for fire pump flow testing.
H. FLANGES, BOLTINGS AND GASKETS
1. Flanges: Forged steel, ASTM A105, slip-on or welding neck, ANSI B16.5, RF, class
1034 kPa.
2. Boltings: Carbon steel machined bolts, ASTM A307, Grade B.
3. Gaskets: 1.6mm thick, non-asbestos composition.
I. STRAINER
REVISIONS
1. Size 50 mm and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 1034 kPa working pressure, Y
pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel perforated screen.
DRAWN BY: ___________
2. Size 63 mm to 100 mm: Flanged iron body for 1034 kPa working pressure, Y pattern
DATE: _________________
with 1.2 mm stainless steel perforated screen.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. Suction Strainer (Centrifugal Fire Pumps): Size 125mm and Larger: Flanged iron body
APPROVED for 1034 kPa working pressure (non-shock, cold water), cast or heavy fabricated with
ENGINEERING DEPT. stainless steel perforated screen. The strainer screens shall have a free area of at least
four times the area of the suction connection and the openings shall be sized to restrict
the passage of a 6.35mm sphere.
J. LEVEL SWITCH: Free floating liquid level switch ABS plastic housing. Switch shall be
UL listed. Maximum pressure and temperature ratings shall be 103 kPa and 60°C
OPERATING DEPT. respectively.
K. PRESSURE GAUGE:
1. The pressure gauges shall comply with the requirements of UL 393.
CERTIFIED 2. The discharge pressure gauge shall have a dial not less than 90 mm in diameter and
shall be calibrated to indicate at least twice the rated working pressure of the fire pump
but not less than 1378 kPa.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ 3. The suction pressure gauge shall be a compound pressure and vacuum gauge with a
dial not less than 90 mm in diameter. The vacuum range shall be calibrated in mm of
mercury. The pressure range shall indicate at least twice the rated working pressure of
the fire pump.
L. CIRCULATION RELIEF VALVE: The circulation relief valve shall be an automatic relief
valve with a setting below the fire pump shut-off pressure at the minimum expected
suction pressure. The relief valve shall provide the circulation of sufficient water to
prevent overheating when operating at no flow condition. The relief valve shall comply
with the requirements of UL 1478.
15320-05

FOR 401
494
‫لمشعقي‬
M. MAIN RELIEF VALVE: The main relief valve shall comply with the requirements of UL
1478. The setting of the relief valve shall be such as to protect the piping system from
pressures in excess of its rating. The size of the main relief valve and discharge piping
shall be in accordance with 90-TMSS-2.
N. UNIONS: Class 1034 kPa malleable iron, ASTM A197, screwed ends.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports
under elbows on pump suction and discharge.
C. Provide drains for pump bases and seals, piped to and discharging into drains.
REVISIONS
D. Provide pumps connection to electrical service.
DRAWN BY: ___________ E. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
DATE: _________________
F. Check, align, and certify base mounted pumps by qualified millwright prior to start-up.
CHK’D BY: ____________
G. Concrete pad/support for fire pumps and jockey pump shall be provided by the
APPROVED CONTRACTOR.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
H. In Fire Pump House, identify valves, flow meter, etc. with tags.
I. Provide access space around fire pump for service. Provide no less than minimum as
J. Provide fire pump with housekeeping pad of concrete, minimum 200 mm high and
OPERATING DEPT. extending 150mm & 300mm beyond supported equipment for electric motor and diesel
engine driven pumps respectively.
K. The fire pump shall be provided with a main relief valve, circulation relief valve, flexible
connections, suction and discharge pressure gauges and pressure switch.
CERTIFIED
L. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all required acceptance tests, complete with
CONTRACTOR's material and test certificate, and forward the certificate to the
BY: ___________________ COMPANY prior to asking for approval of the installation.
DATE: _________________
3.02 Field Quality Control
A. Perform test on entire system in accordance with 90-TMSS-2 and NFPA 20.
B. All tests to be witnessed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
15320-06

FOR 402
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15325 - SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Suspended Ceilings:
1. Type: Concealed pendent type with matching push on escutcheon plate.

2. Head Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type, temperature rated for 79 C.
5. 13mm thread size and 13mm orifice size.
6. K-Factor = 81.00
7. Approvals: UL listed and FM approved.
REVISIONS B. Exposed Area Type:
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Type: Standard upright type with guard.

DATE: _________________
2. Head Finish: Chrome plated.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type, temperature rated for 79 C
4. K-Factor = 81.00
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head.
1.02 IN-RACK SPRINKLERS
1. Type: Upright, closed head with shield and guard.

OPERATING DEPT. 2. Head Finish: Chrome plated.
3. 13 mm thread size and 13 mm nominal orifice size.
4. Fusible Links: Glass bulb type, temperature rated for 79C.
5. Guard: Finish to match sprinkler head.
6. K-Factor = 81.00
CERTIFIED
1.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced
clapper to automatically actuate electrically and hydraulically operated alarms, with
pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim. Alarm valve shall be UL-Listed and
FM approved.
B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy red
enameled gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer. Water motor alarm
shall be UL listed and FM approved.
C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two
contacts rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC, polyethylene vane and UL listed.
15325-01

FOR 403
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Tamper Switch: Mounted on the yoke of the OS&Y gate valve that includes switch
assembly and mounting brackets. The switching components shall be enclosed in NEMA
Type 1 enclosure. The switch shall be UL listed or FM approved.
E. Wafer Check Valve: ASTM A126, Class B cast iron body, bronze plate and rated for
1723 kPa water service pressure. Check valve shall be UL listed and FM approved.
F. Fire Department Connection:
1. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; double
independent swinging clappers, threaded dust cap and chain of matching material
and finish.
2. Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Label: “Standpipe – Fire Department Connection”.
G. Pressure Indicator: 0 to 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa) in 5 psi (35 kPa) increments, 6 mm NPT
male pipe connection, 89 mm diameter and ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. Gauge shall
be UL listed and FM approved.
REVISIONS
H. Inspector’s Test Valve
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Type: Vertical, positive positioning of handle with integral sight glass.
2. Size: 25 mm.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3. Nominal orifice size: 13 mm.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
*** End of Section 15325***
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15325-02

FOR 404
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15375 - STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Hose Cabinet:
1. Cabinet:
a. Style: Recessed mounted. Stainless Steel Frame & Door with Full Clear Glass
Door. Sized to accommodate fire hose with rack and portable fire extinguisher.
b. Metal: Primed 1.2 mm thick base metal, prepared for pipe and accessory rough-
in.
c. Door: 1.2 mm thick stainless steel., reinforced for flatness and rigidity, full
glass access.
REVISIONS
d. Door Glazing: Glass, Clear, 3mm thick.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2. Fire Hose Rack: One-piece swinging type, construction of 16 gauge steel with steel
DATE: _________________ cadmium plated rack pins, automatic release mechanism to allow valve to be
CHK’D BY: ____________
opened without release of water until the last fold is removed, 30 meters lined hose
rack capacity and red enamel finish. Approval: UL listed.
APPROVED 3. Fire Hose: Single jacket, lightweight, polyester lined with acceptance test pressure
of 3,446 kPa. Hose shall not decay, impervious to mildew and resists acids and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
chemicals. Approval: UL listed. Manufacturer labeling/marking of fire hoses shall be
as per NFPA standard.
4. Hose Coupling: Cast brass with polished chrome plated finish.
5. Nipple: Cast brass and suitable for 38mm diameter hose threads.
6. Angle Valve: 38mm diameter, cast brass with polished chrome plated finish. Valve
OPERATING DEPT. shall have working pressure of 1034 kPa, non-shock, cold water. Approval: UL
listed.
7. Nozzle: 38mm diameter brass, polished chrome plated finish, 340 lpm rated
discharge at 689 kPa. Capable of complete shut-off, conical fog or straight stream
discharge pattern. Approval: UL listed.
CERTIFIED 8. Fire Extinguisher: Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers, multi purpose, in accordance
with the applicable requirements of 90-TMSS-3. UL Rating / Capacity: 10A; 60 B:C
BY: ___________________ / 7.7 kgs.
DATE: _________________

FOR 405
494
‫لمشعقي‬
15375-01
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________

FOR 406
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 SANITARY SEWER AND DRAINAGE PIPING, UNDERGROUND AND CONCEALED
Refer to Section 02732 - Site Sanitary Sewerage and Drainage Systems.
1.02 SANITARY SEWER AND DRAINAGE PIPING, ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED
A. Steel: ASTM A53, galvanized, schedule 40, threaded connection.

B. Fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A197, galvanized to ASTM A153, class 150, taper thread.
1.03 RAW WATER PIPING, UNDERGROUND OR CONCEALED
Refer to Section 02667 - Site Water Lines.

REVISIONS
1.04 RAW WATER PIPING, ABOVEGROUND AND EXPOSED
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Refer to Section 02667 - Site Water Lines.
CHK’D BY: ____________
1.05 HOT WATER PIPING
APPROVED
A. Plastic Pipe: CPVC, ASTM F441, Schedule 80.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Fittings: Same material as pipe formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee,
bends, elbows and other configuration required. Solvent cement joints.
C. Joints: Socket solvent weld per ASTM F493.
PART 2 EXECUTION
OPERATING DEPT.
2.01 TESTING
A. Water Piping System: Upon completion of a section or of the entire cold and hot water
supply system, it shall be tested and proved tight with a water pressure at least 50% higher
CERTIFIED than the pressure under which the system will be used. Isolate test source and allow to
stand for 2 hours. Leaks and loss of pressure constitute defects that must be repaired and
BY: ___________________ retested. The water used for tests shall be obtained from a clean source of supply.
DATE: _________________
B. Drainage and Sewer Piping System: Clean water shall be used for testing as follows:
1. Rough Plumbing Test: On completion of rough-in piping installation, tightly close all
openings in piping system and fill with water to a point of overflow, but not less than
3.05 meters head of water. Water level shall not drop for at least 2 hours before
inspection starts through completion of inspection. The system shall then be tight at
all points.
15410- 01

FOR 407
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Finished Plumbing Test: After plumbing fixtures have been set and its traps filled
with water, test connections and prove gas tight and watertight. Plug stack openings
on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the
system equal to a pressure of 25mm water column. Use a U-tube manometer
inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air
pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout the
period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
C. If testing is to be performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test complete
with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15410- 02

FOR 408
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALITIES
PART - 1 PRODUCTS
1.01 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non skid cover.
B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy
coated gasketed cover.
C. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron, two-piece body with double drainage
flanges, weep holes reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel bronze strainer,
round with scoriated cover in service areas and with depressed cover to accept floor
finish in finished floor areas.
D. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy-
coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine
screw.
REVISIONS E. Chemical Storage Room & Forklift Charging Station: Acid resisting epoxy-coated cast
iron.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.02 FLOOR DRAINS
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Chemical Storage Room & Forklift Charging Station: Acid resisting epoxy-coated cast
APPROVED
iron with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar and round
adjustable strainer.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Other Areas: ANSI/ASME A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron, two-piece body with double
drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar and round, adjustable, nickel
bronze strainer.
1.03 PERENNIAL HOSE SPRAY

OPERATING DEPT.
Spray Assembly with Flexible Stainless Steel Hose. Chrome plated or plastic compact
automatic shut-off valve with spray, 10 mm diameter, 1000 mm long polished flexible
stainless steel hose.
CERTIFIED 1.04 HOSE BIBB:
BY: ___________________
ANSI/ASME 1011, bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal
disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum
DATE: _________________
breaker.
15430- 01

FOR 409
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Western and Eastern Water closets.
B. Counter Top Lavatories
C. Mop Receptor
D. Kitchen sinks
E. Bath/Shower Fitting
REVISIONS
F. Eyewash with Auxiliary Body Spray
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Section 15140 Supports and Anchors
APPROVED
B. Section 15410 Plumbing Piping
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. Section 15430 Plumbing Specialties
D. Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment

OPERATING DEPT.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A112.19.1 Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures
B. ANSI/ASME A112.19.2 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures

CERTIFIED
C. ANSI/ASME A112.19.5 Trim for Water Closet Bowls & Tanks

BY: ___________________
D. 75-SMSS-2 COMPANY Material Specifications for Vitreous China
DATE: _________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
B. Manufacturer’s catalogues containing technical specifications for all fixtures, trim and
accessories proposed.
15440-01

FOR 410
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Three color samples of fixtures.
D. Drawings showing proposed method of installation for all fixtures.
E. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
F. Certificate of compliance for materials.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new fixtures, free from flaws and blemishes with finished surfaces clear, smooth
and bright. Fixture colors shall be selected on site to suit Company’s Representative
finishes’ schedule. Colors selection shall be approved by Company’s Representative.
B. Provide plumbing fittings. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories shall be heavily
chrome plated.
C. Fixtures shall be product of one Manufacturer. Fittings of same type shall be product of
REVISIONS one manufacturer.
DRAWN BY: ___________ D. Protect fixtures against use and damage during construction.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED A. Deliver materials in original, unopened protective packaging to prevent damage to the
ENGINEERING DEPT.
material and finish.
B. Store all fixtures in an upright position, above ground in a dry place. Trim and
accessories shall also be stored above ground in a dry place.
1.07 COLORS
OPERATING DEPT.
A. Color of all fittings shall be selected on site coordinating with architectural and furniture
finishes schedules and color schemes.
CERTIFIED B. Sample colors shall be submitted as indicated and all color selection approved by
Company’s Representative.
BY: ___________________
1.08 WARRANTY
DATE: _________________
A. Provide one (1) year warranty.
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EASTERN WATER CLOSET AND FLUSH VALVE
a. Manufacture: Vitreous china, rectangular shape with integral foot treads, designed to
mount flush with the floor finish provided with built-in or separated tar-coated or china
P-trap. The approximate dimensions are 400mm wide x 595mm long.
15440-02

FOR 411
494
‫لمشعقي‬
b. Flush Valve: Exposed Water Closet Flushometer, for floor mounted,Quiet, Exposed,
Diaphragm Type, Chrome Plated Closet Flushometer with a push button with following
features:
Permex synthetic rubber diaphragm with dual filtered fixed bypass.
ada compliant metal oscillating non-hold-open handle with triple seal handle packing.
1” i.p.s. screwdriver bak-chek angle stop. Free spinning vandal resistant stop cap.
Adjustable tailpiece. High back pressure vacuum breaker flush connection with one-
piece bottom hex coupling nut. Spud coupling and flange for 1½” top spud.
Sweat solder adapter with cover tube & cast wall flange with set screw.
High copper, low zinc brass castings for dezincification resistance.
Non-hold-open handle, fixed metering bypass and no external volume adjustment to
ensure water conservation. Diaphragm, handle packing, stop seat and vacuum
breaker molded from permex rubber compound for chloramine resistance. Valve body,
cover, tailpiece and control stop shall be in conformance with astm alloy classification
for semi-red brass.
2.02 WESTERN WATER CLOSET WITH FLUSH VALVE
a. Manufacture: Vitreous china, floor mounted, close coupled, siphon jet flush action
REVISIONS
water closet with trims, water closet bowl with separate flush valve secured to and
supported by water closet bowl.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ b. Flush Valve: Exposed Water Closet Flushometer, for floor mounted,Quiet, Exposed,
CHK’D BY: ____________
Diaphragm Type, Chrome Plated Closet Flushometer for left hand with following
features:
APPROVED Permex synthetic rubber diaphragm with dual filtered fixed bypass.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
ada compliant metal oscillating non-hold-open handle with triple seal handle packing.
1” i.p.s. screwdriver bak-chek angle stop. Free spinning vandal resistant stop cap.
Adjustable tailpiece. High back pressure vacuum breaker flush connection with one-
piece bottom hex coupling nut. Spud coupling and flange for 1½” top spud.
Sweat solder adapter with cover tube & cast wall flange with set screw.
High copper, low zinc brass castings for dezincification resistance.
OPERATING DEPT. Non-hold-open handle, fixed metering bypass and no external volume adjustment to ensure
water conservation. Diaphragm, handle packing, stop seat and vacuum breaker molded
from permex rubber compound for chloramine resistance. Valve body, cover, tailpiece and
control stop shall be in conformance with astm alloy classification for semi-red brass.
CERTIFIED
2.03 LAVATORY
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
A. Manufacture: Vitreous china, counter top lavatory as per SEC Standard 75-TMSS-2
complete with mounting kit, lavatory faucet with spout , metal pop-up drain and handle
stops. The fixture shall be provided with supply assembly with 10mm diameter angle
valve, inlet pipe male thread with escutcheon, flexible tube riser with reducing coupling,
chrome finish.
B. Lavatory Mixer Faucet: Shall be with metal knob handles, metal pop-up drain, 13mm
diameter threaded inlets and coupling nuts.
15440-03

FOR 412
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.04 COUNTER SINK
Shall be single bowl, seamless, nickel bearing, stainless steel, of standard gauge (19), with
undercoating, self-trimming, soft satin finish in bowls, mirror polished outer rim and bowl
edges, flush fittings deck, complete with sink faucet, gooseneck, angle valve, trap, sink waste
and plug, lead washer, escutcheon, tubing.
2.05 KITCHEN SINK
Kitchen sink shall be single or double bowl, seamless, nickel bearing, stainless steel of
standard gauge (18.8), with APB undercoating, self-trimming, soft satin finish in bowls,
mirror polished outer rim and bowl edges, flush fittings deck, complete with sink faucet,
gooseneck stop angle, trap, sink waste and plug, lead washer, escutcheon, tubing.
Meets ANSI Specifications A112.19.3M-1987.
2.06 MOP RECEPTOR (JANITOR)
A. Mop service receptor shall be one-piece, precast, terrazo, reinforced with 16 gauge
galvanized wire, size 900mm x 900mm x 300mm, with 2 tiling flanges, corner style and
REVISIONS center drain.
B. Service faucet (hot and cold water) shall be connected separately, and 16mm  x
DRAWN BY: ___________ 760mm long flexible steel hose with ablution spray shall be connected to cold water line
DATE: _________________ faucet.
CHK’D BY: ____________ C. Provide mop hanger with 3 clamps.
APPROVED 2.07 BATH/SHOWER FITTING:

ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Shall be cast brass showerhead and arm, with two knob handle shower for hot and cold
fittings, washerless ceramic disc valve cartridge, solid brass waterway with 13mm
diameter female union connection and shall conform to ASTM/ANSI A112.18.1M. Pipe
size shall be 13mm diameter female thread.
OPERATING DEPT.
2.08 EYEWASH WITH AUXILIARY BODY SPRAY
A. Unit shall meet ANSI Standard and OSHA rules and regulations.
CERTIFIED B. Eyewash: Free standing, easy cleaning, non-clogging eyewash with stainless steel
receptor, twin soft PVC covered ABS plastic anti surge heads, stainless steel spray
BY: ___________________
rings, dual automatic pressure compensating devices, chrome plated brass ball valve
DATE: _________________
easily activated by either flag and or foot treadle, universal emergency sign, stainless
steel dust cover, supply and waste pipe fittings.
C. Drench Hose: Eye/face and body spray with ABS plastic spray head, squeeze lever
handle valve and 2.4 meters heavy duty yellow rubber hose.
D. The unit shall be protected against corrosive atmosphere.
E. A 533mm long self-adhesive, barber pole stripe in green and bright yellow shall be
provided to improve visibility.

15440-04

FOR 413
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Electric Water Heaters
B. Pool Electric Water Heaters
C.
rinking Water Cooler (Bottle Type)
D. Pool Circulating Pump

REVISIONS
E. Chlorinating Pump
DRAWN BY: ___________
F. Distribution Pump
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

G.
APPROVED
ater Transfer Pumps
ENGINEERING DEPT.
H.
oof Mounted Water Storage Tank
OPERATING DEPT. I.
nderground Water Storage Tank
CERTIFIED 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
BY: ___________________
A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors
DATE: _________________
B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
C. Section 16120 – Low Voltage Wires and Cables
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ARI Electric Drinking Fountain
B. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
C. ISO International Organization for Standardization

FOR 414
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
E. NSF National Sanitation Foundation
F. UL Underwriters Laboratories
15450-01
G. UL 399 Standard for Safety Drinking Water Coolers
H. UL 174 Safety Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters
I. UL 1453 Safety Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Include dimensions drawings of electric water heaters, pool electric water heaters,
REVISIONS electric drinking fountain, pool circulating pumps, chlorinating pumps, distribution
pump indicating components and piping connections.
DRAWN BY: ___________
2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ B. Manufacturer’s installation instruction.

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Submit operation, maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers.
OPERATING DEPT. A. Provide electric water heater, electric drinking fountain, pool circulating pump,
chlorinating pump, distribution and irrigation pumps with manufacturer’s name, model
number and rating/capacity identified.
B. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with

CERTIFIED recommendations and requirements of NSF, ASME, NEMA, UL, ISO and ARI.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
A. Conform to UL 174, or UL 1453 requirements for electric water heaters.
B. Conform to ARI 1010, Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Electric Drinking

Fountain.
C. Conform to UL 1995, Standard for Safety Heating and Cooling Equipment
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year warranty for the installed equipment.

B. Warranty shall include coverage of electric drinking fountain and compressor.

FOR 415
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Factory assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage.
B. Performance:
15450-02
1. Minimum recovery rate: as indicated against each model on drawings with 38
degrees C temperature rise.
2. Maximum working pressure: 10.34 Bars
C. Tank: Glass lined, welded steel; 100 mm diameter inspection port, thermally insulated
with minimum 50 mm glass fiber encased in corrosion resistant steel jacket; baked on
enamel finish.
D. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature

REVISIONS range from 16 to 82 degrees C, flanged or screw in nichrome elements, high
temperature limit thermostat.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high density
CHK’D BY: ____________
magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
APPROVED 2.02 POOL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Type: Factory assembled and wired electric resistance heaters.
B. Heater Tank: Shall be constructed of BS 1452, Grade 14 steel, with heavy epoxy
coating. The body design pressure shall be 2.41 bars and 19mm diameter relief valve
OPERATING DEPT.
shall be set at a pressure of 2.07 bars. A 13mm diameter drain valve shall be provided
at the lowest point of the heater tank. The flow connections shall be PVC stub flanges.
C. Heater Elements: Shall be heavy duty nickel plated copper sheathed elements and shall
conform to BS 3456, with low watt density for long life. The heater elements shall be
CERTIFIED mounted individually in a removable top plate which allows complete inspection of the
interor.
BY: ___________________
D. Temperature Control: Shall be externally mounted, fully adjustable thermostat with
DATE: _________________
temperature probe mounted in waterway for accurate temperature control within 0.5 C
temperature differential. Contactor assembly shall allow remote installation of control
device.
E. Standard and Safety Features: Shall be provided with indicating lights, adjustable
pressure (flow) switch, sacrificial magnesium anode rod for additional corrosion
protection, high temperature limit switch with internal manual reset switch, factory
installed temperature and pressure relief valve.
2.03 DRINKING WATER COOLER (BOTTLE TYPE)
A. Water guard system shall consist of the following components:


FOR 416
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1. Open-cell foam filter screens out dust and grit and other unwanted contaminants.
2. Flexible bottle gasket for an airtight seal around the bottle.
B. Sides: 20-gauge steel panels with cathodically electro coated acrylic enamel finish.
15450-03
C. Top: Made from high-impact ABS polystyrene.
D. Front: Upper part in high-impact ABS polystyrene. Lower part in Walnut Wood-Grain
vinyl-on-steel.
E. Faucets: Durable polypropylene, self-closing push button type.
F. Drip Receptor: Rugged molded polystyrene.
G. Cold Water Reservoir: Type 304 stainless steel with external copper refrigerant coil and
REVISIONS reservoir insulation in removable, molded expanded polystyrene.
DRAWN BY: ___________ H. Cold Water Thermostat: Temperature is controlled by adjustable thermostat easily
DATE: _________________
accessible on rear of cabinet.
CHK’D BY: ____________
I. Refrigeration unit: Convection cooled condenser with internally spring mounted
APPROVED
hermetically sealed compressor with automatic overload protector.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
J. Hot Tank: Red brass with fiberglass insulation, 500 watt tubular copper sheathed,
externally bonded heating element with a manually resettable heat limiter.
K. Hot Water Thermostat: Water temperature is controlled to nearly 82°C by automatic

thermostat. On-off toggle switch is located on the shell and easily accessible through the
OPERATING DEPT. condenser.
2.04 POOL CIRCULATING PUMP

Pool circulating pump shall be centrifugal, close coupled and designed for horizontal
CERTIFIED installation. Pump parts material specifications shall be as follows:
Casing : Bronze
BY: ___________________
Shaft : Stainless Steel
DATE: _________________ Impeller : Bronze
Case Wearing Ring : Bronze
Mechanical Seal : Buna N Bellows, Stainless Steel Metal Parts, Ni-Resist Seat
and Carbon Washer
The pump shall have a TEFC enclosure and operable at 220V, 3-phase, 60 Hz with a
speed of 3450 rpm.
2.05 CHLORINATING PUMP

Chlorinating pump shall be positive displacement, diaphragm type and pump parts material
specifications shall be as follows:
Diaphragm : Hypalon

FOR 417
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Valve Seats : Hypalon

Gaskets : Teflon
Ball Checks : Ceramic
Pump Head : Tyril
Fittings : PVC
Suction Tubing : Flexible PVC
Discharge Tubing : Polyethylene
15450-04
Pump drive shall be lifetime lubricated, sealed and self-maintaining gear train, heavy
duty fan cooled motor with a pH adjustment range from 0 to 9.51 pH at 6.8 bar gauge.
2.06 DISTRIBUTION PUMP

Pump shall be single stage end suction and per NEMA requirements. Pump parts
material specifications shall be as follows:
Pump Casing : Cast Iron, ASTM A48
Shaft : Steel, AISI C1045
Impeller : Bronze, ASTM B854
REVISIONS
Motor Bracket : Cast Iron, ASTM A48
Sleeve : Bronze, ASTM B62
DRAWN BY: ___________ Power Frame : Cast Iron, ASTM A48
DATE: _________________ Cast Wearing Ring : Bronze, ASTM B62
CHK’D BY: ____________ Mechanical Seal : Buna-N Elastomer Parts
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.07 WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
A. The pump shall be close-coupled and designed for horizontal installation. Pump parts
material specifications shall be as follows:
Casing : Cast Iron

OPERATING DEPT. Case Wearing Ring : Bronze
Impeller : Bronze
Shaft : Stainless Steel
Mechanical Seal : Buna N Bellows, Stainless Steel Metal
Parts, Ni-Resist Seat and Carbon Washer
CERTIFIED
B. Pump motor shall have a TEFC enclosure and a speed of 3500 rpm.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________ C. The pump suction line shall be provided with foot valve & strainer.
D. The water transfer pumps shall be provided with a control panel including magnetic
starter, disconnect switches and automatic pump alternator to alternate the operating
cycles of the two pumps.
2.08 ROOF MOUNTED WATER STORAGE TANK
A. Constructed of fiberglass or polyethylene and provided with insulation. The inside surface
of the tank shall be clean, smooth, uninterrupted and free of foreign materials. Shape
shall be cylindrical-horizontal type.

FOR 418
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Tank Nozzle and Manhole: Tank nozzles shall be provided with steel pipe couplings,
threaded steel flanges or standard pipe nipples. Manhole shall also be provided for
cleaning and maintenance. Nozzles shall be for inlet, outlet, drain, overflow, vent, float
switches and sight glass.
C. The roof mounted water storage tank shall be provided with float valves and float
switches for water level & water transfer pump control. The pump will only stop when the
entire three tanks reaches full level and start again when one tank is in low-level
15450-04
condition. Low water level alarm float switch shall also be provided for each tank. The pump
control system drawings shall be provided by the contractor.
D. The float switches shall have microswitch switching element, 200 kPa (29 psi) pressure
rating, 55°C heat rating and polypropen float material
2.09 UNDERGROUND WATER STORAGE TANK
A. Construction detail shall be as shown on the drawings and approved by Saudi Electricity
REVISIONS Company representative.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. The underground water storage tank shall be provided with a float switch to stop the
DATE: _________________
water transfer pumps at low water level. One low water level alarm float switch shall also
be provided.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. The float switches shall have microswitch switching element, 200 kPa (29 psi) pressure
rating, 55°C heat rating and polypropen float material.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER AND POOL WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

OPERATING DEPT.
A. Install electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to UL

requirements.
3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION

CERTIFIED
Install pump and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and

BY: ___________________ instructions.
DATE: _________________
3.03 WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
Install water storage tank and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s

specifications and instructions.
3.04 POOL CIRCULATING PUMP, CHLORINATING PUMP, AND DISTRIBUTION PUMP

INSTALLATION
Install pump and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and

instructions.

FOR 419
494
‫لمشعقي‬
15450-06
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________

FOR 420
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15536 – PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Packaged Air Conditioning Unit
1.02 REFERENCES
A. 73-TMSS-1 - SEC-ERB Materials Standard Specification - Packaged

Air-Conditioning Units
B. TCS-K-100.01 - SEC-ERB Construction Standard - HVAC Systems and

REVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNIT

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ A. The unit shall be self-contained, factory-prewired, pre-piped and precharged with
refrigerant and compressor oil; and ready for field connections to utilities and ducts.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. Packaged air conditioning unit shall be of the manufacturer’s standard, designed and
manufactured equipment with factory and field-installed accessories required for a
complete and fully operational system. The unit shall be of direct expansion (DX) type
evaporator coil and air cooled condenser.
B. The unit shall be rated in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 210 (formerly ARI 210
OPERATING DEPT.
standard).and designed to conform to NRCA Standards.
All units referred to in this Specification shall meet AHRI certification requirements and shall be
designed, constructed, assembled and installed in accordance with the following:
CERTIFIED
(a) ANSI/AHRI 210/240 (formerly ARI 210/240 standard). for matching units with rated
Cooling capacities below 40 kW.
BY: ___________________
(b) ANSI/AHRI 340/360 (formerly ARI 340/360 standard). for matching units
DATE: _________________
With rated cooling capacities at or above 40 kW.
C. Insulation & adhesive:

Insulation shall be supplied in sufficient thickness and density to prevent condensate from
forming on the unit casing from air entrance at coils to air outlet of unit, including framing angles
exposed to air stream. Insulation shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and be protected
against deterioration and delamination from air currents. Condensate drain pan shall be
insulated with water impervious insulation with sufficient thickness to prevent condensate
formation on the exterior at ambient conditions to be encountered.
15536-01

FOR 421
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and baked on

electrostatic polyester dry powder coat. Cabinet interior shall be insulated with 13
millimeter thick fiberglass insulation. Unit shall be factory equipped with internally trapped
condensate drain pan.
E. The fan shall be of centrifugal type conforming to AMCA 210 and shall be double-width,
double-inlet with forward curved blades or backward-inclined airfoil blades specifically
designed and suitable for the required operating pressure.
F. Hermetic or semi hermetic type conforming to ARI 520 with all the minimum standard
equipment and accessories listed therein. Compressor speed for compressors above 70 kW
shall not exceed 1750 rpm. Compressors shall be provided with cylinder unloading for
automatic capacity reduction of at least 50% for units over 35 kW. Compressors shall start
unloaded. If standard with the manufacturer, two or more compressors, but not more than four
may be provided in lieu of a single compressor with cylinder unloading, in which case capacity
reduction shall be accomplished by sequence operation of the compressors or combination of
the 2 methods.
G. The evaporator & condenser coils shall have aluminum corrugated fins mechanically
REVISIONS bonded to seamless copper tube.
DRAWN BY: ___________ H. The electric heater shall be of the open wire type. It shall be factory installed.
DATE: _________________
I. The refrigerant circuit components shall include thermostatic expansion valve, filter drier,
CHK’D BY: ____________
Schrader valve connections on suction and discharge lines & sight glass.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
J. The filter section shall consist of factory installed filter racks for installation of aluminum
filters.
K. The unit shall be complete with self-contained control system. It shall be provided with
low pressure switch, anti-freeze thermostat, high pressure switch, airflow switch, overheat
OPERATING DEPT. thermostat, fusible link & fuse protection.
L. The unit shall be capable of starting and running at 54.44°C. It shall be capable of
operation down to 1.67°C.
CERTIFIED M. The unit shall be provided with a 16-gauge galvanized steel roof curb.
BY: ___________________
N. The unit shall be provided with a manual damper, bird screen and rain hood.
DATE: _________________
O. The compressor motors shall be cooled by suction gas and shall have thermal overload
protection. The evaporator fan motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings and
thermal overload protection. The condenser motor shall be of the totally enclosed type
with permanently lubricated bearings and thermal overload protection.
P. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) should not be less than 10.
15536-02

FOR 422
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15870 – POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.01 WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN AND BACKDRAFT DAMPER
A. Type: Wall-mounted, weatherproof, centrifugal direct driven type fitted with backdraft
damper and 13mm mesh, gage 16 aluminum bird screen. Construction of the wind band
shall of heavy gauge aluminum and shall have rolled bead for added strength. Units shall
be constructed so that removal of several fasteners shall allow removal of entire power
assembly and wheel for servicing and cleaning.
The fan wheel shall be of the backward inclined, non-overloading aluminum wheels with a
well-designed inlet venturi for maximum performance. Wheels shall be statically and
dynamically balanced to ensure minimal noise and vibration generation. Blades, fins inlet
cone and back plate shall be fabricated from aluminum and securely joined together.
REVISIONS Fan shall bear the AMCA “Certified Rating Seal” for both air and sound performance.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Motor: ODP NEMA Design B, shall be heavy duty, ball bearing type, carefully matched to
DATE: _________________
the fan load and furnished at specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors shall be
mounted on vibration isolators and shall be isolated from exhaust airstream. Fresh air
CHK’D BY: ____________
for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of
APPROVED
discharge contaminants. Motor shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Exhaust fan
motor shall be explosion-proof and non-corrosive type.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match circuit conductor quantities, sizes and
materials. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box
OPERATING DEPT. installed in the motor compartment.
E. Speed Controls: Solid state speed controller shall be provided for ease of system
balancing. The controller shall also be utilized to serve as on-off switch.
CERTIFIED F. Backdraft Damper: The unit shall be factory fabricated, energy conserving parallel blade
type with blades and frame constructed of non-corrosive materials. Blade width shall not
BY: ___________________
exceed 250 mm. Blades shall be fitted with spring assists and counter-balanced where
necessary. Blade edges shall be fitted with seals. Pivot points shall be fitted with self-
DATE: _________________
lubricating bearings. Dampers shall open automatically when fan starts and close when
fan stops and shall not rattle at any position.
1.02 WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN AND BACKDRAFT DAMPER.
A. Manufactured Units
Fans shall be wall mounted, PVC, centrifugal direct driven type fitted with backdraft
damper and 13mm mesh, gage 16 aluminum bird screen.
15870-01

FOR 423
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Electrical Characteristics And Components
Speed Controls: For direct drives, provide solid-state speed controller that shall also
serve as an on/off switch.
C. Backdraft Dampers
The unit shall be factory fabricated, energy conserving parallel blade type with blades and
frame constructed of PVC, galvanized steel, aluminum sheet or aluminum extrusions.
Blade width shall not exceed 250 mm. Blades shall be fitted with spring assists and
counter-balanced where necessary. Blade edges shall be fitted with seals. Pivot points
shall be fitted with self-lubricating bearings. Dampers shall open automatically when fan
starts and close when fan stops and shall not rattle at any position.
1.03 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS & BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.
A. Exhaust fan shall be centrifugal type per 73-TMSS-05 requirements and consists of non-
corrosive parts with explosion proof type motor with class B insulation ideal for 24 hours
continuous operation. Exhaust fan shall be up-blast type, and ducted.
REVISIONS
B. Backdraft Damper: The unit shall be factory fabricated, energy conserving parallel blade
DRAWN BY: ___________ type with blades and frame constructed of non-corrosive materials. Blade width shall not
DATE: _________________ exceed 250 mm. Blades shall be fitted with spring assists and counter-balanced where
CHK’D BY: ____________
necessary. Blade edges shall be fitted with seals. Pivot points shall be fitted with self-
lubricating bearings. Dampers shall open automatically when fan starts and close when
APPROVED
fan stops and shall not rattle at any position.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.04 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS & BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.
A. Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fans shall be downdraft roof mounted, centrifugal direct driven type fitted with
OPERATING DEPT. backdraft damper, roof curbs and gage 16 aluminum wire mesh bird screen.
Fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, non-overloading aluminum wheels

constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone, carefully matched to the inlet
cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced
CERTIFIED
to assure minimal noise and vibration generation. .
BY: ___________________ The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with rigid internal
DATE: _________________
support structure. The fan shroud shall have rolled bead for added support.
The fan shall be provided with factory-fabricated fiberglass roof curb.
The fan shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance and
shall also be UL listed.
15870-02

FOR 424
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Backdraft Dampers: The unit shall be factory fabricated, energy conserving parallel
blade type with blades and frame constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum sheet or
aluminum extrusions. Blade width shall not exceed 250 mm. Blades shall be fitted with
spring assists and counter-balanced where necessary. Blade edges shall be fitted with
seals. Pivot points shall be fitted with self-lubricating bearings. Dampers shall open
automatically when fan starts and close when fan stops and shall not rattle at any
position.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15870-03

FOR 425
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15885 - AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Washable Permanent Panel Filters

B. Filter Frames and Housings
C. Filter Gages
1.02 REFERENCE
ANSI/AHRI 850 (formerly ARI 850 standard). - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter
Equipment
1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS
REVISIONS Provide two (2) sets of each type of filter.
DRAWN BY: ___________ PART 2 - PRODUCTS

DATE: _________________
2.01 WASHABLE PERMANENT PANEL FILTERS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Media: 14 mesh aluminum, alternate layers of flat and herringbone crimp, four layers per
25mm, rod reinforced.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Frame: Aluminum
2. Nominal Size: Manufacturer’s standard
OPERATING DEPT. 3. Thickness: 50 mm
B. Performance Rating:
1. Average Weight Arrestance: 80 - 85 percent

CERTIFIED
2. Initial Resistance at 2.54 m/sec face velocity: 25 Pa
BY: ___________________
3. Recommended Final Resistance at 2.54 m/sec face velocity: 125 Pa
DATE: _________________
2.02 FILTER FRAMES AND HOUSINGS
A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage (1.5mm) galvanized
steel or extruded aluminum T-section construction with necessary gasketting between
frames and walls.
B. Standard Sizes: Provide for interchangeability of filter media of other manufacturers.
15885-01

FOR 426
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Metal Ductwork
B. Hangers and Supports
C. Duct Cleaning
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Carbon Structural Steel
B. ASTM A90 - Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with
Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
REVISIONS
C. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
DRAWN BY: ___________ Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process
DATE: _________________
D. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National
CHK’D BY: ____________
Association, Inc.
APPROVED
E. TCS-K-100.01 - SEC-ERB Construction Standard - HVAC Systems and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
F. SES-K-100 - SEC-ERB Engineering Standard - HVAC Systems Design
OPERATING DEPT. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel, lock forming quality, having G90
CERTIFIED zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.
BY: ___________________ Rectangular Straight Ducts: Longitudinal and traverse connections shall be by
Pittsburgh or double corner seams and companion angles respectively. Maximum joint
DATE: _________________
spacing shall be 1200 mm. with duct construction schedules (constructed for 500 Pa.,
positive or negative pressure) as follows:
15890-01

FOR 427
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Longest Size of Wall Thickness, Intermediate Traverse

Duct, mm. US Gage Reinforcement, mm. Connections, mm.
0 - 500 26 None 25 x 25 x 3
525 - 1050 24 None 25 x 25 x 3
1075 - 1200 22 None 25 x 25 x 3
1225 - 1350 20 None 32 x 32 x 3
1375 - 1500 20 40 x 40 x 3 Angle + 32 x 32 x 3
Rod at 600 c.c.
1525 - 1800 18 40 x 40 x 3 Angle + 40 x 40 x 3
Rod at 600 c.c.
1825 - 2100 18 40 x 40 x 3 Angle + 40x 40 x 6
Rod at 600 c.c.
2125 - 2400 16 40 x 40 x 5 Angle + 50 x 50 x 5
Rod at 600 c.c.
Note: If galvanized duct is used for swimming pool, steps should be taken to adequately
protect the metal from corrosion. It is recommended that, at a minimum, the
REVISIONS galvanized ducts properly prepared and painted with epoxy-based or other durable
paint suitable to protect metal surfaces in a swimming pool environment. Certain
DRAWN BY: ___________ types of fabric duct(airtight) with appropriate grilles sewn in are also a good choice.
For details Follow ASHRAE STANDARDS.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

B. Insulated Flexible Ducts:
APPROVED
1. UL 181, Class 1, airtight polyester material mechanically interlocked into 6mm, 30
ENGINEERING DEPT. gage galvanized spiral helix; 25mm fiberglass insulation with K-factor of not more
than 0.033 W/m-K ; reinforced metalized (fire retardant) outer jacket.
2. Pressure Rating: 3.0 kPa
OPERATING DEPT. 3. Maximum Velocity: 25.4 m/sec
4. Temperature Range: -6.67°C to 121°C
C. Duct Hangers and Supports: Galvanized steel

CERTIFIED
Longest Size of Maximum Spacing, Trapeze Angle Hanger Rod
BY: ___________________
Duct, mm. mm. Sizes, mm. Diameter, mm.
DATE: _________________
0 - 450 3000 25 x 25 x 3 10
475 - 750 3000 40 x 40 x 3 10
775 - 1050 3000 40 x 40 x 5 10
1075 - 1500 2400 50 x 50 x 5 10
1525 - 2100 2400 50 x 50 x 5 15
2125 - 2400 1800 65 x 65 x 6 15
15890-02

FOR 428
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistant, compatible with mating materials;
liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; galvanized steel, threaded both ends.
2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with TCS-K-100.01 and SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing
and sealing for the required operating pressure. Straight ducts and fittings shall be of
quality-controlled and factory-manufactured.
B. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct
on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil
turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated
metal with glass fiber insulation.
REVISIONS C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15° divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30° divergence upstream of equipment and 45° convergence downstream.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
D. Provide standard 45° lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90° conical
tee connections are used.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15890-03

FOR 429
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Air Turning Devices

B. Back Draft Dampers
C. Splitter Dampers
D. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers
E. Duct Access Doors
F. Duct Test Holes
G. Fire Dampers
H. Flexible Duct Connections
I. Volume Control Dampers
REVISIONS J. Duct Smoke Detectors

DATE: _________________
A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
B. NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire Protection Service
E. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers

OPERATING DEPT.
F. UL 555S - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems
G. TCS-K-100.01 - SEC-ERB Construction Standard - HVAC Systems and

CERTIFIED
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
BY: ___________________
2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES
DATE: _________________
A. Turning vanes in all rectilinear elbows shall be single vane construction as

recommended by SMACNA. Angle of turning vanes shall correspond to angle of
Elbow.
B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimensions; steel or aluminum

construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

FOR 430
494
‫لمشعقي‬
15910-01
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. General
1. Backdraft dampers shall be of galvanized steel or aluminum multi-blade type.
2. Blades shall have felt strips riveted or crimped in place and shall be joined
together with connection bars.
3. Each blade shall be rigidly attached to a pivot rod. The rod shall extend into
oil-impregnated bronze bushings or anti-friction bearings located in the
frames.
B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers size 450 x 450 mm or Smaller, Furnished with Air
Moving Equipment
1. Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
REVISIONS C. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum (150 mm) width,
DATE: _________________
with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner
with 90° stop, steel ball bearings and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device
CHK’D BY: ____________
to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
APPROVED
2.03 SPLITTER DAMPERS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Material: Same gauge as duct to 600mm. size in either direction, and 2 gauges heavier
for sizes over 600mm..
B. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with
OPERATING DEPT. continuous hinge or rod.
C. Operator: Minimum of 6mm diameter rod in self-aligning, universal joint action, flanged
bushing with set screw.
CERTIFIED 2.04 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS
BY: ___________________
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555 and UL 555S.
DATE: _________________
B. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.
C. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage (1.5 mm) galvanized steel frame and
blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles,
stainless steel jamb seals, 3.2 x 13 mm plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel
closure spring, blade stops and lock, and 13 mm actuator shaft.
D. Operators: UL listed and labeled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single
phase, 60 Hz. Provide end switches to indicate damper position. Locate damper
operator of duct link to damper operating shaft.
15910-02

FOR 431
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Normally Open Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, closing upon actuation
of electric thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant
sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices to ensure positive closure
for units mounted horizontally.
2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 25 mm (1 in.) thick
insulation with sheet metal cover.
B. Access doors smaller than 300 mm square may be secured with cam locks.
C. Provide two hinges and two cam locks for sizes up to 450 mm square, three hinges and
two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 600 x 1200 mm.
Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
REVISIONS
D. Access doors to fire dampers shall be provided in the duct for inspection and
service to smoke/fire damper and fusible link. Access doors shall be airtight
DRAWN BY: ___________ and conform to the recommendations of NFPA and SMACNA.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

2.06 DUCT TEST HOLES
APPROVED A. Drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,
threaded plugs, threaded or twist-on metal caps or any other test plugs of approved
ENGINEERING DEPT.
materials.
B. Location of test holes shall be in accordance with National Environmental Balancing

Bureau (NEBB) Standards.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.07 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555.
B. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.

CERTIFIED
C. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, gage 22 (0.76 mm) frame, stainless steel closure
BY: ___________________ spring and lightweight, heat retarding non-asbestos fabric blanket.
DATE: _________________
D. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel
closure spring and latches for closure under airflow conditions. Configure with blades out
of air stream.
E. Fusible Link: UL 33, separate at 71C with adjustable link straps for combination
fire/balancing dampers.
2.08 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
15910-03

FOR 432
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire retarding neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA
90A, minimum density 1.0 kg/m2.
2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 75 mm wide.
3. Metal: 75 mm wide, 24 gage (0.6 mm thick) galvanized steel.
2.09 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct height of 300 mm. and below.
B. Multi-Blade Dampers: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes for
duct height of over 300 mm. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated
or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.
C. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 300 mm. and smaller, provide end bearings. On
multiple blade dampers, provide oil impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
REVISIONS
D. Quadrants:
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and mullet blade dampers.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand off mounting brackets,
APPROVED
bases, or adapters.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3. Where rod lengths exceed 750 mm provide regulator at both ends.
2.10 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
Ionization smoke detector designed for air handling use in systems with air velocity from
OPERATING DEPT. 2.54 to 15.73 m/sec. range, installed with sampling tube, unit contains red alarm LED,
self-contained to trip fan unit when unit senses product of combustion, reset type.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15910-04

FOR 433
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15940 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Light Troffer Diffusers
B. Linear Slot Diffusers
C. Registers and Grilles
D. Louvers
E. Disc Valves
REVISIONS F. Ceiling Diffusers
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.02 REFERENCES
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Outlets and
APPROVED
Inlets
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
C. TCS-K-100.01 - SEC-ERB Construction Standard - HVAC Systems and

OPERATING DEPT. D. SES-K-100 - SEC-ERB Engineering Standard - HVAC Systems Design
E. AMCA 500 - Test Method and Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
F. ANSI/AHRI 650 (formerly ARI 650 standard) - Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets
CERTIFIED
G. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
BY: ___________________
H. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
DATE: _________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHT TROFFER DIFFUSERS
A. Supply: Double plenum constructed independent of light troffer with volume and air
pattern controllers adjustable through slot opening in luminaire face, round or oval top
crossover air inlet and are designed with dampers on each side of diffuser (at the
crossover inlet) that internally equalize flow along the full length of the slot discharge.
15940-01

FOR 434
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Fabrication: Galvanized steel with welded or soldered joints and finish matte black inside
with insulation.
2.02 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER
A. Type: Flanged type, continuous slot, with adjustable air deflectors per slot. “Hit and
Miss” damper shall also be provided.
B. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white baked enamel finish.
C. Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw support clips for suspension system
mounting and gasket end cap.
2.03 REGISTERS AIR GRILLES
A. Supply and return air grilles and register frames shall have overlap margin with sponge
REVISIONS rubber gasket, furnished with pierced screw holes and mounting screws.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Supply and return registers shall be furnished with opposed blade volume control damper
DATE: _________________
constructed of heavy gage galvanized steel and operated by key or arm from face of the
register. If indicated in the Contract Drawings, the damper shall be furnished with spring
CHK’D BY: ____________
closing and UL-listed fusible link for 71°C (160°F).
APPROVED
Provide manufacturer’s standard registers and grilles; of size, shape, capacity and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
type indicated and as required for complete installation.
Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent surfaces.
Refer to the Contract Drawings and Specifications, for types of wall construction which will
contain each type of wall register and grille.
OPERATING DEPT.
Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish.
Return Type: Curved vanes grilles having fixed horizontal louvers arranged to overlap
CERTIFIED each other to be vision proof with the deflection facing away from the line of sight, 32 mm.
width frame with rubber gasket finished with pierced screw holes and screws.
BY: ___________________
2.04 LOUVERS.
DATE: _________________
A. Louvers shall be compatible with adjacent substrate and specifically manufactured to fit
into construction openings with accurate and adequate support. On inside face of exterior
louvers, provide anodized aluminum wire mesh bird screens mounted in removable
frames. Provide manufacturer’s standard louvers of size, shape, capacity and type
indicated and as required for complete installation. Provide louvers with a baked enamel
finish. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent
substrate, and specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit
and adequate support, for weatherproof installation.
15940-02

FOR 435
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Sand Trap Louvers: Designed for an air intake application to separate airborne sand and
dust mixture from main air stream. Test dust distribution efficiency at 80% on 20 to 200
microns and 50% on 1 to 70 microns.
Fabrication: Aluminum construction 2mm thick frames 4.23mm thick blades and shall be
provided with self-emptying sand drain holes from the base.
Accessory: Aluminum wire bird screen, 13mm x 13mm, 1.6mm diameter wire.
Outdoor air louver: Aluminum frame & louver with sand dust filter screen.
2.05 DISC VALVES.
Provide disc valves for exhaust air with valve disc fitted to valve seat by means of an
adjustable valve spindle, complete with separate mounting frame and connecting socket
including sealing ring. Front section shall be produced in stove-enameled steel sheet and
parts shall be made of galvanized sheet steel.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.06 CEILING DIFFUSERS.

DATE: _________________
Ceiling air diffusers shall be used for air supply and/or air return as indicated on Contract
CHK’D BY: ____________
Drawings and air outlets and inlets schedules.
APPROVED
Provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air diffusers of size, shape, capacity and type
ENGINEERING DEPT.
indicated and as required for complete installation.
Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that
are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15940-03

FOR 436
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15975 – HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Complete System of Automatic Controls
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 85 - Automatic Control Terminology for Heating, Ventilating and

Air Conditioning
B. ASME MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Controls
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REVISIONS 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Pressure Differential Switch

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

Switch shall be provided with plastic housing, EPDM membrane, galvanized steel
mounting bracket, PVC tubing and IP 54 protection standard. Maximum operating
APPROVED
pressure & temperature shall be 50 mbar and 65ºC respectively. The contact system &
rating shall be 1 x SPDT switching element & 250 VAC, 1A respectively.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Thermostat
Low voltage, adjustable to control compressor stages and heating stages in sequence
with delay. Minimum two (2) stages for cooling and two (2) stages for heating.
OPERATING DEPT.
2.02 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
Ionization smoke detector designed for air handling use in systems with air velocity from
2.54 to 15.73 m/sec. range, installed with sampling tube, unit contains red alarm LED,
CERTIFIED
self-contained to trip fan unit when unit senses product of combustion, reset type.
BY: ___________________ 2.03 HVAC CONTROL PANEL

DATE: _________________
A. The panel shall be wall-mounted, NEMA 4 construction, gage 16 minimum, sheet metal
cabinet with hinged front door and all control devices mounted inside. Face of panel shall
mount ammeters, voltmeters, selector switches, indicator lights and push buttons.
B. Locate control panel at Mechanical Room.
15975-01

FOR 437
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Testing, Adjustment and Balancing of HVAC Air Systems

B. Measurement of Final Operating Conditions of HVAC Systems
C. Sound Measurement of Equipment Operating Conditions
D. Vibration Measurement of Equipment Operating Conditions
1.02 REFERENCE
TCS-K-100.01 - SEC-ERB Engineering Standard - HVAC Systems and

DRAWN BY: ___________ The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY the following items for review:
DATE: _________________
A. Testing Organization: The CONTRACTOR shall submit the name of the organization he
CHK’D BY: ____________
proposes to employ within sixty days after contract award. The submittal shall further
APPROVED
include the certified individual qualifications of all persons responsible for supervising and
performing the actual WORK and the qualifications of the independent testing and
ENGINEERING DEPT.
balancing supervisor certifying the report.
B. Preliminary Report: Plans and specifications shall be reviewed by the testing

organization prior to installation of any of the affected systems, and a written report
submitted indicating any deficiencies in the systems that will preclude the proper
OPERATING DEPT. adjusting, balancing and testing of the systems.
C. Agenda: An agenda shall be submitted to and approved by the COMPANY prior to start
of testing and balancing WORK. The agenda shall include the following:
CERTIFIED 1. General description of each air system with its associated equipment and operation
cycles for heating, intermediate and cooling.
BY: ___________________
2. A preliminary test report with listing of all air flow and air terminal measurements to
DATE: _________________
be performed.
3. Proposed selection points for sound measurements. List shall include typical
spaces, such as offices, conference room, library, etc.
4. Specific test procedures and parameters for determining specified quantities (e.g.,
flow, sound levels, etc.) from the actual field measurements to establish compliance
with contract requirements.
15990-01

FOR 438
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Procedure Reporting: Specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals
shall specify type of instrument to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch)
and factors for:
1. Air Terminal Configuration
2. Flow Direction (supply return or exhaust)
3. Velocity Corrections
4. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the measurement and setting of air flow facilities provided or specified
for the systems, recording data, making tests and preparing reports. The WORK in this
section shall not be commenced until the completion of the systems.
B. Qualifications: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified testing

REVISIONS organization to perform the testing and balancing WORK. Prior to commencing WORK
under this section, the testing organization shall have been approved by the COMPANY.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
The criteria for determining qualifications shall be as prescribed in TCS-K-100.01 or the
testing organization shall have submitted proof to satisfy the COMPANY that the
CHK’D BY: ____________
organization meets the technical qualification acceptable to the COMPANY.
APPROVED
C. Procedures: WORK shall be accomplished in accordance with the Agenda required
ENGINEERING DEPT.
herein. Procedures described herein shall be followed and, in general, shall be in
accordance with standards mentioned in TCS-K-100.01.
D. Definitions: The following definitions shall apply in this section:
OPERATING DEPT. 1. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal
equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).
2. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (sub mains, branches
and terminals) in accordance with specified design quantities.
CERTIFIED
3. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of WORK operations
BY: ___________________
to yield reproducible results.
DATE: _________________
4. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collection of test data in logical order
for submission and review. Data should also form the permanent record which shall
be used as the basis for any future testing, adjusting and balancing required.
5. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
15990-02

FOR 439
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Accurately record actual locations of flow measuring stations, balancing dampers and
rough setting.
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the quality of all WORK and material to be
used in the WORK and shall propose a program for inspection and testing so as to
achieve the specified design requirement.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a qualified representative on site during all operations.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence WORK to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of

WORK before substantial completion of PROJECT.
B. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety system with
REVISIONS COMPANY.
DRAWN BY: ___________ PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

DATE: _________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
3.01 EXAMINATION
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to COMPANY.
B. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions that prevent

system balance.
OPERATING DEPT. C. Where, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as
observed.
D. Beginning of WORK means acceptance of existing conditions.
CERTIFIED 3.02 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
BY: ___________________
A. Verification: Prior to proceeding with final testing activities, all prerequisites specified in
TCS-K-100.01 must be verified and confirmed for completeness.
DATE: _________________
B. Allowable Tolerances: All allowable tolerances for the test shall be in accordance with
the standards mentioned in TCS-K-100.01.
C. Procedures and Instruments - General:
1. Requirements: All systems and components thereof shall be adjusted to perform as

required by the contract drawings and specifications.
15990-03

FOR 440
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance

with the approved agenda.
a) All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration

histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Each test
instrument shall be calibrated by an approved laboratory or by the
manufacturer. The COMPANY has the right to request instrument recalibration,
or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of
readings is questionable.
b) All instruments shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers' certified

instructions.
c) All labor, instruments and appliances required shall be furnished by the

CONTRACTOR. Permanently installed instruments used for the tests shall not
be installed until just prior to the tests to avoid damage and changes in
calibration.
REVISIONS D. System Procedures: All systems procedures for air, sound and vibration tests shall be in
accordance with TCS-K-100.01.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.03 CERTIFIED REPORTS - GENERAL
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Submittal: Three (3) copies of the reports described herein, covering air system
APPROVED
performance, sound pressure levels, and vibration tests shall be submitted to the
COMPANY prior to final tests and inspection.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Report Forms: The certified report shall include complete information, final/actual data as
adjusted to conform to the design requirements.
C. Instrument Records: Types, serial numbers and dates of calibration of all instruments
OPERATING DEPT. shall be included.
D. Reports: Reports shall identify conspicuously items in the system summary not
conforming to contract requirements, or obvious maloperation and design deficiencies.
CERTIFIED E. Certification: The reports shall be certified by an independent registered test supervisor
or engineer who is well-versed in the field of testing and who is not affiliated with any
BY: ___________________
organization involved in the design or construction phases of the contract. Certification
shall include checking of adherence to agenda, calculations, procedures and evaluation
DATE: _________________
of final summaries.
3.04 FINAL TESTS, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Scope: Test shall be made to demonstrate that capacities and general performance of
each system comply with contract requirements.
B. At the time of final inspection, the CONTRACTOR shall recheck, in the presence of the
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, random selections of data recorded in the certified
report.
15990-04

FOR 441
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the COMPANY.
D. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for WORK forming
basis of certified report.
E. Selections for recheck (specific plus random), in general, shall not exceed 25% of the
total number tabulated in the report, except that special system may require a complete
recheck for safety reasons.
F. Retests: Where random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of 10% or more from, or a
sound level of 2 dB or more greater than that recorded in the certified report listings, at
10% or more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be automatically rejected. In
the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data
recorded, new certified reports submitted and new inspection tests made, all at no
additional cost to the COMPANY.
G. Marking of Settings: Following final acceptance of certified reports by the COMPANY, the
settings of all valves, dampers and other adjustment devices shall be permanently
REVISIONS marked by the CONTRACTOR so that adjustment can be restored where disturbed at
any time. Devices shall not be marked until after final acceptance.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
15990-05

FOR 442
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This Section covers the scope of the electrical requirements, material specifications and
electrical workmanship.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The system description of this PROJECT includes the following:
1. Acceptance Tests and Calibrations

2. Conduits and Fittings
REVISIONS 3. Low Voltage Wires and Cables
4. Boxes
DRAWN BY: ___________ 5. Wiring Devices
DATE: _________________
6. Cabinets/Enclosures
7. Supports and Fasteners
CHK’D BY: ____________
8. Electrical Identification
APPROVED
9. Main Distribution Panelboard
10. Grounding
ENGINEERING DEPT.
11. Equipment Panelboards
12. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
13. Motor Starters/Controllers
14. Safety/Disconnect Switches
15. Lamps
OPERATING DEPT. 16. Ballasts
17. Lighting
18. Fire Detection and Alarm System
19. Public Address and Audio-Visual System
CERTIFIED 1.03 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
BY: ___________________
The general description of the scope of the electrical requirements includes mainly, but not
limited to, the following:
DATE: _________________
A. Low Voltage Power Distribution.

B. Receptacles and Miscellaneous Power Loads.
C. Indoor Lighting.
D. Outdoor Lighting.
E. Fire Detection and Alarm System.
F. Motor Controls/Wiring.
G. Grounding System.
H. Public Address and Audio-Visual System.
I. Testing and Commissioning.
16010 - 01

FOR 443
494
‫لمشعقي‬
A. Applicable Standards
1. Codes: All electrical WORK shall conform with the requirements and
recommendations of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, COMPANY
standards and all local codes and ordinances.
In case of conflicts between codes, the COMPANY standards shall prevail. The
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall be notified for final acceptance.
2. Standards: The specifications and standards of the organizations are by reference

made a part of these specifications and all electrical WORK, unless otherwise
indicated, shall be installed in accordance with their requirements and
recommendations wherever applicable.
Saudi Arabian Standard Organization (SASO)

National Electrical Code (NEC)
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)
REVISIONS
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
DRAWN BY: ___________
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
DATE: _________________ Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM)
CHK’D BY: ____________ National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA, NFC)
APPROVED Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
ENGINEERING DEPT. Saudi Electricity COMPANY (COMPANY) Standards
IEC Publications
B. Obligations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all additional equipment and accessories
if required to comply with above-mentioned standards. These shall be done at no
additional cost to the COMPANY.
OPERATING DEPT.
C. Interferences. The CONTRACTOR shall plan and coordinate the WORK properly to
eliminate interferences with other trades. All new installations shall be neat.
D. Electrical Materials. Provide all materials used in this WORK, unless particularly
CERTIFIED
specified otherwise, that are new and free from flaws or imperfections.
BY: ___________________ E. Excavations, Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction. Execute all excavation, trenching,
DATE: _________________ backfilling and compaction required for this WORK in accordance with the relevant
sections of the specifications and design drawings.
F. Sleeves and Inserts. Furnish and locate all sleeves and inserts required for this WORK
in accordance with relevant sections of the specifications.
G. Painting. Paint exposed electrical equipment and materials in accordance with relevant
sections. Limit painting of factory- finished equipment to touching up unless specified
otherwise.
16010 – 02

FOR 444
494
‫لمشعقي‬
H. Testing. In addition to testing required under these specifications, the COMPANY

reserves the right to conduct independent acceptance tests on such portions of the
installation as they see fit. Acceptance tests will be to determine fulfillment of contract
requirements and will be conducted in presence of authorized representatives of the
CONTRACTOR and the COMPANY. Timely notification of acceptance tests will be
given. Correct all deficiencies in materials and workmanship revealed by the acceptance
tests and retests.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Applicable.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16010 - 03

FOR 445
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16050 - ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND CALIBRATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section provides for the testing of low voltage circuit breakers, molded case circuit breakers
and electrical components.
A. Applicable Standards. Comply with NFPA-70B, Electrical Equipment Maintenance.
B. Tests
REVISIONS 1. Manufacturer's Test and Data
DRAWN BY: ___________ a) The manufacturer shall perform the following test for the circuit breakers:
DATE: _________________
i. Test each breaker electrically for proper tripping characteristics by passing
CHK’D BY: ____________
60Hz. sinusoidal low voltage current through each pole, one at a time, with
APPROVED
test current injection at the primary disconnects. Perform tests at operating
trip device settings as specified by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Include this information in the report plus the record of the settings "as left"
after calibration and adjustment of trip devices for conformance with
required pickup characteristics.
ii. Observe the following test procedure and record test results (test current
OPERATING DEPT. and elapsed time at tripping) for each pole; state whether or not breaker
tripping is within the manufacturer's tolerances:
Apply sufficient current to actuate each mode of the trip device (i.e. long
time pickup, long time delay band, short time pickup, short time delay
CERTIFIED band, instantaneous pickup, ground pickup and ground delay band as
applicable).
BY: ___________________
iii. Test breakers having thermal magnetic trips in a temperature controlled
DATE: _________________
environment maintained at 40C plus or minus 3C.
A temperature stabilization period of 15 minutes is required prior to testing

the inverse-time automatic tripping characteristics. Test each pole of each
breaker at 90% and 200% of its continuous current rating. Replace any
breaker or trip device which trips within 10 minutes at 90%, or which fails to
trip at 200% within the time indicated in the following table:
16050 - 01

FOR 446
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Rated Continuous Max Tripping

Current, Amperes Time, Minutes
15-40 2
50 4
60-100 6
125-225 8
250-400 10
500-600 12
700-800 14
1000 16
1200 18
iv. Test each pole of each breaker for automatic instantaneous tripping with
slowly rising current. Replace any breaker or trip device which fails to
operate within the following values:
Non-Adjustable Trips : +/- 20% of fixed setting
REVISIONS Adjustable Trips : +/- 10% of the high setting and +/- 25% of the
low setting of the rms values of the
DRAWN BY: ___________ instantaneous tripping current.
DATE: _________________
b) The CONTRACTOR shall submit test certificate to the COMPANY after
CHK’D BY: ____________
completion of the manufacturer's tests.
APPROVED
2. Field Test and Data (By CONTRACTOR)
ENGINEERING DEPT.
a) General: Institute and maintain rigorous precautions for all test procedures
application of potentials above 30 volts; erect barricades around danger areas,
post suitable warning signs and guardhouse as necessary to ensure that
unauthorized persons do not approach energized conductors. Maintain
OPERATING DEPT. telephone or voice radio contact between potential injection point and energized
remote locations during high potential testing operations.
b) Low Voltage Circuit Breaker:
CERTIFIED i. Preparatory WORK: Prior to testing, remove each breaker from its
compartment and inspect the breaker visually for physical damage.
BY: ___________________
ii. Record the breaker identification, including the COMPANY's designation,
DATE: _________________
manufacturer's ratings, serial number, trip device type, ranges and time
bands.
iii. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations.
iv. Make a circuit continuity check on each pole with the circuit breaker in the
closed position.
v. If desired, apply 300 percent of breaker rated continuous current to each
pole to determine that the circuit breaker will trip on an overload.
16050 - 02

FOR 447
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1.03 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES
All power cables and control cables shall be tested in accordance with 11-TMSS-10.
Instrumentation and signal cables shall be tested as per 11-SMSS-11, Rev. 2. All the test
results shall be submitted.
1.04 MOTOR AND MOTOR CONTROLS
All motor power and control wiring shall be checked, inspected and tested for insulation
resistance, circuit continuity, wiring connections and proper grounding. Test shall be made prior
to energizing circuits. All motor starters and control devices shall be checked, inspected and
tested for proper operation. The CONTRACTOR shall record and the complete nameplate data
of all motors overload relay heaters.
The motor insulation resistance values may also be tested and submitted.
1.05 LIGHTING SYSTEM
Test the insulation resistance and continuity of all lighting branch circuits. All luminaires shall be
REVISIONS properly aimed, aligned and supported. Prior to the insulation resistance test for branch circuits,
ballasts of all lighting fixtures shall be disconnected.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
1.06 SPECIAL SYSTEMS
CHK’D BY: ____________
Exercise care in the checking and testing of all electrical systems so as not to damage special
APPROVED
electronic or instrument circuits. The CONTRACTOR shall not undertake to check or test
special electronic or instrument circuits beyond his ability or responsibility. The CONTRACTOR
ENGINEERING DEPT.
shall test and check the continuity and wire insulation resistance only for instrumentation or
similar special wiring systems prior to final equipment connections.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16050 - 03

FOR 448
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16111 - CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section covers all metallic and plastic conduits and fittings.
A. Applicable Standards. UL labeling of all conduits and fittings.

B. COMPANY Materials Standards Specifications, 23-TMSS-01 and Engineering Standards
TES-P-119.25.
REVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2.01 MATERIALS
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Conduits
APPROVED
1. Rigid Conduit: Rigid conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized heavy wall with
ENGINEERING DEPT.
threaded ends, hot-dipped galvanized fittings and threads. Underground conduit
shall be minimum 25mm size, PVC coated. Rigid steel conduit shall be in
accordance with UL 6 and NFPA 70 and shall be provided in standard 3 meters (10
ft.) lengths.
OPERATING DEPT. 2. Flexible Conduit: Flexible raceway shall be steel in accordance with UL 360.
3. Non-Metallic Conduit:
a) Rigid PVC, Schedule 40 conduits shall confirm to ASTM D1785.

CERTIFIED
b) PVC conduits type DB shall conform to COMPANY Standard 23-TMSS-01,
BY: ___________________
NEMA TC 8, UL 651, ASTM D4396 and Article 347 of NFPA 70. Conduit
fittings, elbows and cement shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
DATE: _________________
c) All joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with the recommendations of

the manufacturer.
B. Conduit Fittings
1. General: Conduit to motors and other electrical equipment subject to vibration shall
terminate in conduit fittings, with the final connection being made with liquid-tight
flexible conduit and connectors provided in accordance with UL 360.
16111 - 01

FOR 449
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. Flexible Connectors: Couplings, connectors and fittings shall be of a type

specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose. Use flexible liquid-tight
conduit and connectors where final connection to equipment with rigid conduit is not
practicable, such as to equipment with adjustable mountings, etc.
3. Steel Fittings: For rigid steel conduit, provide zinc-coated, cast malleable, ferrous
metal, threaded fittings. All steel fittings shall be hot-dipped, galvanized threads.
4. All conduits penetrating building exterior walls, roofs or membranes shall be

provided with a water-tight fitting, pitch pocket, flange or membrane clamping ring to
provide a water-tight construction.
5. Vertical Runs: The long vertical runs shall be supported at an interval not to exceed
3 meters. The short vertical runs shall be supported at each location.
6. Outside Diameter: The outside diameter of any raceway buried in concrete shall not
exceed one-third of the thickness of the slab, wall or beam in which it is placed.
REVISIONS 7. Bends and Offsets: Avoid using bends and offsets wherever possible. Field bends
shall be so as to avoid changing the internal diameter of conduit inside. Field bends
DRAWN BY: ___________ shall be free from kinks, indentations or flat surfaces and shall be made with
DATE: _________________
approved conduit bending devices. Individual bends shall not exceed 90 degrees
and not more than 270 degrees total bend shall be allowed in any one conduit run,
CHK’D BY: ____________
except where a pull box is used.
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General. Bends shall not be more than 90°. Use manufacturer's recommended heating
OPERATING DEPT. units for making all bends in plastic conduits. Care must be exercised to prevent damage
to the conduit and that the internal diameter of the conduit shall not be effectively
reduced. Install conduits with vertical runs plumb and horizontal runs level and parallel or
perpendicular to principal structural features. Limit the number of bends between outlets
to the equivalent of three at 90°. Make all joints tight and do not use running threads.
CERTIFIED Clean inside conduits before inserting conductors. All conduit ends shall be reamed prior
to installation.
BY: ___________________
B. Radius of Conduit Bends: Comply with Table 346-10 of the NEC for the minimum
DATE: _________________
bending radius on both field bends and factory bends.
C. Conduit in Concrete: Anchor to reinforcing all conduits in concrete slabs and columns;
plug or cap open ends until concreting and masonry operations are completed.
D. Conduits Above Ceilings: Above suspended ceilings, support conduits independently of

the ceiling suspension structure.
16111 - 02

FOR 450
494
‫لمشعقي‬
E. Conduit Support: Use threaded rods and approved hangers or malleable iron conduit
straps with backing plates for supporting single run. Use trapeze hangers consisting of
double-netted threaded rods and channels or angles of 12 gauge (minimum) steel for
supporting multiple runs. Do not secure hangers to building structure with set screw type
beam clamps or C-clamps. Locate supports at intervals not exceeding the values of NEC
Table (346-12).
F. Steel Conduits Below Grade: Provide sand surround 150 mm for all conduits installed
below grade. Use only PVC coated steel conduits where steel conduits are required.
G. PVC Conduits Below Grade: Conduit shall not extend above ground. Where above
grade extension is required, a concrete encased transition using threaded male or female
PVC adaptor to PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be made underground. Coated
conduit shall extend at least 150 mm above grade.
H. Openings: Block out openings in the structure for electrical conduits, shall be sleeved
with 1.29mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel sleeves extending 25mm above finish floor
grade. Further, these openings shall be blocked top and bottom with a 2.05mm (12
REVISIONS gauge) galvanized steel sheet cover and the intervening cavity filled with asbestos fibers
impregnated with a fireproof binder.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
3.02 APPLICATION
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Rigid steel, galvanized conduits (RSGC) shall be installed in all exposed locations,
APPROVED
minimum size shall be 20 mm diameter. Where in contact with soil, they shall be PVC
coated and minimum size shall be 25mm diameter.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Rigid PVC, ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 conduits of minimum 25mm diameter with all
fittings securely fixed on the same shall be used for all concealed/embedded wiring.
C. PVC conduits used for outdoor underground applications shall be type “DB” for direct
OPERATING DEPT. buried and type “EB” for concrete encased installations. Underground conduits/cables
installations shall be done per COMPANY latest Standards TES-P-104.05 and SDCS-2.
D. Flexible metal conduits shall be used in the building for connection of lighting fixtures,
motors and equipment subject to vibration, minimum conduit size shall be 12mm
CERTIFIED diameter. Flexible conduits for outdoor use shall be liquid-tight.
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16111 - 03

FOR 451
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16120 - LOW VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section covers low voltage conductors for use up to 600V.
A. Applicable Standards: UL labeling or listing of all insulations and jackets.
B. Power and/or control cables shall conform to COMPANY Engineering Standard TES-P-
119.29 and Materials Standard Specifications 11-TMSS-10.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with relevant section.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
APPROVED
2.01 MATERIALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Wires and Cables: Provide new low voltage wires and cables free from kinks, cuts and
abrasions at the time of installation, in accordance with the following:
1. Main service cables and outdoor underground circuits shall be copper, stranded,
OPERATING DEPT. XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed, thermosetting material, 90°C maximum operating
temperature, heat and moisture resistant, and flame retardant, rated for 600V.
2. All interior, branch circuits and control wires shall be copper, PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed, stranded, thermoplastic material, 70°C maximum operating temperature,
CERTIFIED heat and moisture resistant, and flame retardant, rated for 600V. Minimum size of
control wire shall be 2.5 mm2, power, lighting and ground wires shall be 4 mm2
BY: ___________________
minimum.
DATE: _________________
B. Connectors and Terminals. Provide connectors and terminals for all splices and terminal
connections in accordance with the following schedule:
1. For conductor sizes 6 mm2 and smaller, make all splices and terminal connections
using one or two pieces insulated twist-on wire nuts, splice and terminal.
Use "Ring-Tongue" lugs on all strap-screw device terminals; do not exceed 2 lugs
per terminal. Do not use crimping tools which are not specifically designed for the
application.
16120 - 01

FOR 452
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2. For conductor sizes 10 mm2 and larger, make all splices, taps and terminal
connections using UL listed cast and machined high conductivity connectors of the
circular clamp type with multiple socket-head cap screws. Except where insulated
covers are provided, fill voids and irregularities on connections with "Scotchfil"
insulation putty and cover neatly with 2 half-lapped layers on Scotch No. 88
insulating tape and 1 half-lapped layer of friction tape.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricants: Powdered soapstone or other commercially produced wire

lubricant may be utilized to ease wire pulling; however, any such lubricant shall be of a
type to produce no deteriorating effects on conductor insulation or on the interior of
associated conduits and shall be approved by the wire manufacturer.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Color Coding:
1. Wires and cables shall be factory color coded integral pigmentation with a separate
color for each phase and neutral conductor.
REVISIONS
2. The color code as indicated below shall be used consistently throughout the
DRAWN BY: ___________ electrical system installation. Use of paint as a substitute for color coding is not
DATE: _________________
acceptable.
CHK’D BY: ____________
Conductor Main Service Feeder Internal Wiring
APPROVED
Phase A Red Brown
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Phase B Yellow Red
Phase C Blue Orange
Neutral Black White
Equipment Ground Green with yellow stripes Green with yellow stripes
OPERATING DEPT.
B. For specified insulations and jackets not manufactured by the selected vendor with
integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color code with Scotch
No. 35 color coding tape on each conductor entering every box, trough, cabinet and wire
way and at intervals not exceeding 150 mm in wire ways, trench duct and other locations
where conductors are continuously accessible.
CERTIFIED
C. Conductor Identification. Other than color-coding, conductor identification is required only

BY: ___________________ when conductor numbering systems are shown on the Drawings.
DATE: _________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not pull wire or cable through any box, fitting or enclosure where change of
raceway alignment or direction occurs; do not cut strands from conductors to fit lugs or
terminals; and do not bend conductors to less than recommended radius as set forth in
NEC 300-34.
16120 - 02

FOR 453
494
‫لمشعقي‬
B. Wiring in Enclosures: Form and tie in a neat and orderly manner all conductors in
panelboards, cabinets, control panels, motor controllers, wire ways and wiring troughs,
providing circuit and conductor identification. Limit spacing between ties to 150 mm and
provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure.
C. Wire Supports: Provide suitable wire supports in accordance with NFPA 70, Article
300-19 in all vertical runs.
D. Raceways: All raceways shall contain a separate grounding conductor in accordance

with NFPA 70, Article 250-95. This grounding conductor shall be in addition to the
number of conductors indicated on the drawing unless the ground itself is noted.
E. Splices, Connections and Tags: Provide all necessary materials for all splices,
connections and tags. Connectors shall be crimped “compression type” in accordance
with UL 486.
F. The neutral conductor cable shall be full size as the phase conductor.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16120 - 03

FOR 454
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16130 - BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install all boxes as required for the PROJECT.
Applicable Standards. Conform with COMPANY Standard TES-P-119.25 and UL Standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REVISIONS
2.01 MATERIALS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. Boxes
CHK’D BY: ____________
1. General: Provide outlet, tap, junction, pull and floor boxes with screw-fastened
APPROVED
covers. Provide removable, flame retardant, insulating cable supports in all boxes
with any dimension exceeding 1070mm. Do not use handy, utility, gem, device or
ENGINEERING DEPT.
switch boxes. All boxes shall conform to UL Standards.
2. Tap, Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide boxes constructed of welded and galvanized
sheet steel of sizes required by NEC. For embedded PVC conduits, PVC coated
cast iron/steel junction boxes shall be used. Grounding screws shall be provided in
OPERATING DEPT. each junction box.
3. Weatherproof Boxes: Where required, provide weatherproof boxes, NEMA Type 4X

enclosures, with gasketed covers and flanges designed to prevent entrance of rain
water and corrosive atmosphere.
CERTIFIED
4. Watertight Boxes: Where required, watertight boxes constructed of galvanized cast
BY: ___________________
iron with gasketed, bolted-on covers with tapped holes in bosses or hubs for conduit
entrances with integrally cast mounting lugs.
DATE: _________________
5. Outlet Boxes
a) Exposed Wall or Ceiling Mounting: Provide cast ferrous metal boxes with
threaded connections for use with steel conduit.
b) Wall and Ceiling Boxes: All boxes shall be securely fastened on building
structure. Flush wall and ceiling boxes shall have a plaster ring, flush with
finished surface.
16130 - 01

FOR 455
494
‫لمشعقي‬
c) Pull Boxes: Pull boxes, where required, shall be sized in accordance with
NFPA 70, Article 370, as a minimum requirement.
d) Flush Installation in Suspended Ceiling: Provide 100 mm square (or gang)

boxes, 54 mm deep.
e) Accessories: Provide fixture studs, plaster rings, extension rings and covers as
required for the application. Use galvanized steel cover and device plates for
surface mounted indoor units and galvanized cast ferrous metal cover and
device plates with neoprene gaskets for outdoor units.
f) Flush Installation in Poured/Concrete Walls, Columns or Overhead Slabs:

Provide 100 mm octagonal boxes not less than 75 mm deep with removable
back plate and knockouts located to allow not less than 25 mm of concrete
cover on conduits.
REVISIONS PART 3 - EXECUTION
DRAWN BY: ___________ 3.01 INSTALLATION

DATE: _________________
Boxes: Mount all boxes rigidly and securely to the building structure. Install all boxes so that the
CHK’D BY: ____________
wiring contained in them is accessible. Install blanking devices or threaded plugs in all unused
APPROVED
holes.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
3.02 CLEANING
Clean all boxes thoroughly before installing covers.

OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16130 - 02

FOR 456
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes line voltage wiring devices and its accessories.
1.02 SCOPE
This section covers switches for control of low voltage branch circuits, low voltage receptacles and
cover plates, furnish and install the wiring devices specified herein and maintain uniformity of
manufacture throughout.
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. All wiring devices shall be BS/IEC compliant.

DATE: _________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.01 MATERIALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Switches:
1. Switches shall be European type.
2. Wiring terminals shall be of the screw type.

OPERATING DEPT.
3. Switches shall be rated 20A, 230V.
B. Receptacle Outlets:
CERTIFIED 1. Receptacle outlets shall be European type.
BY: ___________________ 2. Receptacle outlets shall be 20A. 230V, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type.
DATE: _________________
C. Weatherproof Receptacles
1. Weatherproof receptacles, mounted in flush or exposed cast metal box, with a

gasketed weatherproof cast metal plate and cap over each receptacle opening.
2. The cap shall be provided with a spring hinges flap.
16141 - 01

FOR 457
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Device Plates:
1. Plates shall be of the one-piece type. Provide plates for all outlets to suit the devices
installed.
2. Plates on unfinished walls or on exposed boxes shall be zinc-coated sheet metal

having rounded or beveled edges.
3. Plates on finished walls shall be stainless steel or of brass 1mm thick, provided with
beveled edges.
4. Screws shall be metal countersunk heads, in color to match finish of plate.
5. The use of sectional type device plates shall not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
REVISIONS 3.01 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
DRAWN BY: ___________ A. Conform to the mounting heights as stated in the applicable standards and as noted in
DATE: _________________
the drawings.
CHK’D BY: ____________
B. The type and heights of floor outlet shall not pose a tripping hazard.
APPROVED
C. The location of the receptacles shall be coordinated with the equipment and furniture
ENGINEERING DEPT.
arrangement. The minimum height of receptacles shall be 300mm above finished floor
level.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16141 - 02

FOR 458
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16160 - CABINETS / ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install all cabinets and enclosures as required for the PROJECT.
Applicable Standards: Conform with UL Standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REVISIONS
2.01 MATERIALS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
A. General: Provide cabinets and enclosures constructed of code-gauge sheet steel, each
with a hinged and gasketed door.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
B. Panelboard:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Enclosure shall be fabricated of code gauge, galvanized or stainless steel as
required, having multiple standard knockouts. Enclosure shall be minimum 510mm
wide and provided with integral gutter spaces of minimum 100mm on all sides.
Wiring gutters shall be provided with necessary wiring space where the feeders
supplying the mains and other electrical equipment are included. At least four (4)
OPERATING DEPT. interior mounting studs shall be provided for installation of panelboard. The panel
box shall be of three-piece construction, wrapper sheet for back and two sides with
removal top and bottom. Exterior and interior surfaces of the surface-mounted
panelboard shall be properly cleaned and finished with gray ANSI 61 paint over a
rust-inhibiting phosphated coating. The minimum thickness of the panelboard
CERTIFIED enclosure shall be in accordance with 31-TMSS-02.
BY: ___________________
2. Trim shall be fabricated from code gauge steel. Hinged door shall be provided.
Door shall be equipped with flush type cylinder lock and catch. Exterior and interior
DATE: _________________
surfaces of panelboard trim shall be properly cleaned and finished with ANSI 61 gray
paint over a rust-inhibiting phosphated coating.
3. Trim for flush mounted panelboards shall overlap the enclosure by at least 20mm all
around. Surface trims shall have the same width and height as the enclosure.
4. Trim shall be mountable by screwdriver without the need for special tools. Door
shall have directory frame and card with transparent cover.
16160 - 01

FOR 459
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Mount cabinets rigidly and with proper alignment on the building structure.
Install cabinet interior after all conduit connections are completed. Close unused cabinet
openings. The installation shall comply with the latest NEC requirements, if not specified.
B. Grounding: Refer to Section 16450.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16160 - 02

FOR 460
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTS AND FASTENERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This section covers supports and fastenings for properly mounting and anchoring all raceways,
equipment and fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
REVISIONS A. Steel Supports: Provide brackets and hangers fabricated from standard rolled structural
steel shapes or prefabricated structural systems.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Provide threaded steel rods of 10mm diameter where required. Use hot-dip galvanized
steel on installations exposed to the weather. Do not use chain except where detailed or
CHK’D BY: ____________
specifically required. Do not use perforated strip or wire.
APPROVED
B. Fastenings: Provide necessary fastenings in accordance with the following:
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1. Bolts and Nuts: ANSI regular series, semi-finished, hexagon, galvanized.
2. Lock Washers: ANSI medium, spring type, galvanized.
OPERATING DEPT. 3. Beam Clamps: Adjustable beam and angle clamps, galvanized.
4. Wall Anchors: Use 10 mm (3/8") toggle bolts in hollow tile and concrete block. Use
10mm (3/8") taper plug drive anchors in solid masonry and concrete. Do not use
fiber, lead, plastic or wood plugs; do not use expansion shields and lag bolts.
CERTIFIED
5. Overhead Concrete Slab Anchors: Poured in Place: For load less than 182 kg (400
BY: ___________________
lb), use 10mm (3/8) taper drive anchors. For loads more than 182 kg (400 lb), use
concrete inserts, cast-in-place.
DATE: _________________
16190 - 01

FOR 461
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Steel Support. Fabricate and install supports so that support installation does not weaken or
overload the building structure. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, do not impose the
weight of electrical equipment, raceways or fixtures on support provided for other trades or
systems. Secure steel supports to the building structure by means of bolting or welding. Do not
make connections with setscrew type beam clamps or C-clamps. Do not support loads from the
bottom chord member of trusses or open web steel joists except where diagonal members
attached to the bottom chord. Do not support loads from roof decking.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16190 - 02

FOR 462
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes electrical identification of all the installations provided under this
PROJECT.
Applicable Standards: Conform with applicable sections of NEMA and UL Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REVISIONS
2.01 NAMEPLATE
DRAWN BY: ___________
Provide a cover mounted stainless steel nameplate that contains permanent record on
DATE: _________________
equipment stating catalog, reference number, industry standard and other useful information.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.02 PANELBOARD DIRECTORY

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. Provide a directory frame and card with transparent cover on the door inside the panelboard.
2.03 COLOR CODING
Cables shall have their insulation color coded as per COMPANY practices. For color code,
refer to Section 16120.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION

CERTIFIED
A. Equip each panelboard, switch, circuit breakers, motor controller with a black laminated
phenolic nameplate each in 12 mm white letters in English and Arabic mounted on the
BY: ___________________
door (outside) with machine screws. Provide the following information on the nameplate:
DATE: _________________
1. Full Name of the Panelboard/Equipment Controlled

2. Numerical Designation
3. Operating Voltage
4. Number of Phases and Wires
3.02 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES
Fill in directory cards typewritten in English and Arabic and properly identify all branch circuits
loads.

16195 - 01

FOR 463
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16200 - MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Provide and install main distribution panelboard in accordance with the Contract
documents and COMPANY Standard 31-TMSS-02.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish main distribution panelboard complete with protective devices and equipment as
REVISIONS
shown on the drawings. The panelboard shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic
molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as shown on drawings. The
DRAWN BY: ___________ panelboard as complete unit shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater
DATE: _________________ than the integrated equipment rating shown. The panelboard shall be marked with their
CHK’D BY: ____________ maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage.
APPROVED B. Panelboard shall be of dead front type fabricated in accordance with the latest National
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standard and tested as per Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. standard UL 67. Installation shall meet or exceed all requirements of
the National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 384, and where required, shall be suitable for
use as service entrance in accordance with Article 230 of the NEC.
C. The panelboard shall be factory assembled.

OPERATING DEPT.
D. The panelboard shall have at least 20% their circuit breakers spare for future use.
E. Short circuit current shall be 22kA (rms symmetrical).

CERTIFIED
2.02 ENCLOSURE
BY: ___________________ A. Panelboard assemblies shall be enclosed in cabinet of code-gauge, galvanized or

DATE: _________________ stainless steel as required. The size of wiring gutters shall meet or exceed UL Standard
67 and NEC code requirements. Panelboard equipped with doors shall be fabricated with
reinforcing steel channels at all four sides of door opening for rigid wrap-free trim. Doors
to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock, with all locks keyed alike. Door over 48
inches (1.22 m) shall be equipped with three-point latch and lock. End walls shall be
removable, front shall be code gauge steel, coated with rust-inhibiting primer and finished
baked enamel ANSI 61 gray. Rear access shall not be required for installation or O&M.
B. Panelboard shall be fabricated according to 31-TMSS-02.
16200 - 01

FOR 464
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.03 BUSING ASSEMBLY
Buswork shall be factory assembled, suitable for 400/230V, 3-phase, 4-wire, with full
length ground bus. Buses shall be tinned, high conductivity copper, sized to comply with
NEMA temperature rise standards. Buswork shall be sequenced for proper phase
connection or branch circuit devices. ABC type bus arrangement left-to-right, top-to-
bottom and front-to-rear shall be used throughout. Busbars shall be drilled and tapped on
circuit pole centers the entire length of branch circuit area, allowing complete flexibility of
circuit arrangement for single, 2 or 3 pole branch breakers. Buswork and support
assembly shall be rated to withstand short circuit stresses of capacities shown on
drawings.
2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Provide and install all circuit breakers of the number of poles, rating and type as shown
on the drawings. All main circuit breakers and branch circuit breakers that are rated 70A
and above shall be adjustable trip type and shall conform with General Materials
Minimum Standards Specifications. Panelboard shall be equipped with main circuit
REVISIONS breaker at location indicated on the drawing. Main breaker shall be barriered on all sides.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.05 INDICATING / METERING INSTRUMENTS

DATE: _________________
Provide and install indicating instruments of the circular scale type, 4-½” square, panel
CHK’D BY: ____________
mounted with approximately 7” scale length, white dial with black markings and 1%
APPROVED
accuracy at full scale.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.06 CONTROL SWITCHES
Provide and install heavy-duty type switches with totally enclosed silver plated contacts
and appropriately marked escutcheons.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.07 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER
Provide and install instrument transformer with accuracy class suitable for the
applications and burdens imposed, and with thermal and mechanical characteristics
adequate to withstand stresses caused by the maximum possible short circuit conditions.
CERTIFIED
2.08 NAMEPLATE
BY: ___________________
A. Provide and install a screw-fix nameplate for each feeder and branch breaker.
DATE: _________________
Nameplate shall be engraved in both Arabic and English, indicating the name of
equipment served.
B. Nameplate shall be black-on-white, laminated, phenolic, engraved in minimum 1/4 inch

(6.5mm) high lettering. Provide other or additional information on nameplates as
required.
C. Install nameplate to breaker cover plates with appropriate sheet metal screws. Glue-on
types and pop-rivet types are not acceptable. Submit samples where requested by
16200 - 02

FOR 465
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.09 Neutral bus of the panelboard shall be connected to ground bus and bonded to main
grounding grid of the building. Panelboard shall be grounded per Section 16450.
2.10 IDENTIFICATION
See Section 16195.
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16200 – 03

FOR 466
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This section provides for a grounding system intended to protect life and property by:
1. Preventing transient over voltages due to lightning; the energizing of conductive

machine frames, enclosures, appliances and structures.
2. Improving the capability of over current devices to sense and interrupt ground fault
currents by minimizing the impedance of ground current return paths to transformer
neutrals.
REVISIONS
3. All equipment and all non current-carrying metal parts being supplied under this
DRAWN BY: ___________ contract shall be effectively bonded to the grounding system to ensure earth
DATE: _________________
continuity throughout the system.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
A. Applicable Standards: Conform with the NEC, Article 250.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
B. Tests: After complete installation of grounding system, measure the ground resistance
employing the "Fall-of-Potential" method using a Biddle "Megger” Earth Tester" with two
electrodes to ensure that an earth resistance of not more than 25 ohms is achieved with
the grounding system.
OPERATING DEPT.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Test Reports: Submit directly to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE seven (7) copies of the test
reports certified by the testing technician.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DATE: _________________
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cables/Conductors: Ground cables/conductors shall be soft-drawn, bare tinned copper

when installed direct buried and PVC insulated, green colored with yellow stripes when
installed exposed or in conduit/raceways. Minimum size of main grounding conductor
shall be 70mm² and minimum size of equipment grounding conductor shall be 35mm².
Building corners shall be grounded and bonded to main grounding system.
B. Ground Connectors: The buried grounding connections shall be thermit weld type, and
where severe corrosive environment is encountered, they shall be bitumastic painted and
mastic taped. Above ground connections shall be compression or bolted type.
16450 - 01

FOR 467
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Ground Rods: Provide 16mm diameter, 2440mm long steel copper- weld ground rods,
where required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install a complete grounding system consisting of the following:
Use multiple ground rods driven into the earth and interconnected with bare tinned
copper conductors to ensure continuity of the grounding system. All connections
shall be by "thermit" welding Type GB.
2. All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipments including steel doors
and steel structures shall be grounded.
REVISIONS B. Panelboard and Motor Frames
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Panelboard: Provide a connection to the grounding system for the ground bus in
DATE: _________________
panelboards. Use cable sized per NEC.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2. Motor Frame: Provide a connection to the grounding system for each motor frame.
APPROVED
C. Equipment Grounding. Bodies of all equipment shall be grounded effectively.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
D. Ground Resistance: The ground resistance of the building ground system shall not
exceed 25 ohms. Additional ground rods shall be provided in the system until the ground
resistance of 25 ohms or less is achieved.
OPERATING DEPT. *** End of Section 16450 ***
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16450 - 02

FOR 468
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16470 - EQUIPMENT PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install 400/230V, 3-phase, 4-wire panelboards as specified herein and as required
for the PROJECT. Panelboards shall be in accordance with the COMPANY Standard 31-
TMSS-02.
A. Applicable Standards: Conform with the following Standards:
REVISIONS NEMA PB-1 Panelboards
DRAWN BY: ___________ UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes

DATE: _________________
UL 67 Panelboards
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
Federal Specs. Panelboards
W-P-115c
ENGINEERING DEPT.
Federal Specs. Circuit Breaker, Molded Case; Branch Circuit Service

WC-375b
1.03 SUBMITTALS
OPERATING DEPT.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CERTIFIED
2.01 EQUIPMENT
BY: ___________________
A. Panelboards shall incorporate protective devices of the number, rating and type as shown
DATE: _________________
in the panelboard schedule drawing. Panelboards shall be rated for intended voltage and
shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated protective
device ratings. Panelboards shall be labeled with their maximum short circuit current
rating at the supply voltage.
B. Panelboards shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards and shall
comply with UL 50 “Cabinets and Boxes, and UL 67 “Panelboards” and shall be so
labeled. Installation shall meet or exceed all requirements of the NEC, Article 384.
C. Panelboards shall be factory assembled.
16470 - 01

FOR 469
494
‫لمشعقي‬
D. Panelboards shall withstand a fault duty that exceeds 125% of the expected fault value at
the panelboard and rated 10kA (rms symmetrical) minimum.
E. Panelboards shall have at least 20% of their circuit breakers spare for future use.
F. Panelboards shall be equipped with bolt-on type, thermal magnetic trip main circuit
breakers as explained in section 16471. Branch circuit breakers shall be plug-in type,
thermal magnetic trip.
G. Panelboards shall be provided with main circuit breaker, neutral bus and ground bus,
unless otherwise indicated on the drawing. Ground and neutral buses shall be equipped
with terminal blocks.
H. Panelboards Breakers: Refer to Section 16471.
I. Panelboards Cabinet and Enclosure: Refer to Section 16160.
REVISIONS J. Panelboards Directory: Refer to Section 16195.
DRAWN BY: ___________ K. Panelboard Grounding: Refer to Section 16450.

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

PART 3 - EXECUTION
APPROVED
3.01 INSTALLATION
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Cabinets and Enclosures: Refer to Section 16160.
B. Panelboard Mounting: Panelboard in the electrical room shall be surface mounted.
OPERATING DEPT. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16470 - 02

FOR 470
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16471 - MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install adjustable thermal-magnetic trip molded case circuit breakers as required for
this PROJECT.
A. Applicable Standards: Conform with the following Standards:
NEMA AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

REVISIONS
UL 489 Circuit Breakers, Branch Circuit and Service

DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Federal Spec Circuit Breaker, Molded Case; Branch Circuit Service
WC-375b
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
1.03 SUBMITTALS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Test Reports: Refer to Section 16050.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings covering each breaker.
OPERATING DEPT. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide molded case circuit breakers with proper voltage rating for the point of
CERTIFIED application, frame size, trip rating, standard or high interrupting capacity per 16050.
BY: ___________________
B. Interrupting Ratings: Conform to interrupting ratings, determined in accordance with
NEMA and IEC test procedures. Minimum interrupting ratings shall be at least equal to
DATE: _________________
the available short circuit at the line terminals.
C. Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a molded case enclosure and shall have
overcenter, trip-free, toggle type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break
action. Contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy type. Arc extinction shall be
accomplished by means of arc chutes consisting of metal grids mounted in an insulating
support. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual
thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Tripping due to overload or short circuit
shall be clearly indicated by the handle assuming a position midway between the “ON”
16471 - 01

FOR 471
494
‫لمشعقي‬
and “OFF” positions. All poles shall open, close and trip simultaneously. Two and three
pole breakers shall be common trip, without the aid of external devices. Each pole shall
provide inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection.
D. Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have their covers sealed. Interchangeable trip
breakers shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Frame type, ampere rating,
voltage and interrupting capacity shall be clearly labeled on each breaker. Circuit
breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position.
E. Breakers shall be bolt-on type, quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic trip;
automatic tripping indicated by the handle at midpoint position; multiple breakers to have
common trip. However, branch circuit breakers in branch panelboards (equipment
panelboards) shall be plug-in type with same features
F. Lugs shall be of the tubular solder less type and shall accommodate conductors of sizes
as indicated on drawings. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper only, conductors. Multiple
terminals per pole shall be provided where required.
2.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

REVISIONS
A. The minimum interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available
DRAWN BY: ___________ short circuit current at the line terminals. All other breakers shall be of the following type:
DATE: _________________
1. Thermal magnetic type, providing inverse time delay overload and instantaneous
CHK’D BY: ____________
short circuit protection.
APPROVED
2. Ambient compensating type standard breakers, providing inverse time delay
ENGINEERING DEPT.
overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermal magnetic
element with compensation provided by a secondary bimetallic element that will
allow the breaker to carry rated currents between 25C and 50C ambient
temperature.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
CERTIFIED A. Mounting
BY: ___________________ Provide secure support and anchorage for all breakers as required under Section 16190.
DATE: _________________
B. Trip Settings: They shall comply with provisions of Article 430 and 440 of the NEC, and
as specified herein.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
16471 - 02

FOR 472
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16483 - MOTOR STARTERS / CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This section covers motor controllers installed in individual enclosures.
B. Each motor shall be protected against overload, short circuit and thermal overload
protection as per the provisions of Article 430 of the NEC. All motor insulation shall be
Class "F". Each motor shall be protected against loss of one or more motor power supply
phases by a phase protection device which shall prevent the actuation of the motor
control CONTRACTORs on loss of one or more phases.
C. Enclosures of the starters for general indoor areas shall be NEMA 1 and for outdoor
REVISIONS
areas shall be NEMA 4X.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________ A. Applicable Standards: Conform with the following Standards:
APPROVED ANSI C19.1 Industrial Control Apparatus

ENGINEERING DEPT.
IEEE 74 Test Code for Industrial Control (600V or Less)
NEMA ICS Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA KS-1 Enclosed Switches

OPERATING DEPT.
NEMA AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
NEMA IS-4 Terminal Blocks

CERTIFIED
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
BY: ___________________ B. Motor and Control Schedule: Prior to final acceptance, furnish to the COMPANY a motor
DATE: _________________ and control schedule and with tabulation of nameplate, full-load amperes and the
manufacturer's identification for each thermal overload heater unit installed. The
schedule shall state detailed requirements for each individual motor controllers. Motors
used indoor shall be open-drip-proof. Motors used outdoors shall be totally enclosed fan
cooled.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the control panel and motor controllers.
16483 - 01

FOR 473
494
‫لمشعقي‬
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
Fractional horsepower electric motors shall be provided with manual starters, consisting
of a manually operated, trip-free, toggle switch, quick-make/quick-break mechanism type,
equipped with plug-in, melting alloy, thermal overload relay. Contacts shall be double-
break, silver alloy. Pre-wired neon pilot light with lens cap shall be provided if called for
on drawings.
2.02 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A. Magnetic motor starters shall be of the full-voltage, across-the-line, non-reversing type,

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Starters shall be complete with 120V holding
coil, control circuit transformer and two N.O. and two N.C. auxiliary contacts, field
convertible. Factory modifications for cover mounted pilot devices and accessories shall
be installed as hereinafter specified.
B. All starters through size four (4) shall be equipped with double-break, silver alloy
REVISIONS contacts. Contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring, or removing
starter from enclosure.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
C. Holding coils shall be of the molded construction type and shall be replaceable from the
front without removing starter from the enclosure.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
2.03 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Combination magnetic motor starters shall be of the full-voltage, across-the-line, non-
reversing type. Starters shall be complete with motor rated, magnetic only circuit
breakers, 120V holding coil and control circuit transformer mounted in common
enclosure. Starters shall be equipped with two N.O. and two N.C. auxiliary contacts, field
convertible. Factory modifications for cover mounted pilot devices and accessories shall
OPERATING DEPT. be installed if shown on drawings.
B. Circuit breakers shall be of the HMCP type, with adjustable trips and continuous ratings
not less than 125% of motor rated full loaded current. Proper voltage rating for the point
of application, frame size, trip rating and standard or high interrupting capacity shall be as
CERTIFIED shown on drawings.
BY: ___________________
2.04 MOTOR RUNNING PROTECTION
DATE: _________________
A. Furnish and install all overload relays for each motor as provided for the type of starter.
Overload relays shall be of the manual reset, ambient-compensated type, double-trip
free. Select overload relay heaters in accordance with the manufacturer’s published
application tables and sized on actual motor nameplate full load current and service factor
ratings, with adjustments set on maximum.
B. Wire all overload relay contacts in the control circuit on the ungrounded side of the 120V
operating coil. This applies to all controllers, whether furnished by this CONTRACTOR or
equipment furnished by others.
16483 - 02

FOR 474
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.05 IDENTIFICATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Control Panel:
1. Enclosure: Mount enclosure rigidly and with proper alignment on the steel supports
fabricated from standard rolled structural steel shapes.
2. Wiring: Install all incoming and outgoing power and control circuits and connect for
the proper phase rotation.
3. Controls: Check the interconnection and correct operation of all control devices,
REVISIONS interlocks, indicating lights and control relays.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. Grounding: Refer to Section 16450.

DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16483 – 03

FOR 475
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16491 - SAFETY / DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This section covers safety and disconnect switches individually enclosed as required for this
PROJECT.
A. Applicable Standards. Conform with the following Standards:
Federal Specs. Switch Box (Enclosed) Surface Mounted

WS-865C
REVISIONS
JIC EMP-1 Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
JIC EGP-1 Electrical Standards for General Purpose Machine Tools
CHK’D BY: ____________
NEMA KS Enclosed Switches
APPROVED
UL 98 Enclosed Switches
ENGINEERING DEPT.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings covering each safety/disconnect switch.
OPERATING DEPT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
CERTIFIED A. General: Provide heavy-duty safety and disconnect switches with ratings as required in
drawings.
BY: ___________________
B. Additional Requirements: Provide each switch with the following:
DATE: _________________
1. Line terminal shields.
2. Visible blades.
3. Non-teasible, positive, quick-make, quick-break interrupter operating mechanism.
4. Handle whose position is easily recognizable and can be multiple padlocked in the
"OFF" position.
16491 - 01

FOR 476
494
‫لمشعقي‬
5. Defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating
handle is in the "ON" position.
6. Factory installed ground lug.
C. Enclosures: Provide NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor safety/disconnect switches and

NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures for outdoor safety/disconnect switches.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION
Nameplate: Refer to Section 16195.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Enclosure: Refer to Section 16160.

REVISIONS
B. Wiring: Install all incoming and outgoing power circuits.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
C. Grounding: Refer to Section 16450.
CHK’D BY: ____________
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
APPROVED
Equipment Designation: Refer to Section 16195.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16491 - 02

FOR 477
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16501 - LAMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section covers lamps that will be mounted inside the lighting fixtures and floodlights as
required for this PROJECT.
All lamps shall comply with ANSI and UL Standards and COMPANY Standard TES-P-119.25.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 2.01 Provide a full complement of new lamps of the correct wattage, shape, color and rating.
DATE: _________________
Fluorescent lamps shall be cool white type suitable for electronic ballasts. All metal
halide lamps shall be made of glass designed to have strength and thermal-shock
CHK’D BY: ____________
resistant characteristics suitable for normal application in typical luminaries. However,
APPROVED
shielding of lamps must be provided to avoid bulb breakage that could result from direct
contact with liquids (such as water) during operation. All metal halide lamps shall be self-
ENGINEERING DEPT.
extinguishing if the outside bulb is broken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
OPERATING DEPT. 3.01 It is intended that the COMPANY shall receive maximum benefit of the rated life of lamps.
Do not install lamps sooner than two (2) weeks prior to the date established for final
acceptance and do not utilize the permanent lighting system for contract construction
purposes. At its option and upon written notification, the COMPANY may occupy
specified areas prior to Final Acceptance of the PROJECT. In that circumstance, install
CERTIFIED the necessary lamps and place in operation for use by the COMPANY. Additional
lamping by CONTRACTOR will not be required in the occupied area prior to the
BY: ___________________
PROJECT Acceptance, unless lamp failure or burn-out occur.
DATE: _________________
16501 - 01

FOR 478
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16502 - BALLASTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section covers ballasts that will be used for the various fixtures and floodlights as required
for this PROJECT.
A. Applicable Standards: All ballasts shall comply with ANSI and UL Standards and
COMPANY Standard TES-P-119.25.
REVISIONS B. Guarantee: CONTRACTOR shall guarantee and replace without charge any ballast
which fails in normal service or in the opinion of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
DRAWN BY: ___________ generates abnormal or objectionable noise within a 2-year period following Final
DATE: _________________
Acceptance or use by the COMPANY.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.01 Ballasts shall contain no askarel or other toxic/hazardous materials.
2.02 The electronic ballasts shall be used for all fluorescent lighting fixtures. The ballasts shall
have a power factor of 0.98 and current total harmonic distortion (THD) not more than
10%.
OPERATING DEPT.
2.03 The ballasts for metal halide fixtures shall be with proper primary voltage ratings. Ballasts
shall be of high power factor constant wattage rated for operation in a 40°C ambient.
Provide ballast circuitry such that currents in excess of lamp operating current will not
occur during lamp rectification or warm-up. The ballasts shall have current total harmonic
CERTIFIED distortion (THD) below 20%.
BY: ___________________
2.04 Ballasts for dimming circuits shall be suitable for dimming.
DATE: _________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Install ballasts and properly secure them.
16502 - 01

FOR 479
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16510 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section include indoor and outdoor lighting and associated WORK.
Applicable Standards. Lighting system shall comply with IES.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
REVISIONS CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings on the lighting system with sufficient details.
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

DATE: _________________
All fittings, luminaires and accessories shall be boxed, crated and wrapped or otherwise suitably
CHK’D BY: ____________
protected during delivery, storage and handling. On delivery, they shall be stored in a secure
APPROVED
and dry facility.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL: Provide complete new lighting systems achieving the minimum maintained
illumination level as specified in table-111-1 of ANSI C2-1990 or IES.
OPERATING DEPT.
2.02 Multi-purpose hall, musallah, entrances and lobby of the Building shall be illuminated by
combination of recessed compact fluorescent downlights and cove lights. Control gear
box and retainer shall be made of stamped welded CRS sheet. Recessing frame shall be
made of spun aluminum. All pre-treated, painted and stove enameled in white with spun
CERTIFIED aluminum dome reflector of silver shine.
BY: ___________________
2.03 Swimming pole area shall be illuminated by pendant mounted high bay heavy-duty
luminaires with glass cover, outdoor type, weather proof.
DATE: _________________
2.04 Administration & supervisor offices shall be illuminated by Recessed mounted

fluorescent lighting fixtures, parabolic type.
2.05 Exercise room shall be illuminated by wraparound type pendant mounted fluorescent
lighting fixtures.
2.06 Pump room, electrical room, communication room & storage of the Building shall be
illuminated by wraparound type Surface mounted fluorescent lighting fixtures.
16510 - 01

FOR 480
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.07 Toilets, lockers, shower, dressing area & kitchen of the Building shall be illuminated by
recessed mounted fluorescent lighting fixtures for strip ceiling with prismatic diffuser.
2.08 Above door lighting fixtures outside the rooms shall be 100W metal halide, outdoor type,
weather proof. Housing of the fixtures shall be made of two parts die cast aluminum, pre-
treated, painted and stove enameled in dark bronze color. Fixture shall be provided with
clear prismatic pattern molded borosilicate tempered square glass diffuser.
2.09 Exit light signs shall be provided near all exit doors. Each unit shall have 1X20W
fluorescent tube and provided with English and Arabic (Exit) lettering in red color on
white background. The minimum height of the “Exit” letters shall be 150mm. A battery
pack shall be provided and shall give at least 180 minutes of operation on the failure of
the normal power supply. Connections for the exit light signs shall be made in such a
way that they shall be continuously illuminated in both the normal and emergency
conditions.
2.010 Emergency lighting shall be provided in the buildings during power outage. They shall
operate automatically, and maintaining an average illumination level of 10 lux measured
at the floor. Integral emergency battery packs installed with some fixtures with 3-hours
REVISIONS reserved capacity shall be provided as indicated on the drawing. The emergency lighting
shall be in accordance with the NFPA 101 and 70-700 specifications.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
2.011 The exterior faces and corners of the Multi-Purpose Hall Building shall be illuminated by
ground mounted, weather proof, outdoor type Metal Halide beam floodlights. The
CHK’D BY: ____________
housing of the fixtures shall be made of heavy duty die cast aluminum pre-treated.
APPROVED
2.012 Walkways around the building shall be illuminated by 100W metal halide bollard lighting
ENGINEERING DEPT.
fixtures.
2.013 Football field & Basketball field shall be illuminated by pole mounted metal halide
floodlights (sports lighters). Poles shall comply with ASTM Standards.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.014 Green areas shall be illuminated by decorative landscape ground mounted lights.
2.015 Street/parking lots shall be illuminated by 400W weather proof, outdoor type, High
Pressure Sodium semi cut-off street lighting fixtures mounted on 10 meter high
galvanized steel poles. Body of the fixtures shall be made of two parts (upper and lower)
CERTIFIED die cast aluminum pre-treated, painted and stove enameled in gray color with silicone
glue sealed optics locked by means of stainless steel toggle.
BY: ___________________
2.016 Lighting poles shall be fabricated of round tapered section of galvanized steel designed
DATE: _________________
and tested to withstand wind velocities of 140km/hour when fully assembled and erected
and have minimum yield strength of 3380kg/cm². The poles shall comply with ASTM
Standards for welded construction and have hot-dip galvanized finish applied by total
immersion. The poles shall be provided with an anchor base plate and high-strength
anchor bolts and nuts.
2.017 Covered parking lots shall be provided with dust tight, water tight and corrosion proof
fluorescent lighting fixtures. Body shall be made of self-extinguishing molded glass rein-
force polyester (GPR) with galvanized steel gear tray, hinged and removable. Supplied
with diffuser and (EPDM) gasket.
16510 - 02

FOR 481
494
‫لمشعقي‬
2.018 All exterior lighting shall be controlled by lighting contactor, operated manually and
automatically by the photocell. Hand-Off-Auto switch shall be provided with each lighting
contactor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install indoor luminaires securely in precise alignment with axes level and plumb, with
symmetrical spacing using supports as specified in Section 16190. Eliminate all leaks
from enclosed luminaires.
B. Indoor Recessed Luminaire
1. Support:
a) Suspended Ceilings: Where installed in suspended ceilings, using inverted

REVISIONS T-runners the weight of the luminaires shall not be imposed on the T-runners.
Provide and install independent support to the luminaires.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
b) Plaster Ceilings: Provide 10 mm (3/8") diameter threaded hanger rods secured
to the main ceiling suspension structure and supplementary horizontal steel
CHK’D BY: ____________
members as required and to the luminaire housing, using two nuts at each end
APPROVED
of rod.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
C. Grounding: Connect each fixture housing and each lighting pole to the equipment
grounding conductor by means of crimped, spade-type terminal connector secured to the
housing with a self-tapping screw or bolt compression type.
D. Photocell:
OPERATING DEPT.
1. Photocell shall be installed to operate the outdoor lamps automatically when the
level of daylight reaches a preset value.
2. The cover of the unit shall be conically shaped to prevent dust and dirt accumulation.
CERTIFIED The unit shall have good weathering properties and shall be resistant to ultra-violet
light.
BY: ___________________
3. The unit shall be sealed and preset to operate at the lighting levels as specified.
DATE: _________________
4. Photocell shall have the following characteristics:
Supply Voltage : 230V 60 Hz.
Contact Load Rating : 1 kW discharge lamps
Sensitivity : Switch On - 54 lux

Switch Off - 108 lux
Power Consumption : 3 watts during daylight conditions

16510 - 03

FOR 482
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Delay time for Daytime : 30 seconds Fluctuations
Ambient Temperature Range : -20C to +50 C
E. Testing and Commissioning
1. Upon completion of installation and before the system is energized or accepted,

tests shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR to demonstrate that each installation
is functioning in accordance with the specifications.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall make temporary or interim tests and adjustments to

WORK as required for proper operation during the construction period in addition to
final adjustments required herein.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall test each circuit for grounds and shorts by means of a
megger insulation testing instrument which shall impress a voltage of not less than
500 volts upon the circuit under test. Any circuit showing an insulation resistance
REVISIONS not less than the minimum values given in the NEC shall be investigated and weak
points corrected. All circuits under megger insulation test shall be connected to
DRAWN BY: ___________ respective final terminals with switches or breakers in the "OFF" position.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________

4. The CONTRACTOR shall correct or replace any current- carrying circuit which is
defective or grounded. The CONTRACTOR shall correct deficiencies encountered
APPROVED
during testing.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
5. Following established procedure, equipment will be energized upon certification that
installation is satisfactory. Final operational tests shall determine that wiring
connections are correct.

OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16510 – 04

FOR 483
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16670 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply and install a complete system of lightning protection as here in
specified and in compliance with the provisions of the latest "code for Protection against
lightning" as adopted by the NFPA and "Underwriter" Laboratories Inc. Franklin rod with
ionized or electronic piezo electric anti repelled end may be used as backup only. The
system shall installed by an experienced firm specializing in this type of work. The system
shall include air terminals, main and secondary conductors, fasteners, metal bonds, splicers,
earthing and all necessary parts to install a complete lightning system.
A ring has to be formed at the roof with vertical down conductors to the lowest floor ring.
Down conductors shall consist of copper strip tape. Distance between vertical connections
shall be 15 m to 20 m approximately. Crossings have to be made on the roof between
opposite vertical connections. At the location of the vertical connections to make weld inserts
at the outside of the buildings. Copper electrodes with a length of 3 m to be put into the
REVISIONS ground near insert. If a ring, as mentioned above, is passing an expansion joint on both sides
near the expansion joint weld insert (connected with the ring) has to be made.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
Each part of a building or installation above roof level must be connected to the lightning
protection system of the building. Guide rails for lifts shall be connected on both ends to the
CHK’D BY: ____________
lightning protection. Lightning systems and the grounding of power supply shall be
APPROVED
interconnected.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Materials shall comply in weight, size and composition with the requirements of Underwriters,
OPERATING DEPT. Laboratories Inc. and the NFPA Code relating to this type of structure.
2.02 AIR TERMINATIONS
Air terminations shall be 16 mm diameter, 500 mm long, 98% conductivity copper and
CERTIFIED pointed rod taper and shall extend not less than 25 cm above the object they protect, and
shall have a proper base support for the surface on which they are used and shall be
BY: ___________________
securely anchored to this surface. Spacing between 2 adjacent terminations shall not exceed
6m.
DATE: _________________
Air terminals shall be provided along parapet of roofs at different levels of roof floors
available.
The mounting of air terminals shall be indicated on shop drawings to be submitted by

Contractor.
16670-1

FOR 484
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Horizontal conductors shall be copper strip tape of 25x3 mm. Conductors shall be run down
to pits with minimum number of bends. Bends shall be of large radius (minimum 20 cm).
Bends less than 20 cm radius shall be supported at two points not more than 7.5 cm on each
side from the center line of the bend. Conductors shall be coursed to provide a two-way path
to ground. Conductors shall be run down as far as possible from any structural or other metal
bodies.
2.03 FASTENERS
Fasteners shall be spaced not more than 1 m apart on all conductors. Nails, screws, or bolts
employed to secure the fasteners shall be of the same material as the fasteners. Galvanized
or plated steel nails, or bolts are not acceptable.
Masonry anchors shall have a diameter of not less than 0.6 cm and shall be set with care.
Holes to receive the shank of the fastener or fitting shall be of correct size, made with proper
tools and preferably made in the stones rather than in the mortar joints, when set the fit
shall be tight against moisture and capable of withstanding a pull test of 40 kg.
2.04 INTERCONNECTION OF METALS

REVISIONS
All ungrounded sizeable metallic objects within 60 cm of the system or metal connected to
DRAWN BY: ___________ the system shall be bonded to the lightning grid with approved fittings and conductor.
DATE: _________________
Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with approved bimetallic connectors.
CHK’D BY: ____________
2.05 DOWN CONDUCTORS
APPROVED
Down conductors shall consist of copper strip tape of 20x3 mm.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
The number of down conductors shall be as evenly distributed as possible on outer walls of
building. Minimum two down conductors shall be provided for a perimeter of up to 75 meters.
One down conductor for each additional 30 m perimeter shall be thereof added.
OPERATING DEPT. 2.06 SPLICERS
Bronze pressure type cable splicers shall be provided where necessary at intersection of
main and branch conductors. Splicers shall be furnished complete with required bolts and
washers. Cables shall be clamped so as to get maximum strength.
CERTIFIED
2.07 EARTHING TERMINALS
BY: ___________________
Each down conductor shall terminate in an accessible earthing pit. The rod shall be a deep
DATE: _________________
driven earthing rod (3 m minimum total length), or where necessary, drilling of ground,
insertion of rod and backfilling with soil conditioning agents.
The connection of all earth pits in a grid or loop form is required.
Clamps connecting down conductors to earth rods shall make contact with the earth rod for a
distance of 4 cm measured parallel to the axis of the ground rod and with the cable itself for
a distance of at least 4 cm. Clamps shall be secured with at least two bolts or cap screws.
The resistance of the individual earthing pits shall not exceed 10 ohms. The diameter of
ground rod shall not be less than 16 mm.
16670-2

FOR 485
494
‫لمشعقي‬
Earth connections shall be of copper covered electrodes and shall be driven to a minimum
depth of 3 meters to reach permanent moisture.
Earth Termination network: earth electrodes are to be interconnected and buried with the top
at least 1 m below ground surface and minimum 0.6 m from the foundations. Combined
resistance to earth of whole network is not to exceed 5 ohms.
Common Earthing: earth termination rods are to be interconnected in a ring around the
structure and bonded to earth electrode of protective earthing system, forming a common
earth ring of total resistance value to earth below the lower value of any of the two systems.
Joints and Interconnections in earth termination network are to be exothermic welds except
that down conductor is to be connected by a single or multi-conductor bolted U-connector
clamp.
The necessary common grounds shall be provided between the lightning protection system
and electric and telephone grounds, and underground metallic piping systems, conduits etc.
where more than one source is used.
REVISIONS 2.08 INSTALLATION
DRAWN BY: ___________ The installation shall be made in an inconspicuous manner. Conductor shall be coursed
DATE: _________________
within 60cm of outer edge of flat roof. All materials shall be fastened to eliminate any
possibility of displacement and subsequent maintenance.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16670-3

FOR 486
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16721 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the supply and installation of a complete automatic (addressable
type) Fire Detection and Alarm System, including associated wiring for this PROJECT as
specified in this document.
B. The fire detection and alarm system shall be installed in conformance to the COMPANY
Engineering Standard, TES-B-106.01 and NFPA 72.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall development a complete detailed drawing of fire detection and
alarm system for review and approval by ISD/FF&LPD prior to installation of the system.
REVISIONS
D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit fire alarm system material with catalogs to ISD for
review and approval.
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________ E. The system shall be installed, connected and tested under the supervision of an
CHK’D BY: ____________ authorized manufacturer’s representative normally engaged in this type of work and shall
have performed such work for at least the past three years and shall be prepared to
APPROVED furnish such evidence to the COMPANY, if required.
ENGINEERING DEPT.
A. Applicable Codes and Standards:
SASO/SSA-55 PVC Insulated Cables

OPERATING DEPT.
TES-B-106.01 Fire Detection and Alarm System
TES-P-119.21 Fire and Loss Prevention Requirements

CERTIFIED
TES-P-119.25 Lighting and Receptacles for Substation Yard and Building
BY: ___________________ TES-P-119.29 LV Cables Selection and Sizing

DATE: _________________
ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code
ANSI/NEMA 05.1 Electrical Boxes
ANSI/UL 514 Safety Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings
NEC 250 Grounding
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

16721 - 01

FOR 487
494
‫لمشعقي‬
UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling System
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling System
B. COMPANY Material Standard Specifications:
11-TMSS-10 Power and/or Control Cable, CU or AL Conductor

600/1000V Rating
90-TMSS-01 Fire Protective Signaling Panel
PART 2 - DETAIL SCOPE OF WORK
2.01 GENERAL
A. CONTRACTOR shall supply and install a complete and ready-to-use fire detection and
alarm system as described herein. The intent of these specifications is for the
CONTRACTOR to provide a complete and satisfactorily operating system complete with
all devices/appliances and installation materials required. Coordinate with the Division
REVISIONS 15, Mechanical, to ensure proper location of smoke and heat detectors.
DRAWN BY: ___________ B. It is the intent of this specification for a single source fire alarm manufacturer to supply all
DATE: _________________
detectors in the system. Manufacturer is to coordinate any mounting provisions required
for his devices with the HVAC equipment supplier finally selected.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
C. Fire Protective Signaling Panel (Fire Alarm Control Panel) shall be microprocessor based
type and shall be connected to COMPANY fire station through tele-alarm devices
ENGINEERING DEPT.
(automatic telephone call transmitters). Fire Protective Signaling Panel (FPSP) of this
building shall also be connected to Fire Alarm Repeater Panel (FARP) located in
proposed gatehouse through underground wiring in conduits.
D. Interlock connections with FPSPs shall be provided to shutdown the A/C units and
OPERATING DEPT. ventilation fans upon activation of any manual or automatic fire alarm system device.
E. Grounding of all non-current carrying metal parts of the fire alarm system with suitable
copper wires/flats per NEC.
CERTIFIED
F. Testing and Commissioning of fire alarm system.
BY: ___________________ 2.02 EQUIPMENT, DEVICES/APPLIANCES AND MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

DATE: _________________
A. Automatic Fire Detectors: Automatic fire detectors shall be addressable type and shall be
in accordance with the requirements of TES-B-106.01.
B. Manual Alarm Stations: Manual pull stations shall be addressable/diagnostic type and
shall be in accordance with the requirements of TES-B-106.01.
C. Audible And Visual Alarm Devices: Audible and visual alarm devices shall be in
accordance with the requirements of TES-B-106.01.
D. Tele-alarm Device: Automatic telephone direct dialing device (automatic telephone call
transmitter) shall be in accordance with the requirements of TES-P-119.21.
16721 - 02

FOR 488
494
‫لمشعقي‬
F. Fire Protective Signaling Panels (FPSPs): FPSPs shall be microprocessor based type and
shall be in accordance with the requirements of 90-TMSS-01.
The FPSP shall meet the following operational requirements:
a. Operational requirements of panel include the pre-alarm condition, contamination

sensitivity and auto-adjust of sensitivity. System operating voltage and battery
voltage shall be 24VDC. Battery recharging time shall be 24 hours. Auxiliary
potential free contacts AC rating shall be 230V, 5A and DC rating shall be 24V,
1A.
b. The panel shall be capable for HVAC System shutdown, automatic telephone
dialing and parallel annunciation with annunciator panel.
G. Data printer: Data printer and its cabinet shall be in accordance with the requirements of
TES-P-119.21.
REVISIONS H. Wires, Cables and Conduits: Wires and cables for fire protective signaling system shall
be PVC insulated copper conductors as per 11-TMSS-10, 2.5mm2 (minimum) cross
DRAWN BY: ___________
sectional area in rigid steel conduits, painted red when exposed, and in Rigid PVC
conduits when embedded in wall/ceiling. Conduits shall be as per Section 16111.
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT. 3.01 INSTALLATION: Installation of all the components shall be done in accordance with the
highest standard practice and under the supervision of a qualified engineer.
A. Automatic Fire Detectors:
OPERATING DEPT. 1. Detectors shall be supported, in all cases, independently of their attachment to the
circuit conductors. Where subject to mechanical damage, detectors shall be
protected.
2. Smoke detectors should not be located in a direct airflow nor closer than 915mm (3
CERTIFIED ft.) from an air supply diffuser/lighting fixtures.
NOTE: For other installation requirements, refer to NFPA 72 or manufacturer’s

BY: ___________________
instruction.
DATE: _________________
B. Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Each fire alarm box shall be securely mounted. The bottom
of the box shall be not less than 1.1m and not more than 1.4m above the floor level.
C. Audible and Visual Alarm Devices:
The alarm devices for indoor use shall be mounted at approximately 2.5 meters and for
outdoors use 4.0 meters above the finished floor or 300mm below the rooftop if the
building height is 4.0 meters or less.
16721 - 03

FOR 489
494
‫لمشعقي‬
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all appropriate tools, test
equipment and temporary AC and DC power supplies needed to perform the
commissioning and site tests. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the
applicable standard and established practices and procedures, and NFPA –72, Chapter 7
“Maintenance and Testing”, and Section 6.0 of COMPANY standard TES-B-106.01.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a schedule of proposed commissioning tests at least

two (2) months prior to scheduled date of test with a list of test and commissioning
equipment to be used for the PROJECT. The list shall indicate whether each equipment
is owned or to be rented.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for conducting additional tests if recommended

by the equipment manufacturers or by the COMPANY.
D. Site testing and commissioning will be done under COMPANY witness. Witnessing of
testing/commissioning by COMPANY does not mean acceptance of test results. Test
results will be reviewed and approved by COMPANY separately, after CONTRACTOR
REVISIONS submits the same for review and approval.
DRAWN BY: ___________ E. Field test and commissioning results shall be submitted to the COMPANY not later than
DATE: _________________
two (2) days after completion of tests of review, prior to the final energization.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16721 - 04

FOR 490
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16740 – COMMUNICATIONS
SEE ATTACHMENTS:
 ATTACHMENT 01: OSP-PDS SCOPE OF WORK (DESIGN-BUILD)

 ATTACHMENT 02 : SOW-PTS (IP TELEPHONY)
 ATTACHMENT 2A: LIST OF OFFICE EQUIPMENT (PC/PRINTERS etc.)
 ATTACHMENT-2B: MAIN GROUND BUS BAR
 ATTACHMENT-2C : APPROVED CONTRACTORS FOR IP TELEPHONY
 ATTACHMENT 2D: VIDEO CONFERENCE SYSTEM
REVISIONS
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
ENGINEERING DEPT.
OPERATING DEPT.
CERTIFIED
BY: ___________________
DATE: _________________
16740 – 01

FOR 491
494
‫لمشعقي‬
SECTION 16770 - PUBLIC ADDRESS AND AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Complete latest improved Public address & audio-visual systems shall be

provided and installed in the proposed Multi-Purpose Hall building. Audio-
visual system and public address system shall be according to related latest
international standards.
A. The WORK to be provided under this Section consists of furnishing and installing a
complete system according to the international standards.
REVISIONS
B. Show evidence of having successfully completed at least three (3) similar projects.
DRAWN BY: ___________ Installation shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, the factory authorized
DATE: _________________ organization.
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED PART 2 - PRODUCTS

ENGINEERING DEPT.
2.01 THE POWER AMPLIFIER
The power amplifier shall have the following technical data:
A. Main Supply : 230V  10%

OPERATING DEPT.
B. Rated Output Power (Per IEC 268) : 150W
C. Frequency Response : 50 to 20 kHz (-2db)

CERTIFIED
D. Distortion : < 0.5%
BY: ___________________ E. Signal to Noise Ratio : > 85 db (sensitivity at max.)

DATE: _________________
2.02 MIXING PRE-AMPLIFIER
The mixing pre-amplifier shall have the following technical data:
A. Supply : 24 to 34V DC, 110 mA
B. Inputs : 2 channels, min.
Overload : Generally 32 db beyond adjusted input level within specified distortion
16770 - 01

FOR 492
494
‫لمشعقي‬
C. Characteristics:
Protections : Input protected against overload

Output protected against short circuit
Distortion : < 0.25% at rated output measured at 1 kHz
D. Output:
Voltage : 200mV rated, 2V maximum
Impedance : 2.2 kOhms
VU Meter : 0 db indication at 200 mV
2.03 MONITOR PANEL
The monitor panel shall be equipped with input line selector, program monitor and VU
meter for controlling the level of the output line signal.
REVISIONS
2.04 MICROPHONES
DRAWN BY: ___________
DATE: _________________
The microphones shall have the following technical data:
CHK’D BY: ____________
A. Microphone Gooseneck, Dynamic Type:
APPROVED
1. Polar Pattern : Uni-directional
ENGINEERING DEPT.
2. Frequency Range : 150-11kHz

(per IEC 268-4)
3. Sensitivity : 2.2 mV/PA

OPERATING DEPT. (per IEC 268-4)
4. Rated Impedance : 600 Ohms
B. Microphone Table Stand, Dynamic Type:

CERTIFIED
1. Polar Pattern : Uni-directional
BY: ___________________
2. Frequency Range : 270-11kHz
DATE: _________________
(per IEC 268-4)
3. Sensitivity : 2.2 mV/PA

(per IEC 268-4)
4. Rated Impedance : 600 Ohms
2.05 LOUDSPEAKERS
A. Loudspeaker Horn Type
16770 - 02

FOR 493
494
‫لمشعقي‬
1. Power Handling Capacity : 30W, can be reduced to 20W, 15W or

10W
2. Nominal Input Voltage : 100V
3. Transformer Impedance : 330 Ohms (30W)

500 Ohms (20W)
670 Ohms (15W)
1 kOhms (10W)
4. Voice Coil Impedance : 16 Ohms
5. Frequency Range(measured : 300 - 5 kHz

with horn type LBC3405)
6. Sound Pressure Level : 112 db

at Rated Power (30W)
REVISIONS B. Loudspeaker Ceiling Mounted (Recessed Type)
DRAWN BY: ___________ 1. Power Handling Capacity : 10W, max. (can be stepped down by tap adjustment)
DATE: _________________
2. Nominal Input Voltage : 100V
CHK’D BY: ____________
APPROVED
3. Frequency Range : 75 - 12.5 kHz
ENGINEERING DEPT.
4. Sound Pressure Level : 96 db
(measured at a load of 1W
at 1M distance and at 1kHz)
5. Maximum Sound Pressure : 104 db

OPERATING DEPT. Level at 6W
2.06 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors for loudspeakers shall be 2 x 2.5 mm2 twisted, shielded solid tinned copper,
CERTIFIED color coded PVC, 80C, 300V.
BY: ___________________ B. Conductors for microphones shall be standard microphone cable.

DATE: _________________
2.07 AMPLIFIER RACK
The power amplifier, mixer pre-amplifier and monitor panel equipment shall be rack
mounted type and easily removable for eventual revision.
16770 - 03

FOR 494
494

مواصفات فنية

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

مواصفات فنية

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAUDI ELECTRICITY CO.

– Eastern Region Branch ‫فرع المنطقةر ا‬

DRAWN BY: ___________

CHK’D BY: ____________

‫المواصفات الفنيه لمشروع مبنى نادي الشركة‬

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

SECTION 02000 GENERAL CONDITIONS

OPERATING DEPT. SECTION 03005 CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTION 04100 MORTARS

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07100 WATER PROOFING CAULKING AND SEALING

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

CERTIFIED DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (SEE ATTACHMENT)

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (SEE ATTACHMENT)

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEM (NOT USED)

SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

16491 SAFETY/DISCONNECT SWITCHES

 ATTACHMENT 01: OSP-PDS SCOPE OF WORK (DESIGN-BUILD)

DRAWN BY: ___________

CHK’D BY: ____________

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF WORK

A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials, labor, tools, equipment, plant, supplies,

A. Drawings: Form part of Contract Documents accompanying this Construction

B. Construction Specifications: Form part of the Contract Documents consisting of Divisions

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

A. Upon award of the Contract, CONTRACTOR shall consult COMPANY

1.04 PROJECT MANAGER

A. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE shall be notified by CONTRACTOR in writing and in

DRAWN BY: ___________ 1.05 MATERIALS SHIPPING AND CRATING

C. CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing when material will

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

A. Throughout the duration of Contract, CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTOR shall

1.08 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETING AND REPORTING

B. Weekly Construction Progress Meetings shall be conducted at the PROJECT SITE

C. CONTRACTOR’s PROJECT Manager, Site Engineers/Supervisors, QA/QC Engineer,

CERTIFIED 1.09 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

1.10 SITE BOARD

OPERATING DEPT. C. CONTRACTOR shall refinish, as directed by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, spaces

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

E. CONTRACTOR shall appoint a safety supervisor to coordinate the program.

F. If the CONTRACTOR has no authorized employee, or has an employee with expired

G. Prior to approval of the program by COMPANY, the Contractor’s Safety Engineer is

SCOPE OF WORK AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

B. COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Codes and Standards:

1. Applicable COMPANY and Saudi ARAMCO Engineering Standards and Codes

C. Industry Codes and Standards:

AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association

* End of Section 01100 *

* End of Section 01300 *